Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command
Reference
Release 3
May 2006
Corporate Headquarters
Cisco Systems, Inc.
170 West Tasman Drive
San Jose, CA 95134-1706
USA
http://www.cisco.com
Tel: 408 526-4000
800 553-NETS (6387)
Fax: 408 526-4100
Customer Order Number: DOC-7814260=
Text Part Number: 78-14260-01 Rev. C0
THE SPECIFICATIONS AND INFORMATION REGARDING THE PRODUCTS IN THIS MANUAL ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT
NOTICE. ALL STATEMENTS, INFORMATION, AND RECOMMENDATIONS IN THIS MANUAL ARE BELIEVED TO BE ACCURATE BUT ARE
PRESENTED WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. USERS MUST TAKE FULL RESPONSIBILITY FOR THEIR
APPLICATION OF ANY PRODUCTS.
THE SOFTWARE LICENSE AND LIMITED WARRANTY FOR THE ACCOMPANYING PRODUCT ARE SET FORTH IN THE INFORMATION
PACKET THAT SHIPPED WITH THE PRODUCT AND ARE INCORPORATED HEREIN BY THIS REFERENCE. IF YOU ARE UNABLE TO
LOCATE THE SOFTWARE LICENSE OR LIMITED WARRANTY, CONTACT YOUR CISCO REPRESENTATIVE FOR A COPY.
The Cisco implementation of TCP header compression is an adaptation of a program developed by the University of California, Berkeley (UCB) as part of
UCB’s public domain version of the UNIX operating system. All rights reserved. Copyright © 1981, Regents of the University of California.
NOTWITHSTANDING ANY OTHER WARRANTY HEREIN, ALL DOCUMENT FILES AND SOFTWARE OF THESE SUPPLIERS ARE PROVIDED
“AS IS” WITH ALL FAULTS. CISCO AND THE ABOVE-NAMED SUPPLIERS DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THOSE OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NONINFRINGEMENT OR ARISING FROM A COURSE OF DEALING, USAGE, OR TRADE PRACTICE.
IN NO EVENT SHALL CISCO OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, OR INCIDENTAL
DAMAGES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, LOST PROFITS OR LOSS OR DAMAGE TO DATA ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR
INABILITY TO USE THIS MANUAL, EVEN IF CISCO OR ITS SUPPLIERS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
CCSP, CCVP, the Cisco Square Bridge logo, Follow Me Browsing, and StackWise are trademarks of Cisco Systems, Inc.; Changing the Way We Work,
Live, Play, and Learn, and iQuick Study are service marks of Cisco Systems, Inc.; and Access Registrar, Aironet, BPX, Catalyst, CCDA, CCDP, CCIE,
CCIP, CCNA, CCNP, Cisco, the Cisco Certified Internetwork Expert logo, Cisco IOS, Cisco Press, Cisco Systems, Cisco Systems Capital, the Cisco
Systems logo, Cisco Unity, Enterprise/Solver, EtherChannel, EtherFast, EtherSwitch, Fast Step, FormShare, GigaDrive, GigaStack, HomeLink, Internet
Quotient, IOS, IP/TV, iQ Expertise, the iQ logo, iQ Net Readiness Scorecard, LightStream, Linksys, MeetingPlace, MGX, the Networkers logo,
Networking Academy, Network Registrar, Packet, PIX, Post-Routing, Pre-Routing, ProConnect, RateMUX, ScriptShare, SlideCast, SMARTnet, The
Fastest Way to Increase Your Internet Quotient, and TransPath are registered trademarks of Cisco Systems, Inc. and/or its affiliates in the United States
and certain other countries.
All other trademarks mentioned in this document or Website are the property of their respective owners. The use of the word partner does not imply a
partnership relationship between Cisco and any other company. (0601R)
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Copyright © 2006, Cisco Systems, Inc.
All rights reserved.
Cisco Reader Comment Card
General Information
1
Years of networking experience:
2
I have these network types:
Other:
LAN
Backbone
3
I have these Cisco products:
Other (specify models):
Switches
Routers
4
I perform these types of tasks:
Network management
H/W installation and/or maintenance
Other:
S/W configuration
5
I use these types of documentation:
Command reference
Other:
H/W installation
Quick reference
S/W configuration
Online help
6
I access this information through:
% Printed docs
Years of experience with Cisco products:
WAN
H/W configuration
Release notes
% Cisco.com (CCO)
% Other:
7
I prefer this access method:
8
I use the following three product features the most:
% CD-ROM
Document Information
Document Title: Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference, Release 3
Part Number: 78-14260-01 Rev. C0
S/W Release (if applicable): Release 3.0
On a scale of 1–5 (5 being the best), please let us know how we rate in the following areas:
The document is written at my technical
level of understanding.
The information is accurate.
The document is complete.
The information I wanted was easy to find.
The information is well organized.
The information I found was useful to my job.
Please comment on our lowest scores:
Mailing Information
Company Name
Contact Name
Date
Job Title
Mailing Address
City
State/Province
ZIP/Postal Code
Country
Phone (
Extension
Fax (
)
)
E-mail
Can we contact you further concerning our documentation?
Yes
No
You can also send us your comments by e-mail to [email protected], or by fax to 408-527-8089.
FIRST-CLASS MAIL
PERMIT NO. 4631
SAN JOSE CA
BUSINESS REPLY MAIL
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE
ATTN DOCUMENT RESOURCE CONNECTION
CISCO SYSTEMS INC
170 WEST TASMAN DRIVE
SAN JOSE CA 95134-9883
NO POSTAGE
NECESSARY
IF MAILED
IN THE
UNITED STATES
C O N T E N T S
Preface
xxi
Objectives
Audience
xxi
xxi
Organization
xxii
Related Documentation xxii
Cisco WAN Manager Release 11 xxii
Cisco MGX 8850 (PXM45) Multiservice Switch Release 3 xxiii
Cisco MGX 8850 (PXM1E) Multiservice Switch Release 3 xxv
Cisco MGX 8950 Multiservice Switch Release 3 xxvi
SES PNNI Controller Release 3 xxvii
Cisco MGX 8830 Multiservice Switch Release 3 xxvii
Cisco WAN Switching Software Release 9.3 xxviii
Cisco MGX 8850 (PXM1) Edge Concentrator Switch Release 1 xxix
Cisco MGX 8250 Edge Concentrator Switch Release 1 xxx
Cisco MGX 8230 Edge Concentrator Switch Release 1 xxxi
Conventions
xxxii
Obtaining Documentation xxxii
World Wide Web xxxii
Documentation CD-ROM xxxiii
Ordering Documentation xxxiii
Documentation Feedback xxxiii
Obtaining Technical Assistance xxxiii
Cisco.com xxxiv
Technical Assistance Center xxxiv
Cisco TAC Web Site xxxiv
Cisco TAC Escalation Center xxxv
CHAPTER
1
Command Line Interface Overview
1-1
Role of the Command Line Interface
Access Level 1-1
Command Line Interface Prompt
1-1
1-2
Command Syntax 1-2
Notation 1-3
Command Entry 1-3
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
v
Contents
Port Identifier
1-3
Contents of a Command Description
CHAPTER
2
Functional Organization
SVC Command Suite
2-1
2-1
SPVC Command Suite
2-4
PNNI Command Suite
PNNI Addressing
2-6
2-7
Shelf Operation Commands
CHAPTER
3
1-4
2-9
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
abortallsaves
3-2
abortofflinediag
abortrev
3-4
addaddr
3-5
addapsln
addcon
3-3
3-7
3-8
addfltset
3-12
addlmiloop
3-14
addpnni-node
3-15
addpnni-summary-addr
addpnport
3-19
addprfx
3-21
addserialif
3-22
addtrapmgr
adduser
3-23
3-24
aesa_ping
3-25
bootChange
burnboot
3-17
3-18
addpref
bye
3-1
3-27
3-28
3-29
cc
3-30
cd
3-31
clidbxlevel
3-32
clrallcnf
3-33
clrbecnt
3-34
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
vi
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Contents
clrcnf
3-35
clrconstats
3-36
clrdiagerr
3-37
clrdiagstat
clrerr
3-38
3-39
clrerrhist
3-40
clrlmistats
3-41
clrlmitrace
3-42
clrlog
3-43
clrloginmsg
3-44
clrpathtracebuffer
3-45
clrpathtracebuffers
clrpncon
3-47
clrpnconstats
3-48
clrqosdefault
3-49
clrscrn
3-50
clrsigstats
3-51
clrsntpstats
3-52
clrspvcnonpers
3-53
clrsscopstats
cmdhistory
3-54
3-55
cnfabrtparmdft
cnfaddrreg
3-56
3-59
cnfainihopcount
cnfapsln
3-60
3-62
cnfautocnf
cnfcbclk
3-64
3-65
cnfcdvtdft
3-67
cnfcmdabbr
cnfcon
3-46
3-69
3-71
cnfconpref
3-74
cnfconsegep
3-76
cnfdate
3-77
cnfdiag
3-78
cnfdiagall
3-80
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
vii
Contents
cnfe164 justify
cnfenhiisp
cnffltset
3-82
3-83
3-84
cnfilmienable
cnfilmiproto
3-86
3-87
cnfintfcongth
cnfintvsvd
3-89
3-91
cnflmitrace
3-93
cnfloginmsg
cnfmbsdft
cnfname
3-94
3-95
3-97
cnfndparms
3-98
cnfnodalcongth
3-101
cnfnodalfd
3-103
cnfpasswd
3-104
cnfpri-routing
3-105
cnfoamsegep
3-107
cnfpnctlvc
3-109
cnfpnni-election
cnfpnni-intf
3-112
3-114
cnfpnni-link-selection
cnfpnni-mtu
3-117
3-119
cnfpnni-node
3-120
cnfpnni-pkttrace
3-125
cnfpnni-routing-policy
cnfpnni-scope-map
3-127
3-131
cnfpnni-svcc-rcc-timer
cnfpnni-timer
3-135
cnfpnportacc
3-139
cnfpnportcac
3-140
cnfpnportcc
3-142
cnfpnportloscallrel
cnfpnportncci
cnfpnportrange
cnfpnportsig
3-133
3-144
3-146
3-148
3-150
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
viii
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Contents
cnfpswdreset
3-154
cnfqosdefault
3-155
cnfrrtparm
3-158
cnfrteopt
3-160
cnfrteoptthld
3-163
cnfserialif
cnfsig
3-164
3-165
cnfsigdiag
3-167
cnfsnmp
3-170
cnfsntp
3-172
cnfspvcprfx
3-174
cnfsscop
3-176
cnfstatsmgr
3-179
cnfsvcoverride
3-180
cnftrftolerance
3-182
cnftime
3-183
cnftmzn
3-184
cnftmzngmt
cnftrapip
3-185
3-186
cnfuser
3-187
commitrev
3-189
conntrace
3-190
copy
cp
3-192
3-193
dbgsntp
3-194
deladdr
3-195
deladdrs
3-197
delapsln
3-198
delcon
3-199
delconsegep
delete
3-200
3-201
delfltset
3-202
dellmiloop
delpnni-node
3-203
3-204
delpnni-summary-addr
3-205
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
ix
Contents
delpnport
3-206
delpnportacc
3-207
delpref
3-208
delprfx
3-209
delserialif
3-210
delsesn
3-211
delsigdiag
3-213
deltrapmgr
3-215
deluser
3-216
disablesscop
dncon
3-217
3-218
dnpnport
3-219
downloadflash
3-220
dspabrtparmdft
3-222
dspaddr
3-223
dspainihopcount
dspapscfg
3-225
dspapsln
3-226
dspatmaddr
dspbecnt
3-227
3-228
dspbkpl
3-229
dspcbclk
dspcd
3-230
3-231
dspcdalms
3-233
dspcderrs
dspcds
3-235
3-236
dspcdstatus
3-238
dspcdvtdft
3-240
dspclkinfo
3-241
dspcmdabbr
dspcon
3-242
3-243
dspconinfo
dspcons
3-224
3-247
3-249
dspconsegep
dspconstats
3-251
3-252
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
x
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Contents
dspdate
3-253
dspdbinfo
3-254
dspdiagcnf
3-256
dspdiagerr
3-257
dspdiagstat
3-258
dspdiagstatus
dspdisk
3-259
3-260
dspenhiisp
3-262
dspenvalms
dsperr
3-265
dsperrhist
dsperrs
3-267
3-269
dspfltset
dspif
3-263
3-271
3-273
dspilmiaddr
3-274
dspintfcongcntr
3-275
dspintfcongflags
3-276
dspintfcongth
3-277
dspipconntask
3-278
dspipif
3-279
dspipifcache
dsplmilink
3-281
3-282
dsplmiloop
3-283
dsplmistats
3-284
dsplmitrace
3-285
dspln
dsplog
3-287
3-288
dsploginmsg
dsplogs
3-292
3-293
dspmbsdft
3-294
dspndalms
3-295
dspndparms
3-296
dspndstatus
3-297
dspnodalcongcntr
dspnodalcongflags
3-298
3-299
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
xi
Contents
dspnodalcongth
dspnodalfd
3-301
3-303
dspoamsegep
3-304
dsppathtracebuffer
3-305
dsppathtracebuffers
dsppathtraceie
3-306
3-307
dsppathtracenode
3-308
dsppathtraceport
3-309
dsppingatmaddr
3-310
dsppnallgrpaddr
3-311
dsppncon
3-312
dsppncon
3-314
dsppncons
3-316
dsppnconstats
dsppnctlvc
3-318
3-320
dsppngrpmbrs
dsppnilmi
3-321
3-322
dsppnni-bn-path
3-324
dsppnni-bypass
3-326
dsppnni-election
dsppnni-idb
3-328
3-330
dsppnni-inducing-uplink
dsppnni-intf
3-334
dsppnni-link
3-337
dsppnni-link-selection
dsppnni-mtu
3-346
3-351
dsppnni-pkttrace
dsppnni-ptse
3-341
3-343
dsppnni-node-list
dsppnni-path
3-339
3-340
dsppnni-neighbor
dsppnni-node
3-332
3-353
3-354
dsppnni-reachable-addr
dsppnni-routing-policy
dsppnni-scope-map
3-363
3-366
3-370
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
xii
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Contents
dsppnni-spoke
3-372
dsppnni-summary-addr
dsppnni-svcc-rcc
3-376
dsppnni-svcc-rcc-timer
dsppnni-timer
dsppnport
3-382
3-384
dsppnportcc
3-385
dsppnportidmaps
3-386
dsppnportloscallrel
dsppnportncci
3-389
dsppnportrsrc
3-390
dsppnports
3-391
dsppnportsig
3-395
dsppnsysaddr
3-396
3-398
dspprefs
3-399
dspprfhist
dspprfx
3-401
3-404
dsppri-routing
3-405
dsppswdreset
3-406
dsppvcif
3-407
dspqosdefault
3-408
3-409
dsprevs
3-410
dsprrtparm
3-412
dsprteoptcnf
3-413
dsprteoptstat
dspsem
3-415
3-416
dspsems
3-417
dspserialif
dspsesn
dspsig
3-387
3-388
dsppnportrange
dspred
3-378
3-380
dsppnportcac
dsppref
3-374
3-421
3-422
3-423
dspsigdiag
3-424
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
xiii
Contents
dspsigstats
3-425
dspsnmp
3-426
dspsntp
3-427
dspsntpstats
3-428
dspspvcaddr
3-429
dspspvcprfx
3-430
dspsscop
3-431
dspsscopstats
3-433
dspstatsmgr
3-434
dspsvcparm
3-435
dspsvcoverride
dspswalms
3-436
3-437
dsptrapip
3-438
dsptrapmgr
3-439
dsptrftolerance
dspusers
3-441
dspversion
exit
3-442
3-443
forcecdnative
help
3-444
3-445
history
3-446
ifShow
3-447
ipifconfig
3-449
loadrev
3-452
logout
ls
3-453
3-454
memShow
modpref
optrte
3-455
3-456
3-458
pathtraceie
3-460
pathtracenode
pathtraceport
ping
3-461
3-462
3-464
pvcifconfig
pwd
3-440
3-465
3-467
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
xiv
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Contents
remove
3-468
rename
3-469
resetcd
3-470
resetsys
3-471
restoreallcnf
3-472
routeShow
3-473
routestatShow
rrtcon
3-475
runrev
3-476
saveallcnf
3-477
sesntimeout
setrev
3-474
3-479
3-480
shellcon
3-481
showsyserr
3-482
stackdump
3-483
svcifconfig
3-485
switchapsln
switchcc
3-487
3-488
switchredcd
3-489
syserr
3-490
telnet
3-491
timeout
3-493
tstconseg
tstdelay
3-494
3-496
tstpndelay
upcon
3-499
uppnport
users
who
3-498
3-500
3-502
3-503
whoami
3-504
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
xv
Contents
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
xvi
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
T A B L E S
Table 1
Cisco WAN Manager Release 11 Documentation
Table 2
WAN CiscoView Release 3 Documentation
Table 3
Cisco MGX 8850 (PXM45) Multiservice Switch Release 3 Documentation
xxiv
Table 4
Cisco MGX 8850 (PXM1E) Multiservice Switch Release 3 Documentation
xxv
Table 5
Cisco MGX 8950 Multiservice Switch Release 3 Documentation
Table 6
SES PNNI Controller Release 3 Documentation
Table 7
Cisco MGX 8830 Multiservice Switch Release 3 Documentation
Table 8
Cisco WAN Switching Software Release 9.3 Documentation
Table 9
Cisco MGX 8850 (PXM1) Edge Concentrator Switch Release 1 Documentation
Table 10
Cisco MGX 8250 Edge Concentrator Switch Release 1 Documentation
xxx
Table 11
Cisco MGX 8230 Edge Concentrator Switch Release 1 Documentation
xxxi
Table 2-1
SVC Commands Summary
Table 2-2
SPVC Commands Summary
2-4
Table 2-3
PNNI Commands Summary
2-8
Table 2-4
Shelf Operation Commands Summary
2-10
Table 3-1
Routing Criteria and Service Classes
3-351
xxii
xxiii
xxvi
xxvii
xxviii
xxix
xxix
2-1
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, October 2006
xvii
Tables
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
xviii
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, October 2006
F I G U R E S
Figure 2-1
Cisco Factory-shipped Node-Addressing Defaults Mapping into Both NSAP and DCC Address Formats
Figure 3-1
Cisco Factory-shipped Defaults for PNNI Peer Group Identifier, PNNI Summary Address, ATM Address, and
PNNI Node Identifier 3-123
Figure 3-2
Alarm Type Hierarchy
Figure 3-3
Multi-Peer Group
Figure 3-4
A List of Nodes in a Multi-Peer Group
3-349
Figure 3-5
SPVC with Endpoints and a Via Node
3-393
2-8
3-239
3-348
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
xix
Figures
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
xx
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Preface
Welcome to the command reference for the BPX Service Expansion Shelf (SES) PNNI controller. The
SES controller is a virtual switch interface (VSI) controller that provides a Cisco BPX 8600 series
wide-area switch with the capability to create switched virtual circuits (SVCs) by using the UNI and
PNNI protocols, and soft permanent virtual circuits (SPVCs) by using the PNNI protocol. Each Cisco
BPX 8600 series node that will be originating, transporting, or terminating SVC and SPVC connections
must be collocated and directly connected to an SES PNNI node to deploy PNNI functionality. The
combined Cisco BPX 8600 and SES controller are referred to as a SES PNNI node in this manual.
This preface contains the following sections:
•
Objectives
•
Audience
•
Organization
•
Related Documentation
•
Conventions
•
Obtaining Documentation
•
Obtaining Technical Assistance
Objectives
This publication describes the commands used to configure the SES controller.
Audience
This publication is designed for the network operator responsible for configuring the SES controller(s)
in a Cisco BPX 8600 network, and for provisioning PNNI services. Both the installer and network
operator should be familiar with Cisco WAN switching networks, Cisco BPX 8600 series wide area
switches, and the Cisco WAN Manager (CWM)—formerly known as StrataView Plus—and CiscoView
network management systems.
Warning
Installation of the equipment should be performed by trained service personnel.
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
xxi
Preface
Organization
Organization
This document contains the following chapters:
•
Chapter 1, “Command Line Interface Overview,”describes the command line interface (CLI) for the
SES PNNI controller.
•
Chapter 2, “Functional Organization,” provides a functional organization for the SVC commands,
SPVC commands, PNNI commands, and shelf operation commands.
•
Chapter 3, “Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands,” provides an alphabetical
listing of all the SES PNNI controller commands.
Related Documentation
The following Cisco publications contain additional information related to the operation of this product
and associated equipment in a Cisco WAN switching network.
Cisco WAN Manager Release 11
The product documentation for the Cisco WAN Manager (CWM) network management system for
Release 11 is listed in Table 1.
Table 1
Cisco WAN Manager Release 11 Documentation
Title
Description
Cisco WAN Manager Installation Guide for Solaris 7, Provides procedures for installing Release 11 of the CWM network
Release 11
management system and Release 5.4 of CiscoView on a Solaris 7
platform.
DOC-7813567=
Cisco WAN Manager Installation Guide for Solaris 8, Provides procedures for installing Release 11 of the CWM network
management system and Release 5.4 of CiscoView on a Solaris 8
Release 11
platform.
DOC-7814230=
Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide, Release 11
DOC-7813568=
Cisco WAN Manager SNMP Service Agent,
Release 11
Describes how to use the CWM Release 11 software, which consists
of user applications and tools for network management, connection
management, network configuration, statistics collection, and security
management.
DOC-7813569=
Provides information about the CWM Simple Network Management
Protocol Service Agent, an optional adjunct to CWM that is used for
managing Cisco WAN switches using SNMP.
Cisco WAN Manager Database Interface Guide,
Release 11
Provides information about accessing the CWM Informix OnLine
database that is used to store information about the network elements.
DOC-7813542=
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
xxii
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Preface
Related Documentation
Table 2
WAN CiscoView Release 3 Documentation
Title
Description
WAN CiscoView Release 3 for the MGX 8220 Edge
Concentrator, Release 5
Provides instructions for using this network management
software application that allows you to perform minor
configuration and troubleshooting tasks for element management
of the Cisco MGX 8220 Edge Concentrator.
DOC-7812768=
WAN CiscoView Release 3 for the MGX 8850 Edge
Switch, Release 1
DOC-7811242=
WAN CiscoView Release 3 for the MGX 8250 Edge
Concentrator, Release 1
DOC-7811241=
Provides instructions for using this network management
software application that allows you to perform minor
configuration and troubleshooting tasks for element management
of the Cisco MGX 8850 Edge Switch.
Provides instructions for using this network management
software application that allows you to perform minor
configuration and troubleshooting tasks for element management
of the Cisco MGX 8250 Edge Concentrator.
WAN CiscoView Release 3 for the MGX 8230 Multiservice Provides instructions for using this network management
software application that allows you to perform minor
Gateway, Release 1
configuration and troubleshooting tasks for element management
DOC-7810926=
of the Cisco MGX 8230 Multiservice Gateway.
WAN CiscoView for Release 2 of the MGX 8850
DOC-7810349=
WAN CiscoView Release 3 for IGX 8400 Switches
DOC-78111243=
WAN CiscoView Release 3 for BPX 8600 Switches
DOC-7811244=
WAN CiscoView Release 3 for the BPX SES PNNI
Controller
DOC-7812303=
Provides instructions for using this network management
software application that allows you to perform minor
configuration and troubleshooting tasks for element management
of the Cisco MGX 8850 switch.
Provides instructions for using this network management
software application that allows you to perform minor
configuration and troubleshooting tasks for element management
of the Cisco IGX 8400 switch.
Provides instructions for using this network management
software application that allows you to perform minor
configuration and troubleshooting tasks for element management
of the Cisco BPX 8600 switch.
Provides instructions for using this network management
software application that allows you to perform minor
configuration and troubleshooting tasks for element management
of the Cisco BPX SES1 PNNI2 Controller.
1. SES = Service Expansion Shelf Private Network-to-Network Interface
2. PNNI = Private Network-to-Network Interface
Cisco MGX 8850 (PXM45) Multiservice Switch Release 3
The product documentation for installing and operating the Cisco MGX 8850 (PXM45) Multiservice
Switch Release 3 is listed in Table 3.
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
xxiii
Preface
Related Documentation
Table 3
Cisco MGX 8850 (PXM45) Multiservice Switch Release 3 Documentation
Title
Description
Cisco MGX 8850 (PXM45 and PXM1E) Hardware
Installation Guide, Release 3
Describes how to install the Cisco MGX 8850 switch. This guide
explains what the switch does and covers site preparation,
grounding, safety, card installation, and cabling. The Cisco
MGX 8850 switch uses either a PXM45 or a PXM1E controller
card and provides support for both broadband and narrowband
service modules.
DOC-7814250=
Cisco MGX 8830, MGX 8850 (PXM45 and PXM1E),
and MGX 8950 Command Reference, Release 3
DOC-7814789=
Cisco MGX 8850 (PXM45) and MGX 8950 Software
Configuration Guide, Release 3
DOC-7814788=
Cisco SNMP Reference for MGX 8850 (PXM45 and
PXM1E), MGX 8950, and MGX 8830, Release 3
DOC-7814747=
Describes the PXM commands that are available on the CLI1 of the
Cisco MGX 8830, Cisco MGX 8850, and Cisco MGX 8950
switches.
Describes how to configure the Cisco MGX 8850 (PXM45) and the
Cisco MGX 8950 switches with a PXM45 controller to operate as
ATM edge or core switches. This guide also provides some
operation and maintenance procedures.
Provides information on all supported MIB2 objects, support
restrictions, and traps for AXSM, AXSM-E, SRM-3T3, SRME,
FRSM12, PXM45, PXM1E, RPM-PR, and RPM-XF.
Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Describes how to use the high-speed Frame Relay
Command Reference for the MGX 8850 FRSM12 Card, (FRSM-12-T3E3) commands that are available in the CLI of the
Cisco MGX 8850 (PXM45) switch.
Release 3
DOC-7810327=
Cisco AXSM Software Configuration Guide and
This guide explains how to configure the AXSM cards for
Command Reference for MGX 8850 (PXM45) and MGX operation and contains a command reference that describes the
8950, Release 3
AXSM commands in detail. The AXSM cards covered in this
manual are the AXSM, AXSM/B, AXSM-E, and
DOC-7814257=
AXSM-32-T1E1-E.
Cisco MGX and SES PNNI Network Planning Guide
DOC-7813543=
Cisco MGX Route Processor Module (RPM-XF)
Installation and Configuration Guide, Release 3
OL-2768-01 (online only)
Cisco VISM Installation and Configuration Guide,
Release 3.0
OL-2521-01 (online only)
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for the
Cisco MGX 8830, MGX 8850 (PXM45 and PXM1E),
and MGX 8950 Switches
Provides guidelines for planning a PNNI network that uses the
Cisco MGX 8850 (PXM45 and PXM1E), Cisco MGX 8950, and
the Cisco BPX 8600 switches. When connected to a PNNI network,
each Cisco BPX 8600 Series Switch requires an SES 3 for PNNI
route processing.
Describes how to install and configure the Cisco MGX Route
Processor Module (RPM-XF) in the Cisco MGX 8850 Release 3
switch. Also provides site preparation, troubleshooting,
maintenance, cable and connector specifications, and basic Cisco
IOS configuration information.
Describes how to install and configure VISM4 in the Cisco
MGX 8850 (PXM1), Cisco MGX 8250, and Cisco MGX 8230
switches. Also provides troubleshooting, maintenance, cable and
connector specifications, and Cisco CLI command configuration
information.
Provides regulatory compliance, product warnings, and safety
recommendations for the Cisco MGX 8830, Cisco MGX 8850
(PXM45 and PXM1E), and Cisco MGX 8950 switches.
DOC-7814790=
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
xxiv
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Preface
Related Documentation
1. CLI = command line interface
2. MIB = Management Information Base
3. SES = Service Expansion Shelf
4. VISM = Voice Interworking Service Module
Cisco MGX 8850 (PXM1E) Multiservice Switch Release 3
The product documentation for installing and operating the Cisco MGX 8850 (PXM1E) Multiservice
Switch Release 3 is listed in Table 4.
Table 4
Cisco MGX 8850 (PXM1E) Multiservice Switch Release 3 Documentation
Title
Description
Cisco MGX 8850 (PXM45 and PXM1E) Hardware
Installation Guide, Release 3
Describes how to install the Cisco MGX 8850 routing switch. This
documentation explains what the switch does and covers site
preparation, grounding, safety, card installation, and cabling. The
Cisco MGX 8850 switch uses either a PXM45 or a PXM1E
controller card and provides support for both broadband and
narrowband service modules.
DOC-7814250=
Cisco MGX 8850 (PXM1E) and MGX 8830 Software
Configuration Guide, Release 3
DOC-7814248=
Cisco MGX 8830, MGX 8850 (PXM45 and PXM1E),
and MGX 8950 Command Reference, Release 3
DOC-7814789=
Cisco SNMP Reference for MGX 8850 (PXM45 and
PXM1E), MGX 8950, and MGX 8830, Release 3
DOC-7814747=
Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and
Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
DOC-7814255=
Cisco AUSM Software Configuration Guide and
Command Reference for MGX 8850 (PXM1E) and
MGX 8830, Release 3
DOC-7814254=
Cisco CESM Software Configuration Guide and
Command Reference for MGX 8850 (PXM1E) and
MGX 8830, Release 3
DOC-7814256=
Cisco MGX and SES PNNI Network Planning Guide
DOC-7813543=
Describes how to configure the Cisco MGX 8850 (PXM1E) and the
Cisco MGX 8830 switches with PXM1E controller cards to operate
as ATM edge switches. This guide also provides some operation and
maintenance procedures.
Describes the PXM commands that are available on the CLI of the
Cisco MGX 8830, Cisco MGX 8850, and Cisco MGX 8950
switches.
Provides information on all supported MIB objects, support
restrictions, and traps for AXSM, AXSM-E, SRM-3T3, SRME,
FRSM12, PXM45, PXM1E, RPM-PR, and RPM-XF.
Provides software configuration procedures for provisioning
connections and managing the FRSM cards supported in this
release. Also provides command descriptions for all FRSM
commands.
Provides software configuration procedures for provisioning
connections and managing the AUSM cards supported in this
release. Also provides command descriptions for all AUSM
commands.
Provides software configuration procedures for provisioning
connections and managing the CESM cards supported in this
release. Also provides command descriptions for all CESM
commands.
Provides guidelines for planning a PNNI network that uses Cisco
MGX 8850 (PXM45 and PXM1E), Cisco MGX 8950, and Cisco
BPX 8600 switches. When connected to a PNNI network, each
Cisco BPX 8600 Series Switch requires an SES for PNNI route
processing.
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
xxv
Preface
Related Documentation
Table 4
Cisco MGX 8850 (PXM1E) Multiservice Switch Release 3 Documentation (continued)
Title
Description
Cisco MGX Route Processor Module (RPM-XF)
Installation and Configuration Guide, Release 3
Describes how to install and configure the Cisco MGX Route
Processor Module (RPM-XF) in the Cisco MGX 8850 Release 3
switch. Also provides site preparation, troubleshooting,
maintenance, cable and connector specifications, and basic Cisco
IOS configuration information.
OL-2768-01 (online only)
Cisco VISM Installation and Configuration Guide,
Release 3.0
OL-2521-01 (online only)
Describes how to install and configure VISM in the Cisco
MGX 8850 (PXM1), Cisco MGX 8250, and Cisco MGX 8230
switches. Also provides troubleshooting, maintenance, cable and
connector specifications, and Cisco CLI command configuration
information.
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for the Provides regulatory compliance, product warnings, and safety
Cisco MGX 8830, MGX 8850 (PXM45 and PXM1E),
recommendations for the Cisco MGX 8830, Cisco MGX 8850
and MGX 8950 Switches
(PXM45 and PXM1E), and Cisco MGX 8950 switches.
DOC-7814790=
Cisco MGX 8950 Multiservice Switch Release 3
The product documentation for installing and operating the Cisco MGX 8950 Multiservice Switch
Release 3 is listed in Table 5.
Table 5
Cisco MGX 8950 Multiservice Switch Release 3 Documentation
Title
Description
Cisco MGX 8950 Hardware Installation Guide,
Release 3
Describes how to install the Cisco MGX 8950 core switch. This
documentation explains what the switch does and covers site
preparation, grounding, safety, card installation, and cabling. The
Cisco MGX 8950 switch uses a PXM45/B controller card and
provides support for broadband service modules.
DOC-7814147=
Cisco MGX 8830, MGX 8850 (PXM45 and PXM1E), Describes the PXM commands that are available on the CLI of the
Cisco MGX 8830, Cisco MGX 8850, and Cisco MGX 8950 switches.
and MGX 8950 Command Reference, Release 3
DOC-7814789=
Cisco MGX 8850 (PXM45) and MGX 8950 Software
Configuration Guide, Release 3
DOC-7814788=
Cisco AXSM Software Configuration Guide and
Command Reference for MGX 8850 (PXM45) and
MGX 8950, Release 3
DOC-7814257=
Cisco SNMP Reference for MGX 8850 (PXM45 and
PXM1E), MGX 8950, and MGX 8830, Release 3
DOC-7814747=
Describes how to configure the Cisco MGX 8850 (PXM45) and the
Cisco MGX 8950 switches with a PXM45 controller to operate as
ATM edge or core switches. This guide also provides some operation
and maintenance procedures.
This guide explains how to configure the AXSM cards for operation
and contains a command reference that describes the AXSM
commands in detail. The AXSM cards covered in this manual are the
AXSM, AXSM/B, AXSM-E, and AXSM-32-T1E1-E.
Provides information on all supported MIB objects, support
restrictions, and traps for AXSM, AXSM-E, SRM-3T3, SRME,
FRSM12, PXM45, PXM1E, RPM-PR, and RPM-XF.
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
xxvi
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Preface
Related Documentation
Table 5
Cisco MGX 8950 Multiservice Switch Release 3 Documentation (continued)
Title
Description
Cisco MGX and SES PNNI Network Planning Guide
Provides guidelines for planning a PNNI network that uses the Cisco
MGX 8850 (PXM45 and PXM1E), Cisco MGX 8950, and the Cisco
BPX 8600 switches. When connected to a PNNI network, each Cisco
BPX 8600 Series Switch requires an SES for PNNI route processing.
DOC-7813543=
Cisco MGX Route Processor Module (RPM-XF)
Installation and Configuration Guide, Release 3
OL-2768-01 (online only)
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for
the Cisco MGX 8830, MGX 8850 (PXM45 and
PXM1E), and MGX 8950 Switches
Describes how to install and configure the Cisco MGX Route
Processor Module (RPM-XF) in the Cisco MGX 8850 switch
Release 3. Also provides site preparation, troubleshooting,
maintenance, cable and connector specifications, and basic Cisco IOS
configuration information.
Provides regulatory compliance, product warnings, and safety
recommendations for the Cisco MGX 8830, Cisco MGX 8850
(PXM45 and PXM1E), and Cisco MGX 8950 switches.
DOC-7814790=
SES PNNI Controller Release 3
The product documentation for installing and operating the Service Expansion Shelf (SES) Private
Network-to-Network Interface (PNNI) Controller Release 3 is listed in Table 6.
Table 6
SES PNNI Controller Release 3 Documentation
Title
Description
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Software Configuration
Guide, Release 3
Describes how to configure, operate, and maintain the SES PNNI
Controller.
DOC-7814258=
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference,
Release 3
Provides a description of the commands used to configure and
operate the SES PNNI Controller.
DOC-7814260=
Cisco MGX and SES PNNI Network Planning Guide
DOC-7813543=
Provides guidelines for planning a PNNI network that uses the
Cisco MGX 8850 (PXM45 and PXM1E), Cisco MGX 8950, and
the Cisco BPX 8600 switches. When connected to a PNNI
network, each Cisco BPX 8600 Series Switch requires an SES for
PNNI route processing.
Cisco MGX 8830 Multiservice Switch Release 3
The product documentation for installing and operating the Cisco MGX 8830 Multiservice Switch
Release 3 is listed in Table 7.
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
xxvii
Preface
Related Documentation
Table 7
Cisco MGX 8830 Multiservice Switch Release 3 Documentation
Title
Description
Cisco MGX 8830 Hardware Installation Guide, Release 3 Describes how to install the Cisco MGX 8830 edge switch. This
documentation explains what the switch does and covers site
DOC-7814547=
preparation, grounding, safety, card installation, and cabling. The
Cisco MGX 8830 switch uses a PXM1E controller card and
provides PNNI support for narrowband service modules.
Cisco MGX 8850 (PXM1E) and MGX 8830 Software
Configuration Guide, Release 3
DOC-7814248=
Cisco MGX 8830, MGX 8850 (PXM45 and PXM1E), and
MGX 8950 Command Reference, Release 3
DOC-7814789=
Cisco SNMP Reference for MGX 8850 (PXM45 and
PXM1E), MGX 8950, and MGX 8830, Release 3
DOC-7814747=
Cisco AUSM Software Configuration Guide and
Command Reference for MGX 8850 (PXM1E) and MGX
8830, Release 3
DOC-7814254=
Cisco CESM Software Configuration Guide and
Command Reference for MGX 8850 (PXM1E) and
MGX 8830, Release 3
DOC-7814256=
Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and
Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
DOC-7814255=
Cisco VISM Installation and Configuration Guide,
Release 3.0
OL-2521-01 (online only)
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for the
Cisco MGX 8830, MGX 8850 (PXM45 and PXM1E), and
MGX 8950 Switches
Describes how to configure the Cisco MGX 8850 (PXM1E) and
the Cisco MGX 8830 switches with PXM1E controller cards to
operate as ATM edge switches. This guide also provides some
operation and maintenance procedures.
Describes the PXM commands that are available on the CLI of
the Cisco MGX 8830, Cisco MGX 8850, and Cisco MGX 8950
switches.
Provides information on all supported MIB objects, support
restrictions, and traps for AXSM, AXSM-E, SRM-3T3, SRME,
FRSM12, PXM45, PXM1E, RPM-PR, and RPM-XF.
Provides software configuration procedures for provisioning
connections and managing the AUSM cards supported in this
release. Also provides command descriptions for all AUSM
commands.
Provides software configuration procedures for provisioning
connections and managing the CESM cards supported in this
release. Also provides command descriptions for all CESM
commands.
Provides software configuration procedures for provisioning
connections and managing the FRSM cards supported in this
release. Also provides command descriptions for all FRSM
commands.
Describes how to install and configure VISM in the Cisco
MGX 8850 (PXM1), Cisco MGX 8250, and Cisco MGX 8230
switches. Also provides troubleshooting, maintenance, cable and
connector specifications, and Cisco CLI command configuration
information.
Provides regulatory compliance, product warnings, and safety
recommendations for the Cisco MGX 8830, Cisco MGX 8850
(PXM45 and PXM1E), and Cisco MGX 8950 switches.
DOC-7814790=
Cisco WAN Switching Software Release 9.3
The product documentation for installing and operating the Cisco WAN Switching Software Release 9.3
is listed in Table 8.
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
xxviii
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Preface
Related Documentation
Table 8
Cisco WAN Switching Software Release 9.3 Documentation
Title
Description
Cisco BPX 8600 Series Installation and Configuration,
Release 9.3.30
Provides a general description and technical details of the Cisco
BPX broadband switch.
DOC-7812907=
Cisco WAN Switching Command Reference, Release 9.3.30 Provides detailed information on the general command line
interface commands.
DOC-7812906=
Cisco IGX 8400 Series Installation Guide, Release 9.3.30
OL-1165-01 (online only)
Provides hardware installation and basic configuration
information for Cisco IGX 8400 Series Switches that are
running Switch Software Release 9.3.30 or earlier.
Cisco IGX 8400 Series Provisioning Guide, Release 9.3.30 Provides information for configuration and provisioning of
selected services for the Cisco IGX 8400 Series Switches that
OL-1166-01 (online only)
are running Switch Software Release 9.3.30 or earlier.
Provides new feature, upgrade, and compatibility information,
as well as known and resolved anomalies.
9.3.42 Version Software Release Notes Cisco WAN
Switching System Software
OL-2911-01 (online only)
Cisco IGX 8400 Series Regulatory Compliance and Safety
Information
Provides regulatory compliance, product warnings, and safety
recommendations for the Cisco IGX 8400 Series Switch.
DOC-7813227=
Cisco MGX 8850 (PXM1) Edge Concentrator Switch Release 1
The product documentation for installing and operating the Cisco MGX 8850 (PXM1) Edge
Concentrator Switch Release 1 is listed in Table 9.
Table 9
Cisco MGX 8850 (PXM1) Edge Concentrator Switch Release 1 Documentation
Title
Description
Cisco MGX 8850 Multiservice Switch Installation and
Configuration, Release 1.1.3
Provides installation instructions for the Cisco MGX 8850 (PXM1)
Edge Concentrator Switch.
DOC-7811223=
Cisco MGX 8800 Series Switch Command Reference,
Release 1.1.3
Provides detailed information on the general command line for the
Cisco MGX 8850 (PXM1) Edge Concentrator Switch.
DOC-7811210=
Cisco MGX 8800 Series Switch System Error Messages, Provides error message descriptions and recovery procedures.
Release 1.1.3
DOC-7811240=
Cisco MGX 8850 Multiservice Switch Overview,
Release 1.1.3
OL-1154-01 (online only)
Provides a technical description of the system components and
functionality of the Cisco MGX 8850 (PXM1) Edge Concentrator
Switch from a technical perspective.
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
xxix
Preface
Related Documentation
Table 9
Cisco MGX 8850 (PXM1) Edge Concentrator Switch Release 1 Documentation (continued)
Title
Description
Cisco MGX Route Processor Module Installation and
Configuration Guide, Release 1.1
Describes how to install and configure the Cisco MGX Route
Processor Module (RPM/B and RPM-PR) in the Cisco MGX 8850
(PXM1), Cisco MGX 8250, and Cisco MGX 8230 switches. Also
provides site preparation, troubleshooting, maintenance, cable and
connector specifications, and basic Cisco IOS configuration
information.
DOC-7812278=
Cisco VISM Installation and Configuration Guide,
Release 3.0
OL-2521-01 (online only)
Release Notes for Cisco MGX 8230, MGX 8250, and
MGX 8850 (PXM1) Software Version 1.2.11
Describes how to install and configure VISM in the Cisco
MGX 8850 (PXM1), Cisco MGX 8250, and Cisco MGX 8230
switches. Also provides troubleshooting, maintenance, cable and
connector specifications, and Cisco CLI command configuration
information.
Provides new feature, upgrade, and compatibility information, as
well as known and resolved anomalies.
OL-2916-01 (online only)
Cisco MGX 8250 Edge Concentrator Switch Release 1
The documentation for installing and operating the Cisco MGX 8250 Edge Concentrator Switch
Release 1 is listed in Table 10.
Table 10
Cisco MGX 8250 Edge Concentrator Switch Release 1 Documentation
Title
Description
Cisco MGX 8250 Edge Concentrator Installation and
Configuration, Release 1.1.3
Provides installation instructions for the Cisco MGX 8250 Edge
Concentrator Switch.
DOC-7811217=
Cisco MGX 8250 Multiservice Gateway Command
Reference, Release 1.1.3
Provides detailed information on the general command line
interface commands.
DOC-7811212=
Cisco MGX 8250 Multiservice Gateway Error Messages, Provides error message descriptions and recovery procedures.
Release 1.1.3
DOC-7811216=
Cisco MGX 8250 Edge Concentrator Overview,
Release 1.1.3
DOC-7811576=
Cisco MGX Route Processor Module Installation and
Configuration Guide, Release 1.1
DOC-7812278=
Describes the system components and functionality of the Cisco
MGX 8250 Edge Concentrator Switch from a technical
perspective.
Describes how to install and configure the Cisco MGX Route
Processor Module (RPM/B and RPM-PR) in the Cisco
MGX 8850 (PXM1), Cisco MGX 8250, and Cisco MGX 8230
switches. Also provides site preparation, troubleshooting,
maintenance, cable and connector specifications, and basic Cisco
IOS configuration information.
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
xxx
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Preface
Related Documentation
Table 10
Cisco MGX 8250 Edge Concentrator Switch Release 1 Documentation (continued)
Title
Description
Cisco VISM Installation and Configuration Guide,
Release 3.0
OL-2521-01 (online only)
Describes how to install and configure VISM in the Cisco
MGX 8850 (PXM1), Cisco MGX 8250, and Cisco MGX 8230
switches. Also provides troubleshooting, maintenance, cable and
connector specifications, and Cisco CLI command configuration
information.
Release Notes for Cisco MGX 8230, MGX 8250, and
MGX 8850 (PXM1) Software Version 1.2.11
Provides new feature, upgrade, and compatibility information, as
well as known and resolved anomalies.
OL-2916-01 (online only)
Cisco MGX 8230 Edge Concentrator Switch Release 1
The documentation for installing and operating the Cisco MGX 8230 Edge Concentrator Switch
Release 1 is listed in Table 11.
Table 11
Cisco MGX 8230 Edge Concentrator Switch Release 1 Documentation
Title
Description
Cisco MGX 8230 Edge Concentrator Installation and
Configuration, Release 1.1.3
Provides installation instructions for the Cisco MGX 8230 Edge
Concentrator Switch.
DOC-7811215=
Cisco MGX 8230 Multiservice Gateway Command
Reference, Release 1.1.3
Provides detailed information on the general command line
interface commands.
DOC-7811211=
Cisco MGX 8230 Multiservice Gateway Error
Messages, Release 1.1.3
Provides error message descriptions and recovery procedures.
DOC-78112113=
Cisco MGX 8230 Edge Concentrator Overview,
Release 1.1.3
DOC-7812899=
Cisco MGX Route Processor Module Installation and
Configuration Guide, Release 1.1
DOC-7812278=
Cisco VISM Installation and Configuration Guide,
Release 3.0
OL-2521-01 (online only)
Release Notes for Cisco MGX 8230, MGX 8250, and
MGX 8850 (PXM1) Software Version 1.2.11
Provides a technical description of the system components and
functionality of the Cisco MGX 8230 Edge Concentrator Switch
from a technical perspective.
Describes how to install and configure the Cisco MGX Route
Processor Module (RPM/B and RPM-PR) in the Cisco MGX 8850
(PXM1), Cisco MGX 8250, and Cisco MGX 8230 switches. Also
provides site preparation, troubleshooting, maintenance, cable and
connector specifications, and basic Cisco IOS configuration
information.
Describes how to install and configure VISM in the Cisco
MGX 8850 (PXM1), Cisco MGX 8250, and Cisco MGX 8230
switches. Also provides troubleshooting, maintenance, cable and
connector specifications, and Cisco CLI command configuration
information.
Provides new feature, upgrade, and compatibility information, as
well as known and resolved anomalies.
OL-2916-01 (online only)
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
xxxi
Preface
Conventions
Conventions
The Cisco SES PNNI Controller Software Command Reference uses the following conventions to convey
instructions and information.
Command descriptions use these conventions:
•
Commands and keywords are in boldface.
•
Arguments for which you supply values are in italic font.
•
Elements in square brackets ([ ]) are optional.
•
Alternative but required keywords are grouped in braces ({ }) and are separated by vertical bars (|).
•
Terminal sessions and information the system displays are in screen font.
•
Information you enter is in boldface
•
Nonprinting characters, such as passwords, are in angle brackets (< >).
•
Default responses to system prompts are in square brackets ([ ]).
screen
font.
Notes, cautions, warnings, and tips use the following conventions and symbols:
Note
Means reader take note. Notes contain helpful suggestions or references to material not covered in
this manual
Tip
Means the following information will help you solve a problem.
Caution
Means reader be careful. In this situation, you might do something that could result in equipment
damage or loss of data.
Warning
Means danger. You are in a situation that could cause bodily injury. Before you work on any
equipment, you must be aware of the hazards involved with electrical circuitry and familiar with
standard practices for preventing accidents. To see translated versions of the warning, refer to the
Regulatory Compliance and Safety document that accompanied the device.
Obtaining Documentation
These sections explain how to obtain documentation from Cisco Systems.
World Wide Web
You can access the most current Cisco documentation on the World Wide Web at this URL:
http://www.cisco.com
Translated documentation is available at this URL:
http://www.cisco.com/public/countries_languages.shtml
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
xxxii
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Preface
Obtaining Technical Assistance
Documentation CD-ROM
Cisco documentation and additional literature are available in a Cisco Documentation CD-ROM
package, which is shipped with your product. The Documentation CD-ROM is updated monthly and may
be more current than printed documentation. The CD-ROM package is available as a single unit or
through an annual subscription.
Ordering Documentation
You can order Cisco documentation in these ways:
•
Registered Cisco.com users (Cisco direct customers) can order Cisco product documentation from
the Networking Products MarketPlace:
http://www.cisco.com/cgi-bin/order/order_root.pl
•
Registered Cisco.com users can order the Documentation CD-ROM through the online Subscription
Store:
http://www.cisco.com/go/subscription
•
Nonregistered Cisco.com users can order documentation through a local account representative by
calling Cisco Systems Corporate Headquarters (California, U.S.A.) at 408 526-7208 or, elsewhere
in North America, by calling 800 553-NETS (6387).
Documentation Feedback
You can submit comments electronically on Cisco.com. In the Cisco Documentation home page, click
the Fax or Email option in the “Leave Feedback” section at the bottom of the page.
You can e-mail your comments to [email protected].
You can submit your comments by mail by using the response card behind the front cover of your
document or by writing to the following address:
Cisco Systems
Attn: Document Resource Connection
170 West Tasman Drive
San Jose, CA 95134-9883
We appreciate your comments.
Obtaining Technical Assistance
Cisco provides Cisco.com as a starting point for all technical assistance. Customers and partners can
obtain online documentation, troubleshooting tips, and sample configurations from online tools by using
the Cisco Technical Assistance Center (TAC) Web Site. Cisco.com registered users have complete access
to the technical support resources on the Cisco TAC Web Site.
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
xxxiii
Preface
Obtaining Technical Assistance
Cisco.com
Cisco.com is the foundation of a suite of interactive, networked services that provides immediate, open
access to Cisco information, networking solutions, services, programs, and resources at any time, from
anywhere in the world.
Cisco.com is a highly integrated Internet application and a powerful, easy-to-use tool that provides a
broad range of features and services to help you with these tasks:
•
Streamline business processes and improve productivity
•
Resolve technical issues with online support
•
Download and test software packages
•
Order Cisco learning materials and merchandise
•
Register for online skill assessment, training, and certification programs
If you want to obtain customized information and service, you can self-register on Cisco.com. To access
Cisco.com, go to this URL:
http://www.cisco.com
Technical Assistance Center
The Cisco Technical Assistance Center (TAC) is available to all customers who need technical assistance
with a Cisco product, technology, or solution. Two levels of support are available: the Cisco TAC
Web Site and the Cisco TAC Escalation Center.
Cisco TAC inquiries are categorized according to the urgency of the issue:
•
Priority level 4 (P4)—You need information or assistance concerning Cisco product capabilities,
product installation, or basic product configuration.
•
Priority level 3 (P3)—Your network performance is degraded. Network functionality is noticeably
impaired, but most business operations continue.
•
Priority level 2 (P2)—Your production network is severely degraded, affecting significant aspects
of business operations. No workaround is available.
•
Priority level 1 (P1)—Your production network is down, and a critical impact to business operations
will occur if service is not restored quickly. No workaround is available.
The Cisco TAC resource that you choose is based on the priority of the problem and the conditions of
service contracts, when applicable.
Cisco TAC Web Site
You can use the Cisco TAC Web Site to resolve P3 and P4 issues yourself, saving both cost and time.
The site provides around-the-clock access to online tools, knowledge bases, and software. To access the
Cisco TAC Web Site, go to this URL:
http://www.cisco.com/tac
All customers, partners, and resellers who have a valid Cisco service contract have complete access to
the technical support resources on the Cisco TAC Web Site. The Cisco TAC Web Site requires a
Cisco.com login ID and password. If you have a valid service contract but do not have a login ID or
password, go to this URL to register:
http://www.cisco.com/register/
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
xxxiv
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Preface
Obtaining Technical Assistance
If you are a Cisco.com registered user, and you cannot resolve your technical issues by using the Cisco
TAC Web Site, you can open a case online by using the TAC Case Open tool at this URL:
http://www.cisco.com/tac/caseopen
If you have Internet access, we recommend that you open P3 and P4 cases through the Cisco TAC
Web Site.
Cisco TAC Escalation Center
The Cisco TAC Escalation Center addresses priority level 1 or priority level 2 issues. These
classifications are assigned when severe network degradation significantly impacts business operations.
When you contact the TAC Escalation Center with a P1 or P2 problem, a Cisco TAC engineer
automatically opens a case.
To obtain a directory of toll-free Cisco TAC telephone numbers for your country, go to this URL:
http://www.cisco.com/warp/public/687/Directory/DirTAC.shtml
Before calling, please check with your network operations center to determine the level of Cisco support
services to which your company is entitled: for example, SMARTnet, SMARTnet Onsite, or Network
Supported Accounts (NSA). When you call the center, please have available your service agreement
number and your product serial number.
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
xxxv
Preface
Obtaining Technical Assistance
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
xxxvi
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
C H A P T E R
1
Command Line Interface Overview
This chapter describes the command line interface (CLI) for the SES PNNI controller. For information
on how to configure a switch and basic network services, refer to the Cisco SES PNNI Controller
Software Configuration Guide, Release 3.0.
Contents of this chapter include:
•
Role of the Command Line Interface
•
Command Line Interface Prompt
•
Command Syntax
•
Contents of a Command Description
Role of the Command Line Interface
The tools for configuring, monitoring, and controlling a switch are the CiscoView application for
equipment management and the Cisco WAN Manager (CWM) application for connection management.
However, during initial switch installation, or where low-level control is important, the CLI provides the
best access to the switch.
To move from the CLI of one card to the CLI of another card, use the cc command. For more information
on the cc command, see Chapter 3, “Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands.”
Access Level
The available command set depends on the privilege level of the user.
The following access levels are shown in descending order:
CISCO_GP (engineering debug)
SERVICE_GP (strategic partner)
SUPER_GP (network manager)
GROUP1 (highest technician level)
GROUP2
GROUP3
GROUP4
GROUP5 (lowest technician level)
ANYUSER (anyuser)
NOUSER_GP
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
1-1
Chapter 1
Command Line Interface Overview
Command Line Interface Prompt
Command Line Interface Prompt
The following format is for the CLI prompt:
name.slot number.card type.card state>
The following definitions are for each parameter:
name
Specifies the name of the node.
The name is unknown until you assign a name by using the cnfname
command.
Note
slot number
Specifies the slot of the front card.
card type
Identifies the Processor Switching Module 1 (PXM1) or type of service module.
card state
Defines the following states:
•
“a” is for active. A card in the active (a) state is fully configured and ready to
carry out its function or is already performing its functions in live traffic.
•
“s” is for standby. Typically, a card goes into the standby (s) state when it first
powers up and boots or when you execute a command that puts it in the standby
state.
The following is an example of the CLI prompt:
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
where:
•
Name of the node is
•
Slot number is 1.
•
Card type is PXM1.
•
Card state is active.
SES_SJ .
Command Syntax
This section contains the following syntax areas:
•
Notation
•
Command Entry
•
Port Identifier
The SES PNNI controller command syntax complies with the syntax defined by the Cisco MGX 8800.
The syntax supported is as follows:
Command :== CMD_STRARG | CMD_VWARG | CMD_CALLXSTURCT | CMD_CALLXPSTRUCT
CMD_STRARG :== command-name <value1> <value2> ... <valueN>
CMD_VWARG :== command-name <value1> <value2> ... <valueN>
CMD_CALLXSTRUCT :== command-name <value1> <value2> ... [<valueN>]
CMD_CALLXPSTRUCT :== command-name <value1> <value2> ... [<valueM>]
-key1 <value1> [-key2 <value2>] ... [-keyN <valueN>]
Description:
1) CMD_STRARG is the command in which all arguments are passed as char
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
1-2
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 1
Command Line Interface Overview
Command Syntax
strings.
2) CMD_VWARG is for calling VxWorks style routine.
3) In CMD_CALLXSTRUCT, the sequence of parameters are fixed, i.e.
position dependent.
4) In CMD_CALLXPSTRUCT, it contains a list of fixed parameters that are
position dependent and a list of keyword parameters that are
position independent.
Notation
The following notations are used for the command and argument parameters:
•
Commands and their parameters are separated by a space.
•
Variables appear in italics.
•
Keywords and commands appear in bold.
•
Required arguments appear within left and right arrowheads (“< >”).
•
Optional parameters appear within square brackets (“[ ]”).
•
A vertical bar ( | ) represents the logical OR function.
Command Entry
When you enter a command with the current version of the product, you must type all intended
arguments before you press the Return key or Enter key.
If you press either the Return key or Enter key with incorrect parameters or no parameters (if the
command requires parameters), a message displays the syntax and parameter ranges. The returned
message can also indicate the type of problem. For example, the message can warn of too few
parameters.
Note
No error messages or warnings appear until you complete the command.
Port Identifier
The following format is used in the CLI to identify ports:
[shelf.]slot[:subslot].port[:subport]
This is a generic port identifier, which is independent of specific platform. The interpretation of the
identifier depends on the platform. For instance, the optional subslot field is used to identify the back
card for AXSM, and the same field is not used for the BXM cards. The optional subport is used to
identify a VP tunneling interface in both of the cards aforementioned.
In this chapter, <portid> stands for the string “[shelf.]slot[:subslot].port[:subport].”
Any reference to the PNNI port or <portid> refers to the PNNI partition on the switch and not the
Physical port itself. Any operation on <portid> affects only the PNNI partition associated with it on the
switch.
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
1-3
Chapter 1
Command Line Interface Overview
Contents of a Command Description
Contents of a Command Description
Each command description contains the following:
•
Introductory paragraph that explains the function of the command.
•
List of cards on the CLI where you can execute the command.
•
Syntax of the command.
•
Syntax description that lists all the parameters. Each parameter in the list includes the following:
– Brief definition.
– Functional details if applicable.
– The range of values for the parameter.
– An applicable default value.
Note
For many instances, the default value is not merely a basic starting value but rather the
most desirable or commonly used value.
•
“Related Commands” section lists other commands in the typical groups, for example, add, delete,
configure, and display, or other commands that can complement the command.
•
“Attributes” section lists the following details:
– The access level contains the privilege level for the user.
– The state of the card that is required to execute a command. The state can be active, standby, or
initialize.
– The switch logs each instance for a command execution. Typically, the switch logs each
configuration change but no display commands.
•
“Example” section that illustrates one or more examples of command usage. The text for the
Example section describes the intention of the command and can also describe an outcome.
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
1-4
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
C H A P T E R
2
Functional Organization
This chapter provides a functional organization for the following groups:
•
SVC Command Suite
•
SPVC Command Suite
•
PNNI Command Suite
•
Shelf Operation Commands
Each table lists the command, complete name of the command, and the page number.
SVC Command Suite
This section lists the commands that apply to the switched virtual circuits (SVCs). The SVC commands
allow you to add, delete, configure, display status, and specify statistics.
The SVC commands consist of the suite shown in Table 2-1.
Table 2-1
SVC Commands Summary
Command
Description
Page
Port Management Commands
addpnport
Add a UNI or NNI port.
3-18
cnfcdvtdft
Change CDVT default.
3-67
cnfconsegep
Configure connection segment endpoint.
3-76
cnfintfvsvd
Configure a virtual source/virtual destination on a PNNI port.
3-91
cnfmbsdft
Configure maximum burst size (MBS) default.
3-95
cnfoamsegep
Configure OAM segment endpoint.
3-107
cnfpnportacc
Configure PNNI port access.
3-139
cnfpnportcac
Configure CAC policy parameters for a port.
3-140
cnfpnportcc
Configure call control parameters for a port.
3-142
cnfpnportrange
Configure PNNI port range.
3-148
cnfpnportsig
Configure PNNI port signaling.
3-150
delconsegep
Remove a segment endpoint on a connection.
3-200
delpnport
Delete PNNI port.
3-206
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
2-1
Chapter 2
Functional Organization
SVC Command Suite
Table 2-1
SVC Commands Summary (continued)
Command
Description
Page
dnpnport
Down PNNI port.
3-219
dspcdvtdft
Display CDVT default.
3-240
dspconsegep
Display connection segment endpoint.
3-251
dspmbsdft
Display MBS default.
3-294
dspoamsegep
Display OAM segment endpoint.
3-304
dsppnport
Display PNNI port.
3-382
dsppnportcac
Display PNNI port CAC.
3-384
dsppnportcc
Display PNNI port call control (CC).
3-385
dsppnportrange
Display PNNI port range.
3-389
dsppnsysaddr
Display PNNI port resource.
3-396
dsppnports
Display PNNI ports.
3-391
dsppnportsig
Display PNNI port signaling.
3-395
tstpndelay
Test PNNI delay.
3-498
uppnport
Up PNNI port.
3-500
addfltset
Add ATM filter set.
3-12
addprfx
Add prefix.
3-21
cnfaddrreg
Configure address registration.
3-59
cnfautocnf
Configure auto configuration.
3-64
cnfilmienable
Configure ILMI enable.
3-86
cnfilmiproto
Configure ILMI protocol.
3-87
delprfx
Delete prefix.
3-209
dspilmiaddr
Display ILMI address.
3-274
dsppnilmi
Display PNNI ILMI.
3-322
dspprfx
Display prefix.
3-404
addaddr
Add address.
3-5
addserialif
Add serial interface.
3-22
clrconstats
Clear connection statistics.
3-36
clrpathtracebuffer
Clear a specified path trace buffer.
3-45
clrpathtracebuffers
Clear path trace buffers.
3-46
clrpncon
Clear UNI or NNI connection.
3-47
clrpnconstats
Clear UNI or NNI connection statistics.
3-48
cnfe164 justify
Configure E.164 justification.
3-82
cnffltset
Configure filter set.
3-84
cnfpnctlvc
Configure PNNI control VC.
3-109
ILMI Commands
Call Control Commands
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
2-2
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 2
Functional Organization
SVC Command Suite
Table 2-1
SVC Commands Summary (continued)
Command
Description
Page
cnfpnportacc
Configure PNNI port access.
3-139
cnfpnportloscallrel
Configure PNNI port LOS call release.
3-144
conntrace
Connection trace.
3-190
deladdr
Delete address.
3-195
delfltset
Delete filter set.
3-202
delpnportacc
Delete PNNI port access.
3-207
dspaddr
Display address.
3-223
dspatmaddr
Display ATM address.
3-227
dspfltset
Display filter set.
3-271
dsppathtracebuffer
Display path trace buffer.
3-305
dsppathtracebuffers
Display path trace buffers.
3-306
dsppathtraceie
Display path trace.
3-307
dsppathtracenode
Display path trace node.
3-308
dsppathtraceport
Display path trace port.
3-309
dsppncon
Display PNNI connection.
3-312
dsppncon
Display PNNI connections.
3-314
dsppnconstats
Display PNNI connection statistics.
3-318
dsppnctlvc
Display PNNI control VC.
3-320
dsppnportloscallrel
Display PNNI port LOS call release.
3-387
dspsvcparm
Display SVC nodal parameter.
3-435
pathtraceie
Path trace information element (IE).
3-460
pathtracenode
Path trace node.
3-461
pathtraceport
Path trace port.
3-462
clrsigstats
Clear signal statistics.
3-51
clrsscopstats
Clear SSCOP statistics.
3-54
cnfenhiisp
Configure enhanced IISP.
3-83
cnffltset
Configure frame discard on AAL5.
3-84
cnfsig
Configure signaling.
3-165
cnfsscop
Configure SSCOP.
3-176
disablesscop
Disable SSCOP.
3-217
dspenhiisp
Display enhanced IISP.
3-262
dspsig
Display signaling.
3-423
dspsigdiag
Display signaling parameters.
3-424
dspsigstats
Display signaling statistics.
3-425
dspsscop
Display SSCOP.
3-431
Signaling Commands
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
2-3
Chapter 2
Functional Organization
SPVC Command Suite
Table 2-1
SVC Commands Summary (continued)
Command
Description
Page
dspsscopstats
Display SSCOP statistics.
3-433
clrsntpstats
Clear SNTP statistics.
3-52
cnfsntp
Configure SNTP.
3-172
dbgsntp
Debug SNTP.
3-194
deltrapmgr
Delete SNTP remote server.
3-215
dspsntp
Display SNTP.
3-427
dspsntpstats
Display SNTP statistics.
3-428
cnfintfcongth
Configure interface level congestion threshold.
3-89
cnfnodalcongth
Configure nodal congestion threshold.
3-101
dspintfcongcntr
Display interface level congestion counter.
3-275
dspintfcongflags
Display interface congestion manager flags.
3-276
dspintfcongth
Display interface congestion threshold.
3-277
dspnodalcongcntr
Display nodal level congestion counter.
3-298
dspnodalcongflags
Display nodal congestion flags.
3-299
dspnodalcongth
Display nodal congestion threshold.
3-301
SNTP Commands
Congestion Commands
SPVC Command Suite
This section lists the commands that apply to the semi-permanent virtual circuits (SPVCs). The SPVC
commands allow you to add, delete, configure, display status, and specify statistics. The following are
the functions used for SPVC:
•
Adding a connection.
•
Modifying an existing connection.
•
Deleting a connection.
•
Displaying one connection or all connections.
•
Downing and upping a connection in the course of maintenance or troubleshooting.
SPVC commands consist of the suite shown in Table 2-2.
Table 2-2
SPVC Commands Summary
Command
Description
Page
Connection Provisioning Commands
addcon
Add connection.
3-8
clrspvcnonpers
Clear SPVC non persistent endpoint.
3-53
cnfabrtparmdft
Configure default ABR traffic parameters.
3-56
cnfcon
Configure connection.
3-71
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
2-4
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 2
Functional Organization
SPVC Command Suite
Table 2-2
SPVC Commands Summary (continued)
Command
Description
Page
cnfpri-routing
Configure priority routing.
3-105
cnfrrtparm
Configure reroute retry parameters.
3-158
cnfspvcprfx
Configure SPVC prefix.
3-174
cnfsvcoverride
Configure SVC override.
3-180
cnftrftolerance
Configure traffic conformance tolerance.
3-182
delcon
Delete connection.
3-199
dncon
Down connection.
3-218
dspabrtparmdft
Display ABR traffic parameter defaults.
3-222
dsppri-routing
Display priority routing.
3-405
dsppvcif
Display permanent virtual connection (PVC) interface.
3-407
dsprrtparm
Display global reroute retry parameters.
3-412
dspspvcprfx
Display SPVC prefix.
3-430
dspsvcoverride
Display SVC override.
3-436
dsptrftolerance
Display traffic conformance tolerance.
3-440
pvcifconfig
PVC interface configuration.
3-465
upcon
Up connection.
3-499
Connection Diagnostics Command
dspabrtparmdft
Display default ABR traffic parameters.
3-222
Connection Debug Commands
dspcon
Display connection.
3-243
dspconinfo
Display connection information.
3-247
dspcons
Display connections.
3-249
dsprrtparm
Display reroute retry parameters.
3-412
rrtcon
Reroute connection.
3-475
tstconseg
Test continuity segment.
3-494
tstdelay
Test delay.
3-496
Route Optimization Commands
addpref
Add preferred route.
3-19
cnfconpref
Configure connection preferred route.
3-74
cnfrteopt
Configure route optimization.
3-160
cnfrteoptthld
Configure route optimization threshold.
3-163
cnfrrtparm
Configure reroute parameters.
3-158
delpref
Delete preferred route.
3-208
dsppref
Display preferred route.
3-398
dspprefs
Display preferred routes.
3-399
dsprteoptcnf
Display route optimization configuration.
3-413
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
2-5
Chapter 2
Functional Organization
PNNI Command Suite
Table 2-2
SPVC Commands Summary (continued)
Command
Description
Page
dsprteoptstat
Display route optimization status.
3-415
modpref
Modify preferred route.
3-456
optrte
Optimize route.
3-458
Troubleshooting Commands
abortofflinediag
Abort offline diagnostics.
3-3
clrdiagerr
Clear diagnostic error.
3-37
clrdiagstat
Clear diagnostic statistics.
3-38
cnfdiag
Configure diagnostics.
3-78
cnfdiagall
Configure diagnostics all.
3-80
dspdiagcnf
Display diagnostics configuration.
3-256
dspdiagerr
Display diagnostics error.
3-257
dspdiagstat
Display diagnostics statistics.
3-258
dspdiagstatus
Display diagnostics status.
3-259
dspdisk
Display disk.
3-260
forcecdnative
Force card native.
3-444
stackdump
Stack dump.
3-483
PNNI Command Suite
This section lists the private network-to-network interface (PNNI) commands specific to node
addressing and routing. The PNNI commands allow you to add, delete, configure, display status, and
create statistics for PNNI nodes.
The following are the functions used for PNNI:
•
Configuring:
– Link selection
– Node addresses and identifiers
– Packet size
– PNNI interface
– PNNI timers
– RCC variables
– Routing policies
– Scope map table
– PNNI summary address
•
Deleting:
– A logical node
– A PNNI summary address
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
2-6
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 2
Functional Organization
PNNI Command Suite
•
Displaying:
– Debug information
– Learned nodes
– Link information
– Neighbor addresses
– Node addresses and identifiers
– Packet information
– Paths
– Reachable addresses
– Routing policy
– System address tables
– Timers
PNNI Addressing
The PNNI addresses and identifiers contain fields that are common to each other and should match each
other. If you change a field in one item, Cisco Systems advises you to change the corresponding field in
the other item. For example, if you change the ATM address, you should change corresponding fields in
the PNNI summary address and node identifier.
Note
The peer group identifier does not share in this recommendation.
The name and graphic represent each address and identifier as well as the common information that
appears in Figure 2-1. The central and lower parts show the breadth of each item. Applicable command
descriptions point out where you should modify common fields. The following fields also go into the
construction of the ATM addresses and PNNI-related identifiers:
•
The Initial Domain Identifier (IDI) identifies the domain.
•
The Initial Domain Part (IDP) identifies the country.
•
The Authority and Format Identifier (AFI) identifies the address format and who provided it.
•
The Data Country Code (DCC) identifies the country.
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
2-7
Chapter 2
Functional Organization
PNNI Command Suite
Figure 2-1
Cisco Factory-shipped Node-Addressing Defaults Mapping into Both NSAP and DCC
Address Formats
20 byte ATM address
DSP: Domain Specific Part
IDI
High order DSP
(10 bytes)
IDP
(3 bytes)
ATM
address
format
AFI
DCC
39
ATM
address
length
PNNI
hierarchy
level
# of
Bytes
Host address
(7 bytes)
ESI
Cisco
ICD
MAC address
SEL
MAC address
56 160 47 00 91 81 00 00 00 XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX 00
1
1
2
1
1
3
6
6
1
Default PNNI
peer group identifier
Default PNNI
summary address
Default PNNI
node identifier
53383
Default ATM address
PNNI commands consist of the suite shown in Table 2-3.
Table 2-3
PNNI Commands Summary
Command
Description
Page
addpnni-node
Add PNNI node.
3-15
addpnni-summary-addr
Add PNNI summary address.
3-17
cnfpnni-election
Configure PNNI election.
3-112
cnfpnni-intf
Configure PNNI interface.
3-114
cnfpnni-link-selection
Configure PNNI link selection.
3-117
cnfpnni-mtu
Configure PNNI maximum transmission unit (MTU).
3-119
cnfpnni-node
Configure PNNI node.
3-120
cnfpnni-pkttrace
Configure PNNI packet trace.
3-125
cnfpnni-routing-policy
Configure PNNI routing policy.
3-127
Node Commands
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
2-8
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 2
Functional Organization
Shelf Operation Commands
Table 2-3
PNNI Commands Summary (continued)
Command
Description
Page
cnfpnni-scope-map
Configure PNNI scope map.
3-131
cnfpnni-svcc-rcc-timer
Configure PNNI SVCC-based RCC timer.
3-133
cnfpnni-timer
Configure PNNI timer.
3-135
delpnni-node
Delete PNNI node.
3-204
delpnni-summary-addr
Delete PNNI summary address.
3-205
dsppnni-election
Display PNNI election.
3-328
dsppnni-intf
Display PNNI interface.
3-334
dsppnni-link
Display PNNI link.
3-337
dsppnni-node-list
Display PNNI node list.
3-346
dsppnni-pkttrace
Display PNNI packet trace.
3-353
dsppnni-summary-addr
Display PNNI summary address.
3-374
dsppnni-svcc-rcc
Display PNNI SVCC-based RCC.
3-376
dsppnni-svcc-rcc-timer
Display PNNI SVCC-based RCC timer.
3-378
dsppnni-timer
Display PNNI timer.
3-380
dsppnni-bn-path
Display PNNI border node path.
3-324
dsppnni-bypass
Display PNNI bypass.
3-326
dsppnni-idb
Display PNNI internal topology database.
3-330
dsppnni-inducing-uplink
Display PNNI inducing uplink.
3-332
dsppnni-link-selection
Display PNNI link selection.
3-339
dsppnni-mtu
Display PNNI maximum transmission unit (MTU).
3-340
dsppnni-neighbor
Display PNNI neighbor.
3-341
dsppnni-node
Display PNNI node.
3-343
dsppnni-node-list
Display PNNI node list.
3-346
dsppnni-path
Display PNNI path.
3-351
dsppnni-ptse
Display PNNI topology state element (PTSE).
3-354
dsppnni-reachable-addr
Display PNNI reachable address.
3-363
dsppnni-routing-policy
Display PNNI routing policy.
3-366
dsppnni-scope-map
Display PNNI scope map.
3-370
dsppnni-spoke
Display PNNI default spoke.
3-372
dsppnsysaddr
Display PNNI system address.
3-396
PNNI Display Commands
Shelf Operation Commands
This section lists the shelf operation commands along with some commands that belong to other logical
entities running on the switch, for example, PNNI. The shelf operation commands allow you to add,
delete, configure, display status, and create statistics for node-level features.
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
2-9
Chapter 2
Functional Organization
Shelf Operation Commands
The following are the functions used for shelf operation:
•
Node-level parameters used for node name, date, time, time zone, and so forth.
•
Firmware downloading.
•
Network synchronization.
•
SNMP configuration.
•
User account creation (and associated password).
•
IP connectivity to support user-control of the switch.
•
Saving and restoring node configuration information.
Shelf operation commands consist of the suite shown in Table 2-4.
Table 2-4
Shelf Operation Commands Summary
Command
Description
Page
adduser
Add user.
3-24
aesa_ping
ATM end system address ping.
3-25
bye
Bye.
3-29
cc
Change card.
3-30
cd
Change directory.
3-31
clrcnf
Clear configuration.
3-35
clrlmitrace
Clear LMI trace.
3-42
clrscrn
Clear screen.
3-50
cmdhistory
Command history.
3-55
cnflmitrace
Configure LMI trace.
3-93
cnfpasswd
Configure password.
3-104
cnfuser
Configure user.
3-187
conntrace
Connection trace.
3-190
copy
Copy.
3-192
cp
Copy.
3-193
delete
Delete.
3-201
dellmiloop
Delete LMI loop.
3-203
deluser
Delete user.
3-216
dspusers
Display users.
3-441
exit
Exit.
3-443
help
Help.
3-445
history
Command history.
3-446
logout
Logout.
3-453
ls
List.
3-454
ping
Ping.
3-464
User Commands
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
2-10
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 2
Functional Organization
Shelf Operation Commands
Table 2-4
Shelf Operation Commands Summary (continued)
Command
Description
Page
pwd
Present working directory.
3-467
rename
Rename.
3-469
shellcon
Shell connection.
3-481
timeout
Timeout.
3-493
users
Users.
3-502
who
Who.
3-503
whoami
Whoami.
3-504
abortallsaves
Abort all saves.
3-2
abortrev
Abort revision.
3-4
addtrapmgr
Add trap manager.
3-23
bootChange
Specifies the boot IP address and gateway address of a PXM card.
clidbxlevel
Command line interface level.
3-27
3-32
clrloginmsg
Clear login message.
3-44
cnfcbclk
Configure cellbus clock.
3-65
cnfcmdabbr
Configure command abbreviation.
3-69
cnfloginmsg
Configure login message.
3-94
cnfndparms
Configure node parameters.
3-98
cnfpasswd
Configure password.
3-104
cnfpswdreset
Configure password reset.
3-154
cnfserialif
Configure serial interface.
3-164
cnfsigdiag
Configure signaling diagnostic.
3-167
cnfsnmp
Configure SNMP.
3-170
commitrev
Commit revision.
3-189
delsesn
Delete session.
3-211
delsigdiag
Delete signaling diagnostic.
3-213
deltrapmgr
Delete trap manager.
3-215
dspbkpl
Display backplane.
3-229
dspcbclk
Display cellbus clock.
3-230
dspcd
Display card.
3-231
dspcderrs
Display card errors.
3-235
dspdisk
Display disk.
3-260
dspcds
Display cards.
3-236
dspcmdabbr
Display command abbreviation.
3-242
dspconstats
Display connection statistics.
3-252
dspdate
Display date.
3-253
Shelf Commands
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
2-11
Chapter 2
Functional Organization
Shelf Operation Commands
Table 2-4
Shelf Operation Commands Summary (continued)
Command
Description
Page
dspdbinfo
Display database information.
3-254
dsperrs
Display errors.
3-269
dspipconntask
Display IP connectivity task.
3-278
dspipifcache
Display IP interface cache translation.
3-281
dsploginmsg
Display login message.
3-292
dspndparms
Display node parameters.
3-296
dsppingatmaddr
Display ping ATM address.
3-310
dsppswdreset
Display password reset.
3-406
dsprevs
Display revisions.
3-410
dspprfhist
Display the percentage of activity of tasks.
3-401
dspsesn
Display session.
3-422
dspsnmp
Display SNMP.
3-426
dsptrapip
Display trap IP.
3-438
dsptrapmgr
Display trap manager.
3-439
dspversion
Display version.
3-442
loadrev
Load revision.
3-452
resetcd
Reset card.
3-470
resetsys
Reset system.
3-471
routeShow
Route show.
3-473
routestatShow
Routing statistics show.
3-474
runrev
Run revision.
3-476
setrev
Set revision.
3-480
sesntimeout
Session timeout.
3-479
svcifconfig
Switched virtual circuit (SVC) interface configuration.
3-485
telnet
Telnet.
3-491
remove
Delete.
3-468
addapsln
Add automatic protection system (APS) line.
3-7
addlmiloop
Add LMI loop.
3-14
clrallcnf
Clear all configurations.
3-33
clrbecnt
Clear bit-error count.
3-34
clrerr
Clear error.
3-39
clrerrhist
Clear error history.
3-40
clrlmistats
Clear local management interface statistics.
3-41
clrlog
Clear log.
3-43
Node Level Commands
Note
Run this command on the BPX and SES.
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
2-12
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 2
Functional Organization
Shelf Operation Commands
Table 2-4
Shelf Operation Commands Summary (continued)
Command
Description
Page
clrqosdefault
Clear quality of service default.
3-49
cnfainihopcount
Configure ATM inter-network interface (AINI) hop count.
3-60
cnfapsln
Configure APS line.
3-62
cnfdate
Configure date.
3-77
cnfintvsvd
Configure interface VS/VD.
3-91
cnfname
Configure name.
3-97
cnfnodalfd
Configure nodal frame discard.
3-103
cnfpnportncci
Configure port network call correlation identifier.
3-146
cnfqosdefault
Configure quality of service default.
3-155
cnfserialif
Configure serial interface.
3-164
cnfstatsmgr
Configure statistics manager.
3-179
cnftime
Configure time.
3-183
cnftmzn
Configure time zone.
3-184
cnftmzngmt
Configure time zone management.
3-185
cnftrapip
Configure trap IP.
3-186
deladdr
Delete.
3-195
deladdr
Delete ATM address.
3-195
deladdrs
Delete ATM addresses.
3-197
delapsln
Delete APS line.
3-198
dellmiloop
Delete LMI loopback.
3-203
delserialif
Delete serial interface.
3-210
dspainihopcount
Display AINI hop count.
3-224
dspapscfg
Display APS configuration.
3-225
dspapsln
Display APS line.
3-226
dspbecnt
Display APS bit-error count.
3-228
dspcdalms
Display card alarms.
3-233
dspcderrs
Display card errors.
3-235
dspcdstatus
Display card status.
3-238
dspclkinfo
Display clock information.
3-241
dspdate
Display date.
3-253
dspenvalms
Display environmental alarms.
3-263
dsperr
Display error.
3-265
dsperrhist
Display error history.
3-267
dspif
Display interface.
3-273
dspipif
Display IP interface.
3-279
dsplmilink
Display LMI links.
3-282
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
2-13
Chapter 2
Functional Organization
Shelf Operation Commands
Table 2-4
Shelf Operation Commands Summary (continued)
Command
Description
Page
dsplmiloop
Display LMI loopback.
3-283
dsplmistats
Display LMI statistics.
3-284
dsplmitrace
Display LMI trace.
3-285
dspln
Display line.
3-287
dsplog
Display log.
3-288
dsplogs
Display logs.
3-293
dspmbsdft
Display maximum burst size (MBS) default.
3-294
dsppnallgrpaddr
Display all group addresses.
3-311
dsppngrpmbrs
Display group members.
3-321
dsppnportidmaps
Display PNNI port ID maps.
3-386
dsppnportncci
Display PNNI port network call correlation identifier.
3-388
dsppnportrsrc
Display PNNI port resource.
3-390
dspndalms
Display node alarms.
3-295
dspndstatus
Display node status.
3-297
dspnodalfd
Display nodal frame discard.
3-303
dspqosdefault
Display quality of service default.
3-408
dspsem
Display semaphore.
3-416
dspsems
Display semaphores.
3-417
dspserialif
Display serial interface.
3-421
dspsnmp
Display slot alarms.
3-426
dspspvcaddr
Display SPVC address.
3-429
dspstatsmgr
Display statistics manager.
3-434
dspswalms
Display switch alarms.
3-437
ifShow
Interface show.
3-447
ipifconfig
IP interface configuration.
3-449
memShow
Memory map show.
3-455
restoreallcnf
Restore all configuration.
3-472
saveallcnf
Save all configuration.
3-477
showsyserr
Show system error.
3-482
switchapsln
Switch APS line.
3-487
syserr
System error.
3-490
dspred
Display redundancy.
3-409
switchcc
Switch core card.
3-488
Redundancy Commands
Note
switchredcd
Run the switchcc command on the BPX and SES.
Switch redundant card.
3-489
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
2-14
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
C H A P T E R
3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller
Commands
This chapter provides an alphabetical listing of all the commands that are used for the SES PNNI
Controller.
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-1
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
abortallsaves
abortallsaves
Abort All Saves—PXM1
Use the abortallsaves command to abort the configuration save process that could have begun with
either the saveallcnf command or an SNMP-based command. The purpose of the abortallsaves
command is to stop a potentially time-consuming save operation so that you can begin a firmware
upgrade. The time you save by aborting the process is significant only with a substantial number of
configured entities in the node, for example, the maximum number of cards and logical entities. If the
switch is not currently saving the configuration database, the switch displays the applicable message.
Syntax
abortallsaves
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
restoreallcnf, saveallcnf
Attributes
Access level: GROUP1
State: active
Log: log
Example
Abort the current configuration process.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > abortallsaves
No Save Process running
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-2
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
abortofflinediag
abortofflinediag
Abort Offline Diagnostics—PXM1
Use the abortofflinediag command to abort the current offline diagnostics.
Syntax
abortofflinediag <slot>
Syntax Description
slot
Specifies the slot number of the card to abort offline diagnostics.
Related Commands
None
Attributes
Access level: SERVICE_GP
State: any
Log: no
Example
Abort the offline diagnostics for slot number 1.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > abortofflinediag 1
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-3
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
abortrev
abortrev
Abort Revisions—PXM1
Use the abortrev command to abort revisions on the specified slot.
Syntax
abortrev <slot> <revision>
Syntax Description
slot
Slot number of the card for which the version is set.
revision
Revision number, for example, 3.0(0.171).
Related Commands
commitrev, dsprevs, loadrev, runrev, setrev
Attributes
Access level: SERVICE_GP
State: any
Log: log
Example
Abort revisions for slot 1.
spirita.1.PXM.a > abortrev 3.0(0.171)
one or more card(s) in logical slot will be reset.
Do you want to proceed (Yes/No)? n
(command not executed)
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-4
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
addaddr
addaddr
Add Address—PXM1
Enter the addaddr command to add or delete an ATM address for a UNI or IISP. This command is also
used to configure static routes to reachable addresses.
An ATM address can be provisioned only on a UNI if ILMI address registration is disabled. Provision
an ATM address as follows:
•
On UNI ports, type must be internal and proto must be local.
•
On IISP ports, type must be exterior and proto must be static.
Syntax
addaddr <portid> <atm-address> <length> [-type {int | ext}][-proto {local | static}]
[-plan {e164 | nsap}][-scope value][-redst {yes | no}]
Syntax Description
portid
Interface number, in the form of [shelf.]slot[:subslot].port[:subport].
atm-address
ATM address or E.164 number, consisting of 1–20bytes.
length
Address length.
This entry represents the length in bits for an NSAP address.
This entry represents the length in digits for an E.164 address.
Range: 1–160
-type
Type of reachability from the advertising node to the address, as either internal or
exterior.
Default: internal
-proto
Routing mechanism which establishes the connectivity from the advertising node to
the reachable address.
Default: local
-plan
Address plan, either E.164 or NSAP.
For NSAP address, the first byte of the address automatically implies one of three
NSAP address plans: NSAP E.164, NSAP DCC, or NSAP ICD.
Default: nsap
-scope
PNNI scope of advertisement (level of PNNI hierarchy) of the reachability from the
advertising node to the address.
Range: 0–104
Default: 0
-redst
Indicates if the static address is distributed.
Default: no
Related Commands
deladdr, dspaddr, dsppnallgrpaddr
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-5
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
addaddr
Attributes
Access level: GROUP1
State: active
Log: log
Example
Assign a 160-bit (20 byte) nsap address to logical port on line 2 of the back card of the PXM in slot 1.
spirita.1.PXM.a > addaddr 2.3 4500731300000010101010101000000000000100 160 –plan nsap
Example
Verify the results by entering the dspaddr command.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dspaddr 2.3
45.0073.1300.0000.1010.1010.1010.0000.0000.0001.00
length: 160
type: internal
proto: local
scope: 0
plan: nsap_e164
redistribute: false
transit network id:
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-6
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
addapsln
addapsln
Add APS Line—PXM1
Use the addapsln command to set APS on a specified line for a PXM.
Syntax
addapsln <work-line> <work-slot> <prot-line> <prot-slot> <mode>
Syntax Description
work-line
work-slot
Working line number. Enter the value 1.
Enter value 1 or 2.
The following are the value types:
Value
Type
1
slot 1
2
slot 2
prot-line
Protection line number. Enter the value 1.
prot-slot
Protection slot number. Enter the value 1 or 2.
mode
Sets the APS architecture mode to be used on the working or
protection line pair. Enter the value 2.
Related Commands
cnfapsln, delapsln, dspapsln, switchapsln
Attributes
Access level: SUPER_GP
State: active
Log: log
Example
Enable the APS line pair for the applicable line.
spirita.1.PXM.a > addapsln 1 1 1 2 2
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-7
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
addcon
addcon
Add Connection—PXM1
Use the addcon command to add a new SPVC connection endpoint. To create an SPVC first use addcon
to add the slave endpoint, at which point the system returns a slave endpoint identifier. Then use addcon
again to add the master endpoint, using the value of the slave endpoint identifier in the -slave parameter
You can assign a priority at the master end of an SPVC or SPVP. The PNNI controller routes higher
priority connections before lower priority connections. For more information about assigning a priority
to a connection, see the cnfpri-routing and dsppri-routing commands.
Syntax
addcon <portid> <vpi> <vci> <serviceType> <master_ship> <slave_nsap.vpi.vci>
[-lpcr <local pcr>] [-lmcr <local MCR>] [-lscr <local SCR>] [-icr <local ICR>] [-lputil <local putil>]
[-lmbs <local MBS>] [-cdvt <local CDVT>] [-lcdv <local CDV>] [-lctd <local CTD>]
[-rpcr <remote PCR>] [-rmcr <remote MCR>] [-rscr <remote SCR>] [-rputil <remote putil>]
[-rmbs <remote MBS>] [-rcdv <remote CDV>] [-rctd <remote CTD>] [-mc <Max Cost>]
[-stats <enable(1)/disable(0)>] [-frame <enable(1)/disable(0)>] [-int_vsvd <1/2/3>]
[-ext_vsvd <1/2/3>] [-slavepersflag <persistent(0)/nonpersistent(1)>]
Syntax Description
portid
Interface number, in the form of [shelf.]slot[:subslot].port[:subport].
vpi
Specify the starting virtual path identifier (VPI) to view active calls starting
from the specified VPI of the specified port. Use this parameter only when
the port is specified.
vci
Specify the starting virtual channel identifier (VCI) to view active calls
starting from the specified VPI/VCI of the specified port. This parameter is
used only if the VPI is specified.
VCI - VCC(32..65535); VPC (VCI = 0)
serviceType
Specifies the service type for the connection.
The following are the values:
Value
Service Type
1
cbr1
2
vbr1rt
3
vbr2rt
4
vbr3rt
5
vbr1nrt
6
vbr2nrt
7
vbr3nrt
8
ubr1
9
ubr2
10
abrstd
11
cbr2
12
cbr3
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-8
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
addcon
master_ship
Specifies whether the connection is a master or a slave.
slave = 1 or s
master = 2 or m
slave_nsap.vpi.vci
Slave ID. The value should look like this: NSAP_address.vpi.vci.
Use this parameter only for setting up a master connection.
-lpcr
This optional keyword can be used for specifying the PCR required for the
connection in the local -> remote direction.
Default: 50 cps
-lmcr
This optional keyword can be used for specifying the MCR required for the
connection in the local -> remote direction.
-lscr
This optional keyword can be used for specifying the SCR required for the
connection in the local -> remote direction.
-icr
This optional keyword can be used for specifying the initial cell rate (ICR)
required for the connection in the local -> remote direction. ICR range. The
range is between minimum cell rate (MCR) and peak cell rate (PCR).
Default: l pcr
-lputil
Specifies the local percentage utilization factor.
Range: 1–100
Default: 100
-lmbs
This optional keyword can be used for specifying the MBS required for the
connection in the local -> remote direction.
Default: dspmbsdft command value
-cdvt
This optional keyword can be used for specifying the CDVT required for
the connection in the local -> remote direction.
Default: dspcdvtdft command value
-lcdv
This optional keyword can be used to specify the CDV required for the
connection in the local -> remote direction.
Default: -1
-lctd
This optional keyword can be used to specify the CTD required for the
connection in the local -> remote direction.
Default: -1
-rpcr
This optional keyword can be used to specify the PCR required for the
connection in the remote -> local direction.
Default: 50 cps
-rmcr
This optional keyword can be used to specify the MCR required for the
connection in the remote -> local direction.
-rscr
This optional keyword can be used to specify the SCR required for the
connection in the remote -> local direction.
-rputil
Specifies the remote percentage utilization factor.
Range: 1–100
Default: 100
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-9
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
addcon
-rmbs
This optional keyword can be used to specify the MBS required for the
connection in the remote -> local direction.
Default: dspmbsdft command value
-rcdv
This optional keyword can be used to specify the CDV required for the
connection in the remote -> local direction.
Default: -1
-rctd
This optional keyword can be used to specify the CTD required for the
connection in the remote -> local direction.
Default: -1
-mc
Maximum cost. This optional keyword is used to specify the routing cost
for a parameter, which would be used by PNNI in choosing route based on
weights assigned for different routes.
Default: -1
-stats
This optional keyword is used to enable or disable the -stat collection on
SPVC. Stats collection: enable(1) | disable(0).
Default: disable
-frame
This optional keyword is used to enable or disable the frame discard on
SPVC. Frame discard: enable(1) | disable(0).
Default: disable
-int_vsvd
Internal Segment VSVD: 1 (off) / 2 (on) /3 (unspec).
Default: off
-ext_vsvd
External Segment VSVD: 1 (off) / 2 (on) /3 (unspec).
Default: off
-slavepersflag
Specifies if the slave endpoint is persistent or nonpersistent. The slave
persistent flag is applicable only when provisioning master endpoints. The
following are the options for the -slavepersflag parameter:
•
persistent (0)
•
nonpersistent (1)
Related Commands
cnfcon, delcon, dncon, dspcon, upcon
Attributes
Access level: GROUP1
State: active
Log: yes
Example
Add a slave endpoint.
spirita.1.PXM.a > addcon 2 11 100 8 s
slave endpoint added successfully
slave endpoint id : 4700918100000000107BE92F7B00000103180200.11.100
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-10
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
addcon
Example
Add a master endpoint.
spirita.1.PXM.a > addcon 2 11 100 8 m -slave
4700918100000000107BE92F7B00000103180200.11.100 -lcpr 1000 -rpcr 1000
master endpoint added successfully
master endpoint id : 4700918100000000107BE92F5100000103180200.11.100
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-11
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
addfltset
addfltset
Add Filter Set—PXM1
Use the addfltset command to add an ATM address filter set.
Note
After a filter is created for a specific port, associate the filter to that port by using the cnfpnportacc
command.
Syntax
addfltset <name> [-address address-template -length address-template-length [-plan {e164 | nsap}]
[-list {calling | called}] [-index number] [-accessMode {permit | deny}]] [-cgPtyAbsentAction {permit
| deny}] [-cdPtyAbsentAction {permit | deny}]
Syntax Description
name
The name of the filter set, consisting of 1–29 characters.
-address
The NSAP address, consisting of 1–40 digits, or the E.164 address,
consisting of 1 to 15 digits. The address template can have prefix address
digits followed by a trailing string “...,” in which case, only the prefix part
of the address is considered in the address pattern match. Likewise, the
address template can have an initial string “...,” followed by address digits,
in which case, the trailing address digits are alone considered in the address
pattern match. An address template can contain the character “*,” in which
case, that digit is not considered in the address pattern match.
Default: filter with no address.
-length
Length in bits (if NSAP) or bytes (if E.164). A length must be specified if
the address is specified. However, a filter can be created without an address,
in which case the length field is not applicable. If the address template
consists of the string “...” or the character “*,” the length field contents do
not matter.
-plan
Address plan, either E.164 or NSAP. Use this parameter only if the address
field is also specified.
Default: NSAP
-list
Address list in which address is included, either calling or called. Use this
parameter only if the address is also specified.
Default: calling
-index number
Specifies how the address entries in a filter are set. This parameter has
significance only if an address is also specified.
Range: 1–65535
Default: 1
-accessMode
Indicates whether or not to accept (permit) or reject (deny) a call on the port
if the address pattern matching succeeds. This parameter has significance
only if an address is also specified.
Default: permit
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-12
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
addfltset
-cgPtyAbsentAction
Indicates whether or not to accept (permit) or reject (deny) a call on the port
if the calling party does not match any entry in the calling party address list
of the filter set.
Default: permit
-cdPtyAbsentAction
Indicates whether or not to accept (permit) or reject (deny) a call on the port
if the called party does not match any entry in the called party address list of
the filter set.
Default: permit
Related Commands
cnffltset, delfltset, dspfltset
Attributes
Access level: GROUP1
State: active
Log: log
Example
Add a filter set called “anyname.”
spirita.1.PXM.a > addfltset anyname
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-13
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
addlmiloop
addlmiloop
Add an LMI Loopback—PXM1
Use the addlmiloop command to add an LMI loopback line to the current card.
Note
Activate only one PXM line on the feeder implementation of an SES node.
Syntax
addlmiloop <slot.port>
Syntax Description
slot
Slot number of the card on which you are adding the LMI loopback line. For an
SES, the value for this parameter is either 1 or 2.
port
Port number.
Related Commands
dellmiloop, dsptrapip
Attributes
Access level: SUPER_GP
State: active
Log: no
Example
Add an LMI loopback line numbered 1 to the PXM in slot 1.
spirita.1.PXM.a > addlmiloop 1.1
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-14
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
addpnni-node
addpnni-node
Add PNNI Node—PXM1
Use the addpnni-node command to add a PNNI node. When adding a new PNNI logical node, the
hierarchical level of the new node must be higher than the level of the node which is currently at the
highest hierarchy.
Syntax
addpnni-node level [lowest][-atmAddr atm-address][-nodeId node-id] [-pgId pg-id]
[-enable {true | false}] [-transitRestricted {on | off}] [-complexNode{on | off}]
[-branchingRestricted {on | off}] [-pglNoTransit {on | off}]
Syntax Description
level
The PNNI hierarchical level. Default to 56 for PNNI node at the lowest level
if not specified.
It must be specified for nodes at higher levels. Once assigned, it may only be
changed when the administrative status of the node is disabled.
lowest
Indicates the PNNI node at the lowest hierarchical level.
-atmAddr
The 20-byte ATM address assigned to a PNNI logical node operating on a
local switching system.
If not specified, the default value is used. Once assigned, it may only be
changed when the administrative status of the node is disabled.
-nodeId
The 22-byte PNNI node id assigned to a PNNI logical node operating on a
local switching system. If not specified, the default value is used, which is the
normal case. Once assigned, it may only be changed when the administrative
status of the node is disabled.
-pgId
The 14-byte peer group ID assigned for a PNNI logical node operating on a
local switching system. If not specified, the default value will be used, which
is the normal case. Once assigned, it may only be changed when the
administrative status of the node is disabled.
-enable
Specifies the administrative status for a PNNI node, as either enable or
disable.
When administratively disabling a PNNI logical node, all nodes at higher
hierarchies must be administratively disabled first.
Default: enable
-transitRestricted
Specifies if this node is a restricted transit node, as either on or off.
Default: off
-complexNode
Specifies if the node is a complex node, as either on or off. This setting is not
applicable for a node at the lowest hierarchical level.
On: Complex node
Off: Not a complex node
Default: off
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-15
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
addpnni-node
-branchingRestricted Specifies support for additional point-to-multipoint branches by this node, as
either on or off.
Default: on
-pglNoTransit
Specifies participation in PGL elections by this node, as either on or off.
Default: off
Related Commands
cnfpnni-node, delpnni-node, dsppnni-node
Attributes
Access level: SUPER_GP
State: active
Log: log
Example
Add a PNNI node to the applicable ATM address.
spirita.1.PXM.a > addpnni-node 1 -atmAddress 47.00918100000000107b65f260.00107b65f260.01
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-16
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
addpnni-summary-addr
addpnni-summary-addr
Add PNNI Summary Address—PXM1
Use the addpnni-summary-addr command to configure an ATM summary address prefix for a PNNI
logical node operating on a local switching system.
Syntax
addpnni-summary-addr <node-index> <address-prefix> <prefix-length>
[-type {internal | exterior}] [-suppress {true | false}]
Syntax Description
node-index
Node index assigned to a PNNI logical node operating on a switching systems.
Range: 1–10
address-prefix
ATM address prefix assigned to the local switching system.
prefix-length
Length of the address-prefix, in number of bits, equal to or less than 152 bits.
Note
-type
Zero-length summary address is not currently supported.
Type of summary address, as either internal or external.
Default: internal
-suppress
Indicates whether to advertise (false) or not advertise (true) the summary address.
Related Commands
delpnni-summary-addr, dsppnni-summary-addr
Attributes
Access level: SUPER_GP
State: active
Log: log
Example
spirita.1.PXM.a > addpnni-node 47.00918100000000107b65f260.00107b65f260.01 internal true
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-17
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
addpnport
addpnport
Add a UNI or NNI Port—PXM1
Use the addpnport command to add a UNI or NNI port. After the port is added, its administrative state
is down by default. This command is used to pre-configure a port on the controller. It is allowed only if
the port does not yet exist on the switch.
Syntax
addpnport <portid>
Syntax Description
portid
Interface number, in the form of [shelf.]slot[:subslot].port[:subport].
Related Commands
delpnport, dnpnport, dsppnport
Attributes
Access level: GROUP1
State: active
Log: log
Example
Add a UNI or NNI port to the applicable port ID.
spirita.1.PXM.a > addpnport 0.1.1
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-18
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
addpref
addpref
Add Preferred Route—PXM1
Use the addpref command to add a new preferred route. This command does not associate the preferred
route with any SPVC, to do this use the cnfconpref command.
The following are the functions for the addpref command:
•
Creates a route in the preferred route database. A preferred route ID value is assigned.
•
Specifies a new route as a list of up to 20 pairs of persNodeIdx and portId (unless the nodes are
specified by name in which case up to 10 pairs can be specified).
Once entered, the system returns the given numeric ID for that preferred route.
Note
At least one keyword needs to be entered to add a preferred route.
Syntax
addpref [-name yes/no] [-h1 {<persNodeIndex>/<portId>}] [-h2 {<persNodeIndex/<portId>}] ...
[-h20 {<persNodeIndex>/<portId>}]
Syntax Description
-name
Specifies the nodes by names. Enter either yes or no.
Default: no
-h1,
-h2,
-h20
Each -hn parameter refers to a node in the preferred route, in which there can up to 20 nodes.
Each node is expressed as a persNodeIndex and portId pair. -h1 refers to the first pair for
the first node, -h2 refers to the pair for the second node, and so on up -h20 which refers to
the 20th node. If the -name yes option is selected, persNodeIndex stands for a name string.
If -name no is selected or -name keyword is not specified then the persNodeIndex refers
to an index called “table index.” This index is derived from the persistent topology database.
This database can be displayed entering the dsptopondlist command.
Related Commands
cnfconpref, delpref, dsppref, dspprefs, modpref
Attributes
Access level: GROUP1
State: active
Log: log
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-19
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
addpref
Example
Check that node indexes 11, 34, 56 and 23 exist in the persistent topology database then, using the
persNodeIndex method, configure a preferred route as follows:
addpref -h1 11/1:2.1.9 -h2 34/1:1.1.2 -h3 56/1:2.1.7 -h4 23/#
pref Route ID = 2
Specify the same route by using node names:
addpref -name yes -h1 altanta/1:2.1.( -h2 newyork/1:1.1.2 -h3 chicago/1:2.1.7 -h4
seattle/#
pref route ID = 2
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-20
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
addprfx
addprfx
Add an ILMI Address Prefix for UNI—PXM1
Use the addprfx command to add an ILMI address prefix for UNI. When adding a prefix, this prefix
must be stored on both the controller and the platform. Therefore, a successful return status from the
command line does not guarantee this prefix is added onto the platform prefix table. You should check
the event log to ensure this prefix is added successfully in the prefix table on the platform. You can add
up to 16 prefix per port.
Syntax
addprfx <portid> <atm-prefix>
Syntax Description
portid
Interface number, in the form of [shelf.]slot[:subslot].port[:subport].
atm-prefix
ATM address prefix. The prefix must be eight or thirteen bytes in length.
Related Commands
delprfx, dspprfx
Attributes
Access level: GROUP1
State: active
Log: log
Example
Add an ILMI address prefix for UNI with the applicable port ID and atm address prefix.
spirita.1.PXM.a > addprfx 0.1.1 4700ab0012340000
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-21
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
addserialif
addserialif
Add Serial Interface—PXM1
Use the addserialif command to add a serial interface to the port.
Syntax
addserialif <port#>
Syntax Description
port#
Indicates the type of port you want to add. Enter 1 to add a maintenance port. Enter
2 to add a console port.
Related Commands
None
Attributes
Access level: SUPER_GP
State: active
Log: no
Example
Add a maintenance port.
spirita.1.PXM.a > addserialif 1
Example
Add a serial port.
spirita.1.PXM.a > addserialif 2
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-22
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
addtrapmgr
addtrapmgr
Add Trap Manager—PXM1
Use the addtrapmgr command to set up an SNMP manager to receive traps. Trap managers added
through addtrapmgr command or through the SNMP manager (Cisco WAN Manager or other
application) do not age and are not deleted. To delete a trap manager, enter either the deltrapmgr
command or an SNMP Set on the intended object.
Syntax
addtrapmgr <ip_addr> <portnum>
Syntax Description
ip_addr
IP address in dotted decimal format. For example,
nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn, n = 0–9 and nnn < 256
portnum
Port number on the workstation that receives traps. If you add a trap manager through
SNMP, the default portnum is 162.
Range: 0–65535
Related Commands
deltrapmgr, dsptrapmgr
Attributes
Access level: SUPER_GP
State: active
Log: log
Example
Add a trap manager with IP address 161.10.144.56 to port 50.
spirit11.1.1.PXM.a > addtrapmgr 161.10.144.56 50
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-23
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
adduser
adduser
Add User—PXM1
Use the adduser command to configure a user name and associated access level on the PXM.
Syntax
adduser <user ID> <accessLevel>
Syntax Description
user ID
Case-sensitive name to be used as the login at the PXM.
The name can consist of up to 12 characters composed of alpha numeric
characters and special characters, such as “_” and “-.”
The name must begin with an alpha character and cannot contain spaces.
Note
accessLevel
System privilege level to be allocated for the user ID by using one of the
following options:
•
SERVICE_GP
•
SUPER_GP
•
GROUP1 (highest level)
•
GROUP2
•
GROUP3
•
GROUP4
•
GROUP5
•
ANYUSER (lowest level)
You cannot configure a new user for an accessLevel that is higher than that
defined for the current login ID.
Related Commands
cnfuser, users
Attributes
Access level: GROUP1
State: active
Log: log
Example
Add a user with the applicable access levels.
spirit.1.1.PXM.a > adduser fin ANYUSER
Enter password:
Re-enter password:
spirit.1.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-24
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
aesa_ping
aesa_ping
ATM End System Address Ping—ping any ATM end station connected to a PNNI network.
Use the aesa_ping command to ping an ATM end station address (AESA) based on an ATM address that
you provide as a destination address. If you specify only the destination address, the local node merely
looks up that address in its routing table. To actually confirm the reachability of another node, specify
the optional parameters for setting up a SVC to send and receive keep-alive packets.
Syntax
aesa_ping {destination address} [-setupcall {yes | no}] [-qos {ubr | abr | vbr_rt | vbr_nrt}] [-trace
{yes | no}] [-data {yes | no}] [-timeout {time out in secs}] [-interval {time}][-pcr {peak cell rate}]
[-scr {sustain cell rate}]
destination address
Destination address in NSAP format. For example,
47.00918100000000500ffde873.00500ffde873.01
-setupcall
Sets up an SVC call as part of the ping. If you do not include the
setupcall parameter, the system performs only route lookup for the QoS
parameters to the destination.
Possible values: yes or no
Default: no
-qos
-trace
Quality of service (QoS) used for SVC ping connection. This parameter
applies only if you enable setupcall. Enter one of the following options:
•
ubr
•
abr
•
cbr
•
vbr_rt
•
vbr_nrt
Enable path trace during ping. This parameter only applies if -setupcall
is enabled. Enter either yes or no.
Default: no
-data
If you enable data, the switch transfers data then prints statistics at the
end of the timeout. Enter either enable or disable.
Default: disable
-timeout
Connection timeout for the ping. This parameter applies only if setup
call is enabled.
Range: 5–120 sec
Default: 5 sec
-interval
The interval between the call setup of successive transmissions. This
parameter applies only if setup call is enabled.
Range: 5–120 sec
Default: 5 sec
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-25
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
aesa_ping
-pcr
Peak cell rate of the ping. This parameter applies only if you enable
setup call.
Range: 1–100 sec
Default: 10
-scr
Sustained cell rate of the ping. This parameter applies only if you enable
setup call.
Range: 1–50 sec
Default: 5
Related Commands
dsppingatmaddr
Attributes
Access level: SUPER_GP
State: active
Log: log
Example
Pings the ATM end station with the address 47.00918100000000500ffde873.00500ffde873.01.
spirita.1.PXM.a > aesa_ping 47.00918100000000500ffde873.00500ffde873.01
Ping Got CLI message, index=0
PING:from PNNI - SOURCE ROUTE
DTL
1 :Number of (Node/port)elements
2
DTL 1:NODE 1::56:160:71:0:145::238:238:238:238:
Port 1:263168
DTL 1:NODE 2::56:160:71:0:145::15:253:232:115:
Port 2:0
Port List :no of ports =
Port ID
1
1:263168
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-26
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
bootChange
bootChange
Boot Change—PXM1
Use the bootChange command to specify the boot IP address and gateway address of a PXM card. The
IP address you define with the bootChange command is used only when the PXM is in the boot state.
In the current release, the only parameters you should enter are “inet on ethernet (e)” and “gateway inet
(g).” The bootChange command presents one parameter at a time. Therefore, press Return (or Enter)
at each prompt except for these two. The example in this description shows the two fields where you
need to enter an IP address and the fields you skip.
Note
Run this command in boot-mode only.
Syntax
bootChange
Related Commands
None
Attributes
Access level: SERVICE_GP
State: active
Log: log
Example
Specify an IP address of 170.11.52.61 for the Ethernet port and 170.11.52.2 for the gateway IP address.
The display shows all the fields that the node presents. Press Return or Enter at all fields except for the
ethernet and gateway prompts.
ses64.1.PXM.a > bootchange
'.' = clear field; '-' = go to previous field;
boot device
: lnPci
processor number
: 0
host name
:
file name
:
inet on Ethernet (e) : 172.29.37.41:ffffff00
inet on backplane (b):
host inet (h)
:
gateway inet (g)
: 172.29.37.1
user (u)
:
ftp password (pw) (blank = use rsh):superuser
flags (f)
: 0x0
target name (tn)
:
startup script (s)
:
other (o)
:
^D = quit
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-27
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
burnboot
burnboot
Burn Boot—PXM1
Use the burnboot command to burn the boot code onto the PXM card.
Syntax
burnboot <slot> <revision>
Syntax Description
slot
Card slot number for the card to be upgraded, Enter 1 or 2.
revision
Software version number for the update.
Related Commands
None
Attributes
Access level: SERVICE_GP
State: active
Log: log
Example
Burn the boot code for the PXM card.
spirita.1.PXM.a > burnboot 1 2.0(0)
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-28
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
bye
bye
Bye—PXM1
Use the bye command to exit the current CLI shell.
Syntax
bye
Related Commands
exit
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: all
Log: log
Example
Exit the current CLI shell.
spirit.1.2.PXM.a > bye
(session ended)
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-29
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cc
cc
Change Card—PXM1
Use the cc command to navigate from card to card on the shelf.
Syntax
cc <slotNumber>
Syntax Description
slotNumber
The number of the slot that contains the card you want to work on, either 1 or 2.
Related Commands
None
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: all
Log: log
Example
Change the card to slot number 2.
spirita.1.PXM.a > cc 2
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-30
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cd
cd
Change Directory—PXM1
Use the cd command to change to another directory on the PXM1 hard disk.
Syntax
cd <path name>
Syntax Description
path name
Specifies the name of the destination directory.
Related Commands
rename, copy
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: all
Log: log
Example
Change the directory to FW.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > cd FW
Example
Verify the current directory by entering the pwd command.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > pwd
C:FW
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Example
Go back to the root directory.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > cd ..
Example
Verify the result by entering the pwd command.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > pwd
C:
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-31
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
clidbxlevel
clidbxlevel
Command Line Interface Level—PXM1
Use the clidbxlevel command to display the attributes for each command. You must enter the clidbxlevel
command on each card where you want to change the level of displayed information. For example, if you
enter the clidbxlevel command on PXM1 on slot 1 and want to see the same level of information in slot
2, you must enter the clidbxlevel command for slot 2.
The following are the attributes:
•
The minimum user-privilege for the command.
•
The required card state of execution.
•
The status of the log file for the command.
Syntax
clidbxlevel [level]
Syntax Description
level
Indicates the level is either 0 or 1. If you do not include the level, the switch
states the current level.
Related Commands
None
Attributes
Access level: SERVICE_GP
State: all
Log: no
Example
Specify level 1 for the CLI.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > clidbxlevel 1
Value of cliDbxLevel is now 1
Example
Enter the help command to view the access levels, card states, and log status for each applicable
command.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > help
Command
Access
Card
Log
--------------------------------------------------?
ANYUSER
A|S|I
abortallsaves
GROUP1
A
+
abortofflinediag SERVICE_GP
A|S
abortrev
SERVICE_GP
A|S
+
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-32
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
clrallcnf
clrallcnf
Clear All Configuration—PXM1
Use the clrallcnf command to remove all configuration databases from the shelf, including configuration
stored in BRAM by the shelf manager, and other configuration files currently stored on disk.
Warning
This is a destructive command.
Syntax
clrallcnf
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
clrcnf, restoreallcnf, saveallcnf
Attributes
Access level: SERVICE_GP
State: any
Log: no
Example
Clear all the configurations and restart the switch.
spirita.1.PXM.a > clrallcnf
All SM’s config will be deleted, and
the shelf will be reset.
Do you want to proceed (Yes/No)? n
(command not executed)
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-33
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
clrbecnt
clrbecnt
Clear Bit-Error Count—PXM1
Use the clrbecnt command to remove all the statistics for the automatic protection switching (APS)
bit-error counts
Syntax
clrbecnt <line>
Syntax Description
line
Enter the value 1.
Related Commands
dspbecnt
Attributes
Access level: SUPER_GP
State: active
Log: no
Example
First display bit error count, then clear bit error count. Confirm by displaying again.
mpgses1.1.PXM.a >
Line 1.1:
24 Hour
Bit
15 Minute Bit
15 Second Bit
Line 2.1:
24 Hour
Bit
15 Minute Bit
15 Second Bit
dspbecnt 1
Error Count 0
Error Count 0
Error Count 0
Error Count 0
Error Count 38
Error Count 0
mpgses1.1.PXM.a > clrbecnt 1
Do you want to clear the bit-error count for line 1.1 [Y/N] ? Yes
The bit-error count for line 1.1 is cleared
Do you want to clear the bit error count for line 2.1 [Y/N] ? Yes
The bit-error count for line 2.1 is cleared
mpgses1.1.PXM.a >
Line 1.1:
24 Hour
Bit
15 Minute Bit
15 Second Bit
Line 2.1:
24 Hour
Bit
15 Minute Bit
15 Second Bit
dspbecnt 1
Error Count 0
Error Count 0
Error Count 0
Error Count 0
Error Count 0
Error Count 0
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-34
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
clrcnf
clrcnf
Clear Configuration—PXM1
Use the clrcnf command to clear all card configurations on the switch.
Syntax
clrcnf
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
clrallcnf, restoreallcnf, saveallcnf
Attributes
Access level: SERVICE_GP
State: active
Log: no
Example
Clear all card configurations.
spirita.1.PXM.a > clrcnf
All SM's disk config will be deleted, and
the shelf will be reset.
clrcnf: Do you want to proceed (Yes/No)? Y
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-35
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
clrconstats
clrconstats
Clear Connection Statistics—PXM1
Use the clrconstats command to clear existing statistics for a specified active spvc connection (specified
using portid, vpi, vci).
Syntax
clrconstats <portid> <vpi> [<vci>]
Syntax Description
portid
PNNI logical port, in the format [shelf.]slot[:subslot].port[:subport]. Using the short
form where only the mandatory elements are appropriate, the portid has the format
slot.port.
vpi
Minimum VPI value for the connection.
Range: 0–4095
vci
Minimum VCI value for the connection.
Range: 0–65535
The default value for vp connections is 0.
Related Commands
dspconstats
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: active
Log: log
Example
spirita.1.PXM.a > clrconstats 4.1 4000 6000
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-36
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
clrdiagerr
clrdiagerr
Clear Diagnostic Error—PXM1
Use the clrdiagerr command to clear all the diagnostics error messages that are currently in memory.
Syntax
clrdiagerr <slot>
Syntax Description
slot
Specifies the slot of the card where to clear the diagnostic errors.
Related Commands
None
Attributes
Access level: SERVICE_GP
State: any
Log: no
Example
Clear all the diagnostic errors for slot 1.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > clrdiagerr 1
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-37
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
clrdiagstat
clrdiagstat
Clear Diagnostic Statistics—PXM1
Use the clrdiagstat command to clear all the diagnostic statistics currently in memory. The diagnostics
program keeps count of how many times the diagnostics has run.
Syntax
clrdiagstat <slot>
Syntax Description
slot
Specifies the slot of the card to clear the diagnostic statistics.
Related Commands
dspdiagstat
Attributes
Access level: SERVICE_GP
State: any
Log: no
Example
Clear the diagnostic statistics for slot number 1.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > clrdiagstat 1
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-38
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
clrerr
clrerr
Clear Error—PXM1
Use the clrerr command to remove a specified file or all error log files. This command queries for
confirmation prior to clearing the error log files from the system.
Syntax
clrerr [-en <error number>][-sl <slot number>]
Syntax Description
-en
Command delineator that precedes the error number entry. The error number
indicates the number of the log file to clear.
-sl
Command delivered that proceeds the slot number entry. The slot number indicates
the number of the slot where the selected card resides.
Related Commands
clrerrhist, dsptrapip, dsperrhist
Attributes
Access level: SUPER_GP
State: any
Log: no
Example
Clear the error log files.
wilco.1.1.PXM.a > clrerr
Do you want to proceed (Yes/No)? No
(command not executed)
wilco.1.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-39
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
clrerrhist
clrerrhist
Clear Error History—PXM1
Use the clrerrhist command to display a log of errors and failures.
Syntax
clrerrhist <slot>
Syntax Description
slot
Number for the slot that contains the card you want to work on. Use this object
to clear the log of errors and failures only on a specific slot.
Related Commands
clrerr, dsptrapip, dsperrhist, dsperrs
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: all
Log: no
Example
Clear the error history for the applicable slot.
spirit11.1.1.PXM.a > clrerrhist
10
0x301f
syncRam DB Reset Init from STBY failed
09/07/2000-20:44:25
----------------------------------------------------------------------------spirit11.1.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-40
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
clrlmistats
clrlmistats
Clear Local Management Interface Statistics—PXM1
Use the clrlmistats command to clear the local management interface (LMI) related statistics on the
current PXM.
Syntax
clrlmistats
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
dsplmistats
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: any
Log: no
Example
Clear the LMI statistics for PXM.
penguin.1.1.PXM.a > clrlmistats
Enabled
VPI.VCI
Polling enable
T393
T394
WaitStatus
Retry Timer
Poll Timer
Status
Rx
UpdtStatus Rx
Status Enq Rx
Status Ack Rx
NodeStatus Rx
NodeStaAck Rx
Bad PDU Rx
Unknown PDU Rx
Invalid Trans
BPX IP Addr
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
1
3.31
1
10
10
0
0
6
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
172.3.3.62
Port Status
:
1
N394
:
N395
:
WaitStAck
:
Retry Count
:
Trans Num
:
Status
Tx :
UpdtStatus Tx :
Status Enq Tx :
Status Ack Tx :
NodeStatus Tx :
NodeStaAck Tx :
Bad PDU Len Rx :
Invalid I.E. Rx:
5
5
0
1
86
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
penguin.1.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-41
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
clrlmitrace
clrlmitrace
Clear LMI Trace—PXM1
Use the clrlmitrace command to clear LMI trace on the switch.
Syntax
clrlmitrace
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
None
Attributes
Access level: CISCO_GP
State: any
Log: no
Example
Clear the LMI trace.
spirita.1.PXM.a > clrlmitrace
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-42
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
clrlog
clrlog
Clear Log—PXM1
Use the clrlog command to clear specified or all event log files.
Syntax
clrlog [-log <log slot>]
Syntax Description
-log
Command delineator that precedes the log slot entry. The log slot of the file that you want
to clear from the event log file.
Related Commands
dsplog, dsplogs
Attributes
Access level: SUPER_GP
State: any
Log: log
Example
Clear the applicable log files.
wilco.1.1.PXM.a > clrlog
Do you want to proceed (Yes/No)? Yes
wilco.1.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-43
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
clrloginmsg
clrloginmsg
Clear Login Message—PXM1
Use the clrloginmsg command to delete the message that appears when any user logs into the switch.
Syntax
clrloginmsg
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
cnfloginmsg, dsploginmsg
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: all
Log: log
Example
Delete the login message.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > clrloginmsg
Login message reset
Example
Confirm that no login message exists by using the dsploginmsg command.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dsploginmsg
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-44
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
clrpathtracebuffer
clrpathtracebuffer
Clear Path Trace Buffer—PXM45, PXM1E
The clrpathtracebuffer command clears the path trace buffer for an individual connection.
Syntax
clrpathtracebuffer <portid> <vpi> <vci>
Syntax Description
portid
PNNI physical port identifier slot.port
vpi
VPI of the connection.
vci
VCI of the connection.
Related Commands
clrpathtracebuffers, dsppathtracebuffer, dsppathtracebuffers
Attributes
Log: yes
State: active
Privilege: SUPER_GP
Example
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > clrpathtracebuffer 1.3 3 100
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-45
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
clrpathtracebuffers
clrpathtracebuffers
Clear Path Trace Buffers—PXM45, PXM1E
The clrpathtracebuffers command clears the path trace buffer for every connection on the switch.
Syntax
clrpathtracebuffers
Syntax Description
This command takes no parameters.
Related Commands
clrpathtracebuffer, dsppathtracebuffer, dsppathtracebuffers
Attributes
Access level: SUPER_GP
State: active
Log: yes
Example
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > clrpathtracebuffers
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-46
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
clrpncon
clrpncon
Clear a UNI or NNI Connection—PXM1
Use the clrpncon command to clear a specified call, or all calls within a logical port. This command
does not apply to spvc endpoints.
Syntax
clrpncon <portid> [all | vpi] <vci>
Syntax Description
portid
Port ID of the call you want to clear, in the form of [shelf.]slot[:subslot].port[:subport].
all | vpi
VPI of the call to clear. Can be all or specific VPI.
Default: 0
vci
VCI of the call to clear. If no VCI is specified, this is a VP connection.
Related Commands
clrpncon, dsppncon
Attributes
Access level: SUPER_GP
State: active
Log: log
Example
For this example, use clrpncon to release the connection on port
1.1 with the VPI/VCI of 100 1000
spirita.1.PXM.a > clrpncon 1.1. all
or
spirita.1.PXM.a > clrpncon 1.1 100 1000
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-47
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
clrpnconstats
clrpnconstats
Clear UNI or NNI Connection Statistics—PXM1
Use the clrpnconstats command to clear existing call statistics for a specific port or all ports.
Syntax
clrpnconstats <portid>
Syntax Description
portid
The port identifier for the port on which you want to clear the call statistics. If portid
is not specified, call statistics for all ports are cleared. Portid is in the form of
[shelf.]slot[:subslot].port[:subport].
Related Commands
dsppnconstats
Attributes
Access level: SUPER_GP
State: active
Log: log
Example
Clear either UNI or NNI connection statistics with the applicable port ID.
spirita.1.PXM.a > clrpnconstats 0.1.1
spirita.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-48
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
clrqosdefault
clrqosdefault
Clear Quality of Service Default—PXM1
Use the clrqosdefault command to clear (resets to 0) the defaults for quality of service (QoS values) on
the switch. You can clear the defaults for each service type on the switch.
Syntax
clrqosdefault
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
cnfqosdefault, dspqosdefault
Attributes
Access level: GROUP1
State: active
Log: log
Example
Clear the QoS defaults on the switch. The system does not return a message unless an error occurs.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > clrqosdefault
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-49
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
clrscrn
clrscrn
Clear Screen—PXM1
Use the clrscrn command to remove the contents of the control terminal screen. After this command
executes, the current command line prompt displays only on the terminal screen.
Syntax
clrscrn
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
None
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: all
Log: no
Example
Clear the contents of the screen.
flyers01.1.17.AUSM.a > clrscrn
flyers01.1.17.AUSM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-50
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
clrsigstats
clrsigstats
Clear Signal Statistics—PXM1
Use the clrsigstats command to clear existing signaling statistics for a specific port or all ports.
Syntax
clrsigstats [<portid>]
Syntax Description
portid
If portid is not specified, then signaling statistics for all ports will be cleared. Port ID
is in the form of [shelf.]slot[:subslot].port[:subport].
Related Commands
dspsigstats
Attributes
Access level: SUPER_GP State: active Log: log
Example
Clear the existing signal statistics with the applicable port ID.
spirit11.1.1.PXM.a > clrsigstats 0.1.1
Clearing Signaling Statistics for 1.1dspconinfo
spirit11.1.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-51
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
clrsntpstats
clrsntpstats
Clear SNTP Statistics—PXM1
Use the clrsntpstats command to clear the SNTP statistics.
The recommended procedure is to
1.
Enter the dspsntpstats command to display the current counters.
2.
Enter the clrsntpstats command.
3.
Enter the dspsntpstats commands again to ensure the all the counters have been reset to zero.
Syntax
clrsntpstats
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
cnfsntp, dspsntp, dbgsntp
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: any
Log: no
Example
orses17.2.PXM.a > clrsntpstats
orses17.2.PXM.a > dspsntpstats
Statistic Counters For SNTP
----------------------------Receive server mode packets from servers in list: 0
Receive server mode packets from servers not in list: 0
Receive server mode packets which fail sanity check: 0
Receive server mode packets which pass sanity check: 0
Receive client mode packets: 0
Receive other mode packets: 0
Send server mode packets: 0
Send client mode packets: 0
Polling Timer Expire Counter: 0
Polling Wait Timer Expire Counter: 0
Rollback Timer Expire Counter: 0
Rollback Wait Timer Expire Counter: 0
Switch From Primary To Secondary Counter: 0
Switch From Secondary To Primary Counter: 0
Switch From Secondary To Secondary Counter: 0
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-52
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
clrspvcnonpers
clrspvcnonpers
Clear SPVC Nonpersistent Endpoint—PXM1
Use the clrspvcnonpers command to release the specified nonpersistent endpoint. To tear down a
specific endpoint, specify both the VPI and VCI. If a VPI is specified, all nonpersistent slaves on that
VPI are released. The single-end provisioned SPVC is rerouted.
Note
If the port ID is the only parameter specified, all the nonpersistent slaves on the port are cleared.
Syntax
clrspvcnonpers <portid> <vpi> <vci>
Syntax Description
portid
Specifies the interface where the nonpersistent slaves are released.
vpi
Specifies the VPI for the nonpersistent connections.
vci
Specifies the VCI for the nonpersistent connections.
Related Commands
cnfpnportcc, cnfsvcoverride, dsppnportcc,
Attributes
Access level: SUPER_GP
State: active
Log: log
Example
Clear the SPVC nonpersistent endpoints for port 2.3 with VPI set to 100.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > clrspvcnonpers 2.3 100
clrspvcnonpers: clear multiple calls. This might take a while.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-53
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
clrsscopstats
clrsscopstats
Clear SSCOP Statistics—PXM1
Use the clrsscopstats command to clear existing SSCOP statistics for a specific port or all ports.
Syntax
clrsscopstats [<portid>]
Syntax Description
portid
If portid is not specified, then SSCOP statistics for all ports will be cleared. portid is in
the form of [shelf.]slot[:subslot].port[:subport].
Related Commands
disablesscop, dspsscop, dspsscopstats
Attributes
Access level: SUPER_GP
State: active
Log: no
Example
Clear statistics on all ports.
spirit11.1.1.PXM.a > clrsscopstats
spirit11.1.1.PXM.a >
Example
Clear statistics on a specified port (0.1.1).
spirit11.1.1.PXM.a > clrsscopstats 0.1.1
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-54
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cmdhistory
cmdhistory
Command History—PXM1
Use the cmdhistory command to view the last ten commands executed on the current card.
Syntax
cmdhistory
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
help
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: all
Log: no
Example
View the last ten commands used for the current card.
spirit4.1.2.PXM.a > cmdhistory
Size of cmdHistory is currently 10 line(s)
1 dspconcnt 2.39.45
2 dsplmistats
3 dsplmiloop
4 dsplm
5 clrportcnt
6 dspportcnts
7 dspportcnt
8 dspportcnt 1
9 dsplmistats
10 cmdhistory
spirit4.1.2.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-55
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfabrtparmdft
cnfabrtparmdft
Configure ABR Traffic Parameters—PXM1
Use the cnfabrtparmdft command to configure default ABR traffic parameters used by a port to set up ABR
SPVCs. The traffic parameters are used in the SETUP message at the source when setting up an SPVC
for ABR service category.
Syntax
cnfabrtparmdft <portid> [-rif RIF-value] [-rdf RDF-value] [-tbe TBE-value] [-nrm NRM-value] [-trm
TRM-value] [-adtf ADTF-value] [-cdf CDF-value][-fsd FSD-value]
Syntax Description
portid
Identifies the port to be configured, in the form of
[shelf.]slot[:subslot].port[:subport].
-rif
Specifies the Rate Increase Factor (RIF). This controls the amount by which the cell
transmission rate may increase upon receipt of an RM-cell. RIF is a power of two,
ranging from 1/32768 to 1. The following are the acceptable choices for this
parameter:
1 = 1/32768
2 = 1/16384
3 = 1/8192
4 = 1/4096
5 = 1/2048
6 = 1/1024
7 = 1/512
8 = 1/256
9 = 1/128
10 = 1/64
11 = 1/32
12 = 1/16
13 = 1/8
14 = 1/4
15 = 1/2
16 = 1
-rdf
Specifies the Rate Decrease Factor (RDF). This controls the decrease in the cell
transmission rate. RDF is a power of two, ranging from 1/32768 to 1. Acceptable
choices are the same as RIF. The default choice is 4 (= 1/4096).
-tbe
Transient buffer exposure.
Default: 1048320
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-56
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfabrtparmdft
-nrm
Specifies the maximum number of cells a source may send for each forward RM-cell.
NRM is a power of two, ranging from 2 to 256. The following are the acceptable
choices for this parameter:
1=2
2=4
3=8
4 = 16
5 = 32
6 = 64
7 = 128
8 = 256
The default choice is 55 (= 32 cells).
-trm
Specifies the upper bound on the time between forward RM-cells for an active source.
TRM is 100 * a power of two milliseconds, ranging from 100*(2^-7) to 100*(2^0).
The following are the acceptable choices for this parameter:
1 = 0.78125
2 = 1.5625
3 = 3.125
4 = 6.25
5 = 12.5
6 = 25
7 = 50
8 = 100
The default choice is 8 (= 100 msec)
-adtf
Specifies the Allowed Cell Rate (ACR) Decrease Time Factor. This is the time
permitted between sending RM-cells before the rate is decreased to ICR. ADTF is in
unit of 10 milliseconds, ranging from 1–1023 units, for example, .01 to 10.23
seconds.
Default: 50 (= 0.5 sec)
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-57
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfabrtparmdft
-cdf
Specifies the Cutoff Decrease Factor (CDF). This controls the decrease in ACR
associated with missing RM-cell count (CRM). CDF is zero, or a power of two
ranging from 1/64 to 1. The following are the acceptable choices for this parameter:
1=0
2 = 1/64
3 = 1/32
4 = 1/16
5 = 1/8
6 = 1/4
7 = 1/2
8=1
The default choice is 7 (= 1/2).
-fsd
Specifies the Fixed Source Delay (FSD) for the source. The Fixed Round-Trip Time
(FRTT) is then accumulated during the call setup and is the sum of the fixed and
propagation delays from the source to the furthest destination and back. FRTT is in
unit of 10 microseconds, ranging from 0–16777215 units, for example, 0 to
167.77215 seconds.
Default: 0
Related Commands
dspabrtparmdft
Attributes
Access level: GROUP1 State: active
Log: no
Example
Configure the ABR traffic parameters with the applicable port ID and values. This example shows the
-rif value is 8.
orses18.1.PXM.a > cnfabrtparmdft 1.1 -rif 8
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-58
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfaddrreg
cnfaddrreg
Configure Address Registration—PXM1
Use the cnfaddrreg command to set ILMI address registration options for a specified port. At least one
keyword must be specified. This command can be used only when the port is added and administratively
down. Currently, the address registration can be also enabled or disabled from the BPX cnfport
command for backward compatibility reason. Furthermore, in order for the address registration to work,
the peer must support address registration table and procedure. Therefore, you must ensure that the
address registration is enabled on all three places to have address registration work.
Syntax
cnfaddrreg <portid> [yes | no]
Syntax Description
portid
Interface ID in the form of [shelf.]slot[:subslot].port[:subport].
yes | no
Enables or disables ILMI address registration on the port.
Default: yes
Related Commands
None
Attributes
Access level: GROUP1
State: active
Log: log
Example
Configure the address registration with the applicable port ID.
spirita.1.PXM.a > cnfaddreg 0.1.1 no
spirita.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-59
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfainihopcount
cnfainihopcount
Configure AINI Hop Count—PXM1
Use the cnfainihopcount command to determine the maximum number of ATM Inter-Network Interface
(AINI) links that a call can traverse. The specification applies to any call originating on the local node,
and the area where the setting applies to the entire network.
The following functions are for the cnfainihopcount command:
Note
•
Enable or disable the counter. This counter generates the hop counter information element (IE).
•
Specify the maximum number of AINI hops. The hop counter IE is initialized to this value in the
setup message. With each AINI link that the setup message traverses, the counter is decremented.
This hop count applies to only AINI interfaces. For more information, see the cnfpnportsig
command.
To enable the AINI hop count, you must also enable it at each port by entering the cnfpnportsig
command and enter enable for the -hopcntgen parameter.
Syntax
cnfainihopcount [-hopcntgen {enable |disable}] [-maxhops <value>]
Syntax Description
-hopcntgen
Enables the counting for AINI hops. Enter either enable or disable.
If you enable the hop count generation, the counter initializes the value for
maxhops.
Default: enable
-maxhops
Determines the maximum number of AINI hops that a connection can take.
Range: 1–31
Default: 31
Related Commands
dspainihopcount
Attributes
Access level: SUPER_GP
State: any
Log: log
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-60
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfainihopcount
Example
Enable the AINI hop counting to specify a maximum of 20 hops.
Note
No response appears unless an error occurs.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > cnfainihopcount -hopcntgen enable -maxhops 20
Example
Display the configuration for the AINI hop count.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dspainihopcount
AINI Hop Counter Generation: enable
Max AINI Hops: 20
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-61
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfapsln
cnfapsln
Configure APS Line—PXM1
Use the cnfapsln command to set APS parameters for a specified line on the PXM card.
Syntax
cnfapsln <line> <SFBER> <SDBER> <Revertive> <WTR> <Direction> <KIK2>
Syntax Description
line
OC-3 line number. Enter the value 1.
SFBER
Signal failure BER threshold.
Range: 3–5
SDBER
Signal degrade BER threshold.
Range: 5–9
Revertive
Value to set the APS revertive or non-revertive function.
•
1: Non-revertive
•
2: Revertive
This setting allows the line to switch back to the working line after the
Wait-To-Restore interval has expired and the working line SF/SD is cleared.
WTR
Number of minutes to wait before attempting to switch back to the working line,
in the range 1through12. This setting is not applicable if the line is configured
in non-revertive mode (Revertive set to 1).
Direction
Value to set the switching direction for either unidirectional or bidirectional.
K1K2
•
1 = Unidirectional: APS line supports switching one end of the line.
•
2 = Bidirectional: APS line supports switching both ends of the line.
Enables or disables the K1/K2 inband protocol on the protection line.
•
1: enable
•
2: disable
Related Commands
addapsln, delapsln, dspapsln, switchapsln
Attributes
Access level: SUPER_GP
State: active
Log: log
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-62
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfapsln
Example
To set the APS working line 1 on the active PXM card in slot 1 to have a signal failure bit error rate
(BER) threshold of 10^^-5, a signal degrade BER threshold of 10^^-5, to enable switch back after signal
failure or degradation cleared, to wait 2 minutes before attempting to switch back, to make switching
bidirectional, and to enable the K1/K2 inband protocol on the protection line.
flyers01.1.1.PXM.a > cnfapsln 1 5 5 2 2 2 1
flyers01.1.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-63
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfautocnf
cnfautocnf
Configure Auto Configuration—PXM1
Use the cnfautocnf command to enable or disable the ILMI auto configuration for a specified port.
Syntax
cnfautocnf <portid> [yes | no]
Syntax Description
portid
Interface ID in the form of [shelf.]slot[:subslot].port[:subport].
yes | no
Enables or disables the ILMI automatic configuration procedure on the port.
Default: yes
Tip
This command is used only when the port is added and administratively down.
Related Commands
None
Attributes
Access level: GROUP1
State: active
Log: log
Example
Configure the auto configuration for ILMI.
spirita.1.PXM.a > cnfautocnf 0.1.1 no
spirita.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-64
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfcbclk
cnfcbclk
Configure Cellbus Clock—PXM1
Use the cnfcbclk command to configure the clock speed for the individual cellbuses. The cnfcbclk
command lets you specify whether a cellbus runs at the default of 21 MHz or the double-speed rate of
42 MHz. Not every cellbus and the supported card slots can receive the double-speed clock. Use the
dspcbclk command to see whether a particular cellbus can run at 42 MHz.
The backplane contains eight cellbuses: two cellbuses support two card slots and can support 21 MHz
or 42 MHz clocking.
Syntax
cnfcbclk <cellBus> <clockRate>
Syntax Description
cellBus
Specifies the cellBus. Enter a string in the range of CB1–CB8. The string is not
case sensitive.
clockRate
Specifies a clock rate of 21 MHz or 42 MHz. Enter either 21 or 42.
Related Commands
dspcbclk
Attributes
Access level: SUPER_GP
State: active
Log: log
Example
Display the current cellbus clock configuration to determine which slots can run at a higher rate. The
display shows that all cellbuses currently have the default speed of 21 MHz.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dspcbclk
CellBus
Rate (MHz)
Slots
Allowable Rates (MHz)
---------------------------------------------------------CB1
21
3
21, 42
CB2
21
5
21, 42
CB3
21
10
21, 42
CB4
21
12
21, 42
CB5
21
11
21, 42
CB6
21
6, 7
21, 42
CB7
21
4
21, 42
CB8
21
13, 14
21, 42
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-65
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfcbclk
Example
Configure a double-speed clock for cellbus 5. Check the configuration.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > cnfcbclk cb5 42
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dspcbclk
CellBus
Rate (MHz)
Slots
Allowable Rates (MHz)
---------------------------------------------------------CB1
21
3
21, 42
CB2
21
5
21, 42
CB3
21
10
21, 42
CB4
21
12
21, 42
CB5
42
11
21, 42
CB6
21
6, 7
21, 42
CB7
21
4
21, 42
CB8
21
13, 14
21, 42
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-66
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfcdvtdft
cnfcdvtdft
Configure CDVT Default—PXM1
Use the cnfcdvtdft command to modify the default CDVT to request UPC for cells received on a port.
The new configuration applies to new incoming calls while existing calls remain intact. This command
is used regardless of the state of the port.
Syntax
cnfcdvtdft <portid> <service_category> [num-of-micro-seconds]
Syntax Description
portid
Interface ID in the form of [shelf.]slot[:subslot].port[:subport].
service_category
ATM 4.0 service category. Enter one of the following bit rates:
•
cbr = constant bit rate
•
rtvbr = real-time variable bit rate
•
nrtvbr = non-real-time variable bit rate
•
ubr = unspecified bit rate
•
abr = available bit rate
num-of-micro-seconds Specifies that the integer ranges from 10,000–5,000,000. The CDVT is
expressed in microseconds.
If this parameter is not specified, the default will be used/restored.
Default: 250,000 microseconds
Related Commands
dspcdvtdft
Attributes
Access level: GROUP1
State: active
Log: log
Example
Configure the default CDVTD to request UPC for cells received at an unspecified bit rate of
250,000 microseconds:
spirita.1.PXM.a > cnfcdvtdft 0.1.1 ubr
spirita.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-67
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfcdvtdft
Example
Configure the default CDVTD to request UPC for cells received on at a constant bit rate of
250,000 microseconds.
spirita.1.PXM.a > cnfcdvtdft 0.1.1 cbr
spirita.1.PXM.a >
Example
Configure the default CDVTD to request UPC for cells received at an available bit rate of
240 microseconds.
spirita.1.PXM.a > cnfcdvtdft 0.1.1 abr 240
spirita.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-68
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfcmdabbr
cnfcmdabbr
Configure Command Abbreviation—PXM1
Use the cnfcmdabbr command to specify whether the CLI requires the entire name of a command or
accepts the first unique string of characters that identifies a command. For example, loa is enough to
identify if the loadrev command abbreviation is enabled.
Note
The string lo is not enough to identify a particular command because of the logout command.
Syntax
cnfcmdabbr <flag>
Syntax Description
flag
Specifies a Boolean expression to enable or disable the command abbreviation.
Enter on to enable or off to disable the command abbreviation.
Related Commands
dspcmdabbr
Attributes
Access level: SERVICE_GP
State: active
Log: log
Example
Enable the command abbreviation.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > cnfcmdabbr on
Command abbreviations being allowed
Example
Verify the status by using the dspcmdabbr command.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dspcmdabbr
Command abbreviations allowed
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-69
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfcmdabbr
Example
Test the function of the command abbreviation by entering loa (for the loadrev command) without
parameters.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > loa
ERR: Syntax: loadrev <slot> <revision>
slot -- optional; value: 15,16,31,32
revision - revision number. E.g.,
2.0(1)
2.0(1.255)
2.0(0)I or 2.0(0)A
2.0(0)P1 or 2.0(0)P2
2.0(0)P3 or 2.0(0)P4
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-70
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfcon
cnfcon
Configure Connection—PXM1
Use the cnfcon command to modify the connection bandwidth, policing, and routing parameters of an
existing endpoint. This command applies to only an SPVC or SPVP.
The following are the functions of the command parameters
•
Identifies the connection for a logical port, VPI, and VCI.
•
Specifies the bandwidth parameters for the local (master) end then the remote (slave) end.
•
Specifies the policing parameters for the connection as a whole.
After you specify the mandatory connection identifier, all other parameters are optional.
You can assign a priority at the master end of an SPVC or SPVP. The PNNI controller routes higher
priority connections before lower priority connections. For more information about assigning a priority
to a connection, see the cnfpri-routing and dsppri-routing commands.
Syntax
cnfcon <portid> <vpi> <vci>
[-lpcr <local PCR>] [-lmcr <local MCR>] [-lscr <local SCR>] [-icr <local ICR>]
[-lputil <local putil>] [-lmbs <local MBS>] [-cdvt <local CDVT>] [-lcdv <local CDV>]
[-lctd <local CTD>] [-rpcr <remote PCR>] [-rmcr <remote MCR>] [-rscr <remote SCR>]
[-rputil <remote putil>] [-rmbs <remote MBS>] [-rcdv <remote CDV>] [-rctd <remote CTD>]
[-stats <enable(1)/disable(0)>] [-frame <enable(1)/disable(0)>] [-mc <Max Cost>]
[-int_vsvd <internal segment>] [-ext_vsvd <external segment>] [-rtngprio <routingPriority>]
Syntax Description
portid
Interface ID in the form of [shelf.]slot[:subslot].port[:subport].
vpi
Specify the starting VPI to view active calls starting from the specified VPI of
the specified port. The parameters can be used only if the port is specified.
Range: 0–4095
vci
Specify the starting VCI to view active calls starting from the specified VPI/VCI
of the specified port. This parameters can only be used if VPI is specified.
Range: 32–65535
-lpcr
Local PCR range.
-lmcr
Local MCR range.
-lscr
Local SCR range.
-icr
Local ICR range.
-lputil
Specifies the local percentage utilization factor.
Range: 1–100
Default: 100
-lmbs
Local MBS range.
-cdvt
CDVT range.
-lcdv
Local CDV range.
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-71
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfcon
-lctd
Local CTD range.
-rpcr
Remote PCR range.
-rmcr
This optional keyword can be used for specifying the MCR required for the
connection in the remote -> local direction.
Default: rpcr
-rscr
This optional keyword can be used for specifying the SCR required for the
connection in the remote -> local direction.
Default: rpcr
-rputil
Specifies the remote percentage utilization factor.
Range: 1–100
Default: 100
-rmbs
This optional keyword can be used for specifying the MBS required for the
connection in the remote -> local direction.
Default: dspmbsdft value
-rcdv
This optional keyword can be used for specifying the CDV required for the
connection in the remote -> local direction.
Default: -1
-rctd
Remote CTD range.
-stats
Enables or disables statistics. Enter one of the following options:
-frame
•
1: enable
•
2: disable
Enables or disables frame. Enter one of the following options:
•
1: enable
•
2: disable
-mc
Maximum cost.
-int_vsvd
Internal Segment VSVD. Enter one of the following options:
-ext_vsvd
-rtngprio
•
1: off
•
2: on
•
3: unspecified
External Segment VSVD. Enter one of the following options:
•
1: off
•
2: on
•
3: unspecified
The routing priority of the SPVC connection. This parameter is used to specify
the connection priority of the SPVC when provisioning the master endpoint.
Note
The -rtngprio parameter is not applicable to the slave end of the SPVC
connection.
Range: 1–15
Default: 8
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-72
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfcon
Related Commands
addcon, delcon, dncon, dspcon, rrtcon, upcon
Attributes
Access level: GROUP1
State: active
Log: log
Example
Configure the connection for port 1.6. Set the routing priority to 1.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > cnfcon 1.6 50 50 -rtngprio 1
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-73
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfconpref
cnfconpref
Configure Connection Preferred Route—PXM1
Use the cnfconpref command to associate a SPVC/P connection to a preferred rout by using the
preferred route id value.
Syntax
cnfconpref <portId> <vpi> <vci> <rteID> [-assoc {set | clr}] [-direct {set | clr}]
[-onPrefRte {yes | no}]
Syntax Description
portId
Specifies the port where the master end of the SPVC is anchored. The format is
[shelf.]slot[:subslot].port[:subport].
vpi
Specifies the virtual path identifier (VPI) of the SPVC.
vci
Specifies the virtual circuit identifier (VCI) of the SPVC. If set to 0, SPVC
becomes a VPC.
rteId
Specifies a number between one and the maximum database size that uniquely
identifies the route location in the database.
Range: 1–1000
-assoc
Indicates either associating or disassociating a route with a preferred route when
the SPVC is modified. Enter one of the following options:
•
set—Specifies that the SPVC is configured to use the given preferred route.
The preferred route ID must be specified.
•
clr—Removes the current configuration.
Default: set
-direct
-onPrefRte
Indicates a change to the setting of the directed status for the SPVC. Enter one
of the following options:
•
set—Specifies that the SPVC is set to use the preferred route as a directed
route.
•
clr—Clears the directed flag. If a preferred route has not been configured,
the parameter is ignored. If the parameter is not stated in the CLI, the setting
is not changed.
If the SPVC connection is already routed on a route that is the same as the
preferred route of the associated SPVC, you can indicate the association with the
-onPrefRte option. Enter either yes or no. Before setting this option to true, the
user should make sure that the connection is really routed on the preferred
route.The default for this option is no.
Related Commands
addpref, delpref, dsppref, dspprefs, modpref
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-74
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfconpref
Attributes
Access level: GROUP1
State: active
Log: log
Example
Associate a preferred route port 1, VPI/VCI = 1.100 route ID = 2.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > cnfconpref 1 1 100 2 -assoc set -direct set -onPrefRte yes
Example
Disassociate a preferred route port 1, VPI/VCI = 1.100 route ID = 2.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > cnfconpref 1 1 100 2 -assoc clr -direct set -onPrefRte yes
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-75
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfconsegep
cnfconsegep
Configure Connection Segment Endpoint—PXM1
Use the cnfconsegep command to set a connection as a segment endpoint. When both VPI and VCI are
present, the segment endpoint is a F5 flow endpoint (for VCCs). When the optional VCI is not present,
the segment endpoint is a F4 flow endpoint (for VPCs). This command is used only for established calls.
Note
Before executing this command, continuity check must be de-activated. Otherwise, continuity check
failure will occur for the connection. This command is used with the conntrace command for fault
isolation.
Syntax
cnfconsegep <portid> <vpi> [vci]
Syntax Description
portid
Interface ID in the form of [shelf.]slot[:subslot].port[:subport].
vpi
VPI of the connection.
vci
VCI of the connection. The default VCI value is 0 for the VP connection.
Related Commands
delconsegep
Attributes
Access level: GROUP1
State: active
Log: log
Example
Configure a connection segment endpoint.
spirita.1.PXM.a > cnfconsegep 0.1.1 50 50
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-76
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfdate
cnfdate
Configure Date—PXM1
Use the cnfdate command to set the system date.
Syntax
cnfdate <mm/dd/yyyy>
Syntax Description
mm/dd/yyyy
Month, date, and year.
Related Commands
dspdate
Attributes
Access level: SUPER_GP
State: active
Log: log
Example
Set the system date.
wilco.1.1.PXM.a> cnfdate 12/17/1999
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-77
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfdiag
cnfdiag
Configure Diagnostics—PXM1
Use the cnfdiag command to enable either online or offline diagnostics. The cnfdiag command also
configures the time settings for the start time and coverage to run the offline diagnostics. When you enter
the cnfdiag command with not parameters, it displays the current configuration and status of the
diagnostics.
The cnfdiagall command is identical to the cnfdiag command except that it configures all the slots at
once.
Syntax
cnfdiag <slot> <onEnb> <offEnb> [<offCover> <offStart> <offDow>]
Syntax Description
slot
Configures the diagnostics for the slot of the card.
onEnb
Enables or disables online diagnostics.
Default: disable
offEnb
Enables or disables offline diagnostics.
Default: disable
offCover
Sets the offline diagnostics coverage time to light, medium, or full.
The following are the parameter measurements:
offStart
Parameter
Measurement
light
5 min or less
medium
30 min or less
full
60 min or less
Sets the time for the offline diagnostics to begin using 24-hour time. The format
is hh:mm.
The following is an example:
22:30
offDow
Sets the day of the week to run the offline diagnostics. The format is SMTWTFS.
The following is an example:
-M-W--- = Mon and Wed only
Related Commands
cnfdiagall, dspdiagcnf
Attributes
Access level: SERVICE_GP
State: any
Log: no
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-78
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfdiag
Example
Configure the online or offline diagnostics with the applicable time settings.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > cnfdiag 1 enable disable light 22:30 -M-W
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-79
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfdiagall
cnfdiagall
Configure Diagnostics All—PXM1
Use the cnfdiagall command to enable and configure the online or offline diagnostics for all card slots.
Note
This command is identical to the cnfdiag command except that it effects all slots instead of just one.
When you enter the cnfdiagall command with no parameters, it displays the current configuration and
status of the diagnostics.
Syntax
cnfdiagall <onEnb> <offEnb> [<offCover> <offStart> <offDow>]
Syntax Description
onEnb
Enables or disables online diagnostics.
offEnb
Enables or disables offline diagnostics.
offCover
Sets the offline diagnostics coverage time to light, medium, or full.
The following are the parameter measurements:
offStart
Parameter
Measurement
light
5 min or less
medium
30 min or less
full
60 min or less
Sets the time for the offline diagnostics to begin using 24-hour time. The format
is hh:mm.
The following is an example:
22:30
offDow
Sets the day of the week to run the offline diagnostics. The format is SMTWTFS.
Enter a dash (-) for days where you do not want diagnostics to run.
The following is an example:
-M-W--- = Mon and Wed only
Related Commands
cnfdiag
Attributes
Access level: SERVICE_GP
State: any
Log: no
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-80
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfdiagall
Example
Configure all the diagnostics for all the card slots.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > cnfdiagall enable disable light 22:30 -M-W
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-81
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfe164 justify
cnfe164 justify
Configure E.164 AESA Justification—PXM1
Use the cnfe164justify command to configure whether the E.164 AESAs with the E.164 AFI are
converted to the left or right-justified encoding format. The default is left-justified.
To ensure that PNNI searches the address correctly, all nodes in the PNNI network must be set for the
same justification.
Syntax
cnfe164justify {left | right}
Syntax Description
left | right
Convert E.164 AESAs with the E.164 AFI to the left or right.
Default: left
Related Commands
None
Attributes
Access level: SUPER_GP
State: active
Log: log
Example
Configure the E.164 AESAs with the E.164 AFI to be converted to the left-justified encoding format.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > cnfe164justify left
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Example
Configure the E.164 AESAs with the E.164 AFI to be converted to the right-justified encoding format.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > cnfe164justify right
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-82
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfenhiisp
cnfenhiisp
Configure Enhanced IISP—PXM1
Use the cnfenhiisp command to enable or disable the enhanced IISP features on a port. This command
is used only on an IISP port, regardless of the state of the port. The new configuration applies to new
incoming calls while existing calls remain intact.
Currently only the support of VBR-rt service category is controlled by this command. If the support is
enabled on the port, the VBR-rt service category, which uses an illegal combination of traffic parameters
in the Broadband Bearer Capability (BBC) IE, is transported across the IISP port without any
modification.
Syntax
cnfenhiisp <portid> {yes | no}
Syntax Description
portid
Interface ID in the form of [shelf.]slot[:subslot].port[:subport].
yes | no
Enables or disables the support of the enhanced IISP on the port.
Default: no
Related Commands
dspenhiisp
Attributes
Access level: GROUP1
State: active
Log: log
Example
Enable the support of the enhanced IISP on port 1.6.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > cnfenhiisp 1.6 yes
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Example
Disable the support of the enhanced IISP on port 1.6.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > cnfenhiisp 1.6 no
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-83
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnffltset
cnffltset
Configure Filter Set—PXM1
Use the cnffltset command to configure or modify an existing filter set. The configuration is in the form
of adding more addresses to the filter set, or changing the access mode or address field of a filter set
entry.
Syntax
cnffltset <name>{-address template -length length [-plan {e164 | nsap}][-list {calling | called}]}
[-index number] [-accessMode {permit | deny}]
Syntax Description
name
Name of the filter set, consisting up to 29 characters.
-address
template: The NSAP address, consisting of 1–40 digits, or the E.164 address,
consisting of 1–15 digits. The address template can have prefix address digits
followed by a trailing string “...” in which case, only the prefix part of the address
is considered in the address pattern match. Likewise, the address template can have
an initial string “...” followed by address digits, in which case, the trailing address
digits are alone considered in the address pattern match. An address template can
contain the character “*” in which case, that digit is not considered in the address
pattern match.
The address can be added to an existing filter set.
The default is modifying the -accessMode field of a filter element, using only the
index, in which case the address field is not necessary.
-length
Length in bits (if NSAP) or bytes (if E.164). If the address template consists of the
string “...” or the character “*” the length field contents do not matter.
A length must be specified if the address is specified.
-plan
Address plan, either E.164 or NSAP. Use this parameter only if the address field is
also specified.
Default: nsap
-list
Specifies the address list which is either calling or called. You can specify this
field only if you also specify the address field.
Default: calling
-index number
Determines the order in which the address entries in a filter are set.
Range: 1–65535
Default: 1
-accessMode
Indicates whether or not to accept (permit) or reject (deny) a call on the port if the
address pattern-matching succeeds.
Default: permit
Related Commands
delfltset, dspfltset
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-84
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnffltset
Attributes
Access level: SUPER_GP
State: active
Log: log
Example
pnnises1.1.PXM.a > cnffltset firstfilter -address
4712345678901234567890123456789012345678
-length 160 -plan nsap -list calling -index 1 -accessMode deny
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-85
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfilmienable
cnfilmienable
Configure ILMI Enable—PXM1
Use the cnfilmienable command to enable ILMI on a PNNI port. Prior to the cnfilmienable command,
you must use the dnpnport command to de-activate the port.
Syntax
cnfilmienable <portid> [yes | no]
Syntax Description
portid
PNNI logical port, in the format [shelf.]slot[:subslot].port[:subport]. Using the short
form where only the mandatory elements are appropriate, the port ID has the format
slot.port.
yes | no
Enables or disables ILMI on the switch. Enter yes to enable or no to disable.
Default: yes
Related Commands
None
Attributes
Access level: GROUP1
State: active
Log: log
Example
Show the cnfilmienable command line that enables ILMI on a PNNI port. Before you enter this
command, you must use the dnpnport command to take down PNNI on that port.
spirita.2.PXM.a > dspilmi 1:1.1:1
INFO: No ilmi address registered
spirita.2.PXM.a > dnpnport 1:1.1:1
spirita.2.PXM.a > cnfilmienable 1:1.1:1 yes
spirita.2.PXM.a > uppnport 1:1.1:1
spirita.2.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-86
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfilmiproto
cnfilmiproto
Configure ILMI Protocol—PXM1
Use the cnfilmiproto command to configure how PNNI reacts to ILMI events that occur on the VSI slave
(a service module). Use the dsppnilmi command to confirm changes to the configuration.
Syntax
cnfilmiproto <portid> [-securelink {yes | no}][-attachmentpoint {yes | no]
[-modlocalattrstd {yes | no]
Syntax Description
portid
Identifies a PNNI physical port in the form of
[shelf.]slot[:subslot].port[:subport].
-securelink
Sets the flag -securelink to make PNNI release the call if it loses the connection
to the ILMI slave. The following options are
•
no: do not enable the ILMI secure link protocol.
•
yes: disable the ILMI secure link protocol.
Default: yes
-attachmentpoint
Sets the flag -attachmentpoint to make PNNI release the call if the slave ILMI
session sees changes in peer information, for example, the system name or
system ID. The following options are
•
no: do not enable the detection loss of the attachmentpoint flag.
•
yes: enable the detection loss of the attachmentpoint flag.
Default: yes
-modlocalattrstd
Sets the flag -modlocalattrstd to make PNNI release the call if the slave ILMI
sees the ATM layer (partition resource) changes, for example, VPI or VCI. The
following options are
•
no: disable the ILMI standard procedure for modification of the local ATM
parameter.
•
yes: enable the ILMI standard procedure for modification of the local ATM
parameter.
Default: yes
Related Commands
cnfilmienable, dsppnilmi
Attributes
Access level: GROUP1
State: active
Log: log
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-87
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfilmiproto
Example
Configure the ILMI protocol port 1.6. The -securelink, -attachmentpoint, and -modlocattrstd flags are
enabled.
spirita.1.PXM.a > cnfilmiproto 1.6 -securelink yes -attachmentpoint yes -modlocalattrstd
yes
spirita.1.PXM.a >
Example
Verify the results by entering the dsppnilmi command for port 1.6.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dsppnilmi 1.6
Port: 1.6
Port Type: Private UNI
Autoconfig: disable
UCSM: disable
Secure Link Protocol: enable
Change of Attachment Point Procedures: enable
Modification of Local Attributes Standard Procedure:
Addressreg: disable
VPI:
0
VCI:
0
Max Prefix:
0
Total Prefix:
0
Max Address:
0
Total Address:
0
Resync State:
0
Node Prefix: yes
Peer Port Id:
0
System_Id : 0.0.0.0.0.0
Peer Addressreg: disable
Peer Ip Address : 0.0.0.0
Peer Interface Name :
ILMI Link State : Disable
ILMI Version : ilmi40
INFO:
No Prefix registered
INFO:
No ilmi address registered
Side:
network
enable
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-88
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfintfcongth
cnfintfcongth
Configure Interface Congestion Thresholds—PXM1
Use the cnfintfcongth command to set interface congestion thresholds parameters for a logical port. The
thresholds apply to incoming calls and status enquiries. When the upper congestion limit is reached, the
port can block incoming calls and adjust the pace of status enquiries.
Note
You must specify at least one keyword.
Syntax
cnfintfcongth <portid> [-setuphi {setupHiThreshold}]]
[-unackedStatEnqLo unackedStatEnqLothreshold]
[-unackedStatEnqHi unackedStatEnqrHithreshold]
Syntax Description
portid
Specifies the interface ID in the form of [shelf.]slot[:subslot].port[:subport].
-setuphi
Determines the number of connection setup messages per second. Above this
number, the condition of setup messages on the interface is congested.
Range: 1–105 cps
Default: 100 cps
-unackedStatEnqLo
Determines the number of status enquires yet to be acknowledged by the
peer-to peer interface. Below this value, the congestion condition for status
enquiries at the interface level is dropped.
Range: 1–500 messages
Default: 40
-unackedStatEnqHi
Determines the number of status enquires yet to be acknowledged by the
peer-to-peer interface. When this threshold is reached, the interface is
considered to be congested with status enquiries.
Range: 1–500 messages
Default: 100
Related Commands
dspintfcongth
Attributes
Access level: GROUP1
State: active
Log: log
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-89
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfintfcongth
Example
Configure a congestion threshold of 100 cps for setup messages for port 1.5.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > cnfintfcongth 1.5 -setuphi 100
Example
Verify the results by entering the dspintfcongth command.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dspintfcongth 1.5
Congestion Thresholds for port : 1.5
Parameter
--------setuphi
unackedStatEnqLo
unackedStatEnqHi
Value
----100
40
100
unit
---cps
messages
messages
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Example
Set the status enquiries low to 50 cps and the high to 60 cps.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > cnfintfcongth 1.5 -unackedstatenqlo 50 -unackedstatenqhi 60
Example
Verify the results by entering the dspintfcongth command.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dspintfcongth 1.5
Congestion Thresholds for port : 1.5
Parameter
--------setuphi
unackedStatEnqLo
unackedStatEnqHi
Value
----100
50
60
unit
---cps
messages
messages
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-90
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfintvsvd
cnfintvsvd
Configure Interface VS/VD—PXM1
Use the cnfintvsvd command to enable the internal or external virtual source/virtual destination
(VS/VD) on a PNNI port. This command is used for SVC calls only and only for configuring ABR
parameters. The cnfintvsvd command applies to ports configured for UNI 4.0 or higher. The port must
be administratively down. For more information, see the dnpnport command.
Syntax
cnfintfvsvd <portid> [-internal {off |on | unspecified}][-external {off | on | unspecified}]
Syntax Description
portid
Identifies a PNNI physical port and has the format [shelf.]slot:subslot.port:subport.
-internal
Indicates the internal loop for VS/VD.
Default: unspecified
The following are the options:
Parameter
Description
off
At the port level, the VS/VD service for available bit rate (ABR)
connections is disabled. Therefore, for an ABR connection to have
VS/VD support, you must use to enable it.
on
At the port level, the VS/VD service for ABR connections is
enabled. Therefore, all ABR connections on the port have VS/VD
support. If you do not want a particular ABR connection to have
VS/VD, you must use to disable it for that connection.
unspecified
The port defaults to the VS/VD capability for the specific port-level
SCT.
Default: off
-external
Indicates the external loop for VS/VD.
The following options are
Parameter
Description
off
At the port level, the VS/VD service for ABR connections is
disabled. Therefore, for an ABR connection to have VS/VD
support, you must use to enable it.
on
At the port level, the VS/VD service for ABR connections is
enabled. Therefore, all ABR connections on the port have VS/VD
support. If you do not want a particular ABR connection to have
VS/VD, you must use to disable it for that connection.
unspecified
The port defaults to the VS/VD capability for the specific port-level
SCT.
Default: off
Related Commands
addfltset, delfltset, dspfltset
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-91
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfintvsvd
Attributes
Access level: GROUP1
State: active
Log:
Examples
Example 1 :
Failure to set VSVD because of port up
pnnises1.1.PXM.a > cnfintfvsvd 11.1 -internal on
ERROR: Port is not out-of-service
Syntax: cnfintfvsvd <portid>
[-internal {off|on|unspecified}]
[-external {off|on|unspecified}]
shelf.slot:subslot.port:subport -- [shelf.]slot[:subslot].port[:subport]default=Mandatory
Parameter; shelf -- valid value = 0
internal -- internal {off|on|unspecified (default =unspecified)}
external -- internal {off|on|unspecified (default = unspecified)}
Example 2 :
Failure to set VSVD because of non UNI4.0 ports
pnnises1.1.PXM.a > cnfintfvsvd 10.1 -internal on
ERROR: Cannot set vs/vd on a UNI3.0/UNI3.1/IISP interfaceTo turn on the VSVD for the port
pnnises1.1.PXM.a > cnfintfvsvd 1.3 -internal on
Example 3 :
To turn on the VSVD for the port
pnnises1.1.PXM.a > cnfintfvsvd 1.3 -internal on
pnnises1.1.PXM.a > dsppnport 1.3
Port:
IF status:
VSVD Internal Loop:
VSVD External Loop:
UCSM:
Auto-config:
IF-side:
UniType:
PassAlongCapab:
Input filter:
minSvccVpi:
minSvccVci:
minSvpcVpi:
p2p :
p2mp:
p2p :
p2mp:
1.3
up
on
unspecified
enable
enable
network
private
n/a
0
0
35
1
Logical ID:
Admin Status:
66304
up
SVC Routing Pri:
Addrs-reg:
IF-type:
Version:
8
enable
uni
uni4.0
Output filter:
maxSvccVpi:
maxSvccVci:
maxSvpcVpi:
0
255
65535
255
(P=Configured Persistent Pep, NP=Non-Persistent Pep,
#Spvc-P: #Spvc-NP: #SpvcAct: #Spvp-P: #Spvp-NP:
3000
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
#Svcc:
#Svpc:
#Ctrl:
Total:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Type <CR> to continue, Q<CR> to stop:
Total:
Act=Active)
#SpvpAct:
0
0
0
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-92
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnflmitrace
cnflmitrace
Configure LMI Trace—PXM1
Use this command to see the LMI messages exchanged between two nodes for each configured LMI
trunk.
The messages can be one of five different types, with corresponding hex codes: STATUS_REPORT
(0x7E), STATUS_ENQUIRY (0x76), UPDATE_STATUS (0x77), STATUS_ACK (0x7F) and
NODE_STATUS (0x7A). The logical trunk numbers are 0 based. For example, if the dsplmilink
command shows the trunk id to be 1.1 (slot.port), then the logical trunk number is (port-1) i.e. 0
The direction indicates whether to log LMI messages that are being received by the local node, or those
being transmitted, or both.h.
Syntax
cnflmitrace <BufWrap> <TrcEnable> <FuncCode> <Ltrk> <Dir>
Syntax Description
BufWrap
Enables or disables the buffer wrap. Enter yes to enable the buffer, or no to disable it.
TrcEnable
Enables or disables the LMI trace. Enter yes to enable the LMI trace, or no to disable
it.
FuncCode
String of function codes in HEX separated by commas.
Ltrk
String of trunk numbers in HEX, separated by commas.
Dir
Direction to be traced.
Related Commands
clrlmistats, clrlmitrace, dsplmistats, dsplmitrace
Attributes
Access level: CISCO_GP
State: any
Log: no
Example
mpgses1.1.PXM.a > cnflmitrace Yes Yes 0x7A,0x7E 0 *
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-93
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfloginmsg
cnfloginmsg
Configure Login Message—PXM1
Use the cnfloginmsg command to create a message that appears when any user logs into the switch. The
CLI prompts you for a login message. The maximum length is 500 characters. Also, the CLI instructs
you to terminate a message by putting a period on line with no other characters on that line.
Syntax
cnfloginmsg
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
clrloginmsg, dsploginmsg
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: all
Log: no
Example
Create the following login message:
Note
Complete the message by typing a period on the next line.
Call system administrator before using this switch
.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > cnfloginmsg
Enter new Login Message (Less than 500 characters)
To complete message enter a line with only a "."
Call system administrator before using this switch
.
Following message will be displayed when user logs in :
Call system administrator before using this switch
Confirm entry of new message Y/N:(N) y
Storing changed Login message
Example
Check the message by entering the dsploginmsg command.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dsploginmsg
Call system administrator before using this switch
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-94
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfmbsdft
cnfmbsdft
Configure the MBS Default—PXM1
Use the cnfmbsdft command to modify the default MBS for SPVCs on a port. The applicable service
types are real-time and nonreal-time variable bit rate (rt-VBR and nrt-VBR).
The most likely connection type where you would use the cnfmbsdft command is SVC. You can also
rely on the value set with this command as a default SPVCs if you do not specify an MBS through the
addcon command for each SPVC of service type VBR.
The new configuration applies to new incoming calls while existing calls remain intact. The cnfmbsdft
command is used regardless of the state of the port.
Syntax
cnfmbsdft <portid> <service_category> [num-of-cell]
Syntax Description
portid
Identifies a PNNI physical port in the form of
[shelf.]slot[:subslot].port[:subport].
service_category
ATM 4.0 service category. Enter one of the following options:
num-of-cell
•
cbr = constant bit rate
•
rtvbr = real time variable bit rate
•
nrtvbr = non-real time variable bit rate
•
ubr = unspecified bit rate
•
abr = available bit rate
Determines the integer in the range of 1–5,000,000. The MBS is expressed in
cells.
If this parameter is not specified, the default is either used or restored.
Range: 0–2147483647 cells.
Default: 1024 cells
Related Commands
dspmbsdft
Attributes
Access level: GROUP1
State: active
Log: log
Example
Configure the MBS default to be 1000 cells for nrt-vbr for port 2.3.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > cnfmbsdft 2.3 nrtvbr 1000
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-95
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfmbsdft
Example
Verify the results by entering the dspmbsdft command for port 2.3.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dspmbsdft 2.3
MBS:
rt-vbr:
1024
nrt-vbr:
1000
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Example
Configure the MBS default to be 900 cells for rt-vbr for port 2.3.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > cnfmbsdft 2.3 rtvbr 900
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Example
Verify the results by entering the dspmbsdft command for port 2.3.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dspmbsdft 2.3
MBS:
rt-vbr:
900
nrt-vbr:
1000
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-96
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfname
cnfname
Configure Name—PXM1
Use the cnfname command to set the name of the SES PNNI node. This name cannot be propagated
throughout the network.
Syntax
cnfname <name>
Syntax Description
name
Name of the SES PNNI node that consists of up to 8 alpha-numeric characters.
Related Commands
None
Attributes
Access level: SUPER_GP
State: active
Log: log
Example
Configure the node name for the switch.
spirita.1.PXM.a > cnfname NewName
cnfname: Configured this node name to NewName Successfully.
NewName.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-97
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfndparms
cnfndparms
Configure Node Parameters—PXM1
Use the cnfndparms command to specify numerical values or to enable a set of node-level parameters.
The cnfndparms command has parameters that consist of an option number, a value, or a yes or no
option. The configuration resides in nonvolatile RAM and utilizes a system reset or power cycle.
For information on related alarms, see dspenvalms and dspndalms commands.
Syntax
cnfndparms <option_number> <option_value>
Syntax Description
option_number A number that selects an option. The current number range is 1–8. If you do not enter
an option number, the interface displays all options. If you enter an option number
but no value, the interface prompts for appropriate input.
The following are the eight option numbers:
Option
Description
1
Specifies the card reset sliding window in seconds. The number of seconds
to count the resets of the shelf management cards. A value of 0 means an
infinite time period. The impact of an infinite time period is that only a
specified count of resets can stop the resets.
Range: 0–65355 (16-bit decimal number)
Default: 3600 sec (1 hour)
2
Specifies the maximum card reset per window. The maximum number of
resets of the shelf management card group per time period. You can specify
the time period with option 1. The meaning of the value of 0 for this
parameter is an infinite number of resets per time period.
Range: 0–255
Default: 3 resets per period
3
Enables or disables core card core redundancy. Enter yes to enable or no to
disable alarms on a missing, redundant core card. Because the default is
enable, the alarm appears when a redundant core card is not installed.
Default: enable
4
Enables or disables the expanded memory on PXM45B. Enter yes to enable
or no to disable. When you enable expanded memory, the system responds
with the following message:
More connections and interfaces can be added.
Default: disable
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-98
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfndparms
option_number 5
Specifies the required power supply module bitmap. The locations are
identified for the required power supplies in an AC-powered system. The
following are the 8-bit hexadecimal types:
•
0x0: The default means that no specified power supply requirement is
related to this particular form of alarm generation. But the
configuration must still meet the power requirements of the switch.
•
0x01: PSU A1 is required.
•
0x02: PSU A2 is required.
•
0x04: PSU A3 is required.
•
0x10: PSU B1 is required.
•
0x20: PSU B2 is required.
•
0x40: PSU B3 is required.
Default: 0x0
6
Specifies the trap manager aging timeout value in hours. The node
configuration occurs before the trap manager registration is deleted. The
default value of 0 means no aging takes place. Therefore, to delete a
particular trap manager, you can enter the deltrapmgr command.
Range: any integer
Default: 0
7
Specifies the primary IP interface for network management. The primary
interface type is discovered by CWM ILMI node discovery mechanism. The
following are the range of values for option 7:
•
0: The atm0 interface will be the primary.
•
1: No interface will be used. This prevents ILMI Node Discovery.
•
2: The lnPci0 interface will be the primary.
Default: 0
8
option_value
Specifies the secondary IP interface for network management. The IP
address of the secondary IP interface is sent with the primary IP address to
other MGX nodes. CWM can then discover both IP addresses from any
node.
The option value can be a decimal or hexadecimal number or a yes or no entry. The
following are the possible ranges or values for each type of numeric option:
•
8-bit decimal: 0–255
•
16-bit decimal: 0–65535
•
32-bit decimal: 0–4294962795
•
8-bit hexadecimal: 0–0xff
•
16-bit hexadecimal: 0–0xffff
•
32-bit hexadecimal: 0–0xffffffff
Related Commands
dspndparms, dspndalms, dspenvalms
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-99
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfndparms
Attributes
Access level: SUPER_GP
State: active
Log: no
Example
Enter the cnfndparms command without an option number and note the response. Specify a LAN
interface for the secondary network management interface.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > cnfndparms
SES_SJ
SES-CNTL
NODE CONFIGURATION OPTIONS
Opt# Value
Type
---- -------1
3600
16bit Decimal
2
3
8bit Decimal
3
Yes
Boolean
4
0x0
8bit Hex
5
0
8bit Decimal
6
atm0
8bit Decimal
7
lnPci0
8bit Decimal
System Rev: 03.00
Jan. 31, 2002 23:14:43 GMT
Node Alarm: NONE
Description
----------SHM Card Reset Sliding Window (secs)
SHM Max Card Resets Per Window (0 = infinite)
Core Redundancy Enabled
Required Power Supply Module Bitmap
Trap Manager Aging timeout value(Hour(s))
Primary IP interface for Netmgmt
Secondary IP interface for Netmgmt
Enter option number (1-7): 8
ERR: Option number 8 not in range 1-7
Syntax: cnfndparms <option_number> <option_value>
<option_number>
- number of option to configure
use dspndparms to see valid options
<option_value>
- value for option
if option is boolean:
(Y/N)
if option is 8bit Decimal: (0 - 255)
if option is 16bit Decimal: (0 - 65535)
if option is 32bit Decimal: (0 - 4294962795)
if option is 8bit Hex:
(0 - 0xff)
if option is 16bit Hex:
(0 - 0xffff)
if option is 32bit Hex:
(0 - 0xffffffff)
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-100
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfnodalcongth
cnfnodalcongth
Configure the Nodal congestion Threshold—PXM1
Use the cnfnodalcongth command to set nodal congestion threshold parameters. The thresholds relate
to call setup messages. stauts enquiries, queue levels, and so forth. You must specify at least one optional
parameter.
Syntax
cnfnodalcongth [-setuphi <value>] [-statenqlo <value>] [-statenqhi <value>][-connpendlo <value>]
[-connpendhi <value>] [-incompjour <value>][-vsiqmild <value>] [-vsiqmedium <value>]
[-vsiqsevere <value>]
Syntax Description
-setuphi
The number of connection setup message per second, above which setup
messages are dropped within a second.
Range: 1–105 cps
Default: 100
-statenqlo
The number of status enquiry message per second, below which the status
enquiry congestion condition abates.
Range: 1–500 cps
Default: 100 cps
-statenqhi
The number of connection setup messages per second, above which the
status enquiry congestion condition sets in.
Range: 1–500 cps
Default: 200 cps
-connpendlo
The aggregate number of connections in the establishment phase below
which the establishment congestion abates.
Range: 1–1000 connections
Default: 400 connections
-connpendhi
The aggregate number of connections in the establishment phase above
which the establishment congestion sets in.
Range: 1–1000 connections
Default: 500 connections
-incompjour
The number of incomplete journaling cycles above which the journaling
speed is increased.
Range: 1–10 cycles
Default: 5 cycles
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-101
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfnodalcongth
-vsiqmild
The Q depth above which VSI master is mildly congested. This is
represented as a percentage of VSI master-slave communication window
size. This threshold is applicable to all the interfaces in the node.
Range:1–175
Default: 5
-vsiqmedium
The Q depth above which VSI master is congested at a medium level. This
is represented as a percentage of VSI master-slave communication window
size. This threshold is applicable to all the interfaces in the node.
Range: 1–175
Default: 10
-vsiqsevere
The Q depth above which VSI master is severely congested. This is
represented as a percentage of VSI master-slave communication window
size. This threshold is applicable to all the interfaces in the node.
Range: 1–175
Default: 20
Related Commands
dspnodalcongth
Attributes
Access level: SUPER_GP
State: active
Log: log
Example
Configure the nodal length threshold with the applicable setup and status enquiry messages.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > cnfnodalcongth -setuphi 80 -vsiqmild 100 -vsiqmedium 140 -vsiqsevere 175
Example
Verify the results by entering the dspnodalcongth command.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dspnodalcongth
Parameter
Value
Unit
=================================
setuphi(prov)
80
cps
setuphi(curr)
80
cps
statenqlo
100
cps
statenqhi
200
cps
connpendlo
400
messages
connpendhi
500
messages
incompjour
5
cycles
vsiqmild
100
multiplier
vsiqmedium
140
multiplier
vsiqsevere
175
multiplier
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-102
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfnodalfd
cnfnodalfd
Configure Nodal Frame Discard—PXM1
Use the cnfnodalfd command to install or not to install frame discard if the AAL5 IE is present. This
changes the information used by the switch when determining whether or not to install frame discard on
SVCs. UNI 4.0 signaling allows explicit signaling of frame discard. Prior to UNI 4.0, the presence of the
AAL5 IE was used to determine whether or not to install frame discard. If the AAL5 IE is present, frame
discard is installed. However, UNI 4.0 signaling element controlling frame discard overrides the
configuration specifying to use AAL5 IE.
Note
The default is to install the frame discard on the presence of the AAL5 IE in the SETUP message.
Syntax
cnfnodalfd <enable | disable>
Syntax Description
enable | disable
Enables or disables the installation of frame discard on the presence of the
AAL5 IE.
Default: enable
Related Commands
dspnodalfd
Attributes
Access level: SUPER_GP
State: active
Log: log
Example
Install frame discard on the presence of the AAL5 IE.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > cnfnodalfd enable
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Example
Disable the frame discard on the presence of the AAL5 IE.
Note
Do not install frame discard on the presence of the AAL5 IE.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > cnfnodalfd disable
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-103
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfpasswd
cnfpasswd
Configure Password—PXM1
Use the cnfpasswd command to change your own password. After the cnfpasswd command is entered,
the switch prompts you to enter the new password. Then, you are prompted to reenter the password
again.
Syntax
cnfpasswd
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
adduser, cnfuser, dspusers
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: active
Log: no
Example
Change your password. After you enter the cnfpasswd command, the switch prompts you to enter a new
password and reenter it again.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > cnfpasswd
Enter existing password:
Enter new password:
Re-enter new password:
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-104
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfpri-routing
cnfpri-routing
Configure Priority Routing—PXM1
Use the cnfpri-routing command to configure the number of bandwidth groups, the size of the first
bandwidth group, and the increment between the successive groups. The cnfpri-routing command also
configures the size of the routing event buffer as well as the delay before connections are routed during
node startup.
The first bandwidth group contains connections for the bandwidth requirements that are below the start
parameter. Each of the bandwidth groups contains connections for the bandwidth parameters that are
more than the previous bandwidth group at or below the sum of the previous bandwidth group upper
bound and the incr parameter. The last bandwidth group, which is specified by the grps parameter,
contains all remaining connections that do not fit into any of the previous groups. Connections in the last
bandwidth group, which require the most bandwidth, are routed as well as derouted ahead of connections
in earlier bandwidth groups when the priority of the connections is the same.
Note
The cnfpri-routing command fails if there are no connections pending to be rerouted.
For a long period of time, both time and delay parameters are recommended to be set at 1 sec and 5 sec,
which helps with setting more effective connections.
Syntax
cnfpri-routing [-bwstart <start>] [-bwincr <incr>][-pribuf <time>]
[-nodebuf <delay>]
Syntax Description
-bwstart
Defines the upper bound of the first bandwidth group. The start parameter is the upper
bound bandwidth of the first bandwidth group.
Range: 1–500000 cps
Default: 5000 cps
-bwincr
Defines the bandwidth difference between successive groups. The incr parameter is the
increment between successive bandwidth groups.
Range: 1–500000 cps
Default: 1000 cps
-pribuf
Defines the waiting time between the first rerouting event and the actual rerouting event.
The time parameter is the buffering time between the arrival of the first rerouting event
and the actual rerouting event.
Range: 0–60 sec
Default: 0 sec
-nodebuf
Defines the waiting time after the first interface came up until the SPVC rerouting
commences during the node rebuild. The delay parameter is the waiting time between
the first interface and the commencement of the SPVC.
Range: 0–300 sec
Default: 0 sec
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-105
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfpri-routing
Related Commands
addcon, cnfcon, dspcon, dspcons, cnfpnportsig, dsppnportsig, dsppncon, dsppncon,
dsppri-routing
Attributes
Access level: SUPER_GP
State: active
Log: log
Example
Configure the upper bound bandwidth to start at 500 cps, and the increment for the bandwidth groups is
set to 100 cps. Then, set the buffering time to be 10 sec and the waiting time to be 50 sec.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > cnfpri-routing -bwstart 500 -bwincr 100
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > cnfpri-routing -pribuf 10 -nodebuf 50
Example
Verify the priority routing results by entering the dsppri-routing command.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dsppri-routing
Priority Routing Configuration
-------------------------------Number of bandwidth groups: 50
Size of first bandwidth group (in cps): 500
Increment between bandwidth groups (in cps): 100
Routing event buffer size (in 0.1-seconds): 10
Node startup routing delay (in 0.1-seconds): 50
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-106
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfoamsegep
cnfoamsegep
Configure an OAM Segment Endpoint—PXM1
Use the cnfoamsegep command to define a specified port as a segment endpoint for F4 and F5 OAM
flow. This command does not take effect for existing connections. It takes effect only for newly
established calls. The cnfoamsegep command is used regardless of the state of the port.
Syntax
cnfoamsegep <portid> [yes | no]
Syntax Description
portid
Interface ID in the form of [shelf.]slot[:subslot].port[:subport].
yes
The specified port is configured as a segment endpoint, and is a segment endpoint for
all connections on this port.
no
The specified port is not a segment endpoint.
Default: no
Related Commands
cnfconsegep, delconsegep, dspoamsegep
Attributes
Access level: GROUP1
State: active
Log: log
Example
Configure a port as a segment endpoint.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > cnfoamsegep 2.3 yes
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Example
Verify the results to enable the OAM segment endpoint by entering the dspoamsegep command for
port 2.3.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dspoamsegep 2.3
Port
2.3
OAM End Point
Yes
Example
Configure a port 2.3 so it is not a segment endpoint.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > cnfoamsegep 2.3 no
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-107
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfoamsegep
Example
Verify the results to disable the OAM segment endpoint by entering the dspoamsegep command for
port 2.3.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dspoamsegep 2.3
Port
2.3
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
OAM End Point
No
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-108
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfpnctlvc
cnfpnctlvc
Configure PNNI Control VC—PXM1
Use the cnfpnctlvc command to configure bandwidth parameters for two types of control channels on a
port. The types of control channels are service-specific connection-oriented protocol (SSCOP) or PNNI
routing control channel (PNNI-RCC). You can enter this command for one VC type at a time.
Before using the cnfpnctlvc command, note the following issues:
•
You can enter the cnfpnctlvc command for one type of control VC at a time.
•
A control VC belongs to a special service type called virtual switch interface signaling (VSI-SIG).
•
The port must be down for you to enter the cnfpnctlvc command.
Note
•
First, you may have to enter the dnppnport command.
The bandwidth used by control-type VCs (including ILMI, when enabled) adds to the bandwidth
load on the port. Enter the dspload command to determine the load on port resources.
The VC for ILMI is also a control channel, but its bandwidth parameters are fixed. The following
are the values for the parameters:
– PCR: 1000 cps
– SCR: 50 cps
– MBS: 1024 cells
Syntax
cnfpnctlvc <portid> <vc-type> -pcr <pcr> -scr <scr> -mbs <mbs>
Syntax Description
portid
PNNI logical port, in the format [shelf.]slot[:subslot].port[:subport]. Using the short
form where only the mandatory elements are appropriate, the portid has the format
slot.port.
vc-type
The type of control VC to be configured. Enter pnnircc or sscop.
-pcr
Peak cell rate for the control VC.
Range: 1–5000 cps
Defaults:
•
If the vc-type is pnnircc, the default is 906 cps.
•
If the vc-type is sscop, the default is 1500 cps.
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-109
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfpnctlvc
-scr
The sustained cell rate of the control VC.
Range: 1–5000
Defaults:
-mbs
•
If the vc-type is pnnircc, the default is 453 cps.
•
If the vc-type is sscop, the default depends on the line rate.
The maximum burst size of the control VC.
Range: 1–1000 cells
Defaults:
•
If the vc-type is pnnircc, the default is 171 cells.
•
If the vc-type is sscop, the default is 1000 cells.
Related Commands
dsppnctlvc
Attributes
Access level: GROUP1
State: active
Log: log
Example
Change the MBS of the PNNI-RCC VC on port 2.3 to 100 cells. The switch returns the error message
that the port is still in service.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > cnfpnctlvc 2.3 sscop -mbs 100
ERROR: Port is not out-of-service
Example
Down port 2.3 by entering the dnpnport command. Enter the cnfpnctlvc command to complete the task.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dnpnport 2.3
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > cnfpnctlvc 2.3 sscop -mbs 100
cnfpnctlvc Successful
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-110
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfpnctlvc
Example
Verify the results by entering the dsppnctlvc command for port 2.3. One section of the display labeled
provisioned shows the configured parameters, and the other section shows the operational VC
parameters. The provisioned section reflects that you did not configure bandwidth parameters other
than MBS, and the operational section shows the actual bandwidth parameters, which includes the MBS
configuration.
Then, up port 2.3 by entering the uppnport command.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dsppnctlvc 2.3
vc type = pnnircc
service category : sig
SCR :
453
PCR :
MBS :
906
171
vc type = sscop
Parameter = Provisioned
service category : sig
PCR : Not Provisioned
SCR : Not Provisioned
MBS :
100
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > uppnport 2.3
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-111
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfpnni-election
cnfpnni-election
Configure PNNI PGL Election—PXM1
Use the cnfpnni-election command to specify the priority of a node for the purpose of electing a peer
group leader (PGL). By using this ranking, you can promote or prevent certain nodes for consideration
for PGL election.
In a multi-peer group environment, each peer group can elect one PGL. The election takes place for every
level of the hierarchy. For example, if three levels exist, three PGL elections occur. To ensure that a node
cannot win the PGL election, you can assign 0 for the priority.
Every node in a peer group runs the election algorithm—with one exception: a node with the nontransit
for PGL Election Flag set.
The following are the specifications that are needed for the cnfpnni-election command:
•
Number of seconds that the node delays advertising its choice of preferred PGL.
•
Number of seconds that the node waits to be declared the preferred PGL by unaminous agreement
among its peer group members.
•
Number of seconds that the node waits before it restarts the election of a new PGL after connectivity
to the current PGL is lost.
Syntax
cnfpnni-election <node-index> [-priority priority][-initTime init-time]
[-overrideDelay override-delay][-reelectionTime reelection-time]
Syntax Description
node-index
The node index to identify a PNNI logical node on a local switching system.
Range: 1–10
-priority
The PNNI leadership priority in a peer group.
Range: 1–20
Default: 0
-initTime
The amount of time, in seconds, this node will delay advertising its choice
of preferred PGL after initializing operation and reaching the full state with
at least one neighbor in the peer group.
Default: 15 sec
-overrideDelay
The amount of time, in seconds, a node will wait for itself to be declared the
preferred PGL by unanimous agreement among its peers.
Default: 30 sec
-reelectionTime
The amount of time, in seconds, after losing connectivity to the current peer
group leader that this node can wait before restarting the process of electing
a new peer group leader.
Default: 15 sec
Related Commands
dsppnni-election
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-112
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfpnni-election
Attributes
Access level: SUPER_GP
State: active
Log: log
Example
Specify the following PGL election parameters:
•
The node index is 1.
•
The node election priority is 15.
•
The Init
•
The node waits 20 sec before proclaiming itself the peer group leader.
•
If the node looses connection with the peer group leader for 15 sec, it starts the election process.
time
is 10 sec.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > cnfpnni-election 1 -priority 15 -initTime 10 -overrideDelay 20
-reelectionTime 15
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dsppnni-election
node index: 1
PGL state...... AwaitUnanimity
Priority.......
15
Init time(sec).......
10
Override delay(sec)..
20
Re-election time(sec)
15
Pref PGL...............56:160:47.009181000000003071f813a1.003071f813a1.01
PGL....................0:0:00.000000000000000000000000.000000000000.00
Active parent node id..0:0:00.000000000000000000000000.000000000000.00
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-113
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfpnni-intf
cnfpnni-intf
Configure PNNI Interface—PXM1
Use the cnfpnni-intf command to configure service category based administrative weight and
aggregation token on a PNNI interface.
Aggregation Tokens
An aggregation token is a marker that indicates which uplinks, for example, links going out of the peer
group, can be bundled or aggregated at the next logical level. If four links a, b, c, and d connect to peer
groups X and Y, no aggregation exists for the links by default. The LGNs of these peer groups can have
hypothetical names x02 and y02. They can be connected by a single logical link.
If you configure the aggregation token of link c as 1, x02 and y02 can have two logical links. One link
corresponds to aggregation token 0, and the other link corresponds to aggregation token 1. Overall, an
aggregation token is the number of links between a peer group leader and the lowest level of a PNNI
hierarchy. The range for tokens is 1–32.
Administrative Weight
The administrative weight (AW) is a number that serves as a cost-based determinant of a route. Each port
in a PNNI network has a default AW for the egress direction. Whether it uses the default AW or an AW
you specify, PNNI adds all the AWs in a prospective route then determines whether the route is too
expensive. For an SPVC, you can specify the maximum cost with the addcon command or the cnfcon
command.
You can specify that all classes of service on the port have the same AW, or you can specify an AW for
each service class on the port. If you specify the same AW for all, it overrides the default AW or the AW
you might specify for individual services types.
The AW for a path is the sum, in both directions, of the individual weight of each link on the path.
Syntax
cnfpnni-intf <portid> [-aggregationToken token][-awcbr aw][-awrtvbr aw][-awnrtvbr aw]
[-awabr aw][-awubr aw] [-awall aw]
Syntax Description
portid
Port identifier of the logical port, as selected by the PNNI protocol entity for
the specific interface. This value is meaningful only to the node associated
with the physical port. In the form of [shelf.]slot[:subslot].port[:subport]
-aggregationToken
Specifies a 32-bit number that is used for link aggregation purposes.
Range: 0–2147483648
Default = 0 (when interface is added)
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-114
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfpnni-intf
-awcbr
Specifies a 32-bit number that is used as administrative weight on this
interface. This value is applied to all QoS classes if aw l is specified.
Otherwise, this value is applied only to the single service class.
The maximum value is a 24-bit unsigned integer.
Range: 0–4,194,304
Default: 5040
-awrtvbr
Specify the administrative weight for real-time variable bit rate (rt-VBR) on
this interface.
Range: 0–4,194,304
Default: 5040
-awnrtvbr
Specify the administrative weight for non-real-time variable bit rate
(nrt-VBR) on this interface.
Range: 0–4,194,304
Default: 5040
-awabr
Specify the administrative weight for available bit rate (ABR) on this
interface.
Range: 0–4,194,304
Default: 5040
-awubr
Specify the administrative weight for unspecified bit rate (UBR) on this
interface. UBR connections can include SVC ping connections.
Range: 0–4,194,304
Default: 5040
-awall
Specify the administrative weight for all service types on this interface. If
you use -awall, this aw becomes the AW for every service type on this port.
Range: 0–4,194,304
Default: 5040
Related Commands
dsppnni-intf
Attributes
Access level: SUPER_GP
State: active
Log: log
Example
Specify the following AWs on port 2.3:
•
The AW for real time variable bit rate is 11040.
•
The AW for non-real time variable bit rate is 20040.
•
The AW for unspecified bit rate is 1040.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > cnfpnni-intf 2.3 -awrtvbr 11040 -awnrtvbr 20040 -awubr 1040
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-115
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfpnni-intf
Example
Verify the results by entering the dsppnni-intf command for port 2.3.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dsppnni-intf 2.3
Physical port id: 2.3
Aggr token..........
AW-CBR..............
AW-RTVBR............
0
5040
11040
Logical port id:
131840
AW-NRTVBR...........
20040
AW-ABR..............
5040
AW-UBR..............
1040
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-116
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfpnni-link-selection
cnfpnni-link-selection
Configure PNNI Link Selection—PXM1
Use the cnfpnni-link-selection command to specify which routing policies are used to select one of the
parallel links that connect a neighboring PNNI node. Neighboring node in this case means a directly
connected node. The cnfpnni-link-selection command applies only if parallel links exist between the
specified port and neighboring nodes.
Note
Link selection applies only to CBR and VBR connections. Preference is in the order of minaw,
maxavcr, txspeedmax , and load-balance in case the configuration options on the links disagree. In
case of equal value, the link is selected randomly.
For ABR and UBR connections, link is selected depend on (AvCR for ABR + AvCR for UBR)/(# of ABR
connections + # of UBR connections).
Syntax
cnfpnni-link-selection <portid> [minaw | maxavcr | maxcr | loadbalance]
Syntax Description
portid
Port identifier. In the form of [shelf.]slot[:subslot].port[:subport]
minaw
Use this option to select the link with the least administrative weight in the
egress direction.
Default:
maxavcr
minaw
policy
Use this option to select the link with the largest available cell rate (AvCR)
in the egress direction.
The AvCR is the remaining bandwidth after the total utilized bandwidth is
subtracted from the maximum cell rate (MaxCR).
The maxavcr policy works well for traffic that consistently requires a large
amount of bandwidth.
maxcr
Use this option to select the link with the largest maximum cell rate
(MaxCR) in the egress direction.
Typically, the MaxCR is the maximum speed of the line (or trunk).
Therefore, if one link traverses an OC3 line and another link traverses a T3
line, the MaxCR policy dictates that PNNI select the OC3 line. Only when
sufficient bandwidth does not exist on a line does the routing protocol switch
to AvCR.
The maxcr policy works well for bursty traffic.
loadbalance
Use this option to select random selection of the link.
The load balance policy works well with links that have identical or very
similar AW or bandwidth characteristics.
Related Commands
dsppnni-link-selection
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-117
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfpnni-link-selection
Attributes
Access level: SUPER_GP
State: active
Log: log
Example
Specify the maximum available cell rate as the routing policy for the link with port 2.3.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > cnfpnni-link-selection 2.3 maxavcr
Example
Use the dsppnni-link-selection command to see the link selection policy on this port.
Note
The dsppnni-link-selection command shows the logical port number for the physical port ID.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dsppnni-link-selection 2.3
physical port id:
logical port id:
2.3
131840
link selection: maxavcr
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-118
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfpnni-mtu
cnfpnni-mtu
Configure PNNI Maximum Transmit Unit—PXM1
Use the cnfpnni-mtu command to configure the maximum PNNI packet size in number of bytes. The
cnfpnni-mtu command is useful for internet working compatibility, which you must match the
maximum packet size of your peer group to a size that another peer group can handle. You can use the
cnfpnni-mtu command in lab trials to test the effect of various packet sizes on the performance of the
peer group.
Use the dsppnni-mtu command to display the PNNI packet size configuration.
Syntax
cnfpnni-mtu <mtu>
Syntax Description
mtu
Specifies the maximum transmit unit (MTU) in number of bytes.
Range: 2048–8192 bytes
Default: 2048
Related Commands
dsppnni-mtu
Attributes
Access level: SUPER_GP
State: active
Log: log
Example
Configure the maximum PNNI packet size to 3002 bytes.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > cnfpnni-mtu 3002
Example
Verify the results by entering the dsppnni-mtu command.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dsppnni-mtu
max packet size : 3002
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-119
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfpnni-node
cnfpnni-node
Configure PNNI Node—PXM1
Use the cnfpnni-node command to modify parameters for an existing PNNI node.
The node must be put into administratively disable status, before changing its ATM address, node ID,
peer group ID, or hierarchical level.
Note
When administratively disabling a PNNI logical node, all nodes at higher hierarchies must be
administratively disabled first.
The following are the functions of the node-level cnfpnni-node command:
•
Modify the parameters of an existing logical node.
•
Enable or disable a node. This ability applies to
– Parameters that require the node to be disabled before you can modify them (if you do not
modify parameters that require a disabled node, you can modify one or more parameters with
one execution of cnfpnni-node).
– A situation where you created the node in the disabled state with addpnni-node.
The following are the modifications for the node configuration and state parameters:
•
ATM address—requires the node to be disabled
•
Level of the node within the hierarchy—requires the node to be disabled
•
Node ID—requires the node to be disabled
•
Peer group ID—requires the node to be disabled
•
Whether the node is the lowest node in the hierarchy
•
State of the node—enabled or disabled
•
Whether connections can transit this node
•
Whether or not the node is complex
•
Whether the node supports point-to-multipoint connections
The preceding parameters appear as optional parameters in the syntax. The required parameter for this
command is the local node index. The local node index is a number in the range 1–10 that indicates the
level of the logical node within a multi-peer hierarchy on the switch. If you do not know the value of this
system-generated item, use the dsppnni-node command.
Disabling the Node for Parameters
For some of parameters, you must first disable the node. The following are the applicable parameters:
•
Level
•
ATM address
•
Node ID
•
Peer group ID
For these parameters, three executions of cnfpnni-node are necessary:
1.
cnfpnni-node -enable false
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-120
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfpnni-node
2.
cnfpnni-node (change parameters, including those that do not require a disabled node)
3.
cnfpnni-node -enable true
Be sure to synchronize applicable changes (such a change in level) throughout the network and follow
up with dsppnni-node or other applicable display commands.
Syntax
cnfpnni-node node-index [-atmAddr atm-address][-level level][-nodeId node-id]
[-pgId pg-id][-enable {true | false}] [-transitRestricted {on | off}] [-complexNode{on | off}]
[-branchingRestricted {on | off}]
Syntax Description
node-index
The node index assigned to a PNNI logical node within the hierarchy of a
multi-peer group. The lowest level is 1. Each new logical node added to the
hierarchy automatically gets the next higher index number so you cannot
configure the node index.
Range: 1–10
-atmAddr
Specifies the ATM address for this logical node. For you to change the ATM
address, the node must be disabled.
If not specified, the default value is used, Once assigned, it can be changed
only when the administrative status of the node is disabled.
Figure 3-1 shows the factory-set default.
-level
Specifies the level of the node within the PNNI hierarchy. The level of the
node is the number of bits in the node ID (-nodeId parameter) or peer group
ID (-pg-id parameter). For example, the default level of 56 means that the
node ID is 56 bits long. If you specify a level of 48, the node ID has a length
of 48 bits.
The maximum number of levels you can configure on a switch is 10. This
limit is meaningful in a multi-peer group only. Although the level can be any
value within the 1–104 range, selecting an 8-bit boundary makes network
planning and address management easier. For example, using 56 for a level
is more expedient than using a level of 59.
Range: 1–104 bits
Default: 56 bits
-nodeId
Specifies the PNNI node identifier assigned to a PNNI node. The node ID
consists of the PNNI hierarchy level (-level), followed by the length of the
ATM address (addaddr length), followed by the ATM address (-atmAddr).
As shown in Figure 3-1, node-id is a 22-byte, formatted hexadecimal string.
Note
Before you change the node ID, you must first use the cnfpnni-node
command one time with the parameter string -enable false to
disable the node.
Figure 3-1 shows the factory-set default.
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-121
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfpnni-node
-pgId
Specifies that all members of a peer group have the same peer group
identifier (pgID) and exist on the same level. (The level is either the existing
number of bits or whatever you specify with -level level).
The default value of level is 56 (7 bytes), which specifies the length of -pgId
to 7 bytes. However, the maximum length of -pgId is 14 bytes, so display
commands always show -pgId as 14 bytes with trailing zeros filling the
undefined fields. If you increase the value of level, you change the length,
and therefore the value, of -pgId, but it will always be displayed as 14 bytes.
Before you change the value of pg-id, disable the node by entering
cnfpnni-node -enable false.
This is a 14-byte, formatted hexadecimal string.
Figure 3-1 shows the factory-set default
-enable
Specifies the administrative status of the PNNI node. Before you change a
node ATM address, node ID, peer group ID, or hierarchical level, the node
must be disabled.
true: Enable the node.
false: Disable the node.
Default: true
-transitRestricted
Specifies whether connections can transit this node. You can disallow via
connections for security reasons, to minimize traffic supported by either a
low bandwidth node or a highly critical node, and so on.
on: This node allows via connections.
off: Via connections cannot transit this node.
Default: off
-complexNode
Specifies whether this node is a complex node. The lowest-level node
cannot be a complex node.
on: This node is a complex node.
off: This node is not a complex node.
Default: off
-branchingRestricted
Specifies whether the PNNI node allows point-to-multipoint branches.
on: This node does not allow point-to-multipoint branches.
off: This node allows point-to-multipoint branches.
Default: on
Note
Caution
You must keep the default values for -lowest, -complexNode, and -branchingRestricted.
Cisco factory-set defaults for address prefixes and the peer group ID share field values with the ATM
address. If you change the peer group ID, you should change the corresponding fields in the ATM
address and node identifier. See Figure 3-1 for the mapping between these addresses.
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-122
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfpnni-node
Figure 3-1
Cisco Factory-shipped Defaults for PNNI Peer Group Identifier, PNNI Summary Address,
ATM Address, and PNNI Node Identifier
ATM
address
ATM
format
address
Cisco
length
MAC address
MAC address
ICD
PNNI
hierarchy
56 160 47 00 91 81 00 00 00 XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX 00
level
Number
of bytes
1
1
2
1
1
3
6
6
1
Default PNNI
peer group identifier
Default PNNI
summary address
Default PNNI
node identifier
53346
Default ATM address
Related Commands
addpnni-node, delpnni-node, dsppnni-node
Attributes
Access level: SUPER_GP
State: active
Log: log
Example
Specifies the PNNI configuration values for a node that already exists on the network. The following are
the PNNI node configurations:
•
The PNNI hierarchy level is 56.
•
The node ATM address is 47.0091 8100000000309409f1f1.00309409f1f1.01.
•
The node PNNI identifier is 56:160:47.00918100000000309409f1f1.00309409f1f1.01.
•
The node PNNI group identifier is 56:47.009181.0000.00. The length specified by the hierarchy
level is 56 (8 bytes) the following 12 zeros are fill.
•
The node is at the lowest level of the network PNNI hierarchy.
•
The node is enabled.
•
The node does not permit traffic to cross it on the way to other nodes.
•
The node is not a complex node.
•
The node permits branching.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > cnfpnni-node 1 -level 56 -nodeId 56:160:47.009181000000003071f813a1.003071f813a1.01
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-123
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfpnni-node
-atmAddr 47.009181000000003071f813a1.003071f813a1.01 -pgId 56:47.00.9181.0000.0000.0000.0000.00 -lowest true
-enable true -transitRestricted off -complexNode off -branchingRestricted off
Example
Use dsppnni-node to display the PNNI configuration values.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dsppnni-node
node index: 1
node name: SES_SJ
Level...............
56
Lowest..............
true
Restricted transit..
off
Complex node........
off
Branching restricted
on
Admin status........
up
Operational status..
up
Non-transit for PGL election..
off
Node id...............56:160:47.009181000000003071f813a1.003071f813a1.01
ATM address...........47.009181000000003071f813a1.003071f813a1.01
Peer group id.........56:47.00.9181.0000.0000.0000.0000.00
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-124
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfpnni-pkttrace
cnfpnni-pkttrace
Configure PNNI Packet Trace—PXM1
The cnfpnni-pkttrace command applies to debugging. It causes the switch to check the PNNI packets
transmitted and received at each peer. For example, if an interface is not receiving user-traffic, you can
enter dsppnni-pktrace to display packet information that can help you find the level and type of
blockage.
The cnfpnni-pkttrace command specifies the trace command examines the contents of PNNI packets
exchanged between two neighboring nodes. A PNNI packet consists of a Hello packet and the topology
information packets.
Note
Executing the cnfpnni-pkttrace command can significantly increase operational overhead;
therefore, degrading network performance. You should consider executing this command while the
node carries little or no live traffic. If you enter cnfpnni-pkttrace while live traffic is present, you
can consider tracing the packets for one direction at a time (transmit or receive).
If you plan to use the optional -portId parameter but do not have the logical format of the port ID, use
the dsppnport command.
Syntax
cnfpnni-pkttrace {tx { on | off }|rx { on | off } [ node-index] [ -portId port-id |-svcIndex svc-index]]
Syntax Description
tx
Specifies whether the switch traces transmitted packets.
on: Trace the transmitted packets
off: Do not trace the transmitted packets
Default: (no default)
rx
Specifies whether the switch traces received packets.
on: Trace the received packets
off: Do not trace the received packets
Default: (no default)
node-index
The node index indicates the relative level of the logical node within a
multi-peer group on the switch.
Range: 1–10
-portId
The port ID in this instance has the format of the logical ID number. The format
is a 32-bit encoded number in the range 1–2147483648. If you do not have the
port ID in this form, use the dsppnport command and provide the common
portID format of slot[:subslot].port[:subport}. The output of the dsppnport
command shows the logical number for the port ID. Use this value for the
-portID parameter.
-svcIndex
PNNI uses the SVC index as a reference to the SVC-based, logical, horizontal
link. This parameter is meaningful only if you specify node-index.
Default: none
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-125
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfpnni-pkttrace
Related Commands
dsppnni-pkttrace, dsppnport, dsppnports
Attributes
Access level: SERVICE_GP
State: active
Log: log
Example
Configure the following contents of PNNI Hello packets:
•
The transmit packets are traced.
•
The packet trace occurs at node index of 1 (the default for cnfpnni-pkttrace and therefore omitted).
•
The packet trace takes place on the port identifier of 17504.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a
PNNI/tx_packet
> 01:00010064
> 02:09f3b801
> 03:81000000
> cnfpnni-pkttrace tx 17504
on port 17504 at level 56
01010100 000038a0 47009181
47009181 00000000 309409f3
00000000 000038a0 47009181
00000000
b8003094
00000000
309409f3
09f3b801
001a531c
b8003094
38470091
2a00001a
Example
Verify the trace by entering the dsppnni-pkttrace command.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dsppnni-pkttrace tx -portId 17504
Node Index :1
Port id:
17504
Tx Pkt Trace on
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-126
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfpnni-routing-policy
cnfpnni-routing-policy
Configure the PNNI Routing Policy—PXM1
Use the cnfpnni-routing-policy command to specify which routing policy values are used during UNI
call setup. Routing policies control PNNI routing for your network.
The following specifications are for the cnfpnni-routing-policy command:
•
Generating background routing tables
•
Load balancing
•
On-demand routing—applies to crankback or a situation where the node must route a call to a
destination for which no route exists in the pre-computed routing tables
The two dynamic routing protocols are shortest path and on-demand routing.
Background Routing Tables
The background routing tables contain all routes within the peer group. The routes are calculated from
information in the internal data base (IDB). When a topology change affects usable routes within the
peer group, a PNNI topology state packet carries the formation to each node so it can update its IDB.
The background routing tables are updated to reflect the change in routing parameters.
The following are generated (or pre-computed) to support routing based on the shortest path:
•
The AW background routing table stores the AWs for all routes.
•
The cell transfer delay (CTD) background routing table stores the CTD data for known routes.
•
The cell delay variation (CDV) background routing table stores the CDV data for known routes.
On-demand routing is used if any of the following occur:
Caution
•
All pre-computed routing tables are disabled.
•
A route does not appear in the precomputed routing tables.
•
Crankback is enabled within a designated transit list (DTL).
Poor routing policies can cripple or even crash a network. You should not change routing policies on
a deployed network unless you have carefully planned the changes and know how the changes can
affect the network.
Syntax
cnfpnni-routing-policy [-sptEpsilon epsilon][-sptHolddown holddown][-bnPathHolddown
bn-path-holddown] [-loadBalance {random | maxbw}] [-onDemand {firstfit | bestfit}]
[-awBgTable {on | off}] [-ctdBgTable {on | off}] [-cdvBgTable {on |off}]
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-127
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfpnni-routing-policy
Syntax Description
-sptEpsilon
The shortest path (SPT) epsilon you supply specifies a tolerance in the form
of a percent that can influence which paths qualify as equal-cost during route
calculation. A higher tolerance results in a broader range of path cost-values
that can qualify as equal-cost. If two paths have very similar administrative
weights (AWs), a large enough tolerance eliminates equal-cost as a routing
factor because the routing algorithm regards the costs as equal.
The range of 0–20 for this parameter comes from the ATM Forum PNNI
specification. However, the percent of tolerance that the numbers dictate is
determined by individual vendors.
Cisco currently maps the following percentages for the Cisco SES PNNI
Controller switch:
•
0: the total AWs along both directions of the route must be identical.
•
1–2: the total AWs along both directions of the route must be within
1.5%.
•
3–4: the total AWs along both directions of the route must be within
3.0%.
•
5–9: the total AWs along both directions of the route must be within
6.0%.
•
10–15: the total AWs along both directions of the route must be within
12.5%.
•
16–20: the total AWs along both directions of the route must be within
25.0%.
Range: 0–20
Default: 0 (exact match required)
-sptHolddown
The interval between two consecutive calculations for generating routing
tables. If a network is stable, it may not be necessary to generate routing
tables 10 times per second. In such a case, you can increase the value to
reclaim CPU time needlessly used to update unchanging routing tables.
Units: 100 ms
Range: 1–600 (0.1–60 seconds)
Default: 1
-bnPathHolddown
The minimum interval between consecutive calculations of routing tables for
border nodes. For a stable network, generating the routing tables 10 times a
second can be unnecessary. You can increase the interval to save the CPU
time spent on updating routing tables that are not changing.
Note
The current release does not support complex nodes, so leave this
parameter as is.
Units: 100 ms
Range: 2–600 (0.2–60 sec)
Default: 2
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-128
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfpnni-routing-policy
-loadBalance
The PNNI routing protocol relies on the load balance policy when it
determines that the routes to a destination have equal cost. (PNNI determines
routes to be identical according to the metrics in the AW, CDV, or CTD
routing table.)
Note
The SPT epsilon value is a factor when PNNI calculates cost.
The choice for load balancing is random or maxbw. Enter the entire word.
With random load balancing, PNNI randomly chooses between the equal cost
routes. This rule requires less computational overhead.
With maxbw load balancing, PNNI selects the route with more available
bandwidth when it chooses between equal cost routes. This rule has more
overhead due to ongoing comparison of available bandwidth on the routes.
Default: no default
-onDemand
On-demand routing applies to crankback or a situation where the node must
route a call to a destination for which no route exists in the pre-computed
routing tables. The on-demand policy is either firstfit and bestfit.
With firstfit (the default), PNNI selects the first route to the destination.
This approach minimizes search time but may not result in the best route.
With bestfit, PNNI selects a route based on the following:
•
The route with the lowest cost.
•
Link verification.
•
Path constraint checks.
•
Avoidance of blocked nodes and links.
•
Checking limits in the designated transit list (DTL).
With bestfit, PNNI selects the optimum route but entails greater
computing overhead. The search-time depends on the density and
complexity of the network.
Default:
-awBgTable
firstfit
Enable or disable the background routing table for AW. The following are
the options:
•
on: The background routing table of AW is enabled.
•
off: The background routing table of AW is disabled.
Default: on
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-129
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfpnni-routing-policy
-ctdBgTable
Enable or disable the background routing table of CTD. The CTD parameter
is the interval between a cell exiting the source PNNI node and entering the
destination PNNI node. The following options are
•
on: The background routing table of CTD is enabled.
•
off: The background routing table of CTD is disabled.
Default: on
-cdvBgTable
Enable or disable the background routing table of CDV. The CDV parameter
is a component of cell transfer delay, and is a quality of service (QoS) delay
parameter associated with CBR and VBR service. Cell Delay Variation is the
variation of delay between cells, measured peak to peak. The following
options are
•
on: The background routing table of CDV is enabled.
•
off: The background routing table of CDV is disabled.
Default: on
Related Commands
dsppnni-routing-policy
Attributes
Access level: SUPER_GP
State: active
Log: log
Example
Enter the cnfpnni-routing-policy command to specify the following routing policy:
•
Only paths with identical values qualify as equal-cost paths.
•
The routing tables are generated every 0.1 seconds.
•
The load balancing is purely random.
•
On-demand routing selects to the optimal route.
•
The background routing table for AW is enabled.
•
The background routing table for cell transfer delay is enabled.
The background routing table for cell delay variation is enabled.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > cnfpnni-routing-policy -sptEpsilon 15 -sptHolddown 100 -bnPathHolddown
100 -loadBalance random -onDemand bestfit
Example
Verify the settings by entering the dsppnni-routing-policy command.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dsppnni-routing-policy
SPT epsilon.........
SPT holddown time...
SPT path holddown time
CTD Background Table
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
15
100
100
on
Load balance........
On demand routing...
AW Background Table
CDV Background Table
random
best fit
on
on
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-130
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfpnni-scope-map
cnfpnni-scope-map
Configure PNNI Scope Map—PXM1
Use the cnfpnni-scope-map command to configure the scope map table. The cnfpnni-scope-map
command specifies how UNI 4.0 address scope values are mapped to PNNI hierarchal levels. The
parameters are stored in the scope map table.
Syntax
cnfpnni-scope-map <scope> <level>
Syntax Description
scope
Specifies the UNI 4.0 address scope.
The following ranges are
1: LocalNetwork
2: LocalNetworkPlusOne
3: LocalNetworkPlusTwo
4: SiteMinusOne
5: IntraSite
6: SitePlusOne
7: OrganizationMinusOne
8: IntraOrganization
9: OrganizationPlusOne
10: CommunityMinusOne
11: IntraCommunity
12: CommunityPlusOne
13: Regional
14: InterRegional
15: Global
Default: none
level
Specifies the PNNI level where the UNI 4.0 address scope is mapped.
Range: 1–104
Default: 56
Related Commands
dsppnni-scope-map
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-131
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfpnni-scope-map
Attributes
Access level: SUPER_GP
State: active
Log: log
Example
Configure the scope map table for the following:
•
The variable scope is 12.
•
The variable level is 100.
The values map to UNI 4.0 scope 12 to the PNNI hierarchical level 56.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > cnfpnni-scope-map 12 100
Example
Verify the results by entering the dsppnni-scope-map command.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dsppnni-scope-map
UNI Scope
---------------------LocalNetwork(1)
LocalNetworkPlusOne(2)
LocalNetworkPlusTwo(3)
SiteMinusOne(4)
IntraSite(5)
SitePlusOne(6)
OrganizationMinusOne(7)
IntraOrganization(8)
OrganizationPlusOne(9)
CommunityMinusOne(10)
IntraCommunity(11)
CommunityPlusOne(12)
Regional(13)
InterRegional(14)
Global(15)
Pnni Routing Level
-----------------56
56
56
40
40
32
32
24
24
24
8
100
0
0
0
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-132
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfpnni-svcc-rcc-timer
cnfpnni-svcc-rcc-timer
Configure PNNI SVCC RCC Timer—PXM1
Use the cnfpnni-svcc-rcc-timer command to define the initial PNNI SVCC-based variables for a
specified PNNI logical node in this switching system.
Syntax
cnfpnni-svcc-rcc-timer <node-index> [-initTime init-time] [-retryTime retry-time]
[-callingIntegrityTime calling-integrity-time] [-calledIntegrityTime called-integrity-time]
Syntax Description
node-index
The node index indicates the relative level of the logical node within a
multi-peer group on the switch.
Range: 1–10
-initTime
The number of seconds this node waits before it advertises its choice of
preferred SVCC to a neighbor with a numerically lower ATM address. This
node does so after determining that such an SVCC should be established.
Range: 1–10 sec
Default: 4
-retryTime
The number of seconds this node waits before it attempts to re-establish an
apparently necessary and viable SVCC-based RCC that was unexpectedly
torn down.
Range: 10–60 sec
Default: 30
-callingIntegrityTime
The number of seconds the node waits while it attempts to set up an SVCC
as the calling party. If the SVCC is not fully established within this time
period, the node tears down the connection.
Range: 5–300
Default: 35
-calledIntegrityTime
The number of seconds the node waits while it attempts to set up an SVCC
as the called party. If the SVCC is not fully established within this time
period, the node tears down the connection.
Range: 10–300
Default: 50
Related Commands
dsppnni-svcc-rcc-timer
Attributes
Access level: SUPER_GP
State: active
Log: log
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-133
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfpnni-svcc-rcc-timer
Example
Configure the PNNI SVCC-based variables for node index 1 by entering the cnfpnni-svcc-rcc-timer
command.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > cnfpnni-svcc-rcc-timer 1 -initTime 10 -retryTime 60 -callingIntegrityTime
35 -calledIntegrityTime 50
Example
Verify the results by entering the dsppnni-svcc-rcc-timer command.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dsppnni-svcc-rcc-timer
node index: 1
Init time...........
10
Calling party integrity time...
Called party integrity time....
Retry time..........
35
50
60
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-134
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfpnni-timer
cnfpnni-timer
Configure PNNI Timer—PXM1
Use the cnfpnni-timer command to define the initial PNNI timer values and significant change
thresholds of a network node. You must carefully plan the use of this command because modifying a
timer can significantly change the efficiency of the network.
Syntax
cnfpnni-timer <node-index> [-ptseHolddown ptse-holddown][-helloHolddown hello-holddown]
[-helloInterval hello-interval]
[-helloInactivity-factor hello-inactivity-factor]
[-horizontal-link-inactivity-time horizontal-link-inactivity-time]
[-ptseRefreshInterval ptse-refresh-interval]
[-ptseLifetimeFactor ptse-lifetime-factor]
[-retransmitInterval retransmit-interval]
[-ptseDelayedAckInterval ptse-delayed-ack-interval][-avcrPm avcr-pm][-avcrMt avcr-mt]
[-cdvPm cdv-pm][-ctdPm ctd-pm]
Syntax Description
node-index
The node index indicates the relative level of the logical node
within a multi-peer group on the switch.
Range: 1–101
-ptseHolddown
The holddown value is the time the switch waits before it
broadcasts PTSEs. The increments are tenths of a second. For
example, -ptseHolddown 1 means 0.1 second, -ptseHolddown 10
means 1 second, and so forth.
Range: 0.1–1000
Default: 10 (1 sec)
-helloHolddown
Specifies he initial value for the Hello hold down timer that the
node uses to limit the rate at which it sends Hellos.
Units: 100 ms. 1 = 0.1sec
Range: 0.1–1000
Default: 10 (1 sec)
-helloInterval
Specifies the initial value for the Hello timer in seconds. The value
limits the rate at which the node sends Hellos.
Range: 1–300 sec
Default: 15 sec
-helloInactivity-factor
The product of the hello-inactivity-factor and the peer neighbor
hello-interval is the maximum time (in sec) that the neighbor is
considered alive after the last reception of a Hello packet.
Range: 1–50 sec
Default: 5 sec
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-135
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfpnni-timer
-horizontal-link-inactvity-time
Inactivity time, in seconds, on a horizontal link between
two-logical group nodes.
Default: 120 sec
-ptseRefreshInterval
Specifies the initial time allowed for the PTSE to reoriginate
specified in seconds.
Range: 30–1800 sec
Default: 1800 sec
-ptseLifetimeFactor
Specifies the value for the lifetime multiplier, expressed as a
percentage. The product of it and the ptse-refresh-interval is the
initial value of the remaining lifetime of a self-created PTSE.
Range: 101–1000%
Default: 200
-retransmitInterval
Specifies the period between retransmissions of unacknowledged
DS, PTSE request, and PTSP specified in seconds.
Range: 5–60 sec
Default: 5 sec
-ptseDelayedAckInterval
Specifies the minimum interval between transmissions of delayed
PTSE acknowledgment packets.
Units: 100 ms. 1 = 0.1 sec
Range: 1–10
Default: 10 (1 sec)
-avcrPm
Specifies the proportional multiplier used in the algorithms to
determine significant change for available cell rate (AvCR)
parameters.
avcr-pm is expressed as a percentage.
Range: 1–99%
Default: 50%
-avcrMt
Specifies the minimum threshold used in the algorithms that
determine significant change for available cell rate (AvCR)
parameters, which are expressed as a percentage. You can change
this value to minimize the overhead created by advertisements
triggered by AVCR changes.
avcr-mt is expressed as a percentage.
Range: 1–99%
Default: 3%
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-136
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfpnni-timer
-cdvPm
Specifies the proportional multiplier used in the algorithms to
determine significant change for cell delay variation (CDV)
parameters that are expressed as a percentage, the variation of delay
between cells, and measured peak to peak. You can change this
value to minimize the overhead created by advertisements triggered
by CDV changes.
cdv-pm is expressed as a percentage.
Range: 1–99%
Default: 25%
-ctdPm
Specifies the proportional multiplier used in the algorithms to
determine significant change for cell transfer delay (CTD)
parameters that are expressed as a percentage. You can change this
value to minimize the overhead created by advertisements triggered
by changes to CTD values.
ctd-pm is expressed as a percentage.
Range: 1–99%
Default: 50%
Related Commands
dsppnni-timer
Attributes
Access level: SUPER_GP
State: active
Log: log
Example
Enter the cnfpnni-timer command that is set with the following parameter values:
•
The hello should be hold down for 1.0 sec.
•
The PTSE should be hold down for 1.0 sec.
•
The node Hello timer is 15 seconds.
•
The node hello-inactivity-factor is 5 seconds.
•
The node recreates PTSEs every 1800 seconds (30 min).
•
The node evaluates the initial PTSE lifetime by multiplying the ptse-refresh-interval (1800 sec) by
200.
•
The node retransmits every 5 sec.
•
If the node broadcasts a PTSE and the PTSE is not acknowledged, the node waits 1 second to
rebroadcast its PTSE.
•
The node multiplies an algorithm by 3% to determine the value that qualifies as a significant change
for AvCR parameters.
•
The node multiplies an algorithm by 50% to determine the value that qualifies as the minimum
threshold for significant change of AvCR parameters.
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-137
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfpnni-timer
•
The node multiplies an algorithm by 25% to determine the value that qualifies as a significant
change for CDV parameters.
•
The node multiplies an algorithm by 50% to determine the value that qualifies as a significant
change for CTD parameters.
You can confirm your settings with the related command dsppnni-timer.
SSES_SJ.1.PXM.a > cnfpnni-timer 1 -ptseHolddown 10 -helloHolddown 10 -helloInterval 15
-helloInactivity-factor 5 -horizontalLinkInactivityTime 120 -ptseRefreshInterval 1800
-ptseLifetimeFactor 200 -retransmitInterval 50 -ptseDelayedAckInterval 10 -avcrPm 50
-avcrMt 3 -cdvPm 25 -ctdPm 50
Verify the settings by entering the dsppnni-timer command.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dsppnni-timer 1
node index: 1
Hello holddown(100ms)...
10
PTSE holddown(100ms)...
Hello int(sec)..........
15
PTSE refresh int(sec)..
Hello inactivity factor.
5
PTSE lifetime factor...
Retransmit int(sec).....
5
AvCR proportional PM....
50
CDV PM multiplier......
AvCR minimum threshold..
3
CTD PM multiplier......
Peer delayed ack int(100ms)...................
10
Logical horizontal link inactivity time(sec)..
120
10
1800
200
25
50
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-138
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfpnportacc
cnfpnportacc
Configure PNNI Port Access—PXM1
Use the cnfpnportacc command to associate an ATM filter set with a port (after you create the filter set
with the addfltset command). You must specify at least one filter set.
Note
To view the access filter group configuration for a port, enter the dsppnport command.
Syntax
cnfpnportacc <portid> [-in {in-filter-name}] [-out {out-filter-name}]
Syntax Description
portid
Interface ID in the form of [shelf.]slot[:subslot].port[:subport].
-in
Specifies the filter set applicable to SETUP messages incoming to the port.
-out
Specifies the filter set applicable to SETUP messages outgoing from the port.
Related Commands
dsppnport
Attributes
Access level: GROUP1
State: active
Log: log
Example
Consider a filter “firstfilter” created via the addfltset command.
To attach it to port 4.1 for filtering incoming setup messages, the following command will be used:
pnnises1.1.PXM.a > cnfpnportacc 4.1 -in firstfilter
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-139
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfpnportcac
cnfpnportcac
Configure PNNI Port CAC—PXM1
Use the cnfpnportcac command to set CAC policy parameters for a specified port. The new
configuration applies to new incoming calls while existing calls remain intact. This command is used
regardless of the state of the port. At least one keyword must be specified.
The bookfactor is interpreted as percentage utilization, and applied in CAC. The booking factor is not
applied to AvCR advertised by the switch to the controller. When the default of maxbw and minbw is
used for all service categories, the common AvCR is to be advertised for all the service categories. The
booking factor is applied to AvCR advertised by the PNNI to its neighbor nodes.
Syntax
cnfpnportcac <portid> <service_category> [-bookfactor {utilization-factor}]
[-maxbw {max-bw-percent}][-minbw {min-bw-percent}] [-maxvc {max-vc-percent}]
[-minvc {min-vc-percent}][-maxvcbw {max-vc-bw}]
Syntax Description
portid
Interface ID in the form of [shelf.]slot[:subslot].port[:subport].
service_category
ATM 4.0 service category. Enter one of the following options:
-bookfactor
•
cbr = constant bit rate
•
rtvbr = real time variable bit rate
•
nrtvbr = non-real time variable bit rate
•
ubr = unspecified bit rate
•
abr = available bit rate
Service Category Utilization Factor (SCUF) for a service category on this port,
in the range 1 through 200.
Range: 1–200
Default: 100
-maxbw
Maximum percentage of guaranteed bandwidth for a service category on this
port.
Range: 0–100.0000
Default: 100.000
-minbw
Minimum percentage guaranteed bandwidth for a service category on this port.
Range: 0–100.0000
Default: 0
-maxvc
Maximum percentage of VCs for a service category on this port.
Range: 0–100
Default: 100
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-140
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfpnportcac
-minvc
Minimum percentage of VCs for a service category on this port.
Range: 0–100
Default: 0
-maxvcbw
Maximum bandwidth, as specified by the PCR, allowed for a VC in a service
category on this port.
Range: 0 through the maximum possible line rate (in cps)
Default: 0 (disabled)
Related Commands
dsppnportcac
Attributes
Access level: GROUP1
State: active
Log: log
Example
Configure the PNNI port CAC with port 2.3 and the service category.
spirita.1.PXM.a > cnfpnportcac 2.3 nrtvbr
Example
Verify the results by entering the dsppnportcac command for port 2.3.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dsppnportcac 2.3
sig:
bookFactor:
100%
maxBw:
100.0000%
minBw:
0.0000%
maxVc:
100%
minVc:
1%
maxVcBw:
0
cbr:
rt-vbr:
nrt-vbr:
ubr:
abr:
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100.0000%
100.0000%
100.0000%
100.0000%
100.0000%
0.0000%
0.0000%
0.0000%
0.0000%
0.0000%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0
0
0
0
0
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-141
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfpnportcc
cnfpnportcc
Configure PNNI Port Call Control—PXM1
Use the cnfpnportcc command to set call control parameters for a specified port. At least one keyword
must be specified. This command is used regardless of the state of the port. The new configuration
applies to new incoming calls while existing calls remain intact.
The following are the applications for the cnfpnportcc command:
•
Specify maximum root and leaf connections for point-to-multipoint connections.
•
Specify whether all SVCs or all SPVCs are blocked on the port.
•
Configures the port to reject or reenable all nonpersistent slave establishments.
You can enter cnfpnportcc command whether the port is active or in the provisioning state.
Note
The current release does not support point-to-multipoint calls.
Syntax
cnfpnportcc <portid>[-maxp2mproot {max-p2mp-root}][-maxp2mpleaf {max-p2mp-leaf}]
[-svcblock {yes | no}][-spvcblock {yes | no}] [-nonpersblock {yes | no}]
Syntax Description
portid
Specifies the port ID for the modified configuration. Interface ID in the form
of [shelf.]slot[:subslot].port[:subport].
-maxp2mproot
Maximum number of root VCs on this port.
Default: 1000
-maxp2mpleaf
Maximum number of leaf VCs on this port.
Default: 4095
-svcblock
Enable or disable SVC blocking on the port. Enter yes or no.
yes: no new call setups are accepted.
no: new call setups are accepted.
Default: no
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-142
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfpnportcc
-spvcblock
Enable or disable SPVC blocking on the port. Enter yes or no.
yes: attempts to add an SPVC through addcon or Cisco WAN Manager fails.
The resulting error message is ERR: SPVC blocking is enabled on this
interface .
no: adds SPVCs through addcon or Cisco WAN Manager.
Default: no
-nonpersblock
Specifies the flag that indicates if nonpersistent slave blocking is enabled or
disabled. The -nonpersblock option ensures that no nonpersistent slaves are
allowed on the port after the port is configured entering the cnfpnportcc
command to block nonpersistent slaves.
Enter either yes or no.
Default: no
Related Commands
dsppnportcc
Attributes
Access level: GROUP1
State: active
Log: log
Example
Configure the applicable PNNI port call control parameters.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > cnfpnportcc 2.3 -maxp2mproot 900 -maxp2mpleaf 2000 -svcblock yes
-spvcblock yes -nonpersblock yes
Example
Verify the results by entering the dsppnportcc command for port 2.3.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dsppnportcc 2.3
maxP2mpRoot:
900
maxP2mpLeaf:
2000
svc blocking option:
yes
spvc blocking option:
yes
nonpers blocking option:
yes
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-143
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfpnportloscallrel
cnfpnportloscallrel
Configure PNNI Port LOS Call Release—PXM1
Use the cnfpnportloscallrel command to shut off the standard delay for rerouting calls on a port when
the system detects loss of signal (LOS) on a port.
When the system detects LOS on an NNI link, the switch does not immediately tear down the calls on
the link—in case the break is momentary. By default, the system waits for the SSCOP no-response and
T309 timers to time out before it releases calls on the broken link. The default values for these timers
are 30 sec and 10 sec. The system-level assumption, the default for the cnfpnportloscallrel command,
is to retain all the calls for a temporary loss of connectivity, but this can also have the effect of delaying
the rerouting of connections. The cnfpnportloscallrel command directs the system to reroute calls
without delay on a particular port.
Syntax
cnfpnportloscallrel <portid> [yes | no]
Syntax Description
portid
Interface ID in the form of [shelf.]slot[:subslot].port[:subport].
yes | no
Enables or disables release of SVCs/SPVCs after a physical LOS.
Default: yes
Related Commands
dsppnportloscallrel
Attributes
Access level: SUPER_GP
State: active
Log: log
Example
Enable the release of SVCs/SPVCs after a physical LOS for port 2.3.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > cnfpnportloscallrel 2.3 yes
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Example
Verify the results by entering the dsppnportloscallrel command for port 2.3.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dsppnportloscallrel 2.3
Call release on Los :enabled
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-144
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfpnportloscallrel
Example
Disable the release of SVCs/SPVCs after a physical LOS for port 2.3.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > cnfpnportloscallrel 2.3 no
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Example
Verify the results by entering the dsppnportloscallrel command for port 2.3.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dsppnportloscallrel 2.3
Call release on Los :disabled
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-145
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfpnportncci
cnfpnportncci
Configure Port Network Call Correlation Identifier—PXM1
Use the cnfpnportncci command to configures an action for a call correlation identifier. The
cnfpnportncci command determines the action that PNNI takes on a call correlation identifier.
The following are the responses to the call correlation identifier:
Note
•
Forward the identifier.
•
Discard the identifier.
•
Assign a new identifier.
The cnfpnportncci command applies only to UNI 4.0 and AINI. It does not apply to UNI 3.x, IISP,
and PNNI.
Syntax
cnfpnportncci <portid> [-action {forward |discard |assign}]
Syntax Description
portid
Identifies a PNNI physical port. The format is slot:subslot.port:subport.
-action
The action that the controller takes on the network call correlation identifier.
The following choices are
•
forward
•
discard
•
assign
Default: forward
Related Commands
dsppnportncci
Attributes
Access level: GROUP1
State: active
Log: log
Example
Configure the network call correlation identifier for port 2.3.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > cnfpnportncci 2.3 -action forward
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-146
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfpnportncci
Verify the results by entering the dsppnportncci command for port 2.3.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dsppnportncci 2.3
NCCI action: forward
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-147
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfpnportrange
cnfpnportrange
Configure PNNI Port Range—PXM1
Use the cnfpnportrange command to set VPI values for SVCC and SVPC on a specified port. This
command is used only when a port is administratively down (by dnpnport). At least one keyword must
be specified. The maxsvccvpi is defaulted to 4095 to allow a maximum negotiation advantage during
ILMI auto-configuration. Moreover, this value is limited by the high VPI value given by the switch
irrespective of the port type (UNI/NNI).
Syntax
cnfpnportrange <portid> [-minsvccvpi <min-svcc-vpi>][-maxsvccvpi <max-svcc-vpi>]
[-minsvccvci <min-svcc-vci>][-maxsvccvci <max-svcc-vci>]
[-minsvpcvpi <min-svpc-vpi>][-maxsvpcvpi <max-svpc-vpi>]
Syntax Description
portid
Interface ID in the form of [shelf.]slot[:subslot].port[:subport].
-minsvccvpi
Minimum VPI value for SVCC.
Range: 0–4095
Default: 0
-maxsvccvpi
Maximum VPI value for SVCC.
Range: 0–4095
Default: 4095
-minsvccvci
Minimum VCI value for SVCC.
Range: 0–65535
Default: 35
-maxsvccvci
Maximum VCI value for SVCC.
Range: 32–65535
Default: 65535
-minsvpcvpi
Minimum VPI value for SVPC.
Range: 1–4095
Default: 1
-maxsvpcvpi
Maximum VPI value for SVPC.
Range: 1–4095
Default: 4095
Related Commands
dsppnportrange
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-148
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfpnportrange
Attributes
Access level: GROUP1
State: active
Log: log
Example
Configure the PNNI port range with the applicable VPI values for port 2.3.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > cnfpnportrange 2.3 -minsvccvpi 0 -maxsvccvpi 4095 -minsvccvci 35
-maxsvccvci 65535 -minsvpcvpi 1 -maxsvpcvpi 4095
Example
Verify the results by entering the dsppnportrange command for port 2.3.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dsppnportrange 2.3
minSvccVpi:
minSvccVci:
minSvpcVpi:
0
35
1
maxSvccVpi:
maxSvccVci:
maxSvpcVpi:
4095
65535
4095
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-149
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfpnportsig
cnfpnportsig
Configure PNNI Port Signaling—PXM1
Use the cnfpnportsig command to set ATM signaling parameters on a specified port. This command is
used only when a port is administratively down (by dnpnport). At least one keyword must be specified.
The parameters univer and nniver are mutually exclusive and determine the port type either as uni or
nni respectively. For UNI port on the controller, the port on BPX switch must be configured as a UNI
port. For IISP port on the controller, the port on the switch must be configured as UNI port. For PNNI
port on the controller, the port on the switch must be configured either as NNI port or trunk.
Syntax
cnfpnportsig <portid> [-univer {uni30 | uni31 | uni40 |q2931 |none |self}]
[-nniver {iisp30 | iisp31 | pnni10|enni |aini}][-unitype {public | private}]
[-addrplan {both |aesa | e164}][-side {user |network}][-vpi <vpi>][-sigvci <signalling-vci>]
[-rccvci <routing-vci>][-cntlvc {ip}][-passalongcap {enable | disable}]
[-hopcntgen {enable |disable}][-vpivcialloc {enable |disable}] [-svcroutingpri <svcroutingPriority>]
Syntax Description
portid
Interface ID in the form of [shelf.]slot[:subslot].port[:subport].
-univer
The UNI version: uni30, uni31, uni40, none, or self.
Note
univer
and nniver are mutually exclusive.
The interface at each end of the connection must have the same interface type. Also,
the port type on the PNNI controller must be the same as on the slave. If this version
is sufficient, you can forego this parameter. However, to change a UNI version, the
port must be down. Remember to up the port by using the uppnport command after
completing the cnfpnportsig command.
The none choice applies to any port that does not need to run SSCOP protocol, for
example, SPVC endpoints. The self choice applies to voice SVCs.
Default: uni31
-nniver
The NNI version: iisp30, iisp31, pnni10, aini, or enni.
Note
univer
and nniver are mutually exclusive.
The interface at each end of the connection must have the same interface type. Also,
the port type on the PNNI controller must be the same as on the slave.
If this version is sufficient, you can forego this parameter. However, to change an
NNI version, the port must be down. Remember to up the port by using the uppnport
command after completing the cnfpnportsig command.
Default: pnni10
-unitype
The type of UNI is either private or public. This parameter is relevant only if you
specified a UNI interface through the -univer parameter.
Default: private
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-150
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfpnportsig
-addrplan
The address plan of the calling party that the interface accepts. The choices are both,
e164, and aesa.
Only a public UNI can use this parameter. For all other interface types, the port
automatically accepts either AESA or E.164 address plans.
Default: both (for public) and aesa (for private)
-side
The side of the port: enter either user or network. This parameter applies to IISP only
and public UNI. An NNI interface type automatically is network.
An IISP or public UNI has a user side and a network side. If both sides are the same,
a configuration error has occurred. The network side is the side that assigns the VPI
and VCI. These links do not distinguish between SVCs and SPVCs.
Default: network
-vpi
The VPI of the signaling and routing control channel (RCC) on the port.
Range: 0–4095
Default: 0
-sigvci
The signaling VCI for the port. If you do not use the default of 5, this VCI must be
in the range 32–65535.
Range: 5 or 32–65535
Default: 5
-rccvci
The routing control channel-vci: the VCI for PNNI RCC. If you do not use the default
of 18, this VCI must be in the range 32–65535.
Range: 18 or 32–65535
Default: 18
-cntlvc
Enable for an IP-based signaling channel. This option applies only to a feeder
connected to the switch. An IP-based control channel is mutually exclusive of either
UNI or NNI. The only choice for -cntlvc is ip.
Default: ip
-passalongcap Pass-along capability: enter enable or disable. With this capability, the port has the
ability to pass along unrecognized information elements (IEs) or messages. Enabling
or disabling the pass-along capability applies to AINI, IISP, and public UNI. For all
other types, the port behaves as if pass-along is enabled. You cannot disable
pass-along on the other port types.
Default: enable
-hopcntgen
This parameter applies to AINI only. Enter either enable or disable. If you enable
hop counting for AINI, the controller generates the hop counter information IE for all
setup messages that pass through the interface if this IE does not already exist in the
setup message. You must also enable AINI hop count IE for the switch by using the
cnfainihopcount command.
Default: enable
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-151
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfpnportsig
-vpivcialloc
This parameter applies to AINI only: enter enable or disable. If you enable it, the
interface becomes responsible for assigning the VPI and VCI for any SVC or SPVC.
If you enable VPI/VCI allocation on one side of the AINI link, allocation
must be disabled on the other side of the link,
Note
Default: enable
-svcroutingpri This parameter is the SVC routing priority for any connections entering the network.
The connections that are tagged 1, which is the highest routing priority, are routed
ahead of other lower priority connections.
Range: 1–15
Default: 8
Related Commands
dsppnportsig
Attributes
Access level: GROUP1
State: active
Log: log
Example
Specify an RCC VCI of 10000 for port 2.3. Ensure that the interface type is compatible with the
parameter you want to change and perform the following tasks:
1.
Confirm that the interface type for 1:2.1:1 is NNI.
2.
Down the port.
3.
Configure the RCC VCI to be 10000.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dsppnport 2.3
Port:
IF status:
UCSM:
Auto-config:
IF-side:
UniType:
PassAlongCapab:
Input filter:
minSvccVpi:
minSvccVci:
minSvpcVpi:
p2p :
p2mp:
p2p :
p2mp:
#SpvcCfg:
0
0
#Svcc:
0
0
2.3
up
enable
enable
network
private
n/a
0
0
35
1
#SpvcActive:
0
0
#Svpc:
0
0
Logical ID:
Admin Status:
131840
up
Addrs-reg:
IF-type:
Version:
enable
nni
pnni10
Output filter:
maxSvccVpi:
maxSvccVci:
maxSvpcVpi:
0
255
65535
255
#SpvpCfg:
0
0
Total:
0
0
Total:
#SpvpActive:
0
0
0
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dnpnport 2.3
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > cnfpnportsig 2.3 -rccvci 10000
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-152
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfpnportsig
Example
Verify the port by entering the dsppnportsig command.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dsppnportsig 2.3
provisioned IF-type: nni
sigType: private
addrPlan: aesa
VpiVciAllocator: n/a
PassAlongCapab: n/a
sigVpi:
0
rccVpi:
0
version:
side:
pnni10
network
HopCounterGen:
n/a
sigVci:
rccVci:
5
10000
Example
Up port 2.3 by entering the uppnport command.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > uppnport 2.3
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Example
Configure the SVC routing priority to 8 for port 2.3.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > cnfpnportsig 2.3 -svcroutingpri 8
Example
Verify the SVC priority routing value for port 2.3 by entering the dsppnportsig command.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dsppnportsig 2.3
provisioned IF-type: uni
sigType: private
addrPlan: aesa
VpiVciAllocator: n/a
PassAlongCapab: n/a
sigVpi:
0
rccVpi:
n/a
svc routing priority: 8
version:
side:
uni3.1
network
HopCounterGen:
sigVci:
rccVci:
n/a
5
n/a
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-153
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfpswdreset
cnfpswdreset
Configure Password Reset—PXM1
Use the cnfpswdreset command to enable or disable the function carried out by the sequence of key
strokes that resets the node to the Cisco default password.
Enter the sequence ESC CTRL-Y.
Syntax
cnfpswdreset <flag>
Syntax Description
flag
A Boolean expression to enable or disable password reset. Enter on to enable or off
to disable the sequence of keys that resets the password.
Related Commands
dsppswdreset
Attributes
Access level: SERVICE_GP
State: active
Log: log
Example
Enable the password reset.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > cnfpswdreset on
Example
Verify the results by entering the dsppswdreset command.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dsppswdreset
Password Reset feature currently enabled
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-154
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfqosdefault
cnfqosdefault
Configure Quality of Service Default—PXM1
Use the cnfqosdefault command to specify default, switch-level QoS values for three service classes.
The applicable service classes are CBR, rt-VBR, and nrt-VBR. The switch applies these default values
to an SVC or SPVC if the incoming setup message does not contain the QoS specification. For an SPVC,
the values specified through addcon or cnfcon override the defaults configured through the
cnfqosdefault command.
You can specify defaults for one service class at a time. In addition to the bandwidth parameters, you
can either enable (activate) or disable the default configuration.
The default state is disabled. Therefore, be sure to enable the configuration for each QoS if you want
PNNI to use it. You can configure the parameters and leave them disabled until a suitable time.
The following are the optional bandwidth parameters:
•
Maximum cell transfer delay
•
Peak-to-peak cell delay variation
•
Maximum cell loss ratio for cells with CLP = 0
•
Maximum cell loss ratio for cells with CLP = 1 or 0
Syntax
cnfqosdefault <cbr | rtvbr | nrtvbr>[<-maxctd> maxctd] [<-ppcdv> ppcdv] [<-maxclrclp0>
maxclrclp0] [<-maxclrclp01> maxclrclp01] [<-enable> {yes | no}]
Syntax Description
cbr, rtvbr, nrtvbr
Specifies the service class for the current iteration of the command.
-maxctd
Specifies the maximum cell transfer delay.
Range: 0–65535 ms
Default: unspecified
-ppcdv
Specifies the peak-to-peak cell delay variation.
Range: 0–16777215 ms
Default: unspecified
-maxclrclp0
Specifies an integer for the maximum cell loss ratio for CLP0.
Range: 1–15
Default: unspecified
-maxclrclp01
Specifies an integer for the maximum cell loss ratio for CLP+0.
Range: 1–15
Default: unspecified
-enable
Specifies the entry to enable or disable the switch level defaults for the current
service class. Enter yes to enable and no for the default state.
Default: no
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-155
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfqosdefault
Related Commands
clrqosdefault, dspqosdefault
Attributes
Access level: GROUP1
State: active
Log: log
Example
For CBR, configure and enable the following:
•
Maximum cell transfer delay of 100 ms
•
Maximum cell delay variation of 1000 microseconds
•
Maximum cell loss ratio for CLP0 of 10
•
Maximum cell loss ratio for CLP0+1 of 5
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > cnfqosdefault cbr -maxctd 100 -ppcdv 1000 -maxclrclp0 10 -maxclrclp01 5
-enable yes
Example
After configuring the defaults, disable them. Check the configuration by entering the dspqosdefault
command. Then, reenable the switch level defaults and recheck them.
Note
The output of the dspqosdefault command is edited to show only the CBR values.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dspqosdefault
Service Category = cbr
MaxCTD =
100
MaxClrClp0 =
10
Qos Default Enable = yes
ppCDV =
1000
MaxClrClp01 =
5
Service Category = rt-vbr
MaxCTD =
Not Provisioned
MaxClrClp0 =
Not Provisioned
Qos Default Enable = no
ppCDV =
Not Provisioned
MaxClrClp01 =
Not Provisioned
Service Category = nrt-vbr
MaxCTD =
Not Provisioned
MaxClrClp0 =
Not Provisioned
Qos Default Enable = no
ppCDV =
Not Provisioned
MaxClrClp01 =
Not Provisioned
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > cnfqosdefault cbr -enable no
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dspqosdefault
Service Category = cbr
MaxCTD =
100
MaxClrClp0 =
10
Qos Default Enable = no
ppCDV =
1000
MaxClrClp01 =
5
Service Category = rt-vbr
Qos Default Enable = no
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-156
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfqosdefault
MaxCTD =
MaxClrClp0 =
Not Provisioned
Not Provisioned
ppCDV =
MaxClrClp01 =
Service Category = nrt-vbr
MaxCTD =
Not Provisioned
MaxClrClp0 =
Not Provisioned
Not Provisioned
Not Provisioned
Qos Default Enable = no
ppCDV =
Not Provisioned
MaxClrClp01 =
Not Provisioned
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > cnfqosdefault cbr -enable yes
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dspqosdefault
Service Category = cbr
MaxCTD =
100
MaxClrClp0 =
10
Qos Default Enable = yes
ppCDV =
1000
MaxClrClp01 =
5
Service Category = rt-vbr
MaxCTD =
Not Provisioned
MaxClrClp0 =
Not Provisioned
Qos Default Enable = no
ppCDV =
Not Provisioned
MaxClrClp01 =
Not Provisioned
Service Category = nrt-vbr
MaxCTD =
Not Provisioned
MaxClrClp0 =
Not Provisioned
Qos Default Enable = no
ppCDV =
Not Provisioned
MaxClrClp01 =
Not Provisioned
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-157
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfrrtparm
cnfrrtparm
Configure Reroute Parameters—PXM1
Use the cnfrrtparm command to configure the time periods that the switch waits between each reroute
retry attempt. When an SPVC fails, the system immediately attempts to reroute the connection. If the
first reroute attempt fails, the switch keeps trying to reroute the connection according to the slow retry
interval (-slowtmr) and the fast retry interval base (-fasttmrbase).
The fast retry interval base is an incremental value (in 100 ms units) that is incriminated each time the
switch attempts to reroute the connection and fails.
The switch then waits the incremented amount of time before it attempts to reroute the connection again.
The fast retry interval base continues to increment after each reroute attempt until it is equal to the slow
retry interval value or until the reroute succeeds.
The slow retry interval is a fixed value (in seconds) that occurs between all subsequent reroute attempts.
After the fast retry interval base reaches the slow retry interval, the switch attempts to reroute the
connection at the rate of the slow retry interval. No limit exists for the number of reroute attempts once
the slow retry interval begins.
For example, if the fast retry interval base is 50–100 ms intervals (5 sec) and the slow retry interval is
300 sec (5 min), the switch attempts to reroute the connection 5 sec after the first attempt, 10 sec after
the second attempt, 15 sec after the third attempt, and so on until the fast retry interval base equals 300
sec (5 min). Afterwards, the switch continues to attempt to reroute the connection every 5 min or until
the reroute is successful.
Syntax
cnfrrtparm [-slowtmr <slow-retry-interval>] [-fasttmrbase <fast-retry-interval-base>]
Syntax Description
-slowtmr
Specifies the slow call retry frequency in seconds.
Range: 1–65535
Default: 60 sec
-fasttmrbase
Specifies the fast call retry base in seconds.
Range: 1–3600
Default: 5 sec
Related Commands
dsprrtparm
Attributes
Access level: SUPER_GP
State: active
Log: log
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-158
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfrrtparm
Example
Set the slow timer to 300 sec intervals and the fast timer base to 7 sec (70 x 100 ms).
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > cnfrrtparm -slowtmr 300 -fasttmrbase 70
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Example
Check the results by entering the dsprrtparm command.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dsprrtparm
Global SPVC Retry Parameters:
-------------------------------Slow Retry Interval: 300 sec
Fast Retry Interval Base: 70 (in 100 msec)
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-159
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfrteopt
cnfrteopt
Configure Route Optimization—PXM1
Use the cnfrteopt command to configure periodic route optimization to improve bandwidth utilization.
This type of optimization is a type of connection grooming. To automate route optimization, the
cnfrteopt command specifies an interval between new optimization cycles.
Note
To force immediate route optimization, use the optrte command.
The load created by route optimization is extremely small and cannot cause congestion.
You can choose a time period for optimization so that disruption is minimal. For example, you could
specify that the switch starts grooming a range of SPVCs for one hour at midnight.
Note
Route optimization is a background process and does not attempt to optimize all possible connections
at once.
The nature of SPVCs provides a reason for periodic grooming: during the course of daily operation,
better routes may become available. The determining factor for a better route is the maximum cost
(maxcost). For details about the maxcost parameter, see the addcon description. The PNNI protocol
identifies this maximum cost by another name: administrative weight (AW).
Note
If you do not specify a maxcost with either the addcon or cnfcon command, the routing protocol
uses the AW on only forward links to calculate a new route for the connection.
If the connection has a specified maxcost, the routing protocol calculates possible routes by using the
AW in both directions.
Syntax
cnfrteopt <portid> {enable | disable}[-range <starting-vpi/vci..ending-vpi/vci>][-interval <interval>]
[-tod <start-time..end-time>]
Syntax Description
portid
Identifies the a port for which route optimization is configure, in the form of
[shelf.]slot[:subslot].port[:subport].
enable | disable
Enables or disables route optimization. If grooming is operational and you want
to disable it, run the cnfrteopt command and enter disable.
Default: disable
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-160
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfrteopt
-range
Specifies a range of SPVCs to receive route optimization. starting-vpi/vci and
ending-vpi/vci are in VPI/VCI format. The ending VPI/VCI must be greater than
or equal to the starting VPI/VCI. If no range is specified, all active SPVCs on
the port are considered, or use the option all to specify that all SPVCs on the port
are considered.
Range: 0–4095 (VPI)
Range: 32–65535 (VCI)
-interval
Specifies the frequency of route optimization in minutes. Keyword that specifies
the frequency at which grooming begins. The units of measure are minutes.
Counting starts at one of the following two moments:
•
The moment you enter the cnfrteopt command.
•
The starting time specified by TOD for the cnfrteopt command.
If the interval is less than half the amount of time specified by the
start-time..end-time parameter, route optimization can begin more than once
during the time period. For example, if the periods of optimization are two hours
beginning at midnight and 4:00 AM and the interval is one hour, route
optimization can occur two to four times per day.
Range: 10–10000
Default: 60 min
-tod
Specifies the keyword for the time to start and stop grooming. The format is a
24-hour clock: 00:00-23:59. The default for both start and end-time is 00:00. If
you enter cnfrteopt during the time specified by tod, the optimization cycle
begins during the next time interval.
If the time for the node changes (for example, by way of the cnftime command),
the node might skip one optimization cycle.
Note
Enter two dots with no spaces between starting and ending times.
The default time range is anytime.
Note
Only one SPVC range is supported. The newly entered range replaces the old range. Same is true for
the time range.
Related Commands
cnfrteoptthld, dsprteoptcnf, dsprteoptstat, optrte
Attributes
Access level: GROUP1
State: active
Log: log
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-161
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfrteopt
Example
Enable route optimization for specific SPVCs with parameters other than default.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > cnfrteopt 1.6 enable -range 1/40..10/1000 -interval 45 -tod 23:00..23:30
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-162
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfrteoptthld
cnfrteoptthld
Configure Route Optimization Threshold—PXM1
Use the cnfrteoptthld command to specify the percentage reduction in the administrative weight of the
existing path required to trigger route optimization. The criterion for selecting a new route is a threshold
in the form of the percent of difference in route cost.
The default for route optimization is a 30% reduction of the cost of a route. By entering the
cnfrteoptthld command, you can change the percentage of routing cost-improvement.
Syntax
cnfrteoptthld <percent>
Syntax Description
percent
Determines the percent of reduction in routing cost that triggers rerouting.
Range: 5–100
Default: 30
Related Commands
cnfrteopt, dsprteoptcnf, dsprteoptstat, optrte
Attributes
Access level: GROUP1
State: active
Log: log
Example
Change the re-routing threshold to a 50% reduction in the route cost.
spirita.1.PXM.a > cnfrteoptthld 50
spirita.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-163
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfserialif
cnfserialif
Configure Serial Interface—PXM1
Use the cnfserialif command to change the data rate on a serial interface on the PXM-UI back card. The
two types of serial ports are the console port and the maintenance port. These ports provide user-access
for controlling the switch. The default speed on a serial interface is 9600 bps, but higher speed terminals
are frequently available.
Each port connects to a different type of terminal implementation. For a description of how to use these
physical ports for switch control, refer to the Cisco SES PNNI Controller Software Configuration Guide.
Syntax
cnfserialif <port#> <speed>
Syntax Description
port#
Specifies the physical port. Enter 1 to select the maintenance port, or 2 to select the
console port.
speed
Specifies a data rate in bits per second. Valid entries are 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600,
19200, 38400.
Related Commands
delserialif, dspserialif
Attributes
Access level: SUPER_GP
State: active
Log: no
Example
Configure the maintenance port to have a data rate of 19200 bps.
spirita.1.PXM.a > cnfserialif 1 19200
Example
Verify the results by entering the dspserialif command.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dspserialif 1
SerialPortNum
: 1
SerialPortType : maintenance
SerialPortSpeed : 19200
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-164
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfsig
cnfsig
Configure Signaling—PXM1
Use the cnfsig command to configure signaling timers for a port. At least one keyword must be specified.
This command is used regardless of the state of the port. The new configuration applies to new incoming
calls while existing calls remain intact.
Syntax
cnfsig <portid>[-t301 <t301-timer>][-t303 <t303-timer>][-t308 <t308-timer>]
[-t310 <t310-timer>][-t316 <t316-timer>][-t317< t317-timer>][-t322 <t322-timer>]
[-t397 <t397-timer>][-t398 <t398-timer>][-t399 <t399-timer>][-maxcrbk <value>]
Syntax Description
portid
Identifies the port for the call in the form of [shelf.]slot[:subslot].port[:subport].
-t301
Set the T301 timer.
Range: 150–240 sec
Default: 180
-t303
Set the T303 timer.
Range: 4–8 sec
Default: 4
-t308
Set the T308 timer.
Range: 20–45 sec
Default: 30
-t310
Set the T310 timer.
Range: 10–20 sec for UNI 3.1/3.1and 30-120 sec for UNI 4.0.
Default: 10
-t316
Set the T316 timer.
Range: 90–300 sec
Default: 90
-t317
Set the T317 timer.
Range: 60–300 sec
Default: 60
-t322
Set the T322 timer.
Range: 4–20 sec
Default: 4
-t397
Set the T397 timer.
Range: 180–240 sec
Default: 180
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-165
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfsig
-t398
Set the T398 timer.
Range: 4–20 sec
Default: 4
-t399
Set the T399 timer.
Range is 14–28 sec for UNI 3.0/3.1 and 34–124 sec for UNI 4.0
Default: 14
-maxcrbk
Set the maximum crankback attempts allowed for a port.
Range: 1–10
Default: 3
Related Commands
dspsig, dspsigdiag, dspsigstats
Attributes
Access level: GROUP1
State: active
Log: log
Example
Configure port 1.6 to have the maximum crankback count of 5.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > cnfsig 1.6 -maxcrbk 5
Example
Check the results by entering the dspsig command for port 1.6.
Note
Check the default values in the dspsig output.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dspsig 1.6
Signaling Timers for port : 1.6
Timer
----t301
t303
t308
t310
t316
t317
t322
t397
t398
t399
Value(secs)
----------180
4
30
10
90
60
4
180
4
14
Max Crankback:
5
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-166
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfsigdiag
cnfsigdiag
Configure Signaling Diagnostic—PXM1
Use the cnfsigdiag command to create a filter table for signaling diagnostics or disable signaling
diagnostics. Signaling diagnostics are disabled by default.
The ATM signaling diagnostics are tools used to troubleshoot call failures in the network and should not
be enabled while the switch is operating.
Syntax
cnfsigdiag {[enable | disable | index]} [-cldaddr nsap-address] [-clgaddr nsap-address]
[-cldaddrmask atm-address-mask] [-clgaddrmask atm-address-mask] [-casttype {all | p2p | p2mp}]
[-clrcause clear-cause-code] [-connctgy {all | svc | svp | swvc | swvp}] [-inport portid]
[-outport portid] [-maxrec max-num-records ] [-scope {all | ext | int}]
[-servctgy {all | cbr | rtvbr | nrtvbr | ubr | abr}] [-status {active | inactive}]
Syntax Description
enable, disable, or
index
Enables or disables the signaling diagnostics or configures an index.
Specifies the diagnostics index number for the filter table and enter the
diagnostics configuration mode. The range for the index is 1–50. If you do not
specify an index, the enable or disable condition globally applies to all signaling
diagnostics.
Default: disable
-cldaddr
Determines the nsap-address the filter for ATM signaling call failures against
this called address.
Default: NULL
-clgaddr
Determines the nsap-address the filter for ATM signaling call failures against
this calling address.
Default: NULL
-cldaddrmask
Determines the atm-address-mask to identify valid bits of the called NSAP
address field, for example, ff.ff.ff. To match this selection criterion, a failed
connect setup must have a called party address value equal to the configured
called party address for all bits that are 1 in the specified mask.
Default: NULL. NULL means the rejected call matches the filter criteria for any
called address in the rejected call.
-clgaddrmask
Determines the atm-address-mask to identify valid bits of the calling NSAP
address field, for example, ff.ff.ff. To match this selection criteria, a failed
connect setup must have a calling party address value equal to the configured
calling party address for all bits that are 1 in the specified mask.
Default: NULL. NULL means the call matches the filter criteria for any calling
address in the rejected call.
-casttype
Determines the F = filtering by connection type. The types are point-to-point
(p2p), point-to-multipoint (p2mp)—currently not supported, or both (all).
Default: all
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-167
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfsigdiag
-clrcause
Determines the clear-cause-code. The filters for the ATM signaling call failures
are specified by the release cause code (a decimal number) as specified in the
ATM Forum UNI 3.1 specification.
Default: 0, meaning the cause code is not considered during filtering.
-connctgy
Determines the filters for ATM signaling call failures by virtual circuit category
(SPVC, SPVP, SVC, SVP, or all of these circuit categories).
Default: all
-inport
Specifies the portid. The filters for the ATM signaling call failures are based on
the incoming port of the call.
Default: 0, meaning the incoming port is not considered during filtering.
-outport
Specifies the portid. The filters for the ATM signaling call failures are based on
the outgoing port of the call.
Default: 0, meaning the outgoing port is not considered during filtering.
-maxrec
Specifies the max-num-records. The maximum number of records are collected
for a particular signaling diagnostics filter table entry. When the maximum value
is reached, the older records are deleted. If this field is set to -1, the records are
not overwritten. Setting this field to -1 increases memory usage for call failure
records and can lead to shortages of available system memory.
Range: -1–214783647
Default: 20
-scope
Specifies that the filtering scope choices are within the switch (int), on other
switches (ext), or both (all).
Default: all
-servctgy
Determines the filters for the ATM signaling call failures by service category
(service type): valid entries are: all (for all service types), cbr, rtvbr, nrtvbr, ubr,
or abr.
Default: all
-status
Specifies the status of the entry for the signaling diagnostics filter table. Enter
active to begin filtering failed connections or inactive to stop filtering failed
connections. The inactive specification causes the node to delete all the records
associated with the filter entry.
Default: inactive
Related Commands
clrsigstats, delsigdiag, dspsigdiag. dspsigstats
Attributes
Access level: SERVICE_GP
State: active
Log: log
Example
Enable the signaling diagnostics.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > cnfsigdiag enable
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-168
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfsigdiag
Example
Verify the results by entering the dspsigdiag command with the applicable option.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dspsigdiag status
An Index of 0 will be treated as a request for all filters
Dspsigdiag option : 3
Index : 0
message ID : 292
message Length : 1704
Signalling diagnostics enabled globally
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-169
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfsnmp
cnfsnmp
Configure SNMP—PXM1
Use the cnfsnmp command to configure SNMP strings. The three strings are community, contact, and
system location. You can configure only one of these strings with a single execution of the cnfsnmp
command.
Syntax
cnfsnmp <community [string <ro | rw>]> <contact [string]> <location [string]>
Syntax Description
community
A community string provides an authentication mechanism to access MIB objects
by using SNMPv1 protocol. One read-only (ro) access string and one read-write
(rw) access string are supported. You can specify your own rw and ro strings (up
to 32 characters each) or keep one or both of the reserved strings. You cannot set
ro and rw to the same string value. If you specify no community strings, “private
rw” is assumed. The following are the reserved strings:
•
Community rw string private
•
Community ro public
The string acts like a password to permit access to the SNMP Protocol. Further, the
access privilege of either ro or rw determines allowable operations on MIB
Objects. The setting can be either “ro” for read-only or “rw” for read-write. With
read-only access, a management station is allowed only to retrieve information.
With read-write access, authorized management stations are able to retrieve and
modify MIB objects.
contact
Keyword that specifies the system contact string for sysContact MIB object in
MIB-II. The string in this case is text that describes the contact. For example, the
contact could be an administrator’s email address. Spaces are allowed between
character strings. You can reset the contact string to no text by entering the
cnfsnmp command and contact keyword then press Enter or Return with no other
text.
Default: no text
location
Keyword that specifies the location of the system. The system location string is
used for sysLocation MIB object in MIB-II. You can reset the location string to no
text by entering the cnfsnmp command and location keyword then press Enter or
Return with no other text.
Default: no text
Related Commands
dspsnmp
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-170
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfsnmp
Attributes
Access level: SUPER_GP
State: active
Log: log
Example
Configure the following community strings.
1.
Configure the
2.
Enter the contact [email protected].
3.
Enter the location Building
rw
string as toplevel.
3/Room 214.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > cnfsnmp community toplevel rw
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > cnfsnmp contact [email protected]
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > cnfsnmp location Building 3/Room 214
Example
Display the SNMP settings by entering the dspsnmp command.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dspsnmp
SES_SJ
SES-CNTL
Community (rw):
Community (ro):
System Location:
System Contact:
System Rev: 03.00
Jan. 22, 2002 10:33:07 PST
Node Alarm: MAJOR
toplevel
public
Building 3/Room 214
[email protected]
Example
Reset the contact and location strings to no text and reenter the dspsnmp command.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > cnfsnmp location
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > cnfsnmp contact
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dspsnmp
SES_SJ
SES-CNTL
Community (rw):
Community (ro):
System Location:
System Contact:
System Rev: 03.00
Jan. 22, 2002 10:33:48 PST
Node Alarm: MAJOR
toplevel
public
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-171
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfsntp
cnfsntp
Configure SNTP—PXM1
Use the cnfsntp command to configure the timers for the client and to turn the SNTP server on or off.
Syntax
cnfsntp {[-polling insecond] [-waiting insecond] [-rb insecond] [-client on |off] [-server on | off]
[-stratum 0-15]}
Syntax Description
-polling insecond
Specifies the synchronization time for the client polling server period.
Default: 64 sec
-waiting insecond
Specifies that the client waits for the response time.
Default: 5 sec
-rb insecond
Polls the primary server when rollback is enabled.
Default: 1024 sec
-client
The client cannot be turned on by the SES must be set to off.
Default: off
-server
Enables the server or disables the server. Enter either on or off.
Default: off
-stratum
Determines the stratum value.
Note
The round trip delay value is 200 ms.
Default: 0
Related Commands
clrsntpstats, dbgsntp, dspsntp, dspsntpstats
Attributes
Access level: GROUP1
State: active
Log: log
Example
Configure the SNTP stratum value to be 0.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > cnfsntp -stratum 0
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-172
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfsntp
Example
Verify the results by entering the dspsntp command.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dspsntp
client: no
server: no
polling: 64
waiting: 5
rollback: 1024
stratum(default): 0
stratum(current): 0
sync: no
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-173
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfspvcprfx
cnfspvcprfx
Configure SPVC Prefix—PXM1
Use the cnfspvcprfx command to configure the SPVC prefix. The port at each end of the SPVC must
have a globally unique SPVC address. When the connection is defined, the address is generated by the
switch, and consists of the SPVC prefix and an internal, generated number that identifies the port.
For the node to support SPVCs, it must have a 13-byte SPVC prefix that applies to the entire node. No
SPVCs can exist on the node until it has an SPVC prefix.
Likewise, to change this prefix, no SPVCs can exist on the node.
Note
If you change the peer group ID for the switch, you should also change the SPVC address
prefix so that the bytes that correspond to the peer group ID match the corresponding bytes
in the SPVC prefix.
The following list shows the order of prerequisite commands and the cnfspvcprfx command. All
commands run on the PXM.
•
cnfpnni-intf command
•
cnfspvcprfx command
•
dspspvcprfx command
For more information on configuring the SPVC prefix, refer to the Cisco MGX and SES PNNI Network
Planning Guide.
Syntax
cnfspvcprfx -prfx <prefix|default>
Syntax Description
-prfx
Unique 13 byte SPVC node prefix.
The default SPVC prefix is the first 13-bytes of the default ATM address
Related Commands
dspspvcprfx
Attributes
Access level: SUPER_GP State: active Log: log
Example
Configure the SPVC prefix with he default node prefix.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > cnfspvcprfx -prfx default
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-174
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfspvcprfx
Example
Verify the SPVC node prefix by entering the dspspvcprfx command. The International Code Designator
(ICD) field shows the prefix is the default from Cisco (0091).
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dspspvcprfx
SPVC Node Prefix: 47.009181000000003071f813a1
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-175
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfsscop
cnfsscop
Configure SSCOP—PXM1
Use the cnfsscop command to set SSCOP parameters for a specified port. At least one keyword must be
specified. This command is used regardless of the state of the port.
Syntax
cnfsscop <portid>[-polltmr {poll-timer value | 0}][-keepalivetmr {keepalive-timer value | 0}]
[-idletmr {idle-timer value| 0}][-cctmr {cc-timer value| 0}]
[-norsptmr {noresponse-timer value| 0}][-t309tmr {t309-timer value| 0}]
[-maxcc {retries | 0}][-sndwnd {send-window-size | 0}][-rcvwnd {recv-window-size | 0}]
Syntax Description
portid
Interface ID in the form of [shelf.]slot[:subslot].port[:subport].
-polltmr
Number of seconds to send POLL PDUs at the active phase. 0 means to restore the
default value.
Valid Range: 1–5 sec
Default: 1 sec
-keepalivetmr
Number of seconds to send POLL PDUs at the transient phase. 0 means to restore
the default value.
Valid Range: 2–10 sec
Default: 5 sec
-idletmr
Number of seconds to send POLL PDUs at the idle phase. 0 means to restore the
default value.
Valid Range: 5–20 sec
Default: 10 sec
-cctmr
Number of seconds to send BGN/END/RS/ER PDUs at the connection control
phase. 0 means to restore the default value.
Valid Range: 1–5 sec
Default: 1 sec
-norsptmr
Number of seconds at least one STAT PDU needs to be received. 0 means to restore
the default value.
Valid Range: 7–45 sec
Default: 30 sec
-t309tmr
Number of seconds before which SAAL reconnection occurs after having been
disconnected earlier.
Valid Range: 10–15 sec
Default: 10 sec
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-176
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfsscop
-maxcc
Maximum number of retries for connection control operations. 0 means to restore
the default value.
Valid Range: 4–15
Default: 10
-sndwnd
Number of packets the port can send before it must receive an acknowledgment
from the ATM switch. 0 means to restore the default value.
Valid Range: 1–127
Default: 30
-rcvwnd
Number of packets the port can receive before it must send an acknowledgment to
the ATM switch. 0 means to restore the default value.
Valid Range: 1–127
Default: 30
Related Commands
clrsscopstats, disablesscop, dspsscop, dspsscopstats
Attributes
Access level: GROUP1
State: active
Log: log
Example
Configure SSCOP parameters with the default settings for port 1.6.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > cnfsscop 1.6
Example
Verify the default settings by entering the dspsscop command for port 1.6.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dspsscop 1.6
SSCOP details for interface: 1.6
Current State = enabled, Current Link State = Unknown State ,
SSCOP version = Invalid
Send Sequence Number: Current = 0, Maximum = 0
Send Sequence Number Acked = 0
Rcv Sequence Number: Lower Edge = 0, Upper Edge = 0, Max = 0
Poll Sequence Number = 0, Poll Ack Sequence Number = 0
Vt(Pd) = 0
Vt(Sq) = 0
Timer_IDLE = 10 - Inactive
Timer_CC = 1 - Inactive
Timer_POLL = 1 - Inactive
Timer_KEEPALIVE = 5 - Inactive
Timer_NO-RESPONSE = 30 - Inactive
Timer_T309 = 10 - Inactive
Max CC = 10
Send Window = 30
Recv Window = 30
Current Retry Count = 0, Maximum Retry Count = 0
AckQ count = 0, RcvQ count = 0, TxQ count = 0
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-177
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfsscop
AckQ HWM = 0,
RcvQ HWM = 0, TxQ HWM = 0
Type <CR> to continue, Q<CR> to stop:
Statistics Pdu's Sent = 0, Pdu's Received = 0, Pdu's Ignored = 0
Begin = 0/0, Begin Ack = 0/0, Begin Reject = 0/0
End = 0/0, End Ack = 0/0
Resync = 0/0, Resync Ack = 0/0
Sequenced Data = 0/0, Sequenced Poll Data = 0/0
Poll = 0/0, Stat = 0/0, Unsolicited Stat = 0/0
Unassured Data = 0/0, Mgmt Data = 0/0, Unknown Pdu's = 0
Lack of credit = 0
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-178
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfstatsmgr
cnfstatsmgr
Configure Statistics Manager—PXM1
Use the cnfstatsmgr command to set the IP address of the Cisco WAN Manager (CWM) that manages
statistics for this node.
Syntax
cnfstatsmgr <index> <IP Address>
Syntax Description
index
IP Address
The following are the indexes:
•
1: primary statistics manager
•
2: secondary statistics manager
•
3: tertiary statistics manager
•
4: statistics master
IP address of the CWM statistics manager for this node.
Related Commands
dspstatsmgr
Attributes
Access level: SERVICE_GP
State: active
Log: no
Example
Configure the IP address for the statistics manager for index 1.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > cnfstatsmgr 1 172.29.4.50
Example
Verify the results by entering the dspstatsmgr command.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dspstatsmgr
Statistics Manager
IP Address
--------------------------Primary
172.29.4.50
Secondary
0.0.0.0
Tertiary
0.0.0.0
Statistics Master
0.0.0.0
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-179
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfsvcoverride
cnfsvcoverride
Configure SVC Override—PXM1
Use the cnfsvcoverride command to configure the SVC override parameters on a per port basis. The
SVC override configuration is part of the nodal database and is persistent and redundant. If a single
ended SPVC establishment request is received and the VPI/VCI on the port is being used by an SVC
connection, the nodal configuration for the SVC override is checked. If the SVC override option is
enabled, the existing SVC is torn down and the SPVC request is rejected. Therefore, the next time the
SPVC establishment request is received, the connection can setup the VPI/VCI on the port.
Syntax
cnfsvcoverride [-spvcoverridesvc {enable | disable}] [-spvcoverridesvp {enable | disable}]
[-spvpoverridesvp {enable | disable}]
Syntax Description
-spvcoverridesvc
Enter one of the following options:
•
enable—Specifies that the incoming SPVC overrides the active SVC on the
same port for VPI and VCI.
•
disable
Default: disable
-spvcoverridesvp
Enter one of the following options:
•
enable—Specifies that the incoming SPVC overrides the active SVP on the
same port for VPI.
•
disable
Default: disable
-spvpoverridesvp
Enter one of the following options:
•
enable—Specifies that the incoming SPVP overrides the active SVC on the
same port for VPI.
•
disable
Default: disable
Related Commands
cnfpnportcc, clrspvcnonpers, dsppnportcc, dsptrftolerance
Attributes
Access level: SUPER_GP
State: active
Log: log
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-180
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfsvcoverride
Example
Enable the -spvcoverridesvc parameter to override the active SVC on the same port for VPI and VCI.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > cnfsvcoverride -spvcoverridesvc enable
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Example
Verify that the spvcoverridesvc parameter is enabled by entering the dspsvcoverride command.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dspsvcoverride
spvcoverridesvc:
Enabled
spvcoverridesvp:
Disabled
spvpoverridesvp:
Disabled
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-181
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnftrftolerance
cnftrftolerance
Configure Traffic Conformance Tolerance—PXM1
Use the cnftrftolerance command to configure the traffic conformance tolerance between the master
and slave traffic parameters for the SPVC connections. The configuration is persistent and redundant.
When the traffic conformance is a nonzero value, the connection is accepted if the slave traffic
parameters are within the configured tolerance with respect to the master’s traffic parameters.
Syntax
cnftrftolerance % (0% to 5%)
Syntax Description
%
Specifies the node tolerance percentage. By default, the tolerance value for each parameter for
all service types is 0%, which implies that the exact parameter needs to be matched.
Default: 5%
Related Commands
cnfpnportcc, clrspvcnonpers, dsppnportcc, dsptrftolerance
Attributes
Access level: SUPER_GP
State: active
Log: log
Example
Configure the traffic conformance tolerance to 1%.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > cnftrftolerance 1
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Example
Verify the traffic conformance tolerance settings by entering the dsptrftolerance command.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dsptrftolerance
Trf Tolerance for SPVCs: 1
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-182
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnftime
cnftime
Configure Time—PXM1
Use the cnftime command to set the system time for the node. To see the time after you enter the cnftime
command, enter the dspdate command. The system displays the time in 24-hour format.
Note
Configure a time zone through cnftmzn and optional GMT offset through cnftmzngmt before you
configure the time through cnftime.
Syntax
cnftime <Time>
Syntax Description
Time
Specifies the time in the following format:
•
hh is the hour in the range 01–24.
•
mm is the minute in the range 01–60.
•
ss is the second in the range 01–60.
Related Commands
cnfdate, cnftmzn, cnftmzngmt, dspdate
Attributes
Access level: SUPER_GP
State: active
Log: yes
Example
Set time for 11 PM. plus 20 minutes and 30 seconds.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > cnftime 11:20:30
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-183
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnftmzn
cnftmzn
Configure Time Zone—PXM1
Use the cnftmzn command to configure the time zone in the Western Hemisphere for the switch. To
configure a time zone outside the four standard time zones of the Western Hemisphere, enter the GMT
argument, then enter the cnftmzngmt command to specify an offset in hours from Greenwich Mean
Time.
The system returns no messages unless an error occurs. To see the time zone, enter the dspdate
command.
Syntax
cnftmzn <Timezone>
Syntax Description
Timezone
Sets the system time zone. Enter one of the following time zones:
•
GMT, Greenwich Mean Time
•
EST, Eastern Standard Time
•
CST, Central Standard Time
•
MST, Mountain Standard Time
•
PST, Pacific Standard Time
•
EDT, Eastern Daylight Time
•
CDT, Central Daylight Time
•
MDT, Mountain Daylight Time
•
PDT, Pacific Daylight Time
Related Commands
cnfdate, cnftmzn, cnftmzngmt, dspdate
Attributes
Access level: SUPER_GP
State: active
Log: log
Example
Configure the time zone in the node to U.S. Pacific Standard Time.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > cnftmzn PST
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-184
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnftmzngmt
cnftmzngmt
Configure Time Zone Management—PXM1
Use the cnftmzngmt command to configure the time zone for the node relative to GMT. Typically, this
command applies to nodes outside the four standard time zones of the Western Hemisphere.
Use the cnftmzngmt command according to the following sequence:
1.
Enter the cnftmzn command to specify the time zone as GMT.
2.
Specify an offset in hours relative to Greenwich Mean Time by entering the cnftmzngmt command.
The values are GMT plus or minus an integer in the range 1–12.
Use the dspdate command to see the time.
Syntax
cnftmzngmt <GMToffset>
Syntax Description
GMToffset
System time zone offset value. Enter one of the following time zone offset
values:
•
-12
•
-11
•
-10
•
10
•
11
•
12
Related Commands
cnfdate, cnftime, cnftmzn, dspdate
Attributes
Access level: SUPER_GP
State: active
Log: log
Example
Set time zone in the shelf to GMT plus 4 hours.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > cnftmzngmt 4
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-185
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnftrapip
cnftrapip
Configure Trap IP—PXM1
Use the cnftrapip command to configure the trap IP for Cisco WAN Manager. You can use the
dsptrapip command to confirm the trap IP address.
Before you use the cnftrapip command, do the following steps:
Step 1
Install the SNMP agent.
Step 2
Ensure that the interface for the switch contains an IP address. To assign an IP address for the switch
interface, enter the ipifconfig command.
For information about installing the SNMP agent for CWM, refer to the Cisco WAN Manager
Installation for Solaris, Release 10.
Syntax
cnftrapip <ip address>
Syntax Description
ip address
Ethernet IP address where traps are configured.
Related Commands
addtrapmgr, cnfsnmp, deltrapmgr, dsptrapip, dsptrapmgr
Attributes
Access level: SUPER_GP
State: active
Log: no
Example
Set the IP address 172.29.4.50 to the switch.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > cnftrapip 172.29.4.50
IP Address set successfully
Example
Verify the trap IP address by entering the dsptrapip command.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dsptrapip
Trap IP Address :172.29.4.50
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-186
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfuser
cnfuser
Configure User—PXM1
Use the cnfuser command to configure a new password or privilege level for a user. If the user does not
already exist, enter the cnfuser command with a new user-name creates that user.
If you do not specify a user-name (userID) but include one or more of the other parameters, the command
applies to the current user.
Syntax
cnfuser -u <userId> [-p <password>] [-l <accessLevel>]
Syntax Description
-u
Keyword that specifies a string of 1–12 characters that identifies a user. The maximum
number of users a system can accept is 50.
-p
(Optional) Keyword that specifies a new password with 5–15 characters for userId.
-l
(Optional) Keyword that specifies a new access level for the user. The accessLevel can be
SERVICE_GP, SUPER_GP, GROUP1, or ANYUSER.
The new level you type must be lower than the privilege of the current user.
System privilege level to be allocated for the user ID by using one of the following options:
•
SERVICE_GP
•
SUPER_GP
•
GROUP1 (highest level)
•
GROUP2
•
GROUP3
•
GROUP4
•
GROUP5
•
ANYUSER (lowest level)
The new user cannot be configured for an access level that is higher than the level defined for
the current login ID.
Related Commands
cnfname, cnfoamsegep, deluser, dspusers, users
Attributes
Access level: GROUP1
State: active
Log: yes
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-187
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cnfuser
Example
Configure the user information with the applicable user ID, password, and access level.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > cnfuser -u aa -p passw123 -l ANYUSER
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-188
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
commitrev
commitrev
Commit Revision—PXM1
Use the commitrev command to commit to the current running firmware version.
The following impacts of the commitrev command are
•
The primary firmware image is activated through the runrev command and is accepted.
•
The previous image is removed from the card’s main memory (but continues to reside on disk).
•
Starting another graceful revision change becomes possible. If you attempt loadrev on the same card
before you enter the commitrev command, the system blocks loadrev and states that a revision
change is in progress.
•
You cannot use the abortrev command to revert to the previous image. To bring a previous image
into memory and run it, you must use setrev to force-load the image (a non-graceful revision
change) or enter the restoreallcnf command.
Syntax
commitrev <slot> <revision>
Syntax Description
slot
Slot number of the card where the version is set.
revision
Revision number that is derived from the name of the firmware file, for
example, 3.0(0.171)P3.
Related Commands
abortrev, dspcd, dsprevs, loadrev, runrev
Attributes
Access level: SERVICE_GP
State: active
Log: log
Example
Commit to the current firmware version with the applicable slot number.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > commitrev 1 3.0(0.171)P3
one or more card(s) in logical slot will be reset.
Do you want to proceed (Yes/No)? n
(command not executed)
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-189
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
conntrace
conntrace
Connection Trace—PXM1
Use the conntrace command to trace an established connection that includes a soft PVC connection. The
result is displayed on the screen.
Syntax
conntrace <portid> [-callRef <callRef>] [-endptRef <endptRef>] [-vpi <vpi>][-vci <vc-i>]
Syntax Description
portid
Identifies the port for the soft PVC in the form of
[shelf.]slot[:subslot].port[:subport].
-callRef
Specifies the call reference for the soft PVC.
Range: 1–16777215
-endptRef
Endpoint reference for a point-to-multipoint call. If no endpoint reference is
specified, this is a point-to-point call.
Range: 1–32767
-vpi
VPI value of connection endpoint.
Range: 1–4095
-vci
VCI value of connection endpoint.
Range: 1–65535
Related Commands
pathtraceie, pathtracenode, pathtraceport
Attributes
Access level: SUPER_GP
State: active
Log: log
Example
Configure the connection trace with the applicable port ID and default settings.
spirita.1.PXM.a > conntrace 0.1.2 -callRef 1000
Result:Succ/Fail Reason: “Desc”
InterfaceId: “--”EndptRef: “--”
Originating Interface VPI: “--”
Originating Interface VCI: “--”
Originating Interface CallRef: “--”
NodeIdEgress PortVpiVciCallRefPhysPortid
XXXXZZZZaaabbbcccceeee
XXXXZZZZaaabbbcccceeee
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-190
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
conntrace
Terminating Interface VPI: “--”
Terminating Interface VCI: “--”
Terminating Interface CallRef: “--”
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-191
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
copy
copy
Copy—PXM1
Use the copy command to copy files.
Syntax
copy <source file name> <destination file name>
Syntax Description
source file name
The name of the file you intend to copy.
destination file name
The name of the new file resulting from copy or the name of the existing
file that is over-written as a result of copy.
Related Commands
cp, cd, ls, rm, pwd, rename
Attributes
Access level: GROUP1
State: all
Log: log
Example
Enter the saveallcnf command at the prompt and enter y to proceed. Then, cd to the C: /CNF directory.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > saveallcnf
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > cd C:/CNF
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > ll
size
date
------------512
APR-07-2001
512
APR-07-2001
512
DEC-06-2001
100328
DEC-06-2001
100725
JAN-23-2002
time
-----01:43:42
01:43:42
12:28:00
13:33:24
05:55:06
name
-------.
<DIR>
..
<DIR>
TMP
<DIR>
SES_SJ_01_200112061332.zip
SES_SJ_01_200201230553.zip
In the file system :
total space : 819200 K bytes
free space : 782210 K bytes
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > copy C: \pxm1_001.001.070.201_ses.fw
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-192
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
cp
cp
Copy—PXM1
Use the cp command to copy a file to a new file on the disk. This command is the same as the copy
command.
Syntax
cp <source file name> <destination file name>
Syntax Description
source file name
The name of the file you intend to copy.
destination file name
The name of the new file resulting from copy or the name of the existing
file that is over-written as a result of copy.
Related Commands
cp, cd, ls, rm, pwd, rename
Attributes
Access level: GROUP1
State: all
Log: log
Example
Enter the saveallcnf command at the prompt. Enter y to proceed. Then, cd to the C: /CNF directory.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > saveallcnf
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > cd C:/CNF
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > ll
size
date
------------512
APR-07-2001
512
APR-07-2001
512
DEC-06-2001
100328
DEC-06-2001
100725
JAN-23-2002
time
-----01:43:42
01:43:42
12:28:00
13:33:24
05:55:06
name
-------.
<DIR>
..
<DIR>
TMP
<DIR>
SES_SJ_01_200112061332.zip
SES_SJ_01_200201230553.zip
In the file system :
total space : 819200 K bytes
free space : 782210 K bytes
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > cp pxm1_001.001.070.201_ses.fw
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-193
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dbgsntp
dbgsntp
Debug SNTP—PXM
Use the dbgsntp command to either turn the SNTP debug and trace capabilities on or off.
Syntax
dbgsntp <enable | disable> [ipaddr] [-level <info | trace | debug>]
Syntax Description
enable | disable
Enables or disables the SNTP debug and trace capabilities.
ipaddr
Specifies the IP address.
-level
Enter one of the following options:
•
info—the functional level of the trace only.
•
trace—info level plus important events.
•
debug—trace level plus NTP message dump.
Related Commands
cnfsntp, deltrapmgr, dspsntp, dspsntpstats, clrsntpstats
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: active
Log: no
Example
Enable the SNTP debug and trace capabilities.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dbgsntp enable -level trace
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-194
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
deladdr
deladdr
Delete ATM Address—PXM1
Use the deladdr command to remove an ATM address for a UNI, IISP, or AINI.
Syntax
deladdr <portid> <atm-address> <length> [-plan <e164|nsap>]
Syntax Description
portid
Identifies a PNNI physical port. The format is slot:subslot.port:subport.
atm-address
Determines an ATM address or E.164 number.
The address plan specifies the address type and so determines the maximum
number of bytes or bits in the address. You can specify the address plan with the
forthcoming -plan option. The default plan is NSAP.
An NSAP address can have 1–20, 8-bit bytes. For example, a byte is
2-hexadecimal characters. Cisco recommends that you use 20 bytes for the NSAP
address.
An E.164 address can have 8–15 decimal digits.
The number of bits or bytes in the ATM address effects the uniqueness of the
address. The longest address ensures total uniqueness of the address. With a
one-byte address, any caller that sends an address whose first address byte
matches that one-byte ATM address goes to that port.
length
Determines the address length. The units of measure differ for each address plan.
The -plan option lets you specify E.164 or NSAP.
•
For NSAP address, this entry represents the length in bits by using the
maximum of a 20-byte address: 20 bytes x 8 bits per byte = 160 bits.
Range: 1–160
•
-plan
For an E.164 address plan, the value is the number of decimal digits. If the
ATM address consists of 15 digits, the value for this parameter is also 15.
Determines the address plan for either E.164 or NSAP.
For NSAP address, the first byte of the address automatically implies one of three
NSAP address plans: NSAP E.164, NSAP DCC, or NSAP ICD.
Default: nsap
Related Commands
addaddr, deladdrs, dspaddr
Attributes
Access level: GROUP1
State: active
Log: log
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-195
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
deladdr
Example
On port 12..2 , delete 47.1111.1111.1111.1111.1111.1111.1111.1111.1111.11 160. Note that the
command entry includes the address length of 160 after the address.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > deladdr 12.2 47.1111.1111.1111.1111.1111.1111.1111.1111.1111.11 160
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-196
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
deladdrs
deladdrs
Delete ATM Addresses—PXM1
Use the deladdrs command to delete all ATM addresses on a specified port. The deladdrs command
removes all ATM addresses on a UNI, AINI, or IISP. The optional plan parameter lets you differentiate
by the address plan for the following:
•
E164
•
NSAP
•
All address plans (the default)
Syntax
deladdrs <portid> [-plan {e164 | nsap | all}]
Syntax Description
portid
Identifies a PNNI physical port. The format is slot:subslot.port:subport.
-plan
Determines the address plan for the following:
•
E.164
•
NSAP
•
all
Default: all
Related Commands
addaddr, deladdr, dspaddr
Attributes
Access level: GROUP1
State: active
Log: log
Example
Delete all the addresses (regardless of address plan) for port 12.2
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > deladdrs 12.2
This command will delete all the addresses of the port
deladdrs: Do you want to proceed (YesNo)? y
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-197
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
delapsln
delapsln
Delete APS Line—PXM1
Use the delapsln command to delete APS from a line on the PXM card.
Syntax
delapsln <line>
Syntax Description
line
Specifies the working line number. Enter the value 1.
Related Commands
addapsln, cnfapsln, dspapsln
Attributes
Access level: SUPER_GP
State: active
Log: log
Example
Delete the APS configuration for working line number 1.
spirita.1.PXM.a > delapsln 1
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-198
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
delcon
delcon
Delete Connection—PXM1
Use the delcon command to delete a configured endpoint. Delete the master first and then the slave.
Syntax
delcon <portid> <vpi> <vci>
Syntax Description
portid
Interface number.
vpi
VPI assigned to the endpoint.
Range: 1–255 (UNI interface)
Range: 0–4095 (NNI interface)
vci
VCI assigned to the endpoint.
Range: 32–65535 (VCC connection)
Range: 0 (VPC connection)
Related Commands
addcon, cnfcon, dncon, rrtcon, upcon
Attributes
Access level: GROUP1
State: active
Log: log
Example
Delete a configured connection with the applicable default settings.
spirita.1.PXM.a > delcon 0.1.1 1 100
Deletion successful
spirita.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-199
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
delconsegep
delconsegep
Delete Connection Segment Endpoint—PXM1
Use the delconsegep command to remove a segment endpoint on a connection. When both VPI and VCI
are present, the segment endpoint is a F5 flow endpoint (for VCCs). When the optional VCI is not
present, the segment endpoint is a F4 flow endpoint (for VPCs).
Syntax
delconsegep <portid> <vpi> [<vci>]
Syntax Description
portid
Interface number.
vpi
VPI assigned to the endpoint. For a UNI interface, this parameter can take a value
between 1–255. For a NNI interface, this can take a value between 1–4095.
vci
VCI assigned to the endpoint. In case of a VCC connection, this parameter takes a
value between 32–65535. For a VPC connection, this parameter is specified as 0.
Related Commands
cnfconsegep
Attributes
Access level: GROUP1
State: active
Log: Log
Example
Delete the connection segment endpoint with the applicable port ID, VP,I and VCI values.
spirita.1.PXM.a > delconsegep 0.1.1 1 100
spirita.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-200
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
delete
delete
Delete—PXM1
Use the delete command to remove any files on the disk.
Syntax
delete <file name>
Syntax Description
file name
Name of the file to be removed.
Related Commands
deladdr
Attributes
Access level: GROUP1
State: all
Log: log
Example
Delete the applicable files from the disk.
spirita.1.PXM.a > delete any_file
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-201
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
delfltset
delfltset
Delete Filter Set—PXM1
Use the delfltset command to delete an ATM address filter set. If the index is specified, the address entry
in the filter set corresponding to the index is removed. If no index is specified, the filter set and all the
address entries contained in it are removed.
Syntax
delfltset <name> [-index number]
Syntax Description
name
Name of the filter set to be deleted.
-index
Index value of the filter to be deleted.
Range: 1–65535
Default: 0
Related Commands
cnffltset
Attributes
Access level: GROUP1
State: active
Log: log
Example
Consider a filter “firstfilter” created via the addfltset command. This filter can be deleted using the
delfltset command as follows:
pnnises1.1.PXM.a > delfltset firstfilter
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-202
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dellmiloop
dellmiloop
Delete LMI Loopback—PXM1
Use the dellmiloop command to remove LMI loopback state for a line.
Note
You can activate only one PXM line on the feeder implementation of an SES node.
Syntax
dellmiloop <slot.port>
Syntax Description
slot
Specifies the slot number.
Range: 1–32
port
Specifies the port number.
Range: 1–256
Related Commands
addlmiloop
Attributes
Access level: SUPER_GP
State: active
Log: no
Example
Delete the LMI loopback line from the current PXM.
spirit11.1.1.PXM.a > dellmiloop 1.6
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-203
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
delpnni-node
delpnni-node
Delete a PNNI Node—PXM1
Use the delpnni-node command to delete a PNNI node from the PNNI network topology. The
delpnni-node command removes a PNNI node from the PNNI network topology. A node that this
command deletes can be restored with the related addpnni-node command. Confirm the deletion of
nodes with the dsppnni-node command.
Syntax
delpnni-node <node-index>
Syntax Description
node-index
The node index indicates the relative level of the logical node within a
multi-peer group on the switch.
Range: 1–10
Related Commands
cnfpnni-node, dsppnni-node
Attributes
Access level: SUPER_GP
State: active
Log: log
Example
Delete the node with the node-index 3.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > delpnni-node 3
Example
Enter the dsppnni-node command and specify a node-index of 3. The last line of the d display states the
error node does not exist, which indicates that you successfully deleted the node.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dsppnni-node 3
Syntax: dsppnni-node [node-index]
nodeIndex -- node-index: 32-bit number starting from 1, Optional parameter
possible errors are:
node does not exist
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Unknown Error Code
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-204
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
delpnni-summary-addr
delpnni-summary-addr
Delete PNNI Summary Address—PXM1
Use the delpnni-summary-addr command to remove a PNNI summary address from the node. The
delpnni-summary-addr command deletes a PNNI summary address for a PNNI node.
Syntax
delpnni-summary-addr <node-index> <address-prefix> <prefix-length>
Syntax Description
node-index
The node index indicates the relative level of the logical node within a
multi-peer group on the switch is 1.
Range: 1–10
address-prefix
ATM address prefix assigned to the local switching system.
Default: none
prefix-length
Length of the address-prefix, in number of bits, equal to or less than 152 bits.
Note
Zero-length summary address is not currently supported.
Default: none
Related Commands
addpnni-summary-addr, dsppnni-summary-addr
Attributes
Access level: SUPER_GP
State: active
Log: log
Example
Delete a summary address as follows:
•
The node-index is 1.
•
The node address prefix is 47.0091.8100.0000.0030.9409.f1f1.
•
The length of the address prefix is 104 bits.
If necessary, enter the dsppnni-summary-addr command to confirm the deletion.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > delpnni-summary-addr 1 47.0091.8100.0000.0030.9409.f1f1 104
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-205
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
delpnport
delpnport
Delete PNNI Port—PXM1
Use the delpnport command to remove a specified UNI or NNI port. This command is used to remove
a port from the controller. It is allowed only if the PNNI port does not exist on the switch, for example,
the PNNI partition associated with the port is removed. In the plug and play scenario, if no provisioning
activity is done on the port from the controller, removing the PNNI partition on the switch will
automatically remove the PNNI port on the controller.
Syntax
delpnport <portid>
Syntax Description
portid
Specifies the interface number.
Related Commands
addpnport, dnpnport, dsppnport, uppnport
Attributes
Access level: GROUP1
State: active
Log: log
Example
Delete port 1.6 from the switch.
spirita.1.PXM.a > delpnport 1.6
spirita.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-206
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
delpnportacc
delpnportacc
Delete PNNI Port Access—PXM1
Use the delpnportacc command to delete an address access filter group for a port.
Syntax
delpnportacc <portid> {in | out}
Syntax Description
portid
Interface number.
in
Delete the incoming address access filter group for the port.
Default: 1
out
Delete the outgoing address access filter group for the port.
Default: 1
Related Commands
cnfpnportacc
Attributes
Access level: GROUP1
State: active
Log: log
Example
Delete the filter group for incoming calls from port 1.6.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > delpnportacc 1.6 in
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-207
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
delpref
delpref
Delete Preferred Route—PXM1
Use the delpref command to delete a preferred route description from the preferred route database. Only
if no SPVCs are currently using a preferred route, is the preferred route deleted.
Syntax
delpref <routeId>
Syntax Description
routeId
Specifies a number that uniquely identifies the route location within the database.
Range: 1–1000
Related Commands
addpref, cnfconpref, dsppref, dspprefs, modpref
Attributes
Access level: GROUP1
State: active
Log: log
Example
Remove a preferred route description 10.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > delpref 10
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-208
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
delprfx
delprfx
Delete Prefix—PXM1
Use the delprfx command to remove an ILMI address prefix associated with UNI, IISP, or AINI.
Syntax
delprfx <portid> <atm-prefix>
Syntax Description
portid
Interface number.
atm-prefix
A 13-byte ATM address prefix, specified as 26 hexadecimal digits.
Related Commands
addprfx, dspprfx
Attributes
Access level: GROUP1
State: active
Log: log
Example
Delete ATM prefix 47.0091.8100.0000.0000.0ca7.9e01 from PNNI physical port 0:1.5:1.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > delprfx 0:1.5:1 47.0091.8100.0000.0000.0ca7.9e01
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-209
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
delserialif
delserialif
Delete Serial Interface—PXM1
Use the delserialif command to delete a serial interface.
Syntax
delserialif <port#>
Syntax Description
port#
Indicates the type of port you want to add. Enter 1 to delete a maintenance port. Enter
2 to delete a console port.
Related Commands
cnfserialif, dspserialif
Attributes
Access level: superuser
State: active
Log: yes
Example
Delete a maintenance port.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > delserialif 1
Example
Verify the settings by entering the dspserialif command.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dspserialif 1
SerialPortNum
: 1
SerialPortType : maintenance
SerialPortSpeed : 19200
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-210
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
delsesn
delsesn
Delete Session—PXM1
Use the delsesn command to ungracefully delete a user-session. The delsesn command lets you
terminate one or more user-sessions. Termination takes place immediately upon command execution.
Each user receives a message that their session is being terminated by a foreign host.
To determine the number of the session, use the who command. The session number appears as a number
appended to the session type in the who display. The session types are console and telnet.
Syntax
delsesn <sesn no> <sesn no>...
Syntax Description
sesn no
Specifies the number of the session in the range of 0–15. The who command or the
dspsesn command can provide the user-session numbers. The dspsesn command output
is more conducive for the delsesn command.
Note
The session number that the who command displays is a hexadecimal number.
For the delsesn command, enter it in decimal format. For example, if the session that the
who command displays is telnet.0a, enter 10 for the delsesn command.
Related Commands
dspsesn, who
Attributes
Access level: SERVICE_GP
State: all
Log: log
Example
Determine the existing user-sessions. For comparison, first run the who command then the dspsesn
command. (The privilege level for who is ANYUSER, and the privilege level for the dspsesn command
is SERVICE_GP.) Compare the output of each command.
Note
The dspsesn command output provides a form of the user-session number that is a requirement for
the delsesn command.
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-211
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
delsesn
The asterisk indicates that the session where the who and dspsesn commands originated. The only
session in this case is 1. Delete session 1 (user cisco), then repeat the dspsesn command.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > who
Port
Slot
Idle
UserId
From
------------------------------------------------------------telnet.01 *
1
0:00:00
cisco
10.21.66.169
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dspsesn
----------------------------------------> Session 0 (console):
Waiting for login...
----------------------------------------*> Session 1 (telnet):
Executing command: dspsesn
user name:
access level:
slot:
slotFallback:
From:
cisco
CISCO_GP
1
1
10.21.66.169
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > delsesn 1
WARNING! delsesn is a destructive command it will
non-gracefully delete sessions selected by you
Do you wish to proceed ? [y/n] n
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-212
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
delsigdiag
delsigdiag
Delete Signaling Diagnostic—PXM1
Use the delsigdiag command to remove a signaling diagnostics filter table entry or some configuration
values within a filter table entry.
Syntax
delsigdiag [index] [-cldaddr nsap-address] [-clgaddr nsap-address] [-cldaddrmask {yes | no}]
[-clgaddrmask {yes | no}] [-casttype {yes | no}] [-clrcause {yes | no}] [-connctgy {yes | no}]
[-inport {yes | no}] [-outport {yes | no}] [-maxrec {yes | no}] [-scope {yes | no}]
[-servctgy {yes | no}] [-agetimeout {yes | no}]
Syntax Description
index
Specifies the diagnostics index number for the filter table. If no other keywords
are entered, the indexed filter table entry is deleted.
Range: 1–50
-cldaddr
Removes the configured called address from the filter entry in NSAP format.
Default: NULL
-clgaddr
Removes the configured calling address from the filter entry in NSAP format.
-cldaddrmask
yes returns the called address mask to the default NULL.
Default: NULL
Default: no
-clgaddrmask
yes returns the calling address mask to the default NULL.
Default: no
-casttype
yes disables the filtering by connection type.
Default: no
-clrcause
yes disables the filtering by the release cause code.
Default: no
-connctgy
yes returns the connection category to the default ALL.
Default: no
-inport
yes returns the incoming port to the default value 0.
Default: no
-outport
yes returns the outgoing port to the default value 0.
Default: no
-maxrec
yes returns the maximum records to default value 20.
Default: no
-scope
yes disables the filtering by scope.
Default: no
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-213
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
delsigdiag
-servctgy
yes returns the service category to the default ALL.
Default: no
-agetimeout
yes returns the agetimeout to default 600.
Default: no
Related Commands
clrsigstats, cnfsigdiag, dspsigstats
Attributes
Access level: SERVICE_GP
State: active
Log: log
Example
Delete index entry 12 in the signaling diagnostics filter table.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > delsigdiag 12
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Change index entry 12 in the signaling diagnostics filter table so that the -clrcause parameter value is
changed to no.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > delsigdiag 12 -clrcause no
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-214
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
deltrapmgr
deltrapmgr
Delete Trap Manager—PXM1
Use the deltrapmgr command to delete a trap manager. The deltrapmgr command requires an IP
address for deletion. To see existing trap managers, enter the dsptrapmgr command.
Syntax
deltrapmgr <ip_addr>
Syntax Description
ip_addr
IP address in the following dotted decimal format:
nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn, n=0-9 and nnn =< 256
Related Commands
addtrapmgr, cnfsnmp, dspsnmp, dsptrapmgr
Attributes
Access level: SUPER_GP
State: active
Log: log
Example
Delete the trap manager with IP address 172.29.52.25.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > deltrapmgr 172.29.52.25
Example
Verify that the trap manager with IP address 172.29.52.25 is deleted by entering the dsptrapmgr
command.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dsptrapmgr
Shelf Database table empty.trapsConfig.trapConfigTable
LastTrapSeqNum:
NumOfValidEntries:
1078
0
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-215
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
deluser
deluser
Delete User—PXM1
Use the deluser command to remove a user from the list of users on the SES node. The system does not
allow you to delete a user with a privilege level higher than the level at which you enter the command.
For example, if the current user privilege is 2 (GROUP2), you cannot delete a user at level 1 (GROUP1).
No screen output appears unless an error occurs.
Syntax
deluser <user_Id>
Syntax Description
user_Id
User name, consisting of up to 12 characters.
Related Commands
bootChange, cnfuser, dspusers, users
Attributes
Access level: GROUP1
State: active
Log: log
Example
Delete a user from the list.
spirita.1.PXM.a > deluser myname
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-216
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
disablesscop
disablesscop
Disable SSCOP—PXM1
Use the disablesscop command to enable or disable SSCOP on a port. This command is used only when
a port is administratively down (by the dnpnport command).
Note
Make sure a valid and useful reason exists for disabling SSCOP.
Syntax
disablesscop <portid> {yes | no}
Syntax Description
portid
Interface number.
yes | no
Disables or enables SSCOP on a port with the following options.
•
yes: disables SSCOP
•
no: enables SSCOP
Note
Do not disable SSCOP on a port.
Default: no (enable SSCOP on the specified port)
Related Commands
clrsscopstats, dspsscop, dspsscopstats
Attributes
Access level: GROUP1
State: active
Log: log
Example
Disable SSCOP on a port 1.6.
spirita.1.PXM.a > dnpnport 1.6
spirita.1.PXM.a > disablesscop 1.6 yes
spirita.1.PXM.a >
Example
Enable SSCOP on a port 2.3.
spirita.1.PXM.a > dnpnport 2.3
spirita.1.PXM.a > disablesscop 2.3 no
spirita.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-217
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dncon
dncon
Down Connection—PXM1
Use the dncon command to down a connection. If the connection is routed, it is derouted. The dncon
command administratively deactivates (or “downs”) so you can modify or troubleshoot the network. This
operation applies to only SPVCs. To reactivate the connection, enter the upcon command.
Syntax
dncon <portid> <vpi> <vci>
Syntax Description
portid
Specifies the interface number.
Range: 1–60
vpi
Specifies that the starting VPI is to view active calls starting from the specified
VPI of the specified port. This parameter is used only if the port is specified.
Range: 0–4095
vci
Specifies that the starting VCI is to view active calls starting from the specified
VPI/VCI of the specified port. This parameter is used only if the VPI is
specified.
Range: 32–65535
Related Commands
addcon, cnfcon, delcon, upcon
Attributes
Access level: GROUP1
State: active
Log: log
Example
Down a connection on a port. Set the starting VPI to 1. Set the starting VCI to 100.
spirita.1.PXM.a > dncon 2.3 1 100
Admin state of connection is DOWN
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-218
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dnpnport
dnpnport
Down PNNI Port—PXM1
Use the dnpnport command to take a specified UNI or NNI port out of service on the controller
(administratively “down” on the controller). This command is used to bring a port out of service for
provisioning and maintenance activity. For example, the port needs to be down to change some of the
port configuration parameters, which are affecting service.
Note
The dnpnport command deletes all connections on a port—except for SPVCs whose endpoints are
on the port.
Syntax
dnpnport <portid>
Syntax Description
portid
Interface number.
Related Commands
addpnport, delpnport, dsppnport, uppnport
Attributes
Access level: GROUP1
State: active
Log: log
Example
Down a PNNI port with the applicable port ID for either UNI or NNI.
spirita.1.PXM.a > dnpnport 2.3
spirita.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-219
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
downloadflash
downloadflash
Download Flash—PXM1
Use the downloadflash command to load the first boot code found by the PXM1 hard drive into flash
memory. The downloadflash command does not execute at the runtime prompt. It operates in bootmode
only.
A downloadflash session concludes the sequence of tasks for performing a PXM1 boot code load. Prior
to entering this command, you must access the boot code and transfer the file to the PXM1 hard drive by
entering a put command). Arguments within the put command let you load boot code to any
combination of standby or active PXM1s. Once firmware is installed in slot 1, the bootcode is mirrored
to a new PXM1 in slot 2 if present.
However, to ensure that the boot code is correct, enter the downloadflash command as a manual way to
download the boot code to the standby PXM1.
Note
Make sure only one version of backup boot code resides in the firmware directory: either delete or
rename old versions to ensure that downloadflash uses the correct version.
Syntax
downloadflash
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
None
Attributes
Access level: SERVICE_GP
State: any
Log: no
Example
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > downloadflash
Error: flash_file supported only at backup boot
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
> ftp <switch_dest_addr>
> bin
> put <pxm_bkup_version>.fw [email protected]
> quit
wilco.7.PXM.a > downloadflash
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-220
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
downloadflash
To place the boot code on the active PXM45 only, use the following "put" string:
>put pxm_bkup_version>.fw PINNACLE@PXM45_ACTIVE.BT
To place the boot code on the standby PXM45 only, use the following "put" string:
>put pxm_bkup_version>.fw PINNACLE@PXM45_STANDBY.BT
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-221
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dspabrtparmdft
dspabrtparmdft
Display ABR Traffic Parameter Defaults—PXM1
Use the dspabrtparmdft command to display default ABR traffic parameters used by a port to set up ABR
SPVCs.
Syntax
dspabrtparmdft <portid>
Syntax Description
portid
Specifies the port to be configured.
Related Commands
cnfabrtparmdft
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: any
Log: no
Example
Display the applicable default ABR traffic parameters for port 2.3.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dspabrtparmdft 2.3
Default ABR Traffic Parameters For: 2:-1.3:-1
----------------------------------RIF : 7 (= 1/512)
RDF : 4 (= 1/4096)
TBE : 1048320 (Cells)
NRM : 5 (= 32 Cells)
TRM : 8 (= 100 msec)
ADTF: 50 (= 0.50 Sec)
CDF : 7 (= 1/2)
FSD : 0 (microSec)
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-222
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dspaddr
dspaddr
Display Address—PXM1
Use the dspaddr command to view ATM addresses and associated information, such as address plan and
scope for UNI or IISP.
The following items are in the display:
•
ATM addresses on the port and the length of each
•
Address plan
•
Type of address—internal or external
•
Protocol for advertising the address
•
Choice for address distribution
•
ID number of transit node
•
Scope—applicable to multi-peer groups only
Syntax
dspaddr <portid>
Syntax Description
portid
Specifies the port to be configured.
Related Commands
addaddr, deladdr
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: any
Log: no
Example
Display the ATM addresses for the applicable port ID.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dspaddr 2.3
45.0073.1300.0000.1010.1010.1010.0000.0000.0001.00
length: 160
type: internal
proto: local
scope: 0
plan: nsap_e164
redistribute: false
transit network id:
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-223
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dspainihopcount
dspainihopcount
Display AINI Hop Count—PXM1
Use the dspainihopcount command to enable or disable the status and the limit for the number of hops
a connection can have over AINI links. The counter is the Hop Counter Information Element. This
configuration applies to the entire node.
Syntax
dspainihopcount
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
cnfainihopcount
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: any
Log: log
Example
Display the current configuration for AINI hop count.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dspainihopcount
AINI Hop Counter Generation: enable
Max AINI Hops: 20
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-224
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dspapscfg
dspapscfg
Display APS Configuration—PXM1
Use the dspapscfg command to view APS configuration information.
Syntax
dspapscfg
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
cnfapsln, delapsln, dspapsln, switchapsln
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: any
Log: no
Example
Display the configuration for APS.
spirita.1.PXM.a > dspapscfg
SlotLine Type
SFBER SDBER WTR Dir Revert K1K2
----------------------------------------------------1.1&2.1
1+1_2 3
5
1
UNI NRV
ENA
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-225
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dspapsln
dspapsln
Display APS Line—PXM1
Use the dspapsln command to view the current APS line parameters on the PXM card. This command
is entered for either a working line or a protection line.
Syntax
dspapsln
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
addapsln, cnfapsln, delapsln, switchapsln
Attributes
Access level: any
State: any
Log: no
Example
Display the current APS configuration for the PXM lines.
spirita.1.PXM.a > dspapsln
SlotLine Type Act W_LINE P_LINE APS_ST CDType Dir Revt LastUsrSwReq
-----------------------------------------------------------------------1.1&2.1 1+1_2 2.1 ALM
YEL
OK
OC-3
UNI NRV NO_REQUEST
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-226
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dspatmaddr
dspatmaddr
Display ATM Address—PXM1
Use the dspatmaddr command to view all active ATM addresses for a port. The output includes
configured ATM addresses, configured ILMI address prefixes, and ATM addresses registered through an
ILMI address registration procedure.
Syntax
dspatmaddr <portid>
Syntax Description
portid
Specifies the port to be configured.
Related Commands
addaddr, deladdr, dspaddr
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: any
Log: no
Example
Display the active ATM addresses for the applicable port ID.
spirita.1.PXM.a > dspatmaddr 0.1.2
Port Id: 2.1
Configured Port Address(es):
39.8401.8011.3744.0000.0040.1005.3456.7834.7777.77
88.8888.8888.0000.0000.0000.0000.0000.0000.5151.00
ILMI Configured Port Prefix(es):
47.0091.8100.0000.0000.0ca7.9e01
88.8888.8888.0000.0000.0000.0000
ILMI Registered Port Address(es):
47.0091.8100.0000.0000.0ca7.9e01.1234.5678.9012.34
88.8888.8888.0000.0000.0000.0000.1234.5678.9012.34
LECS Address(es):
47.0091.8100.0000.0000.0ca7.9e01.4000.0c81.9030.01
47.0091.8100.0000.0000.0ca7.9e01.4000.0c81.9030.02
spirita.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-227
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dspbecnt
dspbecnt
Display Bit-Error Count—PXM1
Use the dspbecnt command to view the APS bit-error information for a generic line.
Syntax
dspbecnt <line>
Syntax Description
line
Working line number. Enter the value 1.
Related Commands
clrbecnt
Attributes
Access level: superuser
State: active
Log: no
Example
Display the APS bit-error information for the applicable line.
mpgses1.1.PXM.a >
Line 1.1:
24 Hour
Bit
15 Minute Bit
15 Second Bit
Line 2.1:
24 Hour
Bit
15 Minute Bit
15 Second Bit
dspbecnt 1
Error Count 0
Error Count 0
Error Count 0
Error Count 0
Error Count 38
Error Count 0
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-228
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dspbkpl
dspbkpl
Display Backplane—PXM1
Use the dspbkpl command to display the switch backplane information.
The following types of information are for the backplane:
•
Card type (a hexadecimal number)
•
Chassis-level part number and revision number
•
PCB 73-level part number
•
Chassis serial number
•
CLEI code
•
PCB 28-level part number
Syntax
dspbkpl
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
None
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: any
Log: no
Example
Display the information for the switch backplane.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dspbkpl
BackPlane Information
--------------------Card Type:
Chassis 800-level P/N:
Chassis 800-level rev:
PCB 73-level P/N:
Chassis serial number:
CLEI CODE:
PCB 28-level P/N:
0x145
800-04793-05
A0
73-3349-04
SCA050209X1
BAM8MNOBRB
28-2687-04
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-229
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dspcbclk
dspcbclk
Display Cellbus Clock—PXM1
Use the dspcbclk command to display clock speed for individual cellbuses.
The following functions are for the dspcbclk command:
•
Cellbuses support only the default clock rate of 21 MHz and either support 21 Mhz or 42 Mhz rates.
•
Individual cellbus is running at the standard rate of 21 MHz or the double-speed rate of 42 Mhz.
•
Card slots that reside on each of the eight cellbuses.
Syntax
dspcbclk
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
cnfcbclk
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: any
Log: no
Example
Display the current cellbus clock configuration. The display shows that all cellbuses currently have the
default speed of 21 Mhz.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dspcbclk
CellBus
Rate (MHz)
Slots
Allowable Rates (MHz)
---------------------------------------------------------CB1
21
3
21, 42
CB2
21
5
21, 42
CB3
21
10
21, 42
CB4
21
12
21, 42
CB5
21
11
21, 42
CB6
21
6, 7
21, 42
CB7
21
4
21, 42
CB8
21
13, 14
21, 42
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-230
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dspcd
dspcd
Display Card—PXM1
Use the dspcd command to view the hardware and firmware information about the selected PXM.
The following information is listed in the display contents:
•
Serial numbers.
•
Front and back card types and the status of each.
•
Runtime and boot firmware revision numbers. (See the loadrev command description for an
explanation of how to interpret the revision field.)
•
Status, possibly including the reason for the last reset and state of the integrated alarm.
•
General node information, such as node name, date, and time.
•
Crossbar status.
•
Current version of firmware.
Syntax
dspcd <slot>
Syntax Description
slot
Slot number of the installed PXM. Enter either 1 or 2.
Related Commands
dspcds, dspcdstatus
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: all
Log: no
Example
The System Rev field contains 03.00. The 0s are leading 0s only. Therefore, the major release number
is 3, and the minor release number is 1. This information corresponds to the major and minor release
numbers in the primary, secondary, and current software revision numbers (the fields labeled Prim SW
Rev:, Sec SW Rev: , and Cur SW Rev: ).
Display the card information for the slot number 1.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dspcd 1
SES_SJ
System Rev: 03.00
SES-CNTL
Slot Number
1
Redundant Slot: 2
Inserted Card:
Reserved Card:
Jan. 31, 2002 22:40:01 GMT
Node Alarm: NONE
Front Card
----------
Upper Card
----------
Lower Card
----------
PXM1_OC3
PXM1_OC3
UIA BackCard
UIA BackCard
SMFIR_4_OC3
SMFIR_4_OC3
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-231
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dspcd
State:
Active
Serial Number:
SBK043200VK
Prim SW Rev:
3.0(0.171)P3
Sec SW Rev:
3.0(0.171)P3
Cur SW Rev:
3.0(0.171)P3
Boot FW Rev:
3.0(0.171)P3
800-level Rev:
B0
800-level Part#:
800-06454-03
CLEI Code:
BAA6CCVCAA
Reset Reason:
On Reset From Shell
Card Alarm:
NONE
Failed Reason:
None
Miscellaneous Information:
Active
SBK041200W7
--------A0
800-03688-01
BAI9Y00AAA
Type <CR> to continue, Q<CR> to stop:
SES_SJ
System Rev: 03.00
SES-CNTL
Crossbar Slot Status:
Active
SBK05070188
--------E1
800-05351-01
BA2IKNHBAA
Jan. 31, 2002 22:40:01 GMT
Node Alarm: NONE
No Crossbar
Alarm Causes
-----------NO ALARMS
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-232
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dspcdalms
dspcdalms
Display Card Alarms—PXM1
Use the dspcdalms command to view the summary of node card alarms. This includes line alarms, port
alarms, and channel alarms.
The following are the definitions of each alarm severity from Bellcore TR-NWT-000474:
•
Critical, indicating complete, non-recoverable failure, loss of data, and do on. The failed entity must
be restored. A power failure or a disconnected line is an example.
•
Major, indicating service-affecting errors. This event indicates that a major service is damaged or
lost, but the existing traffic is not affected.
•
Minor, indicating non-service affecting errors or errors on a remote node. Corrective action is
appropriate to prevent a serious fault from developing. An example is a fan failure, where no
subscribers are immediately affected, but calamity could result if the situation persists. Note that an
accumulation of lower-level alarms does equal a higher-level alarm.
Frequently, the dspcdalms command follows the higher-level command dspndalms.
Syntax
dspcdalms [slot]
Syntax Description
slot
Identifies a particular slot.
Related Commands
dspcdstatus, dspndalms
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: active
Log: no
Example
Display card alarms without specifying a slot.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dspcdalms
Card Alarm Summary
Slot
---1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Critical
-------0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Major
------0
1
0
0
0
0
0
Minor
------0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Use dspcdalms <slot> to see more detail.
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-233
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dspcdalms
Example
Display the card alarm for slot 1.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dspcdalms 1
Card Alarm Summary
Alarm Type
---------Hardware Alarm
Card State Alarm
Disk Alarm
SRM Alarm
Line Alarm
Port Alarm
LMI Alarm
Channel Alarm
Critical
-------0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Major
------0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Minor
------0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-234
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dspcderrs
dspcderrs
Display Card Errors—PXM1
Use the dspcderrs command to display information about card errors.
Syntax
dspcderrs
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
clrerr, dsptrapip, dsperrs
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: any
Log: no
Example
Display information about the card errors.
spirit11.1.1.PXM.a > dspcderrs
dspcderrs
08/05/95-18:53:05 tRootTask
09/05/95-09:14:08 tRootTask
3 Task failed
3 Task failed
: scm
: scm
value = 0 = 0x0
spirit11.1.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-235
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dspcds
dspcds
Display Card Status—PXM1
Use the dspcds command to view status of all installed cards in the SES PNNI Controller. The dspcds
command also displays high-level information for all the cards in the node.
The following contents are provided in the dspcds command:
•
Revision level of the boot firmware
•
Revision level of the system software
•
Date and time of command execution, including GMT offset
•
Backplane serial number and its hardware revision level
•
IP address of the statistics master (a workstation)
•
Type of card in the front and back slots and the (active/standby) state of each
•
Alarm status for each card and the shelf itself
•
Redundancy configuration for each slot
Syntax
dspcds
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
dspcd
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: all
Log: no
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-236
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dspcds
Example
Display the card status for all the cards.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dspcds
SES_SJ
System Rev: 03.00
Chassis Serial No:
SCA050209X1 Chassis Rev: A0
Card
Slot
---
Front/Back
Card State
----------
Card
Type
--------
Alarm
Status
--------
Jan. 31, 2002 22:50:38 GMT
GMT Offset: 4
Node Alarm: NONE
Redundant
Redundancy
Slot
Type
-----------
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
Active/Active
Empty Resvd/Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
PXM1_OC3
-------------
NONE
NONE
-----------
02
01
-----------
PRIMARY SLOT
SECONDARY SLOT
-----------
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-237
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dspcdstatus
dspcdstatus
Display Card Status—PXM1
Use the dspcdstatus command to view the status of the card alarms. The dspcdstatus command displays
the most serious alarms reported by a service module.
The following pertains to alarm information:
•
Lines
•
Ports
•
Connections
•
Feeders
•
Severity of each alarm
You can enter the dspcdstatus command to isolate the alarm source if, for example, you see that a
Critical Alarm LED is lit or just want to check the node for alarms. You can subsequently use other alarm
commands to locate the problem.
The following are the commands related to the dspcdstatus command:
•
The dspndalms command displays various types of alarms on the node from a high-level
perspective. With the information in the dspndalms display, you can select one of the other
commands to investigate the alarm further.
•
The dspcdalms command identifies line, port, feeder, or connection alarms.
•
The dspclkalms command shows alarms related to network clocks.
•
The dspenvalms command lists alarms for out-of-range conditions for temperature, voltage sources,
and so forth.
•
The dspswalms command shows alarms related to the switching hardware on PXM1.
The alarm monitoring function on PXM1 uses two criteria to determine which alarm to display. One
criterion is alarm severity, and the other is hierarchy. For more information about the alarm severity
definitions, see the dspcdalms command.
Two hierarchies of alarm types are card alarms and node alarms. For a list of alarm categories, see
Figure 3-2.
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-238
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dspcdstatus
Figure 3-2
Alarm Type Hierarchy
Disk
Card
Power supply
Line
DC level
Port
Fan
Feeder
Temperature
Channel
34910
Card alarms
Legacy alarms
The alarm monitoring function reports the highest status alarm after it sorts the current alarms first by
severity then by hierarchy. If alarms of equal severity exit in both hierarchies, the system reports the node
alarm as the highest status alarm. For example, if a major alarm exists on a line and a major power alarm
exists, the dspcdstatus command displays the power alarm as the highest status alarm.
Syntax
dspcdstatus <slot_number>
Syntax Description
slot_number
Command delineator that precedes the slot number entry.
Related Commands
dspcdalms, dspenvalms, dspndalms, dspswalms
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: active
Log: no
Example
Display the card alarm status for slot 1.
spirita.1.PXM.a > dspcdstatus
Defaulting to logical slot
1.
Logical Slot
1
Physical Slot
Card Alarm Status - Type LINE
1
Severity CRITICAL
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-239
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dspcdvtdft
dspcdvtdft
Display CDVT Default—PXM1
Use the dspcdvtdft command to view the default cell delay variation tolerance (CDVT) set for a
specified port.
Syntax
dspcdvtdft <portid>
Syntax Description
portid
Specifies the port to be configured.
Related Commands
cnfcdvtdft
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: any
Log: no
Example
Display the CDVT default for port 2.3.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dspcdvtdft 2.3
CDVT:
cbr:
250000
rt-vbr:
250000
nrt-vbr:
250000
ubr:
250000
abr:
250000
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-240
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dspclkinfo
dspclkinfo
Display Clock Information—PXM1
Use the dspclkinfo command to display clock information.
Syntax
dspclkinfo
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
None
Attributes
Access level: GROUP1
State: active
Log: log
Example
Display the clock information.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dspclkinfo
****** Clock HW registers ********
SEL_T1 = t1
SEL100 = ON
SEL120 = ON
NOEXTCLK = ON
SEL120 = ON
priMuxClockSource = INTERNAL_OSC
prevPriMuxClockSource = INTERNAL_OSC
primaryInbandClockSourceLineNum = 0
secMuxClockSource = EXTERNAL_CLOCK
prevSecMuxClockSource = none
secondaryInbandClockSourceLineNumber = 1
currentClockSetReq = primary
currentClockHwStat = primary
PreviousClockHwStat = internal
extClockPresent = No
extClkConnectorType = RJ45
extClkSrcImpedance = 100 Ohms
Internal Clock Status=255, Primary Clock Status=0
Secondary Clock Status=0, Last inband Clock State=0
last Inband Clock state= 0, Last External Clock Present = 1
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-241
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dspcmdabbr
dspcmdabbr
Display Command Abbreviation—PXM1
Use the dspcmdabbr command to show whether the CLI accepts abbreviated command names. The
dspcmdabbr command lets you see whether the CLI requires the entire name of a command or accepts
the first unique string of characters that identifies a command. For example, loa is enough to identify
loadrev if the command abbreviation is enabled. The string lo is not enough to identify a particular
command because of the logout command.
Syntax
dspcmdabbr
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
cnfcmdabbr
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: active
Log: no
Example
Check the status of command abbreviation.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dspcmdabbr
Command abbreviations allowed
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-242
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dspcon
dspcon
Display Connection—PXM1
Use the dspcon command to display a summary of soft PVC connections on a specific port or all ports.
This command applies only to endpoint nodes.
Most of the information in the dspcon output comes from the addcon execution. For more information,
see the description for the addcon command. Also, entering the cnfpnni-intf command can affect the
dspcon command output.
The connection identifiers that are displayed are NSAP address, status, and ownership of local and
remote ends of the connection. The display shows whether a particular endpoint is the master or slave.
The following are the provisioning parameters that are displayed:
•
Connection type of VPC or VCC.
•
Service type and compliance (for example, UBR for service type and UBR.1 for ATM Forum
compliance).
•
Bearer class (relates to voice traffic and is reserved for future use).
•
Whether continuity checking or frame discard are enabled (see the description for the addcon
command).
•
Cause of the last failure. This field can also show that no errors have occurred since the connection
was first added by displaying SPVC Established. If a failure occurred, the Attempts field shows the
number of times the system attempted to re-establish service. If no failures have occurred, the
Attempts field contains a 0.
•
L-Util and R-Util are the local and remote percent of utilization assigned to the connection.
Currently, the default of 100% is the only value.
•
Cost values for the connection’s route: the two fields in this category are Max Cost and Routing
Cost. The Max Cost is a cost-per-link configured for a service type (such as UBR) through the
cnfpnni-intf command. When you add the SPVC through addcon, you can specify a maximum
routing cost through the maximum cost (maxcost) parameter. The maxcost represents the maximum
cost for an individual connection. The system uses the cost-per-link for the service type and the
maxcost for the connection to determine whether a route costs too much. After the system creates a
route, the total number of links yields the Routing Cost.
The default cost-per-link is 5040, so if a particular service type uses the default and a route consists
of 4 links, the Routing Cost is 20160. If the dspspvc display shows that Max Cost is -1, no limit was
specified through cnfpnni-intf, and the resulting Routing Cost is 0.
•
Broadcast type: point-to-point or multicast.
•
The persistence state of the slave endpoint of a routed SPVC is shown as persistent or nonpersistent
based on the value of the -slavepersflag used in the addcon command for the master endpoint of a
single-ended SPVC.
•
Routing priority of the connection.
•
Preferred route ID if the connection has one.
The Traffic Parameters section shows the standard parameters PCR, SCR, and CDV in the receive and
transmit directions.
The Preferred Route section shows the associated preferred route identifiers and status.
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-243
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dspcon
Syntax
dspcon <portid> <vpi> <vci>
Syntax Description
portid
Specifies the port ID for the soft PVC.
vpi
Specifies the VPI for the soft PVC.
Range: 0–255 (UNI) or 0–4095 (NNI)
vci
Specifies the VCI for the soft PVC. If no VCI is specified, this is a SPVP
connection. For a VPC, the VCI is 0.
Range: 32–65535 (VCC)
Related Commands
addcon, cnfcon, delcon, dncon, dspcons, dsppncon, upcon
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: any
Log: no
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-244
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dspcon
Example
Display a non-ABR SPVC for port 1.5 with the VPI set to 100 and VCI set to 100.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dspcon 1.5 100 100
Port
Vpi Vci
Owner
State
Persistency
---------------------------------------------------------------------------Local 1:-1.5:-1
100.100
SLAVE
FAIL
Persistent
Address: 47.009181000000003071f813a1.000000010500.00
Node name: SES_SJ
Remote Routed
0.0
MASTER
-Persistent
Address: 00.000000000000000000000000.000000000000.00
Node name:
-------------------- Provisioning Parameters -------------------Connection Type: VCC
Cast Type: Point-to-Point
Service Category: rt-VBR
Conformance: rt-VBR.2
Bearer Class: BCOB-X
Last Fail Cause: N/A
Attempts: 0
Continuity Check: Disabled
Frame Discard: Disabled
L-Utils: 100
R-Utils: 100
Max Cost: 0
Routing Cost: 0
OAM Segment Ep: Enabled
Priority: ---------- Traffic Parameters ---------Values: Configured (Signalled)
Tx PCR: 50
(-)
Rx PCR: 50
Type <CR> to continue, Q<CR> to stop:
Tx SCR: 50
(-)
Rx SCR: 50
Tx MBS: 1024
(-)
Rx MBS: 1024
Tx CDVT: 250000
(-)
Tx CDV: N/A
Rx CDV: N/A
Tx CTD: N/A
Rx CTD: N/A
(-)
(-)
(-)
------- SES Parameters only ---------Tx AIS: 1
Rx AIS: 0
Rx Abit:0
lpbk_type
: No Loopback
lpbk_dir
: ---lpbk_status
: None
round trip delay: 0 usec
Stats
: Disabled
-------------------- Preferred Route Parameters-----------------Preferred Route ID: Currently on preferred route: N/A
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-245
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dspcon
Example
Display an ABR SPVC.
spirita.1.PXM.a > dspcon 2:1.1:1 10 100
Port
Vpi Vci
Owner
State
------------------------------------------------------------------------Local 3:1.1:1
10.100
SLAVE
FAIL
Address: 47.00918100000000107bc15348.000000030100.00
Remote Routed MASTER
FAIL
Address: 47.00918100000000107bc15348.000000030100.00
-------------------- Provisioning Parameters -------------------Connection Type: VCC
Cast Type: Point-to-Point
Service Category: ABR
Conformance: ABR
Bearer Class: BCOB-X
Last Fail Cause: Invalid SPVC cause
Attempts: 0
Continuity Check: Disabled
Frame Discard: Disabled
L-Utils: 0
R-Utils: 0
Max Cost: 0
Routing Cost: 0
---------- Traffic Parameters ---------Tx PCR: 50
Rx PCR: 50
Tx SCR: 50
Rx SCR: 50
Tx MBS: 1024
Rx MBS: 1024
Tx CDVT: 250000
Rx CDVT: 250000
Tx CDV: -1
Rx CDV: -1
Tx CTD: -1
Rx CTD: -1
---------- ABR Traffic Parameters ---------Tx MCR: 0
Rx MCR: 0
Tx ICR: 50
Rx ICR: 50
Tx RIF: 7
Rx RIF: 7
Tx RDF: 7
Rx RDF: 7
Tx TBE: 1048320
Rx TBE: 1048320
Tx NRM: 5
Rx NRM: 5
Tx TRM: 8
Rx TRM: 8
Tx CDF: 7
Rx CDF: 7
Tx ADTF: 50
Rx ADTF: 50
Tx FRTT: 0
Rx FRTT: 0
Type <CR> to continue, Q<CR> to stop:
------- SES Parameters only ---------Tx AIS:0
Rx AIS:0
Rx Abit:0
lpbk_type
:Non Destructive
lpbk_dir
:forward - tstdelay
lpbk_status
:Success
round trip delay:2000 usec
Stats
:Disabled
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-246
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dspconinfo
dspconinfo
Display Connection Information—PXM1
Use the dspconinfo command lists the total number SPVCs on each PNNI port on the switch. The default
operation of the command is to show all SPVCs or SPVPs, With the optional parameters, you can specify
one or more types of information to display.
The following display contents are
Note
•
PNNI physical port number
•
Number of active connections
•
Number of failed connections
•
Number of administratively inactive (or down) connections as a result of dncon
•
Total number of connections
The dspconinfo command checks for the down state at the master end of the connection (status at
the slave endpoint is failed).
Syntax
dspconinfo [-port portid] [-detail {true | false}] [-owner {master |slave}]
[-sc {cbr | rtvbr | nrtvbr | abr | ubr}]
Syntax Description
-port
Interface number.
-detail
Determines whether the display contains information for all interfaces and slots or
just slots. Enter true after the keyword for all interfaces and slots.
Enter false for just slots.
Default: true
-owner
Specifies the endpoint of the connection. Enter master or slave.
-sc
Directs the command to display connections of a particular service type. Enter one
of the following after the keyword: cbr, nrtvbr, rtvbr, abr, or ubr.
Default: no default
Related Commands
dspcon, dspcons
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: any
Log: no
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-247
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dspconinfo
Example
Display the SPVC summaries on the switch with the following conditions:
•
No options: no active connections exist.
•
UBR connections: no endpoints are listed.
•
Connections on port 1.5.
•
Connections at slot 1.
•
Slave endpoints.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dspconinfo
Local Port
#Active
#Fail
#AISFail #ABITFail
#IFFail
#Down
----------------------------+-----------------------------+--------------------1.5
0
2
0
0
0
0
#Total
2
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dspconinfo -sc ubr
Local Port
#Active
#Fail
#AISFail #ABITFail
#IFFail
#Down
----------------------------+-----------------------------+--------------------1.5
0
0
0
0
0
0
#Total
0
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dspconinfo -port 1.5
Local Port
#Active
#Fail
#AISFail #ABITFail
#IFFail
#Down
----------------------------+-----------------------------+--------------------1.5
0
2
0
0
0
0
#Total
2
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dspconinfo -detail false
Local Slot
#Active
#Fail
#AISFail #ABITFail
#Down
#Total
----------------------------+-----------------------------+--------------------1
0
2
0
0
0
2
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dspconinfo -owner slave
Local Port
#Active
#Fail
#AISFail #ABITFail
#IFFail
#Down
----------------------------+-----------------------------+--------------------1.5
0
2
0
0
0
0
#Total
2
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-248
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dspcons
dspcons
Display Connections—PXM1
Use the dspcons command to display basic information for all connections.
The dspcons command displays a summary of soft PVC (SPVC) connections on a specific port or all
ports. This command applies only to endpoint nodes. The default usage of dspcons uses no parameters
and causes all available information for the connections to appear. To narrow the scope of the output, use
one or more optional parameters.
The following are the field descriptions for the display:
Field
Description
Local Port
Physical id of the port (local).
VPI
Number of the virtual path identifier (local).
VCI
Number of the virtual channel identifier (local).
Remote Port
Physical id of the port at the other end.
VPI
Number of the virtual path identifier at the other end.
VCI
Number of the virtual channel identifier at the other end.
State
Routing state of the connection (OK/DOWN/FAIL).
Owner
End of the connection in control of re-routing (Master/Slave).
Pri
Displays the connection priority at the master end of the SPVC.
Persistency
Displays the persistent or nonpersistent connections for the -persflag
parameter.
Syntax
dspcons[-port portid] [-vpi starting-vpi] [-vci starting vci] [-state {fail | ais | ok | down}]
[-owner {master | slave}] [-sc {cbr | rtvbr | nrtvbr | abr | ubr] [-persflag {persistent |
nonpersistent}][-rtied prefrouteId]
Syntax Description
portid
Specifies the port ID. If no port is specified, a summary of soft PVC connections
for all ports are displayed.
-vpi
Specifies the starting VPI. This parameter can only be used if port is specified.
-vci
Specifies the starting VCI. This parameter can only be used if VPI is specified.
-state
Specifies the routing state. Only connections of the specified routing state are
displayed. The following routing states are
•
fail: unrouted
•
ok: routed
•
down: downed
•
ais: routed
-owner
Specifies the end (master or slave) of the connection in control of rerouting.
Only connections of the specified end are displayed.
-sc
[-sc {cbr | rtvbr | nrtvbr | abr | ubr]
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-249
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dspcons
-persflag
Specifies persistent or nonpersistent connections. When no flag is specified,
both persistent and nonpersistent endpoints are displayed.
-rteId
Specifies the associated preferred route identifier. The -rteId parameter also
adds a filter to display the connection details for all the connections associated
with a particular route ID.
Related Commands
dspcon, dspconinfo
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: any
Log: no
Example
Display all the SPVC connections.
pnnises2.1.PXM.a > dspcons
Local Port
Vpi.Vci
Remote Port Vpi.Vci
State
Owner Pri Persistency
----------------------+------------------------+---------+-------+---+----------1.3
10 1100
Routed
10 1100
OK
MASTER 8
Persistent
Local Addr: 47.009181000000003071f81c00.000000010300.00
Remote Addr: 47.009181000000003071f813b9.000000090100.00
Preferred Route ID:1.3
10 1101
Routed
10 1101
OK
MASTER 8
Persistent
Local Addr: 47.009181000000003071f81c00.000000010300.00
Remote Addr: 47.009181000000003071f813b9.000000090100.00
Preferred Route ID:1.3
10 1102
Routed
10 1102
OK
MASTER 8
Persistent
Local Addr: 47.009181000000003071f81c00.000000010300.00
Remote Addr: 47.009181000000003071f813b9.000000090100.00
Preferred Route ID:1.3
10 1103
Routed
10 1103
OK
MASTER 8
Persistent
Local Addr: 47.009181000000003071f81c00.000000010300.00
Remote Addr: 47.009181000000003071f813b9.000000090100.00
Preferred Route ID:1.3
10 1104
Routed
10 1104
OK
MASTER 8
Persistent
Local Addr: 47.009181000000003071f81c00.000000010300.00
Remote Addr: 47.009181000000003071f813b9.000000090100.00
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-250
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dspconsegep
dspconsegep
Display Connection Segment Endpoint—PXM1
Use the dspconsegep command to view an OAM segment endpoint for a connection endpoint. When
both VPI and VCI are present, the segment endpoint is a F5 flow endpoint (for VCCs). When the optional
VCI is not present, the segment endpoint is a F4 flow endpoint (for VPCs). This command is used only
for established calls.
Use for SVC connections only, for SPVC connections use dspcon and look at the OAM Segment Ep
field.
Syntax
dspconsegep <portid> <vpi> [vci]
Syntax Description
portid
Interface ID in the form of [shelf.]slot[:subslot].port[:subport].
vpi
VPI of the connection.
vci
VCI of the connection.
Related Commands
cnfconsegep, delconsegep
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: any
Log: no
Example
Display the OAM connection segment endpoint to establish calls.
pnnises1.1.PXM.a > dspconsegep 11.1 1 12017
OAM Connection Endpoint State: Port(11.1) Vpi: 1, Vci: 12017
is NOT an OAM Endpoint
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-251
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dspconstats
dspconstats
Display Connection Statistics—PXM1
Use the dspconstats command to display connection statistics for a port.
Syntax
dspconstats <portid> <vpi> [<vci>]
Syntax Description
portid
Interface number, in the form of [shelf.]slot[:subslot].port[:subport].
vpi
Minimum VPI value for the connection.
Range: 0–4095
vci
Minimum VCI value for the connection. The default value for virtual path
connections is 0.
Range: 0–65535
Related Commands
None
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: active
Log: no
Example
Display the connection statistics for the applicable port ID.
spirita.1.PXM.a > dspconstats 1:1.1:11
Call Statistics for 1:1.1:11
Incoming Call Attempts:
209
Outgoing Call Attempts:
8
Incoming Call Success:
6
Outgoing Call Success:
0
Incoming Call Failures:
0
Outgoing Call Failures:
209
Incoming Filtering Failures:0
Outgoing Filtering Failures : 0
Incoming Routing Failures:
0
Outgoing Routing Failures :
209
Incoming CAC Failures:
0
Outgoing CAC Failures :
0
Incoming Timer Failures:
0
Outgoing Timer Failures :
0
Incoming Crankback Failures:0
Outgoing Crankback Failures : 0
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-252
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dspdate
dspdate
Display Date—PXM1
Use the dspdate command to display the current date and time.
Syntax
dspdate
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
cnfdate
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: all
Log: no
Example
Display the current date and time.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dspdate
Jan 30 2002 04:11:57 +04:00 GMT
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-253
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dspdbinfo
dspdbinfo
Display Database Information—PXM1
Use the dspdbinfo command to display different levels of detailed information about the database.
Syntax
dspdbinfo <lslot> <level>
Syntax Description
level
Displays the level of detail in the database information that is displayed. Select one of
the following levels:
•
0 to 1—Database summary information.
•
2—Database and table summary information.
•
3+—Database information and detailed table information.
Related Commands
None
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: any
Log: no
Example
Display the database information for the applicable level.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dspdbinfo 1 0
-------------------------------------------------ALL DATABASES for LSLOT=1
================
Total number of DB:
Created=9
Registered=9
================
-------------------------------------------------CB Ptr = 0x859ecf28 Name Entry Ptr = 0x859ee648
Database: dbId = 0x1000001 Name = plfm:LineDrvDb Version = 0x1000000
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------CB Ptr = 0x859dc818 Name Entry Ptr = 0x859ee660
Database: dbId = 0x1000002 Name = statUpldDB Version = 0x1000000
--------------------------------------------------
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-254
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dspdbinfo
-------------------------------------------------CB Ptr = 0x859dc788 Name Entry Ptr = 0x859ee678
Database: dbId = 0x1000003 Name = ipconnDb Version = 0x1000000
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------CB Ptr = 0x859dc4a8 Name Entry Ptr = 0x859ee690
Database: dbId = 0x1000004 Name = RTMData Version = 0x1000000
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------CB Ptr = 0x859ce788 Name Entry Ptr = 0x859ee6a8
Database: dbId = 0x1000005 Name = cntpAuthen Version = 0x1000000
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------CB Ptr = 0x859ce6f8 Name Entry Ptr = 0x859ee6c0
Database: dbId = 0x1000006 Name = plfm:aps Version = 0x1000000
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------CB Ptr = 0x859cd618 Name Entry Ptr = 0x859ee6d8
Database: dbId = 0x1000007 Name = cntpAuthParams Version = 0x1000000
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------CB Ptr = 0x83bc8be8 Name Entry Ptr = 0x859ee6f0
Database: dbId = 0x1000008 Name = provRed Version = 0x1000000
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------CB Ptr = 0x83b5c5a8 Name Entry Ptr = 0x859ee708
Database: dbId = 0x1000009 Name = spvcRed Version = 0x1000000
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-255
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dspdiagcnf
dspdiagcnf
Display Diagnostics Configuration—PXM1
Use the dspdiagcnf command to display the current diagnostics configuration, such as whether online
or offline is enabled, the coverage time, starting time, and the days of the week (SMTWTFS) that the
offline diagnostics runs.
Coverage indicates the length of time that the diagnostics will run as follows:
•
light :
5 minutes or less
•
medium :
•
full:
30 minutes or less
60 minutes or more
Syntax
dspdiagcnf
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
cnfdiag, cnfdiagall
Attributes
Access level: SERVICE_GP
State: any
Log: no
Example
Verify the current diagnostics configuration.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a
Online
Slot Enable
---- -----1
disable
2
disable
3
disable
4
disable
5
disable
6
disable
7
disable
8
disable
9
disable
10
disable
11
disable
12
disable
13
disable
14
disable
> dspdiagcnf
-------------- Offline ------------Enable Coverage StartTime SMTWTFS
------ -------- --------- ------disable light
00:00
-------8
disable light
00:00
-------8
disable light
00:00
-------8
disable light
00:00
-------8
disable light
00:00
-------8
disable light
00:00
-------8
disable light
00:00
-------8
disable light
00:00
-------8
disable light
00:00
-------8
disable light
00:00
-------8
disable light
00:00
-------8
disable light
00:00
-------8
disable light
00:00
-------8
disable light
00:00
-------8
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-256
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dspdiagerr
dspdiagerr
Display Diagnostics Error—PXM1
Use the dspdiagerr command to display the current offline or online diagnostics errors.
Syntax
dspdiagerr <online/offline>
Syntax Description
online/offline
Displays the online or the offline diagnostics errors.
Related Commands
clrdiagerr
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: any
Log: no
Example
Verify the current offline diagnostics errors.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dspdiagerr offline
Slot Date
Time Message
---- ------- ------1
--2
--3
--4
--5
--6
--7
--8
--9
--10
--11
--12
--13
--14
---
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-257
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dspdiagstat
dspdiagstat
Display Diagnostics Statistics—PXM1
Use the dspdiagstat command to display the number of times that the diagnostics has run. The output
shows the number of attempts and the number of failures for both offline and online diagnostics.
Syntax
dspdiagstat <slot>
Syntax Description
slot
Specifies the slot of the card where display the diagnostics statistics.
Related Commands
clrdiagstat
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: any
Log: no
Example
Verify the diagnostics statistics for slot 1.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dspdiagstat 1
Slot 1 diagnostics statistics:
online diag attempted
online diag failed
offline diag attempted
offline diag failed
=
=
=
=
0x00000000
0x00000000
0x00000000
0x00000000
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-258
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dspdiagstatus
dspdiagstatus
Display Diagnostics Status—PXM1
Use the dspdiagstatus command to display the diagnostics status for each card on the switch. The
following diagnostics statuses are
•
Idle
•
Ready
•
Offline
•
Online
Syntax
dspdiagstatus
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
cnfdiag, cnfdiagall
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: any
Log: no
Example
Verify the diagnostics status for each card.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a
Slot State
---- ----1
Idle
2
Idle
3
Idle
4
Idle
5
Idle
6
Idle
7
Idle
8
Idle
9
Idle
10
Idle
11
Idle
12
Idle
13
Idle
14
Idle
> dspdiagstatus
Role
---INVALID CTC CARD
INVALID CTC CARD
INVALID CTC CARD
INVALID CTC CARD
INVALID CTC CARD
INVALID CTC CARD
INVALID CTC CARD
INVALID CTC CARD
INVALID CTC CARD
INVALID CTC CARD
INVALID CTC CARD
INVALID CTC CARD
INVALID CTC CARD
INVALID CTC CARD
ROLE
ROLE
ROLE
ROLE
ROLE
ROLE
ROLE
ROLE
ROLE
ROLE
ROLE
ROLE
ROLE
ROLE
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-259
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dspdisk
dspdisk
Display Disk—PXM1
Use the dspdisk command to display disk utilization. A likely application of the dspdisk command is a
routine check of disk utilization by running a script that includes this command.
Note
The capacity of the disk is very large relative to typical usage; therefore, does not present potential
restrictions. The output shows the allocated space rather than the physical capacity of the drive.
The space utilization of each directory is displayed under that partition or directory, in addition to disk
summary information. The disk partition can be one of the following:
•
Name of the disk partition (for example, C:)
•
Directory name (for example, C:/LOG)
If you do not state the disk partition, only the summary of the total and free space on each disk partition
is displayed.
Note
The dspdisk command cannot handle multiple partitions or directories on the CLI.
Syntax
dspdisk
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
None
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: any
Log: no
Example
Display a utilization summary of the total and free space on each disk partition.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dspdisk
==========================================================
Partition C: Allocated Size: 800 MB Free Space: 764 MB
Partition D: Allocated Size: 200 MB Free Space:
87 MB
Partition E: Allocated Size: 100 MB Free Space:
99 MB
Partition F: Allocated Size: 1000 MB Free Space: 999 MB
==========================================================
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-260
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dspdisk
Example
Display a utilization summary for the default disk partition c:.
spirita.1.PXM.a > dspdisk c:
==========================================================
Partition C: Allocated Size: 800 MB Free Space: 634 MB
Partition D: Allocated Size: 200 MB Free Space: 175 MB
Partition E: Allocated Size: 100 MB Free Space:
99 MB
Partition F: Allocated Size: 1000 MB Free Space: 999 MB
==========================================================
Disk usage for c:
==========================================================
Error: could not stat() c:
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-261
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dspenhiisp
dspenhiisp
Display Enhanced IISP—PXM1
Use the dspenhiisp command to view the enhanced IISP setting for a specific port or all ports.
Syntax
dspenhiisp <portid>
Syntax Description
portid
If port ID is not specified, the enhanced IISP setting for all ports are displayed.
Related Commands
cnfenhiisp
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: any
Log: no
Example
Display the enhanced IISP settings for the applicable port ID.
spirit11.1.1.PXM.a > dspenhiisp 0.1.1
Enhanced IISP Features Setting
Port Id
Enabled
<portid1>
yes
<portid2>
no
...
spirit11.1.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-262
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dspenvalms
dspenvalms
Display Environmental Alarms—PXM1
Use the dspenvalms command to view environment alarms that include line alarms, port alarms, and
channel alarms.
Display alarms are related to the environment of the node. The following are the monitored categories:
•
Temperature inside the enclosure
•
AC power supplies if applicable
•
DC supply power
•
DC system power
•
Bottom fan tray operation
•
Top fan tray operation
For the definition if each alarm severity, see the description for the dspcdalms command.
Syntax
dspenvalms [temp | psu | fan | vmon]
Syntax Description
temp
Shows the temperature and whether an alarm condition exists.
(temperature)
psu
Shows how many AC power supplies reside in the power supply tray, and also
shows the high and low DC output values that the AC power supplies should be
(power supply units)
able to maintain.
fan
Shows the presence of top and bottom fan trays, minimum rotation rate of each
fan, and actual rotation rate of each fan in RPMs.
vmon
Shows the permitted ranges and actual DC voltages.
(voltage monitor)
Related Commands
dspcdalms, dspsnmp, dspswalms
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: active
Log: no
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-263
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dspenvalms
Example
Display the environmental alarms.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dspenvalms
SES_SJ
System Rev: 03.00
Jan. 31, 2002 23:17:44 GMT
SES-CNTL
Node Alarm: NONE
ENVIRONMENTAL ALARM STATE INFO
^Notification Disabled
Alarm Type
Unit
Threshold
DataType
Value
State
---------------- ---- --------------------- ---------- ------------Temperature
<= 50
Celsius
32
Normal
Power Supply
Power Supply
Power Supply
DC Voltage
A1
A2
A3
A
none
none
none
42 to 54
None
None
None
VoltsDC
none
none
none
50
Normal
Missing
Missing
Normal
Power Supply
Power Supply
Power Supply
DC Voltage
B1
B2
B3
B
none
none
none
42 to 54
None
None
None
VoltsDC
none
none
none
0
Missing
Missing
Missing
Normal
Fan
Fan
Fan
Fan
Fan
1
2
3
4
5
>=
>=
>=
>=
>=
RPM
RPM
RPM
RPM
RPM
3390
3402
3372
3426
3432
Normal
Normal
Normal
Normal
Normal
Tray
Tray
Tray
Tray
Tray
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
Type <CR> to continue, Q<CR> to stop:
SES_SJ
System Rev: 03.00
Jan. 31, 2002 23:17:44 GMT
SES-CNTL
Node Alarm: NONE
ENVIRONMENTAL ALARM STATE INFO
^Notification Disabled
Alarm Type
Unit
Threshold
DataType
Value
State
---------------- ---- --------------------- ---------- ------------Fan Tray
6
>= 2000
RPM
3324
Normal
Fan Tray
7
>= 2000
RPM
3354
Normal
Fan Tray
8
>= 2000
RPM
3378
Normal
+5V Input
+3.3V Input
Calibration VDC
4.850^ to 5.150^
3.200^ to 3.400^
0x7e^ to 0x82^
VoltsDC
VoltsDC
Other
5.017
3.278
0x80
Informational
Informational
Informational
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-264
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsperr
dsperr
Display Error—PXM1
Use the dsperr command to view the contents of either all error log files or a specific error log file. The
dsperr command is primarily a debug command. Because it displays tasks and system calls, the
information is more suitable to developers or others who can use information that is internal to the switch
rather than applicable to the network. The information may also be useful to Cisco support personnel.
Syntax
dsperr -sl Slot# [options] [-en <Error#>] [ -tr {P | L | N}]
Syntax Description
-sl
Command delineator that precedes the slot number entry. The -s1 parameter is
mandatory. The slot number contains the card you want to work on, either 1 or 2.
-en
Command delineator that precedes the error slot entry. The error number is the error
log file. This option that lets you specify a particular error record.
-tr
Specifies three options for printing trace data: P, L, or N. If -tr parameter is not
specified, the trace data is printed normally.
•
P: Pause prompts before printing the trace data with the following message:
This section contains trace data that may span
multiple pages. This data is contained in the file:
C:/LOG/slot01/error38.log
You can ftp this file to a workstation for further analysis
Do you want to view this data now [Yes/No]?
•
L: Lists all of the trace data file names, for example,
C:/LOG/slot01/error38.log
C:/LOG/slot01/error32.log
C:/LOG/slot01/error15.log
C:/LOG/slot01/error05.log
•
N: No disables trace data printing.
Related Commands
clrerr, dspcderrs, dsperrs, syserr
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: all
Log: no
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-265
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsperr
Example
Display all the error log files for slot 1. The error number is 17638.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dsperr -sl 1
Error Log for Slot 01: Error Num 17638
Firmware version: 001.001.070.201_swtools Product Id: 3
Timestamp: 01/29/2002-04:46:39 Node name:
Section Number 0:
Event Logged:
01B00001 01/29/2002-00:46:35 SSI-6-RESETDUMPTRACE
E:17638 tRootTask ssiSaveResetTrace
A function trace dump is available from the last reset.
Section Number 1:
Trace before event: 14000 entries
0xe26090e1
0x1d9f6f1e
0x3a
0xef7771eb
0xf2e91ef6
0x20063
0xef773880
0x0000396b
0x63
0xef77371d
0x00000163
0x63
0xef7734f9
0x00000224
0x63
0xef772aed
0x00000a0c
0x63
0xef7727e3
0x0000030a
0x63
0xef7712d1
0x00001512
0x10012
0xef76e38d
0x00002f44
0x20062
0xef753ac5
0x0001a8c8
0x2005f
0xef7530e7
0x000009de
0x20063
0xef750839
0x000028ae
0x10012
0xef74e5f5
0x00002244
0x20063
0xef74da7b
0x00000b7a
0x63
0xef74d94f
0x0000012c
0x63
0xef74d7c5
0x0000018a
0x63
0xef74cdd9
0x000009ec
0x63
0xef74caf5
0x000002e4
0x63
0xef74c631
0x000004c4
0x20062
0xef74af0f
0x00001722
0x2005f
0xef74a67b
0x00000894
0x20063
0xef747b9e
0x00002add
0x63
0xef747a55
0x00000149
0x63
0xef7478bd
0x00000198
0x63
0xef746ee1
0x000009dc
0x63
Type <CR> to continue, Q<CR> to stop:
lDrvUpdateSonetAlarmTransitions(0x3)
(8072ad38) ==>
0x20062 (8072ad38)
ssiFree(0x86cdbf38)
ssiTaskUnlock()
ssiTaskLock()
ssiMalloc(0x18,0x4,0x0,0x0)
cliTimedIO(0x47,0x8213cc98,0x42,0x10)
(8072ad38) ==>
0x20063 (8072ad38)
(8072ad38) ==>
0x10012 (8072ad38)
(8072acc8) ==>
0x20062 (8072ad38)
(8072ad38) ==>
0x2005f (8072acc8)
(8072ad38) ==>
0x20063 (8072de6c)
(8072de6c) ==>
0x10012 (8072ad38)
ssiFree(0x86cdbf38)
ssiTaskUnlock()
ssiTaskLock()
ssiMalloc(0x18,0x4,0x0,0x0)
cliTimedIO(0x47,0x8213cc98,0x1,0x10)
(8072ad38) ==>
0x20063 (8072ad38)
(8072acc8) ==>
0x20062 (8072ad38)
(8072ad38) ==>
0x2005f (8072acc8)
ssiFree(0x86cdbf38)
ssiTaskUnlock()
ssiTaskLock()
ssiMalloc(0x18,0x4,0x0,0x0)
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-266
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsperrhist
dsperrhist
Display Error History—PXM1
Use the dsperrhist command to display a log of errors and failures for the card slot. The display consists
of the following for each record in the history file:
•
A number for the entry in the error history file
•
Event number in hexadecimal format
•
Event name—a few words that describe the error (such as the severity or affected area)
•
Time stamp
The maximum number of entries in the history for a slot is 10. When the 11th error is logged, the switch
deletes the oldest entry. Alternatively, you can clear the error history by entering the clrerrhist
command.
If no entries exist in the history, the system returns the following message:
Log of Errors and Failures (Slot 1):
Nothing is logged
Syntax
dsperrhist [slot]
Syntax Description
slot
Number of the slot that contains the card you want to work on. Use this object to display
the log of errors and failures on a specific slot.
Related Commands
clrerrhist
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: all
Log: no
Example
Display a log of errors and failures for all cards on the switch.
spirit11.1.1.PXM.a > dsperrhist
Log of Errors and Failures:
Entry#--Event#---EventName-------------------------------TimeStamp----------01
0x1000
RAM sync error
08/11/2000-16:50:34
02
0x1000
RAM sync error
08/11/2000-16:51:54
03
0x301f
syncRam DB Reset Init from STBY failed
08/11/2000-16:53:12
04
0x0007
SHM_CDF_MAX_RESETS_REACHED
08/11/2000-16:54:28
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-267
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsperrhist
05
0x301f
syncRam DB Reset Init from STBY failed
08/11/2000-16:58:16
06
0x1000
RAM sync error
08/11/2000-16:59:36
07
0x301f
syncRam DB Reset Init from STBY failed
08/11/2000-17:00:56
08
0x301f
syncRam DB Reset Init from STBY failed
08/11/2000-17:01:35
09
0x1000
RAM sync error
09/07/2000-20:43:05
Type <CR> to continue, Q<CR> to stop:
Example
Display a log of errors and failures for slot 2.
spirit11.1.1.PXM.aspirit11.1.1.PXM.a> dsperrhist 2
Log of Errors and Failures:
Entry#--Event#---EventName-------------------------------TimeStamp----------01
0x1000
RAM sync error
07/07/2000-09:29:31
02
0x1000
RAM sync error
07/07/2000-09:30:51
03
0x301f
syncRam DB Reset Init from STBY failed
07/07/2000-09:32:11
04
0x0007
SHM_CDF_MAX_RESETS_REACHED
07/07/2000-09:33:19
05
0x1000
RAM sync error
07/07/2000-22:25:06
06
0x1000
RAM sync error
07/07/2000-22:26:26
07
0x301f
syncRam DB Reset Init from STBY failed
07/07/2000-22:27:46
08
0x0007
SHM_CDF_MAX_RESETS_REACHED
07/07/2000-22:28:54
09
0x1000
RAM sync error
07/08/2000-04:29:58
Type <CR> to continue, Q<CR> to stop:
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-268
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsperrs
dsperrs
Display Errors—PXM1
Use the dsperrs command to display the contents of all error log files.
Syntax
dsperrs
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
clrerr, syserr
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: all
Log: no
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-269
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsperrs
Example
Display the contents of the error log files.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dsperrs
Error Log for Slot 01: Error Num 17638
Event Logged:
01B00001 01/29/2002-00:46:35 SSI-6-RESETDUMPTRACE
E:17638 tRootTask ssiSaveResetTrace
A function trace dump is available from the last reset.
Error Log for Slot 01: Error Num 17637
Event Logged:
01A01273 01/24/2002-11:02:35 FAS-4-FDINVALID
E:17637 tTnCmdTsk0 ssiRmtFileClose
File descriptor (-1) is invalid
Error Log for Slot 01: Error Num 17636
Event Logged:
01A01271 01/24/2002-11:02:35 FAS-4-FDINVALID
E:17636 tTnCmdTsk0 ssiRmtFileRead
File descriptor (-1) is invalid
Type <CR> to continue, Q<CR> to stop:
Error Log for Slot 01: Error Num 17635
Event Logged:
01A00940 01/22/2002-11:20:41 SSI-4-PARMOUTOFRANGE
E:17635 lmiRootTas ssiTimeOfDaySet
Parm pTimeSpec->tm_nsec '-2111696840' is out of range 0-999999999 to ssiTimeOfDaySet.
Error Log for Slot 01: Error Num 17634
Event Logged:
01A00927 01/22/2002-11:09:04 SSCO-4-SSCOP_CNF_FAIL
E:17634 pnSscop
sscop_processCnfMsg
SSCOP/processCnfMsg;Cfg chg incomplete;Cmd:CNFSSCOP;Reason:Null Control Block;Itf
id:67072
Error Log for Slot 01: Error Num 17633
Event Logged:
01A00108 01/17/2002-12:19:21 SHM_-7-NODE_RESET
E:17633 ShelfMgr
shmResetShelf
SHM INFO: Node Reset, reason 9, callerPc 0x8018bf18
Type <CR> to continue, Q<CR> to stop:
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-270
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dspfltset
dspfltset
Display Filter Set—PXM1
Use the dspfltset command to display a specific ATM filter set or a summary of ATM filter sets.
Syntax
dspfltset [- name <...>]
Syntax Description
-name
Indicates the name of the filter set to present. If no filter set name is specified, a summary
of the ATM filter sets are displayed.
Related Commands
addfltset, cnffltset, delfltset
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: any
Log: log
Example
Display the specific ATM filter set.
spirit11.1.1.PXM.a > dspfltset -name SanJose
FilterName: SanJose
Index: 1
Address: 1234567890123456789012345678901234567890
AddrLen: 160 bits
AddrPlan: Nsap
AccessMode: Permit
AddrList: Calling Party List
--------------------------------------FilterName: SanJose
Index: 2
Address: 1800
AddrLen: 16 bits
AddrPlan: E164
AccessMode: Permit
Filter Address Type : NSAP Prefix
AddrList: Called Party List
---------------------------------------
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-271
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dspfltset
Example
Display the output example for the dspfltset command.
spirit11.1.1.PXM.a > dspfltset
Filter Number: 1
FilterName: SanJose
CgPtyAbsentAction: Permit
CdPtyAbsentAction: Permit
--------------------------------------Filter Number: 2
FilterName: sunnyvale
CgPtyAbsentAction: Permit
CdPtyAbsentAction: Permit
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-272
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dspif
dspif
Display Interface—PXM1
Use the dspif command to view configuration and state information for the selected broadband interface.
Syntax
dspif <ifNum>
Syntax Description
ifNum
Interface number.
Range: 1–32
Related Commands
dspipif
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: any
Log: no
Example
View configuration and state information for broadband interface number 1.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dspif 1
ifNum Status Line ingrPctBw egrPctBw minVpi maxVpi
-----------------------------------------------------1
Ena
1
100
100
0
2000
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-273
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dspilmiaddr
dspilmiaddr
Display ILMI Address—PXM1
Use the dspilmiaddr command to view ATM address(es) registered by the peer through the ILMI
address registration procedure.
Syntax
dspilmiaddr <portid>
Syntax Description
portid
Specifies the port to be displayed.
Related Commands
cnfilmiproto, dsppnilmi
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: any
Log: no
Example
Display the ILMI address for the applicable port ID through the registered ILMI address.
spirit11.1.1.PXM.a > dspilmiaddr 0.1.2
ILMI Registered Port Address(es):
47.0091.8100.0000.0000.0ca7.9e01.1234.5678.9012.34
88.8888.8888.0000.0000.0000.0000.1234.5678.9012.34
spirit11.1.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-274
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dspintfcongcntr
dspintfcongcntr
Display Interface Congestion Configuration Thresholds—PXM1
Use the dspintfcongcntr command to view the current configuration of the congestion thresholds for a
specified port.
Note
The dspintfcongcntr command cannot be used if the interface is in the PROVISIONING state.
Syntax
dspintfcongcntr <portid>
Syntax Description
portid
Specifies the port to be displayed.
Related Commands
dspnodalcongcntr
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: any
Log: no
Example
Display the interface congestion configuration thresholds for the applicable port.
Note
vsiqdepth is the depth of the VSI queue for the slave that serves the interface. It is identified by
portid, which is displayed as the percentage of the VSI communication window size.
spirit11.1.1.PXM.a > dspintfcongcntr 0.1.2
Parameter
Value
thresh1 thresh2
============================================================
setupRx
0
90
105
unackstatenq
0
40
100
Parameter
Value
Mild
Medium
Severe
============================================================
vsiqdepth
0
5
10
20
spirit11.1.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-275
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dspintfcongflags
dspintfcongflags
Display Interface Congestion Flags—PXM1
Use the dspintfcongflags command to view various congestion detection and action flags maintained at
the CCM interface level.
Syntax
dspintfcongflags <portid>
Syntax Description
portid
Specifies the port to be displayed.
Related Commands
dspnodalcongflags
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: any
Log: no
Example
Display the interface congestion flags to view the congestion detection flags and action flags for the
applicable port ID.
spirita.1.PXM.a > dspintfcongflags 2.1
Congestion Detection Flags for Interface:10.2
Parameter
Value
===================================
vsimildcongflg
FALSE
vsimedcongflg
FALSE
vsiseverecongflg
FALSE
setupflg
FALSE
unackstatenqcongflg
FALSE
Congestion Action Flags for Interface:10.2
Parameter
Value
===================================
dropsetupflg
FALSE
dropestabflg
FALSE
queuerel
FALSE
markcallsforrelflag
FALSE
pacevsiresyncflg
FALSE
pacestatenqflg
FALSE
speedjournalflg
FALSE
pacepnniroutecalflg
FALSE
lowersetupthflg
FALSE
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-276
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dspintfcongth
dspintfcongth
Display Interface Congestion Thresholds—PXM1
Use the dspintfcongth command to view the current configuration of the congestion thresholds for a
specified port.
Syntax
dspintfcongth <portid>
Syntax Description
portid
Specifies the port to be displayed.
Related Commands
cnfintfcongth
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: any
Log: no
Example
Display the interface congestion thresholds for the port 2.3.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dspintfcongth 2.3
Congestion Thresholds for port : 2.3
Parameter
--------setuphi
unackedStatEnqLo
unackedStatEnqHi
Value
----100
40
100
unit
---cps
messages
messages
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-277
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dspipconntask
dspipconntask
Display IP Connectivity Task—PXM1
Use the dspipconntask command to display the current state of the IP connectivity task. As a part of a
troubleshooting regimen, the dspipconntask command helps you isolate a problem related to IP
connectivity.
Syntax
dspipconntask
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
dspipif, dspipifcache, ipifconfig
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: all
Log: no
Example
Display the task information IP connection on the PXM.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dspipconntask
IP CONNECTIVITY TASK INFORMATION
---------------------------------------------------------Task State:
ACTIVE
Card State:
READY
Task Id:
0x1000e
Subtask Id:
0x10035
Disk API State:
OK
SyncRam API State:
OK (NEED SENDREADY)
Task SyncRam State:
NO SYNCHRONIZATION
Task Disk Update Bitmap:
Device Table:
0 0 0
Task SyncRam Update Bitmap:
Disk:
0 0 0
IO Links:
0 0 0
Interface Cache: 0 0 0
BootChange Sync: 0 0 0
Task Debug Level:
0x1
Task Logging To:
Event Log
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-278
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dspipif
dspipif
Display IP Interface—PXM1
Use the dspipif command to view configuration and statistics information associated with one or all
IP interfaces. If you request all interfaces by entering the dspipif command with no parameters, the
display shows information for all interface types. The displayed information comes from the current
state of the interface and the configuration specified through ipifconfig. The following contents are
displayed:
•
Configuration (see ipifconfig for descriptions).
•
Operational state.
•
Statistics (including transmitted and received packets and errors).
Syntax
dspipif [interface]
Syntax Description
interface
Interface name. This parameter is optional.
Enter one of the following parameters:
•
atm0—Specifies
the ATM interface.
•
lnfci0—Specifies
•
sl0—Specifies
the Ethernet interface (the default on power-up).
the SLIP interface.
Related Commands
dspif
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: all
Log: no
Example
Display information for all IP interfaces. The output shows that no configuration exists for the ATM
interface but do for Ethernet and SLIP.
Note
The unit
number
has no meaning for each interface in the current release.
The Flags field for Ethernet shows that the interface is UP, a broadcast address has been configured,
ARP is enabled, and that the interface is running. For a description of the parameters, see the ipifconfig
command description. The output also shows the number of packets that have crossed the Ethernet
interface. Although a configuration exists for SLIP, the display shows that no packets have crossed this
interface.
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-279
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dspipif
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dspipif
SES_SJ
System Rev: 03.00
Jan. 31, 2002 23:00:02 GMT
SES-CNTL
Node Alarm: NONE
IP INTERFACE CONFIGURATION
-------------------------------------------------------------------atm (unit number 0):
Flags: (0xc61) UP ARP RUNNING
Type: UNDEFINED
Internet address: 10.10.11.131
Netmask 0xff000000 Subnetmask 0xffffff00
Ethernet address is 00:00:00:00:00:00
Metric is 0
Maximum Transfer Unit size is 1500
819 packets received; 10 packets sent
0 multicast packets received
0 multicast packets sent
0 input errors; 0 output errors
0 collisions; 0 dropped
Additional Flags: (0xc00) SVC,PVC
Type <CR> to continue, Q<CR> to stop:
SES_SJ
System Rev: 03.00
Jan. 31, 2002 23:00:02 GMT
SES-CNTL
Node Alarm: NONE
IP INTERFACE CONFIGURATION
-------------------------------------------------------------------lnPci (unit number 0):
Flags: (0x63) UP BROADCAST ARP RUNNING
Type: ETHERNET_CSMACD
Internet address: 172.29.52.131
Broadcast address: 172.29.255.255
Netmask 0xffff0000 Subnetmask 0xffffff00
Ethernet address is 00:30:71:f8:13:a1
Metric is 0
Maximum Transfer Unit size is 1500
1105 packets received; 903 packets sent
313 multicast packets received
0 multicast packets sent
401 input errors; 0 output errors
0 collisions; 0 dropped
DISK IP address: 172.29.52.131
Type <CR> to continue, Q<CR> to stop:
SES_SJ
System Rev: 03.00
Jan. 31, 2002 23:00:02 GMT
SES-CNTL
Node Alarm: NONE
IP INTERFACE CONFIGURATION
-------------------------------------------------------------------sl (unit number 0):
Flags: (0x8071) UP POINT-TO-POINT MULTICAST ARP RUNNING
Type: SLIP
Internet address: 127.0.0.2
Destination Internet address: 127.0.0.3
Netmask 0xff000000 Subnetmask 0xff000000
Metric is 0
Maximum Transfer Unit size is 576
0 packets received; 0 packets sent
0 multicast packets received
0 multicast packets sent
0 input errors; 0 output errors
0 collisions; 0 dropped
DISK IP address: Not Configured
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-280
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dspipifcache
dspipifcache
Display IP Interface Cache Translation—PXM1
Use the dspipifcache command to view the interface cache translation table for one or all interfaces.
Syntax
dspipifcache [interface]
Syntax Description
interface
Interface type that is stated as atm0.
This parameter is optional.
Enter one of the following parameters:
•
atm0—Specifies
the ATM interface.
•
lnfci0—Specifies
•
sl0—Specifies
the Ethernet interface (the default on power-up).
the SLIP interface.
Related Commands
dspipif, ipifconfig
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: all
Log: no
Example
Display the interface cache translation table for the applicable interfaces.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dspipifcache
SES_SJ
System Rev: 03.00
Jan. 31, 2002 23:09:24 GMT
SES-CNTL
Node Alarm: NONE
IP CONNECTIVITY INTERFACE CACHE
Interface
IpAddress
VcId
Age(Flush@120000)
Flags
-------------------------------------------------------------------------atm0
10.10.11.62
32776
46
PROXY
atm0
172.29.52.25
32776
2326
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-281
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsplmilink
dsplmilink
Display LMI links—PXM1
Use the dsplmilink command to display LMI links on a line.
Syntax
dsplmilink
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
addlmiloop, clrlmitrace, cnflmitrace, dellmiloop, dsptrapip, dsplmistats
Attributes
Access level: CISCO_GP
State: any
Log: no
Example
Display the LMI links for a line.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dsplmilink
TRK
Current Alarm Status
Other End
1.1
B8650_SJ/2.1
CLEAR
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-282
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsplmiloop
dsplmiloop
Display Local Management Interface Loopback State—PXM1
Use the dsplmiloop command to display the LMI loopback state for a line.
Syntax
dsplmiloop
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
addlmiloop, clrlmistats, clrlmitrace, cnflmitrace, dellmiloop, dspmbsdft
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: active
Log: no
Example
Display the state of the LMI loopback for a line.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dsplmiloop
TRK
LMI LOOP STATUS
----------------------1.1
Disabled
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-283
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsplmistats
dsplmistats
Display Local Management Interface Statistics—PXM1
Use the dsplmistats command to view the current LMI configurations.
Syntax
dsplmistats
Related Commands
clrlmistats, clrlmitrace, cnflmitrace, dellmiloop, dspmbsdft, dsptrapip
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: any
Log: no
Example
Display the current LIMI statistics.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dsplmistats
Polling Enabled:
1
Port Status
:
1
VPI.VCI
:
3.31
T393
:
10
N394
:
5
T394
:
10
N395
:
5
WaitStatus
:
0
WaitStAck
:
0
Retry Timer
:
0
Retry Count
:
1
Poll Timer
:
0
Trans Num
:
199
Status
Rx :
6599
Status
Tx :
6582
UpdtStatus Rx :
0
UpdtStatus Tx :
0
Status Enq Rx :
6582
Status Enq Tx :
6599
Status Ack Rx :
0
Status Ack Tx :
0
NodeStatus Rx :
5395
Type <CR> to continue, Q<CR> to stop:
NodeStatus Tx :
5409
NodeStaAck Rx :
5409
NodeStaAck Tx :
5395
Bad PDU Rx
:
0
Bad PDU Len Rx :
0
Unknown PDU Rx :
0
Invalid I.E. Rx:
0
Invalid Trans :
0
BPX IP Addr
:
10.10.11.62
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-284
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsplmitrace
dsplmitrace
Display LMI Trace—PXM1
Use the dsplmitrace command to display the LMI messages in the lmi trace buffer. This command
displays the information captured as a result of the cnflmitrace command.
Displayed (in sequence) are
1.
The message number that is exchanged
2.
The time (in ms) since the trace began
3.
The absolute time value at which this trace information was captured
4.
The (1-based) trunk number to which this trace information applies
5.
The direction (incoming or outgoing) of the message logged in the trace buffer
6.
The type of the message (one of five above)
7.
The length of the message
8.
The actual data received/sent (enclosed in [ ] brackets)
Syntax
dsplmitrace
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
addlmiloop, clrlmistats, clrlmitrace, cnflmitrace, dellmiloop, dspilmiaddr, dsplmilink, dsplmiloop,
dsplmistats
Attributes
Access level: CISCO_GP
State: any
Log: no
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-285
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsplmitrace
Example
The first dsplmitrace command shows the buffer to be empty. Configure the buffer then repeat the
dsplmitrace command to show the results of the configuration.
mpgses1.1.PXM.a > dsplmitrace
LMI Trace Buffer is empty
mpgses1.1.PXM.a > cnflmitrace Yes Yes 0x7A,0x7E 0 *
mpgses1.1.PXM.a > dsplmitrace
No. Time(mSecs) AbsTime Ltrk Dir MsgType Length Data
0 0 56860838 1 Rx 76 28
[ 09 03 ff ff ff 76 80 00 13 66 80 00 01 04 5a 80 00 05 80 00 03 00 1f 64 80 00
01 2a ]
1 0 56860838 1 Tx 7e 32
[ 09 03 ff ff ff 7e 80 00 13 66 80 00 01 04 65 80 00 05 00 03 00 1f 82 64 80 00
01 2a 0d 00 00 00 ]
2 +134 56860972 1 Tx 7a 192
[ 09 03 ff ff ff 7a 80 00 b3 7a 80 00 af 04 01 c0 00 00 00 6d 70 67 73 65 73 31
00 00 2d 2d 2d 2d 2d 2d 2d 2d 2d ac 00 00 00 00 07 d2 05 1d 0c 12 1b 0a 01 01 82
00 ac 1d 36 dd 00 03 c0 00 00 00 c0 00 00 00 c0 00 00 00 c0 00 00 00 c0 00 00 0
0 c0 00 00 00 c0 00 00 00 c0 00 00 00 c0 00 00 00 c0 00 00 00 c0 00 00 00 c0 00
00 00 c0 00 00 00 c0 00 00 00 c0 00 00 00 c0 00 00 00 c0 00 00 00 c0 00 00 00 c0
00 00 00 c0 00 00 00 c0 00 00 00 c0 00 00 00 c0 00 00 00 c0 00 00 00 c0 00 00 0
0 c0 00 00 00 c0 00 00 00 c0 00 00 00 c0 00 00 00 c0 00 00 00 c0 00 00 00 c0 00
00 00 0d 00 00 00 ]
3 +140 56860978 1 Rx 7a 188
[ 09 03 ff ff ff 7a 80 00 b3 7a 80 00 af 04 02 c0 00 00 00 6d 70 67 62 70 78 31
00 00 2d 2d 2d 2d 2d 2d 2d 2d 2d 8a 00 00 09 24 07 d2 05 1d 00 12 1b 2d 01 00 02
07 ac 1d 36 de 21 ac 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 0
0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 0
0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
00 00 ]
mpgses1.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-286
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dspln
dspln
Display Line—PXM1
Use the dspln command to display the characteristics of a physical line.
Syntax
dspln -sonet | -ds3 | -e3
Syntax Description
-sonet
Command delineator that precedes the bay.line number entry for a SONET line.
-ds3
Command delineator that precedes the bay.line number entry for a T3 line.
-e3
Command delineator that precedes the bay.line number entry for an E3 line.
Related Commands
None
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: active
Log: no
Example
Display sonet line 1 port 1.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dspln -sonet
sonetLineNum:
sonetLineType:
sonetLineLoopback:
sonetHCSmasking:
sonetPayloadScramble:
sonetFrameScramble:
sonetLineEnable:
sonetMediumType:
sonetMediumTimeElapsed:
sonetMediumValidIntervals:
sonetMediumLineCoding:
sonetMediumLineType:
sonetMediumCircuitIdentifier:
1.1
1
sonetSts3c
NoLoop
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
sonet
2
-1
Other
ShortSingleMode
Sonet Line
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-287
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsplog
dsplog
Display Log—PXM1
Use the dsplog command to view events and messages logged by the selected PXM. The most recent
events appear at the top of the list. You can display the entire list of logged messages by entering the
dsplog command without arguments, or you can specify the individual card for which you want to view
the log information.
The following are the functions:
Note
•
Specify an individual log file.
•
Target a specific task.
•
Specify an area of system functionality (called a module in the syntax).
•
Display messages of a particular severity.
•
Specify relative time periods in which errors may have occurred.
This document describes the dsplog command on the SES. This command is also in the BPX CLI.
Syntax
dsplog -log <EventLog# > -mod <ModuleName> -sev <Severity#> -sl <Slot#> -task <TaskName>
-tge <time same or greater than> -tle <time same or earlier than>
Syntax Description
-log
Specifies the filename of the error log. If you do not specify a file, the output scrolls through
all log files one file at a time. To see a list of the existing log files, enter the dsplogs
command.
-mod
Specifies the module or functional area of switch software. The categories are numerous.
Examples are node alarm manager, card alarm manager, and inter-process communications.
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-288
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsplog
-sev
Specifies the severity of the alarm. Select a number in the of range of 1–7:
1.
EVENT_FATAL: This severity indicates that the event affects the existing data traffic
for the systems and is considered fatal because the platform cannot recover. Fatal
events cause a card reset. Also, any error or condition that damages or causes loss of
ongoing data traffic is fatal. Examples of fatal events are hardware watchdog timeout,
critical task failure or suspension, and hardware device failures of CBC or QE.
2.
EVENT_MAJOR_ALERT: This severity indicates a major service or feature of the
platform has been damaged or lost but that existing data traffic is not affected. These
events indicate that immediate action is necessary to recover the platform or service by
posting traps and major alarms. Examples of major alerts are hard disk crashes, critical
memory shortages, and inability to complete a configuration change.
3.
EVENT_MINOR_ALERT: This severity indicates a minor event or partial damage to
or loss of a service on the platform. Nevertheless, existing data traffic and critical
services are not affected. These events indicate that eventual action is necessary to
recover the platform or service by posting a minor alarm condition. Examples of minor
alerts are loss of some tftp or telnet sessions and loss of statistics or other non-critical
features.
4.
EVENT_ERROR: This severity indicates that an error occurred but is not sever enough
or it does not know the scope of its implication to be more sever. Most detected failures
are reported with this severity, then the higher levels of software determine the
appropriate response. Examples of these errors are malloc failures, illegal API
parameter values, bad PDUs, and most internally detected failures.
5.
EVENT_WARNING: This severity indicates that some threshold has been reached and
could be a warning of a future error condition. Examples are resource shortages of
memory and disk space, voltage and temperature just out of tolerance, and other
conditions that could lead to a more serious situation.
6.
EVENT_NOTICE: This severity indicates that a normal but significant event has
occurred on the platform. Events for significant configuration changes would be in this
category. Examples of notice type events would be addition of lines or ports and
connection alarms.
7.
EVENT_INFO: This severity indicates an event is informational. It does not indicate
an abnormal condition. Examples of informational events are logging of user logins and
important commands.
-sl
Specifies the slot number to display errors. The Slot# entry contains the card associated with
the event log.
-task
Specifies the task to display errors.
-tge
Specifies a particular time to display events for either the same time or later time.
-tle
Specifies a particular time to display events for either same time or earlier time.
Related Commands
clrlog, dsplogs
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: all
Log: no
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-289
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsplog
Example
Display the events and messages logged by the applicable PXM. The example shows the first of multiple
screens.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dsplog
01A00267 02/01/2002-03:15:01 CLI-7-CMDLOG
tTnInTsk01 logUserCmdFunc
cliCmdLog: [email protected]: (cc 1).
01A00266 02/01/2002-03:15:01 CLI-7-CMDLOG
tTnInTsk01 logUserCmdFunc
cliCmdLog: [email protected]: (login).
01A00264 02/01/2002-03:14:57 CLI-7-TELNETD
tTelnetDTa Telnetd
socket 11, l_onoff 0, l_linger 0, linger addr 0x822696f8, 171.71.29.60
01A00265 02/01/2002-03:14:57 CLI-7-CLITNLOG
tTelnetDTa cliTnLogConnection
cliTelnetd: [email protected]: telnet.1: connected
01A00263 02/01/2002-03:12:05 ATMC-5-SETCAC_WARN
pnCcb
atmCore_setCacWarn
setInitCACRsp: NAK from Switch on intf: 0x20400
- 5 dropped
01A00262 02/01/2002-02:48:05 ATMC-5-SETCAC_WARN
pnCcb
atmCore_setCacWarn
setInitCACRsp: NAK from Switch on intf: 0x20400
- 5 dropped
01A00261 02/01/2002-02:24:05 ATMC-5-SETCAC_WARN
pnCcb
atmCore_setCacWarn
Type <CR> to continue, Q<CR> to stop:
Example
Display the contents of log file number 1. The example shows the first of multiple screens.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dsplog -log 1
02-00019 08/17/2001-12:47:48 SSI-4-SSISARTXERROR
tSCM
0x8007b360
A SAR frame or cell transmit failed buffer=0xa7505580, glcn=0.
02-00018 08/17/2001-12:47:48 SCM-4-UNKNOWN_VALUE
tSCM
0x801277dc
<scmGlcnGetFromSlotLcn> unknown scmType 0 - 1 dropped
01-00005 08/17/2001-12:47:42 FIPC-4-COMEPIDINVALID
E:17333 tSarDisp
0x80151ea8
An invalid FIPC_COM_EPID of 0x7 was passed as an argument.
01-00004 08/17/2001-12:47:40 FIPC-4-COMEPIDINVALID
E:17332 tSarDisp
0x80151ea8
An invalid FIPC_COM_EPID of 0x5 was passed as an argument.
01-00003 08/17/2001-12:47:38 FIPC-4-COMEPIDINVALID
E:17331 tSarDisp
0x80151ea8
An invalid FIPC_COM_EPID of 0x5 was passed as an argument.
01-00002 08/17/2001-12:47:36 FIPC-4-COMEPIDINVALID
E:17330 tSarDisp
0x80151ea8
An invalid FIPC_COM_EPID of 0x5 was passed as an argument.
01-00042 08/17/2001-12:47:21 SHM_-7-ACT_CTRL_RESET
ShelfMgr
0x801692f4
Active controller card reset, reason SHM_RSTCODE_SSM_REL_MASTERSHIP[15], stby
cd state CD_CTC_UP[10]
Type <CR> to continue, Q<CR> to stop:
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-290
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsplog
Example
Display all the logged events for slot 1. The example shows the first of multiple screens.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dsplog -sl 1
01A00255 02/01/2002-01:05:44 CLI-7-CMDLOG
tTnInTsk01 logUserCmdFunc
cliCmdLog: [email protected]: (cc 1).
01A00254 02/01/2002-01:05:44 CLI-7-CMDLOG
tTnInTsk01 logUserCmdFunc
cliCmdLog: [email protected]: (login).
01A00252 02/01/2002-01:05:39 CLI-7-TELNETD
tTelnetDTa Telnetd
socket 11, l_onoff 0, l_linger 0, linger addr 0x822696f8, 171.71.29.60
01A00253 02/01/2002-01:05:39 CLI-7-CLITNLOG
tTelnetDTa cliTnLogConnection
cliTelnetd: [email protected]: telnet.1: connected
01A00251 02/01/2002-00:56:31 CLI-7-CLITNLOG
tTnInTsk01 cliTnLogConnection
cliTelnetd: [email protected]: telnet.1: disconnected
01A00250 02/01/2002-00:56:31 CLI-7-CMDLOG
tTnInTsk01 logUserCmdFunc
cliCmdLog: [email protected]: (logout).
01A00249 02/01/2002-00:48:05 ATMC-5-SETCAC_WARN
pnCcb
atmCore_setCacWarn
setInitCACRsp: NAK from Switch on intf: 0x20400
- 5 dropped
Type <CR> to continue, Q<CR> to stop:
Example
Display the logged events for an EVENT_MINOR_ALERT severity by entering 3. The example shows
the first of multiple screens.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dsplog -sev 3
01I00042 01/31/2002-03:43:35 LDRV-3-CLKSRCCHANGE
tLDRV10ms lDrvUpdateClockStatus
Current Clock source changed to Primary
01I00041 01/31/2002-03:43:35 LDRV-3-LDRV_DID_NOT_RU
tLDRV10ms lDrv100msProcessSchedul
lDrv10msTask did not run for the past 2415 ticks
01I00032 01/31/2002-03:43:30 LDRV-2-LMIALARMSETTRAP
tLDRV
lDrvLmiAlarmSetTrap
lDrv LMI Alarm Set Trap send
01I00006 01/31/2002-03:43:22 SYS-2-NOVRAMFAIL
tmon
sysNvInfoGet
Novram on PS A1 has checksum failure: 65524d, 65535d
01I00036 01/31/2002-03:34:26 LDRV-3-CLKSRCCHANGE
tLDRV10ms lDrvUpdateClockStatus
Current Clock source changed to Primary
01I00035 01/31/2002-03:34:26 LDRV-3-LDRV_DID_NOT_RU
tLDRV10ms lDrv100msProcessSchedul
lDrv10msTask did not run for the past 2007 ticks
01I00005 01/31/2002-03:34:17 SYS-2-NOVRAMFAIL
tmon
sysNvInfoGet
Novram on PS A1 has checksum failure: 65524d, 65535d
01I00018 01/31/2002-03:34:21 LDRV-2-LMIALARMSETTRAP
Type <CR> to continue, Q<CR> to stop:
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-291
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsploginmsg
dsploginmsg
Display Login Message—PXM1
Use the dsploginmsg command to display the login message if one exists.
Syntax
dsploginmsg
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
clrloginmsg, cnfloginmsg
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: all
Log: log
Example
Display the login message.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dsploginmsg
Call system administrator before using this switch
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-292
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsplogs
dsplogs
Display Logs—PXM1
Use the dsplogs command to view the existing PXM log files but not the contents. The dsplogs command
lets you see which files exist and determines the specific contents for you to view when you enter the
dsplog command.
Syntax
dsplogs
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
clrlog, dsplog
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: all
Log: no
Example
The output shows that many log files exist. To view the contents of log file 23, for example, you would
enter dsplog -log error023.log. See also the description of the dsplog command.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dsplogs
Current Event log number: 26
Event log 26: C:/LOG/event26.log
starting timestamp: 01/31/2002-03:44:04
Event log 25: C:/LOG/event25.log
starting timestamp: 01/28/2002-23:27:58
Event log 24: C:/LOG/event24.log
starting timestamp: 01/24/2002-10:21:42
Event log 23: C:/LOG/event23.log
starting timestamp: 01/18/2002-02:50:17
Event log 22: C:/LOG/event22.log
starting timestamp: 01/14/2002-06:17:35
Event log 21: C:/LOG/event21.log
starting timestamp: 01/09/2002-18:20:27
Event log 20: C:/LOG/event20.log
starting timestamp: 01/05/2002-12:02:07
Event log 19: C:/LOG/event19.log
starting timestamp: 12/30/2001-20:33:27
Event log 18: C:/LOG/event18.log
starting timestamp: 12/23/2001-11:27:27
Event log 17: C:/LOG/event17.log
starting timestamp: 12/16/2001-07:41:28
Event log 16: C:/LOG/event16.log
starting timestamp: 12/09/2001-03:43:28
Type <CR> to continue, Q<CR> to stop:
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-293
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dspmbsdft
dspmbsdft
Display MBS Default—PXM1
Use the dspmbsdft command to view the default maximum burst size (MBS) currently configured for a
specified port.
Syntax
dspmbsdft <portid>
Syntax Description
portid
Specifies the port to be displayed.
Related Commands
cnfmbsdft
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: any
Log: no
Example
Verify the results by entering the dspmbsdft command for port 2.3.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dspmbsdft 2.3
MBS:
rt-vbr:
1024
nrt-vbr:
1000
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-294
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dspndalms
dspndalms
Display Node Alarms—PXM1
Use the dspndalms command to view the node alarm, including clock alarms, switching alarms, shelf
and slot alarms, environment alarms, and card alarms.
With the information in the dspndalms display, you can select one of the following commands to
investigate the alarm:
•
The dspcdalms command identifies line, port, or connection alarms.
•
The dspenvalms command lists alarms for out-of-range conditions for temperature, voltage sources,
and so forth.
•
The dspswalms command shows alarms related to the switching fabric on the PXM.
Use the help (or ?) on the CLI of the other card to see available alarm commands (for example, ? alm).
For more information on the alarm severity definitions, see the dspcdalms command description.
Syntax
dspndalms
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
dspcdalms, dspndstatus
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: active
Log: no
Example
Display the node alarm summary.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dspndalms
Node Alarm Summary
Alarm Type
---------Clock Alarms
Switching Alarms
Environment Alarms
Card Alarms
Critical
-------0
0
0
0
Major
------0
0
0
2
Minor
------0
0
0
0
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-295
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dspndparms
dspndparms
Display Node Parameters—PXM1
Use the dspndparms command to display the current node-level parameters specified by the
cnfndparms command. For a description of the parameters and possible values, see the cnfndparms
command.
Syntax
dspndparms
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
cnfndparms
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: any
Log: no
Example
Display the current node parameters.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dspndparms
SES_SJ
SES-CNTL
NODE CONFIGURATION OPTIONS
Opt# Value
Type
---- -------1
3600
16bit Decimal
2
3
8bit Decimal
3
Yes
Boolean
4
0x0
8bit Hex
5
0
8bit Decimal
6
atm0
8bit Decimal
7
lnPci0
8bit Decimal
System Rev: 03.00
Feb. 01, 2002 05:14:43 GMT
Node Alarm: NONE
Description
----------SHM Card Reset Sliding Window (secs)
SHM Max Card Resets Per Window (0 = infinite)
Core Redundancy Enabled
Required Power Supply Module Bitmap
Trap Manager Aging timeout value(Hour(s))
Primary IP interface for Netmgmt
Secondary IP interface for Netmgmt
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-296
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dspndstatus
dspndstatus
Display Node Alarm Status—PXM1
Use the dspndstatus command to view the status of the node alarms.
Syntax
dspndstatus
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
dspndalms
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: active
Log: no
Example
Display the node alarm status.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dspndstatus
Total Alarms =
2
Node Alarm Status - Type LINE ALARM
Severity CRITICAL
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-297
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dspnodalcongcntr
dspnodalcongcntr
Display Nodal Congestion Threshold Configuration—PXM1
Use the dspnodalcongcntr command to view the current congestion values and thresholds.
Syntax
dspnodalcongcntr
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
cnfintfcongth, cnfnodalcongth, dspnodalcongth
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: any
Log: no
Example
Display the node-level congestion thresholds.
pnnises1.1.PXM.a > dspnodalcongcntr
Parameter
Value
thresh1 thresh2
============================================================
setupRx
0
90
100
statenqRx
0
100
200
connpending
0
400
500
incompljournal
0
5
Parameter
Value
Mild
Medium
Severe
============================================================
vsiqdepth
0
5
10
20
===================================================================================
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-298
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dspnodalcongflags
dspnodalcongflags
Display Nodal Congestion Flags—PXM1
Use the dspnodalcongflags command to view various congestion detection and action flags maintained
at the CCM node level.
Syntax
dspnodalcongflags
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
dspintfcongflags
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: any
Log: no
Example
Display the nodal congestion detection flags and the nodal congestion action flags.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dspnodalcongflags
Nodal Congestion Detection Flags are
Parameter
Value
===================================
memflg
FALSE
ipcflg
FALSE
sarflg
FALSE
remstatenqflg
FALSE
incompjournalingflg
FALSE
setupflg
FALSE
releaseflg
FALSE
connpendingflg
FALSE
legpoolflg
FALSE
connswitchoverflg
FALSE
conntrfparmflg
FALSE
conntrfabrflg
FALSE
Nodal Congestion Action Flags are
Parameter
Value
===================================
dropsetupflg
FALSE
Type <CR> to continue, Q<CR> to stop:
dropestabflg
FALSE
queuerel
FALSE
markcallsforrelflag
FALSE
pacevsiresyncflg
FALSE
pacestatenqflg
FALSE
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-299
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dspnodalcongflags
speedjournalflg
pacepnniroutecalflg
lowersetupthflg
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-300
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dspnodalcongth
dspnodalcongth
Display Nodal Congestion Thresholds—PXM1
Use the dspnodalcongth command to view the current configuration of the nodal congestion thresholds.
Syntax
dspnodalcongth
Syntax Description
None
Display Contents
setuphi
The number of connection setup messages per second, above which the set-up
messages have congested the node.
Range: 1–105 calls per second
Default: 100 calls per second
statenqlo
The number of status enquiry messages per second, below which the status
enquiry congestion condition is dropped.
Range: 1–500 calls per second
Default: 100 calls per second
statenqhi
The number of status enquiry messages per second, above which the status
enquiries have congested the node.
Range: 1–500 calls per second
Default: 200 calls per second
connpendlo
The aggregate number of connections in the establishment phase, below which
establishment congestion is dropped.
Range: 1–1000 connections
Default: 400 connection
connpendhi
The aggregate number of connections in establishment phase above which the
establishment congestion sets in.
Range: 1–1000 connections
Default: 500 connections
incompjour
The number of incomplete journaling cycles that must be exceeded to increase the
journaling speed.
Range: 1–10 cycles
Default: 5 cycles
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-301
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dspnodalcongth
vsiqmild
The VSI Q depth above which the VSI master is mildly congested. This threshold
is represented as a percentage of the VSI master-slave communication window.
This threshold applies to all the interfaces on the node.
Range: 1–175
Default: 5
vsiqmedium
The VSI Q limit above which the VSI master is congested at a medium level. This
threshold is represented as a percentage of VSI master-slave communication
window size. This threshold applies to all the interfaces on the node.
Range: 1–175
Default: 10
vsiqsevere
The VSI Q depth above which the VSI master is severely congested; this threshold
is represented as a percentage of VSI master-slave communication window size.
This threshold applies to all the interfaces on the node.
Range: 1–175
Default: 20
Related Commands
cnfnodalcongth
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: any
Log: no
Example
View the current configuration of the nodal congestion threshold.
pnnises1.1.PXM.a > dspnodalcongth
Parameter
Value
Unit
=================================
setuphi(prov)
100
cps
setuphi(curr)
100
cps
statenqlo
100
cps
statenqhi
200
cps
connpendlo
400
messages
connpendhi
500
messages
incompjour
5
cycles
vsiqmild
5
multiplier
vsiqmedium
10
multiplier
vsiqsevere
20
multiplier
===================================================================================
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-302
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dspnodalfd
dspnodalfd
Display Nodal Frame Discard—PXM1
Use the dspnodalfd command to show whether the switch is enabled to perform frame discard on AAL5
cells.
Note
This command formerly had the name dspsigparms.
The dspnodalfd command indicates whether the frame discard feature for AAL5 cells is enabled. The
cnfnodalfd command lets you enable or disable frame discard for AAL5 cells. The default is enabled.
Syntax
dspnodalfd
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
cnfnodalfd
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: any
Log: no
Example
Determine whether frame discard for AAL5 cells is enabled on the switch.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dspnodalfd
Global Signalling Parameters
============================
Frame Discard on AAL5 IE: enable
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-303
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dspoamsegep
dspoamsegep
Display OAM Segment Endpoint—PXM1
Use the dspoamsegep command to view the segment endpoint for F4 and F5 OAM flow on a specified
port. Operation, administration, and maintenance (OAM) is an ATM Forum specification for cells used
to monitor virtual circuits. OAM cells provide a virtual circuit-level loopback which demonstrates
whether a circuit is up or not.
Syntax
dspoamsegep <portid>
Syntax Description
portid
Specifies the port to be displayed.
Related Commands
cnfoamsegep
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: any
Log: no
Example
Verify the results to enable the OAM segment endpoint by entering the dspoamsegep command for
port 2.3.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dspoamsegep 2.3
Port
2.3
OAM End Point
Yes
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-304
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsppathtracebuffer
dsppathtracebuffer
Display Path Trace Buffer—PXM1
Use the dsppathtracebuffer command to display a specified path trace in the pathtrace buffer. The
display includes the connection’s routing path.
Syntax
dsppathtracebuffer <portid> <vpi> <vci>
Syntax Description
portid
Specifies the port to be displayed.
vpi
Specifies the VPI of a soft PVC.
vci
Specifies the VCI of a soft PVC.
Related Commands
dsppathtraceie, dsppathtracenode, dsppathtraceport, pathtraceie, pathtracenode, pathtraceport,
clrpathtracebuffer, clrpathtracebuffers
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: active
Log: no log
Example
orses13.1.PXM.a > dsppathtracebuffer 10.3 10 100
Last update time: May 20 2002 16:14:54
Result: SUCCESS
Reason: N/A
Incoming Port: 656128
Physical PortId: 10.3
VPI
: 10
VCI: 100
CallRef: 2
Node Name: orses13 NodeId: 56:160:47.009181000000003071f80e7b.003071f80e7b.01
Outgoing Port: 656896
Physical PortId: 10.6
VPI
: 1
VCI: 35
CallRef: 1
Node Name: orses14 NodeId: 56:160:47.009181000000001029300129.001029300100.01
Outgoing Port: 131840
VPI
: 10
VCI: 100
CallRef: 2
Physical PortId: 2.3
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-305
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsppathtracebuffers
dsppathtracebuffers
Display Path Trace Buffers—PXM1
Use the dsppathtracebuffers command to display all path traces in the path trace buffers. Routing paths
for all connections are displayed.
Syntax
dsppathtracebuffers
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
dsppathtracebuffer, dsppathtracenode, dsppathtraceport, pathtraceie, pathtracenode,
pathtraceport, clrpathtracebuffer, clrpathtracebuffers
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: active
Log: no log
Example
orses13.1.PXM.a > dsppathtracebuffers
-------------------------------dsppathtracebuffers: next record
-------------------------------Last update time: May 20 2002 17:31:31
Result: SUCCESS
Reason: N/A
Incoming Port: 656128
Physical PortId: 10.3
VPI
: 10
VCI: 101
CallRef: 5
Node Name: orses13 NodeId: 56:160:47.009181000000003071f80e7b.003071f80e7b.01
Outgoing Port: 657152
Physical PortId: 10.7
VPI
: 1
VCI: 37
CallRef: 3
Node Name: orses14 NodeId: 56:160:47.009181000000001029300129.001029300100.01
Outgoing Port: 131840
VPI
: 10
VCI: 101
CallRef: 5
Physical PortId: 2.3
-------------------------------dsppathtracebuffers: next record
-------------------------------Type <CR> to continue, Q<CR> to stop:
Last update time: May 20 2002 17:31:26
Result: SUCCESS
Reason: N/A
Incoming Port: 656128
Physical PortId: 10.3
VPI
: 10
VCI: 100
CallRef: 4
Node Name: orses13 NodeId: 56:160:47.009181000000003071f80e7b.003071f80e7b.01
Outgoing Port: 656896
Physical PortId: 10.6
VPI
: 1
VCI: 36
CallRef: 2
Node Name: orses14 NodeId: 56:160:47.009181000000001029300129.001029300100.01
Outgoing Port: 131840
VPI
: 10
VCI: 100
CallRef: 4
Physical PortId: 2.3
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-306
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsppathtraceie
dsppathtraceie
Display Path Trace—PXM1
Use the dsppathtraceie command to display the port configuration for the trace transit list information
element (IE) that is either inserted or removed.
Syntax
dsppathtraceie <portid>
Syntax Description
portid
Specifies the port to be displayed.
Related Commands
dsppathtracenode, dsppathtraceport, pathtraceie, pathtracenode, pathtraceport
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: active and standby
Log: no log
Example
Verify the pathtrace IE is inserted or removed for port 2.3.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dsppathtraceie 2.3
dsppathtraceie:
insert
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-307
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsppathtracenode
dsppathtracenode
Display Path Trace Node—PXM1
Use the dsppathtracenode command to display the nodal configuration for the path and connection
trace.
Syntax
dsppathtracenode
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
dsppathtraceie, dsppathtraceport, pathtraceie, pathtracenode, pathtraceport
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: active and standby
Log: no log
Example
Verify that the path trace node is enabled.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dsppathtracenode
dsppathtracenode: enable (1)
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-308
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsppathtraceport
dsppathtraceport
Display Path Trace Port—PXM1
Use the dsppathtraceport command to display the port configuration for the path and connection trace.
Syntax
dsppathtraceport <portid>
Syntax Description
portid
Specifies the port to be displayed.
Related Commands
dsppathtraceie, dsppathtracenode, pathtraceie, pathtracenode, pathtraceport
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: active and standby
Log: no log
Example
Verify the setting for path trace for port 2.3.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dsppathtraceport 2.3
Port option
:
Clear
:
Crankback
:
VPI/VCI
:
Call Reference :
Calling address:
Called address :
off
off
off
on
on
none
none
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-309
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsppingatmaddr
dsppingatmaddr
Display Ping ATM Address—PXM1
Use the dsppingatmaddr command to display the default ping ATM address.
Syntax
dsppingatmaddr
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
aesa_ping
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: active
Log: no
Example
Display the default ping ATM address.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dsppingatmaddr
47.0091.8100.0000.0030.71f8.13a1.0030.71f8.13a1.99
length: 160
type: unknown
proto: unknown
scope: 0
plan: unknown
redistribute: false
transit network id:
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-310
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsppnallgrpaddr
dsppnallgrpaddr
Display All Group Addresses—PXM1
Use the dsppnallgrpaddr command to list all group addresses on the node. The ATM address is the basis
of membership of such a group. For more information, see the addaddr command description.
The following are the specifications for an ATM address to be a member of a particular group:
•
The first 8-bit byte of the ATM address must be A0 or higher.
•
The ATM address must be the same as the other ATM addresses in the group.
You can list all member-addresses by not supplying a port ID, or you can specify that the display show
member-addresses for a particular port.
Syntax
dsppnallgrpaddr <portid>
Syntax Description
portid
Specifies the port to be displayed.
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: any
Log: no
Example
Verify all the group addresses.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dsppnallgrpaddr
a0.1111.1111.1111.1111.1111.1111.1111.1111.1111/152
Tyoe : uni Port id:12.2
a0.1111.1111.1111.1111.1111.1111.1111.1111.1111/152
Tyoe: uni Port id:3.8
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-311
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsppncon
dsppncon
Display PNNI Connection—PXM1
Use the dsppncon command to view information for an active call for SVC or SPVC. The displayed call
information corresponds to the objects described in the portCallTable and portAbrCallTable
management information base (MIB) groups. This command is issued at any node in the route path.
Syntax
dsppncon <portid> <vpi> <vci>
Syntax Description
portid
Port ID for the call.
vpi
VPI for the call.
vci
VCI for the call. If no VCI is specified, this is a VP connection.
Related Commands
clrpncon, dsppncon
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: any
Log: no
Example
Configure an ABR call.
sspirita.1.PXM.a > dsppncon 12.2 1 100
Port :
12.2 VPI :
1 VCI :
100
CallRef:
15 CallRefFlag:
0 CallLeafRef :
0
Calling-address: 47.02918100000000001a531c05.0000010a1802.00
Calling-subaddress #1: N/A
Calling-subaddress #2: N/A
Called-address: 47.02918100000000001a531c05.000001011804.00
Called-subaddress #1: N/A
Called-subaddress #2: N/A
OE Port :
12.3 OE VPI :
10 OE VCI :
57
OE CallRef:
18 OE CallRefFlag:
0
OAM-Type : OAM Endpoint
Routing Priority : 8
Connection-type : SPVC
Cast-type : point-to-point
Bearer-class :BCOBX
Service-category :CBR
Call-clipping-susceptibility:no
Tx conformance :CBR.1 Rx conformance :CBR.1
Tx pcr :
50
Rx pcr :
50
Tx scr :
N/A Rx scr :
N/A
Tx Per Util :
100
Rx Per Util :
100
Tx mbs :
N/A Rx mbs :
N/A
Tx cdvt : 250000
Tx frame-discard-option :disable Rx frame-discard-option :disable
Max ctd :
N/A
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-312
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsppncon
Max Tx cdv :
N/A
Max Rx cdv :
N/A
Max Tx clr :
N/A
Max Rx clr :
N/A
NCCI value: 47 02 91 81 00 00 00 00 00 1a 53 1c 05 00 00 1a 53 1c 05 01 01 0a 18 02 00 01
00 66
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-313
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsppncon
dsppncon
Display Connection—PXM45, PXM1E
The dsppncon command displays details about a connection from the viewpoint of the PNNI controller.
The connection can be an SVC, SVP, SPVC, or SPVP. The information reflects the dynamic state of the
connection, so some of the information can change from one iteration of the command to the next. (The
dspcon command shows the configuration of an SPVC or SPVP at its endpoints and therefore presents
a static information.)
You can use this command at any node in the route. See the example for the contents of the command
output.
Syntax
dsppncon <portid> <vpi> <vci>
Syntax Description
portid
The format of the PNNI physical port identifier can vary, as follows:
•
On a PXM45: slot:subslot.port:subport.
•
On a PXM1E for UNI/NNI back card: slot:subslot.port:subport. On the UNI/NNI
back card, the subslot is always 2, but the slot depends on the chassis, as follows:
– In an MGX 8850 chassis, slot is always the logical slot 7.
– In an MGX 8830 chassis, slot is always the logical slot 1.
•
vpi
On a PXM1E for a narrowband service module (NBSM): slot.port.
VPI for the call.
Default: 0
vci
VCI for the call. If you do not specify a VCI, the connection is a virtual path connection.
Default: 0
Related Commands
dsppncons
Attributes
Log: nolog
State: active, standby
Privilege: ANYUSER
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-314
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsppncon
Example
Display VPI/VCI 9 102 on port 1:3.
p2ses14.7.PXM.a > dsppncon 1:3 9 102
Port :
1:3 VPI :
9 VCI :
102
CallRef:
1 CallRefFlag:
0 CallLeafRef :
0
Calling-address: 47.02918100000000001a531c05.0000010a1802.00
Calling-subaddress #1: N/A
Calling-subaddress #2: N/A
Called-address: 47.02918100000000001a531c05.000001011804.00
Called-subaddress #1: N/A
Called-subaddress #2: N/A
OE Port :
10:1.2:2 OE VPI :
1 OE VCI :
102
OE CallRef:
1 OE CallRefFlag:
0
OAM-Type : OAM Endpoint
Routing Priority : 8
Connection-type : SPVC
Cast-type : point-to-point
Bearer-class :BCOBX
Service-category :UBR
Call-clipping-susceptibility:no
Tx conformance :UBR.1 Rx conformance :UBR.1
Tx pcr :
100
Rx pcr :
100
Tx scr :
N/A Rx scr :
N/A
Tx Per Util :
100
Rx Per Util :
100
Tx mbs :
N/A Rx mbs :
N/A
Tx cdvt : 250000
Tx frame-discard-option :disable Rx frame-discard-option :disable
Max ctd :
N/A
Max Tx cdv :
N/A
Max Rx cdv :
N/A
Max Tx clr :
N/A
Max Rx clr :
N/A
NCCI value: 47 02 91 81 00 00 00 00 00 1a 53 1c 05 00 00 1a 53 1c 05 01 01 0a 18 02 00 01
00 66
p2ses14.7.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-315
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsppncons
dsppncons
Display PNNI Configuration—PXM1
Use the dsppncons command to view a summary of active calls for SVC or SPVC on a specific port or
all ports. This command is issued at any node.
The default is all connections on all ports because all parameters are optional. You can specify a starting
VPI or VCI to begin a range of connections. In addition, you can display one of two types: point-to-point
or point-to-multipoint.
Syntax
dsppncons [-port portid] [-vpi starting-vpi] [-vci starting-vci] [-type {p2p | p2mp| ctrl}]
Syntax Description
portid
Port identifier. If not port specified, a summary of active calls for all ports are
displayed.
-vpi
Specify the starting VPI to view active calls starting from the specified VPI of the
specified port. This parameters can be used only if port is specified.
-vci
Specify the starting VCI to view active calls starting from the specified VPI/VCI of
the specified port. This parameters can be used only if VPI is specified.
-type
Causes the system to display only point-to-point or point-to-multipoint. Without this
option, the system displays both types. No default value exists if you include the
keyword type on the command line, you must enter one of the following entries.
•
p2p (point-to-point).
•
p2mp (point-to-multipoint).
•
ctrl (control connections)—These are system generated connections to pass
control (not user) information.
Display Contents
Port
Physical ID of the specified port.
VPI
Number of the virtual path identifier.
VCI
Number of the virtual channel identifier.
CallRef
Call reference number.
X-Port
Physical ID of the cross-connected value for the port.
X-VPI
Number of the cross-connected value of the virtual path identifier.
X-VCI
Number of the cross-connected value of the virtual channel identifier.
X-CallRef
Call reference number of the other port.
Type
Cast type.
Calling-Addr
NSAP address of the calling party.
Called-Addr
NSAP address of the called party.
Pri
Displays the routing priorities of the routed connections.
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-316
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsppncons
Related Commands
clrpncon, dsppncon
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: any
Log: no
Example
Display a summary of the active calls for the applicable port IDs.
spirita.1.PXM.a > dsppncons
Port
VPI
VCI
CallRef
5.3
0
32
1
Calling-Addr: <clg AESA addr>
Called-Addr: <cld AESA addr>
5.3
0
33
2
Calling-Addr: <clg AESA addr>
Called-Addr: <cld AESA addr>
5.3
0
34
3
Calling-Addr: <clg AESA addr>
Called-Addr: <cld AESA addr>
...
5.4
0
41
10
Calling-Addr: <clg AESA addr>
Called-Addr: <cld AESA addr>
5.4
0
42
11
Calling-Addr: <clg AESA addr>
Called-Addr: <cld AESA addr>
X-Port VPI
3.2
0
VCI
32
CallRef Type OAM-Type
1
MTP
No
8
3.2
0
33
2
MTP
No
3.2
0
34
3
MTP
No
3.8
0
41
10
PTP
Yes
3.8
0
42
11
PTP
Yes
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-317
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsppnconstats
dsppnconstats
Display PNNI Call Statistics—PXM1
Use the dsppnconstats command to display call statistics for a port.
Syntax
dsppnconstats <portid>
Syntax Description
portid
Specifies the port to be displayed.
Display Contents
Incoming Call
Attempts
Number of incoming signaling messages (setup and add party) received on
this port for call establishment.
Incoming Call
Success
Number of incoming signaling messages (connect and add party) received
on this port, which indicate successful call establishment.
Incoming Call
Failures
Number of incoming point-to-point and point-to-multipoint SVC/SPVC call
attempts that failed on this port.
Incoming Filtering
Failures
Number of incoming point-to-point and point-to-point SVC/SPVC call
attempts that failed the address filtering on this port.
Incoming Routing
Failures
Number of incoming point-to-point and point-to-multipoint SVC/SPVC call
attempts that failed on this port because there was no route to the destination.
Incoming CAC
Failures
Number of incoming point-to-point and point-to-multipoint SVC/SPVC call
attempts that failed on this port because there were not enough resources as
requested in the traffic parameters of the call.
Incoming Timer
Failures
Number of signaling timers that timed out on incoming point-to-point and
point-to-multipoint SVC/SPVC calls received on this port.
Incoming Crankback
Failures
Number of crankback IEs received on this port for incoming point-to-point
and point-to-multipoint SVC/SPVC call attempts.
Related Commands
clrpnconstats
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: any
Log: no
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-318
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsppnconstats
Example
Display the PNNI call statistics for port 2.3.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dsppnconstats 2.3
Call Statistics for 2.3
Incoming Call Attempts:
0
Incoming Call Success:
0
Incoming Call Failures:
0
Incoming Filtering Failures:0
Incoming Routing Failures: 0
Incoming CAC Failures:
0
Incoming Timer Failures:
0
Incoming Crankback Failures:0
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Outgoing
Outgoing
Outgoing
Outgoing
Outgoing
Outgoing
Outgoing
Outgoing
Call Attempts:
0
Call Success:
0
Call Failures:
0
Filtering Failures : 0
Routing Failures :
0
CAC Failures :
0
Timer Failures :
0
Crankback Failures : 0
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-319
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsppnctlvc
dsppnctlvc
Display PNNI Control VC—PXM1
Use the dsppnctlvc command to display configuration of the control VC parameters on the port. The
bandwidth parameters result from the use of the (optional) cnfpnctlvc command.
Note
To see details about the VCs that support ILMI, enter the dsppnilmi command.
Syntax
dsppnctlvc <portid>
Syntax Description
portid
Specifies the applicable port ID.
Related Commands
cnfpnctlvc
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: any
Log: no
Example
Display the control VC parameters for the applicable port ID.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dsppnctlvc 2.3
vc type = pnnircc
service category : sig
SCR :
453
PCR :
MBS :
906
171
vc type = sscop
Parameter = Provisioned
service category : sig
PCR : Not Provisioned
SCR : Not Provisioned
MBS :
100
vc type = sscop
Parameter = Operational
service category : cbr
PCR :
0
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-320
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsppngrpmbrs
dsppngrpmbrs
Display Group Members—PXM1
Use the dsppngrpmbrs command to display members of a port-level, ATM address group. The
dsppngrpmbrs command lists all the members of an address-based group. The ATM address is the basis
of membership of such a group. For more information, see the addaddr command description.
The following are the specifications for an ATM address to be a member of a particular group:
•
The first 8-bit byte of the ATM address must be A0 or higher.
•
The ATM address must be the same as the other ATM addresses in the group.
Syntax
dsppngrpmbrs <group_addr> <length>
Syntax Description
group_addr
Specifies the ATM address. The format depends on whether the address type is NSAP
or E.164.
All group addresses begin with 0xA0 or higher.
Note
For more information, see the addaddr command description.
length
Specifies the address length. The units of measure differ for each address plan:
•
For an NSAP address plan, the units of measure are bits. The range is 0–160.
Using the maximum of a 20-byte ATM address: 20 bytes x 8 bits per byte = 160
bits.
•
For an E.164 address plan, the value is the number of decimal digits. If the ATM
address consists of 15 digits, the value for this parameter is also 15.
Related Commands
addaddr, deladdr, dspaddr, dsppnallgrpaddr
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: any
Log: no
Example
pnnises3.2{XM.a> ds[[ngrpmbrs a0.1111.1111.1111.1111.1111.1111.1111.1111.1111. 152
Node-id
Member port id
56.160.47.009181000000003071f81b63.003071f81b63.0112.2
56.160.47.009181000000003071f81b63.003071f81b63.013.8
56.160.47.00918100000000d058ac2317.00d058ac2317.01*
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-321
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsppnilmi
dsppnilmi
Display PNNI ILMI—PXM1
Use the dsppnilmi command to view the current ILMI service configuration for a PNNI logical port.
The ILMI state can be one of the following.
Note
Disable
Protocol is not enabled on this port.
NotApplicable
This port is not accessible due to hardware-related conditions.
LostConnectivity
Protocol on listening port is not enabled.
EnableNotUp
This port is not accessible due to hardware.
UpAndNormal
This port is physically up, and the protocol is enabled.
The VC for ILMI is a control channel, but its bandwidth parameters are fixed, as follows:
PCR = 1000 cps; SCR = 50 cps; and MBS = 1024 cells. The bandwidth used by ILMI (when enabled)
and other control-type VCs (see the cnfpnctlvc command) adds to the bandwidth load on the port.
Use the dspload command to determine the load on port resources.
Syntax
dsppnilmi <portid>
Syntax Description
portid
Specifies the applicable port ID.
Related Commands
None
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: any
Log: no
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-322
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsppnilmi
Example
Display the ILMI configuration for PNNI for port 2.3.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dsppnilmi 2.3
Port: 2.3
Port Type: Private UNI
Autoconfig: enable
UCSM: enable
Secure Link Protocol: enable
Change of Attachment Point Procedures: enable
Modification of Local Attributes Standard Procedure:
Addressreg: Permit All
VPI:
0
VCI:
0
Max Prefix:
16
Total Prefix:
0
Max Address:
64
Total Address:
0
Resync State:
0
Node Prefix: no
Peer Port Id:
0
System_Id : 0.0.0.0.0.0
Peer Addressreg: disable
Peer Ip Address : 0.0.0.0
Peer Interface Name :
ILMI Link State : NotApplicable
ILMI Version : ilmi40
INFO:
No Prefix registered
INFO:
No ilmi address registered
Side:
network
enable
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-323
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsppnni-bn-path
dsppnni-bn-path
Display PNNI Border Node Path—PXM1
Use the dsppnni-bn-path command to display the PNNI border node paths calculated by a Peer Group
Leader (PGL) node in a given peer group. The node-index specifies the PGL node implemented on this
switching system.
Note
The command applies to multi-peer groups only.
Syntax
dsppnni-bn-path <node-index>
Syntax Description
node-index
The node index indicates the relative level of the logical node within the hierarchy on
the switch.
Range: 1–10
Display Contents
node index
The range is 1–10.
source node IDB index
Node identifier within the internal data base (IDB).
Range: 1–2147483648.
source node ID
Node ID of the source.
destination node IDB index
Node identifier of each destination node.
destination node ID
Node ID of each destination.
metrics for the path
For each class of service (CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, ABR, UBR), the
configuration for each of the following routing metrics:
•
administrative weight (AW)
•
maximum cell rate (MaxCR)
•
available cell rate (AvCR)
•
cell transfer delay (CTD)
•
cell delay variation (CDV)
•
cell loss priority, first leaky bucket (CLP0)
•
cell loss priority, second leaky bucket (CLP0+1)
Related Commands
None
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-324
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsppnni-bn-path
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: any
Log: no
Example
Display the PNNI border node path for the applicable node ID.
spirita.1.PXM.a > dsppnni-bn-path 1
node index: 1
Source node number...
2
Dest node number.....
37
Source node id........0:0:00.000000000000000000000000.000000000000.00
Dest node id..........0:0:00.000000000000000000000000.000000000000.00
AW
MCR
AvCR
CTD
CDV
CLR0
CLR0+1
CRM
VF
CBR
-----5040
0
100000
0
0
0
0
10
5
RTVBR
-----5040
0
100000
0
0
0
0
10
5
NRTVBR
-----5040
0
100000
0
0
0
0
10
5
ABR
-----5040
0
100000
0
0
0
0
10
5
UBR
-----5040
0
100000
0
0
0
0
10
5
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-325
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsppnni-bypass
dsppnni-bypass
Display PNNI Bypass—PXM1
Use the dsppnni-bypass command to display the PNNI bypass table for a logical group node (LGN) that
uses the complex node representation of its peer group. The bypass table contains the topology and Hello
information of every node in the peer group.
Note
This command applies to multi-peer groups only.
Syntax
dsppnni-bypass <node-index>
Syntax Description
node-index
The node index points to the LGN of this peer group. It indicates the relative level of
the node within the hierarchy on the switch.
Range: 1–10
Display Contents
node-index
The node index indicates the relative level of the logical node within a
multi-peer group on the switch.
Range: 1–10
Input port Id
The logical form of port identifier at the input.
Range: 1–2147483648.
Output port Id
The logical form of port identifier at the output.
Range: 1–2147483648.
ptse id
Display the unique identifier assigned to the PNNI topology state elements
PTSE. ptse-id is the 32-bit numeric node identifier assigned by the software—it
is not user-configurable.
flags
Although a hexadecimal flag appears, it applies to software debugging by Cisco
engineers and so is not described here.
Related Commands
None
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: any
Log: no
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-326
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsppnni-bypass
Example
Display the bypass table for an LGN using complex node representation in the peer group.
spirita.1.PXM.a > dsppnni-bypass 1
node index: 1
Input portId........
Ptse id.............
AW
MCR
AvCR
CTD
CDV
CLR0
CLR0+1
CRM
VF
CBR
-----5040
0
100000
0
0
0
0
10
5
376
12
RTVBR
-----5040
0
100000
0
0
0
0
10
5
NRTVBR
-----5040
0
100000
0
0
0
0
10
5
Output portId........
Flags................
ABR
-----5040
0
100000
0
0
0
0
10
5
399
a3
UBR
-----5040
0
100000
0
0
0
0
10
5
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-327
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsppnni-election
dsppnni-election
Display PNNI Election—PXM1
Use the dsppnni-election command to display parameters and current status related to the election of a
peer group leader (PGL). This command and related information applies to multi-peer groups only. The
cnfpnni-election command lets you specify election parameters.
In a multi-peer group environment, each peer group can elect one PGL. Such an election takes place for
every level of the hierarchy. For example, if three levels exist, three PGL elections occur.
Syntax
dsppnni-election [node-index]
Syntax Description
node-index
The system-generated node index indicates the relative level of the logical node within
a multi-peer group on the switch.
Note
node index is inversely related to the node level, which you specify through
such commands as cnfpnni-node, for example, and has a range of 1–104.
The lowest node level is 104. When you add a logical node to the hierarchy on a switch,
the system generates the node index.
Range: 1–10
Display Contents
Node-index
The node index has a range of 1–10.
PGL state
Specifies the OperNotPGL, OprPGL, starting, and so on.
Priority
The node leadership priority in a peer group.
Initialization time
The number of seconds that this node delays advertising its choice of
preferred PGL.
Override delay
The number of seconds that this node waits for itself to be declared the
preferred PGL by unanimous agreement among its peers.
Re-election time
After losing connectivity to the current peer group leader, the number of
seconds that this node waits before restarting the process of electing a new
peer group leader.
Preferred PGL
The ID of the node that should be the PGL according to the current node. This
choice weighs information on leadership priorities and node IDs that it
receives from the PTSEs.
PGL
The node in the peer group that has been elected PGL.
Active parent node ID
The node ID of the LGN.
Related Commands
cnfpnni-election
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-328
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsppnni-election
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: any
Log: no
Example
Display the information about peer group leader election for all nodes in the hierarchy.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dsppnni-election
node index: 1
PGL state...... AwaitUnanimity
Priority.......
15
Init time(sec).......
10
Override delay(sec)..
20
Re-election time(sec)
15
Pref PGL...............56:160:47.009181000000003071f813a1.003071f813a1.01
PGL....................0:0:00.000000000000000000000000.000000000000.00
Active parent node id..0:0:00.000000000000000000000000.000000000000.00
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-329
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsppnni-idb
dsppnni-idb
Display PNNI Internal Topology Database—PXM1
Use the dsppnni-idb command to display the PNNI internal topology database for a specific logical
node or for all logical nodes on this switching system.
Note
This command is used for debugging purposes.
The dsppnni-idb command lets you see all the nodes and links that the current node has discovered. If
a node or link should be in the internal database (IDB) but is missing, you can check the PTSEs
(dsppnni-ptse) to begin tracing the missing topology information.
An IDB stores all the logical nodes known to the local node (its own levels and the network nodes in
each logical node’s view) and the outgoing links from all of them. The IDBs are the source of all address
and routing tables in the peer group. When a node advertises PNNI topology state elements (PTSEs), the
updated information goes into the IDB updates. The system address table, local network reachable
address table, background routing tables, and PNNI summary address table receive updates from the IDB
as appropriate.
The dsppnni-idb command can display all the contents or a subset of the IDB. You can specify the
granularity of the display by using the following optional parameters:
•
If you enter dsppnni-idb with no parameters, the display shows the internal topology database of
all nodes in the peer group.
•
If you specify a node index, the display shows the internal topology database of all nodes that are
visible to the local, logical node with the specified index.
•
If you specify a node number, the display shows the internal topology database for a specific, remote
node within the peer group. To see the valid node numbers for nodes in the peer group, first use
dsppnni-node-list.
If you specify a port ID after specifying a node number, the display shows the internal topology database
of that specific port on that remote node.
Syntax
dsppnni-idb [node-index] [-nodeNumber node-number [-portId port-id]]
Syntax Description
node-index
The node index is the system-generated number of the local logical node. In a
multi-peer group hierarchy, the range is 1–10. In the current release, the only node
index is 1.
Range: 1–10
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-330
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsppnni-idb
-nodeNumber A number that uniquely identifies a node in the network. For a list of the remote node
numbers that are visible to the local node, enter dsppnni-node-list.
Range: 1–256
-portId
The logical number for a PNNI port. Use this optional parameter if you have specified
a node number (-nodeNumber) and want to narrow the scope of the display.
You can obtain the logical number for the port ID by entering dsppnports for all
PNNI ports or dsppnport a:b.c.d for a specific port. For example, a, b, c, and d are
the values corresponding to the physical portID.
Range: 1–2147483648
Related Commands
None
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: any
Log: no
Example
Display PNNI internal topology database for the applicable logical node.
spirita.1.PXM.a > dsppnni-idb 1 36 2.1
node index: 1
Local port id.......
66048
Remote port id.......
66048
Local link index....
1
Remote link index....
1
Local node number...
1
Remote node number...
2
PGL node index......
0 LGN node index......
0
Transit restricted..
off
Complex node.........
off
Branching restricted
off
PGL..................
false
Ancestor............
false
Border node..........
false
VP capable..........
true
Link type............horizontal
Non-transit for PGL election..
off
node id...............56:160:47.00918100000000107be92f07.00107be92f07.00
node name:
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-331
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsppnni-inducing-uplink
dsppnni-inducing-uplink
Display PNNI Inducing Uplink—PXM1
Use the dsppnni-inducing-uplink command to view the PNNI inducing uplink database for a logical
node or for all logical nodes on this switching system.
Note
This command is used for debugging purposes.
The following are the display contents:
•
Child node index number
•
Token (if configured)
•
Uplink node ID—the ID of the node
•
Uplink ATM address
•
Uplink peer group ID
•
Routing metrics of the uplink
The child node number is the number of a node at a lower level (as shown by dsppnni-node-list) from
which the uplink comes. The child port ID is the local port ID of the child node from which the uplink
comes. You can see the details of this uplink by entering dsppnni-idb. (In the display for dsppnni-idb,
the child node index is the local node number.)
The uplink node or upnode is the node at the upper end of the uplink. It is the neighboring peer of the
ancestor of the node from which the uplink originates.
The extent of the dsppnni-inducing-uplink display depends on whether you specify an individual
logical node in the hierarchy, as follows:
•
If you specify a node index, the display shows the PNNI-inducing uplink database of a specific
logical node on the switch.
If you do not specify a node index, the command displays the PNNI-inducing uplink database for each
logical node on the switch.
Syntax
dsppnni-inducing-uplink [node-index]
Syntax Description
node-index
The node-index specifies the logical node on the switch.
Range: 1–10
Related Commands
None
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-332
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsppnni-inducing-uplink
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: any
Log: no
Example
Display the PNNI inducing uplink database for the applicable node ID.
spirita.1.PXM.a > dsppnni-inducing-uplink 1
node index: 1
Token................
123
Child node portId....
1200
Child node number....
2
Upnode id.............0:0:00.000000000000000000000000.000000000000.00
Upnode ATM addr.......00.000000000000000000000000.000000000000.00
Upnode PG id..........30:47.00.9181.0000.0000.0000.0000.00
AW
MCR
AvCR
CTD
CDV
CLR0
CLR0+1
CRM
VF
CBR
-----5040
0
100000
0
0
0
n/a
10
5
RTVBR
-----5040
0
100000
0
0
0
n/a
10
5
NRTVBR
-----5040
0
100000
0
0
0
n/a
10
5
ABR
-----5040
0
100000
0
0
0
n/a
10
5
UBR
-----5040
0
100000
0
0
0
n/a
10
5
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-333
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsppnni-intf
dsppnni-intf
Display PNNI Physical Interfaces—PXM1
Use the dsppnni-intf command to display the specified physical interfaces of the switch that operate
PNNI for the given port ID. The interfaces are either physical connections or configured VPCs. Each
interface is attached to a specific lowest-level node within the switching system. The traffic metrics and
attributes associated with each interface are also displayed as well.
The interfaces are displayed in ascending order of the port ID.
The following information for a PNNI port are displayed:
•
Aggregation token. The current release does not support the aggregation token.
•
Administrative weight (AW).
•
The logical port identifier assigned to the physical port identifier.
NNI includes a topology state routing protocol, which advertises detailed information about the peer
groups links and nodes. Links and nodes are assigned metrics and attributes that can be used to diagnose
or tune network behavior.
The administrative weight (AW) is the cost to traffic that traverses a port. The AW for a path is the sum,
in both directions, of the individual AWs the egress of each port on the path.
The AW can be specified on the interface and by the service class (or QoS class), and it is associated
with each port. AW is a defining factor when routes are selected. The AW parameters influence how
PNNI selects paths in the peer group and therefore how it distributes each SVC and SPVC. PNNI route
selection can also key on AW to exclude certain links from routing. The application of such exclusion
can be to defining a backup link for use only when no bandwidth is available on the primary link.
Syntax
dsppnni-intf <portid>
Syntax Description
portid
Interface number.
Default: none
Display Contents
Physical port Id
Displays the physical PNNI identifier on the interface. The portid variable is
entered and displayed as a numeric string formatted as
[shelf.]slot[:subslot].port[:subport].
Logical port Id
Displays the logical PNNI port identifier. The -portId parameter displays the
logical PNNI port identifier on the interface.
Range: 1–2147483648
Aggr token
Displays the 32-bit number used for link aggregation purpose.
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-334
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsppnni-intf
AW-NRTVBR
Displays the AW for non-real-time variable bit rate (nrtvbr) connections on this
interface. nrtvbr accounts for the bursty traffic that is caused by some
non-real-time applications. This category is characterized in terms of a PCR,
SCR, and MBS.
Range: 0–4,194,304
AW-CBR
Displays the AW for constant bit rate (CBR) connections on this interface.
While a cbr connection is active, this option limits its bit rate to a static value
that remains available until the connection is torn down. The bit rate is
characterized by the peak cell rate (PCR) value.
Range: 0–4,194,304
AW-ABR
Displays the AW for available bit rate (ABR) connections on this interface.
While an ABR connection is active, that connection changes its permitted bit
rate (bandwidth) in response to ATM layer transfer characteristics. PNNI
periodically polls for the unused bandwidth at the ATM level, then adjusts the
ABR connection bit rate in direct relation to the available bandwidth.
Displays the 24-bit number AW for ABR on this interface.
Range: 0–4,194,304
AW-RTVBR
Displays the AW for real-time variable bit rate (rt-vbr) connections on this
interface. rtvbr is intended for real-time applications requiring tightly
constrained delay and delay variation (voice/video applications). rtvbr is
characterized by peak cell rate (PCR), sustainable cell rate (SCR), and
maximum burst size (MBS).
Range: 0–4,194,304
AW-UBR
Displays the AW (QoS) used for unspecified bit rate (UBR) connections—this
includes switched virtual connection (SVC) ping connections.
While a UBR connection is active, this option limits only the maximum bit-rate
(bandwidth) of the connection—no bit rate is guaranteed.
Range: 0–4,194,304
Related Commands
cnfpnni-intf
Attributes
Privilege: ANYUSER
State: any
Log: no
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-335
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsppnni-intf
Example
Display the physical interfaces for PNNI for port ID 2.3.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dsppnni-intf 2.3
Physical port id: 2.3
Aggr token..........
AW-CBR..............
AW-RTVBR............
0
5040
11040
Logical port id:
131840
AW-NRTVBR...........
20040
AW-ABR..............
5040
AW-UBR..............
1040
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-336
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsppnni-link
dsppnni-link
Display PNNI Link—PXM1
Use the dsppnni-link command to display the information about a specific PNNI link or all PNNI links.
If the port id is not specified, all links attached to a specified node are displayed. If the node index is not
specified, all links attached to PNNI nodes at all hierarchies on the single switching system are
displayed.
The dsppnni-link command displays the address, link, and Hello packet information of each link. In a
multi-peer group, it also displays the upnode ATM address and node ID.
The following parameters are displayed for all PNNI links:
•
If you specify a node index and a port ID, the command displays information about that specific
PNNI link.
•
If you specify only a node index, the display shows all PNNI links attached to that node.
•
If you specify nothing, the command displays all links attached to all PNNI nodes in the network.
Syntax
dsppnni-link [node-index [port-id]]
Syntax Description
node-index
A system-generated value that corresponds to a logical node in an MPG hierarchy.
For every PNNI node that you add through CWM or the addpnni-node command,
the system associates the next available integer in the range 1–10.
Note
In the current release, the value of the node-index is always 1.
Range: 1–10
portid
Interface number.
Related Commands
cnfpnni-link-selection, dsppnni-link-selection
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: any
Log: no
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-337
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsppnni-link
Example
Display the information for the applicable PNNI link.
spirita.1.PXM.a > dsppnni-link 1
node index: 1
Local port id: 4789876609
Type.lowestLevelHorizontalLink
Derive agg..........
0
SVC RCC index.......
0
Remote
Remote
Upnode
Upnode
Common
Remote port id: 66304
Hello state.....
twoWayInside
Intf Index...........
66048
Hello pkt RX.........
1248753
Hello pkt TX.........
1234565
node name.......ses001
node id.........56:160:47.00918100000000107be92f07.00107be92f07.00
id..............0:0:00.000000000000000000000000.000000000000.00
ATM addr........00.000000000000000000000000.000000000000.00
peer group id...00:00.00.0000.0000.0000.0000.0000.00
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-338
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsppnni-link-selection
dsppnni-link-selection
Display PNNI Link Selection—PXM1
Use the dsppnni-link-selection command to view the link selection on a link.
Syntax
dsppnni-link-selection <portid>
Syntax Description
portid
Interface number.
Display Contents
The display shows the following information for each node.
physical port id
Display the physical PNNI identifier on the interface. The portid variable is
entered and displayed as a numeric string formatted as
[shelf.]slot[:subslot].port[:subport].
link selection
The ASCII string displaying the link routing policy.
logical port id
The PNNI port identifier in the form of a logical number.
Range: 1–2147483648
Related Commands
cnfpnni-link-selection
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: any
Log: no
Example
Displays the link selection for a parallel link on port 2.3. This link uses the default of maxavcr.
Note
The display also shows the logical port number for the physical port ID.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dsppnni-link-selection 2.3
physical port id:
logical port id:
2.3
131840
link selection: maxavcr
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-339
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsppnni-mtu
dsppnni-mtu
Display PNNI Maximum Transfer Unit—PXM1
Use the dsppnni-mtu command to display the maximum PNNI packet size in number of bytes. This
command is primarily for configuring internetwork compatibility, but you can use it in lab trials to test
the affect of various packet sizes on the performance of the peer group.
Use the cnfpnni-mtu command to specify the PNNI packet size configuration.
Syntax
dsppnni-mtu
Syntax Description
None
Display Contents
The following parameter is displayed for each node:
max packet size
The value of the maximum transmit unit mtu in number of bytes.
Range: 1024–8192
The right column shows the label for each value that appears in the dsppnni-mtu command. The left
column maps each value to the corresponding keyword in the cnfpnni-mtu command, and explains the
argument function.
Related Commands
cnfpnni-mtu
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: any
Log: no
Example
Display the maximum PNNI packet size.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dsppnni-mtu
max packet size : 3002
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-340
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsppnni-neighbor
dsppnni-neighbor
Display PNNI Neighbor—PXM1
Use the dsppnni-neighbor command to display information of about a specific PNNI neighbor, or all
PNNI neighbors in a network. If remote node id is not specified, all neighbors attached to the specified
node are displayed. If the node index not specified, all neighbors attached to the PNNI nodes at all
hierarchies on the single switching system are displayed.
Syntax
dsppnni-neighbor [node-index [rmt-node-id]]
Syntax Description
node-index
The system-generated node index specifies the relative level of the PNNI logical
node within the hierarchy on the switch. the node identifier. In the current release,
the only node index is 1.
Range: 1–10
rmt-node-id
The remote node index for a remote node is the index assigned to a neighboring
node.
Display Contents
node-index
The system-generated node index. In the current release, the only node index
is 1.
Range: 1–10
node name
The name of the neighboring node (assigned through the cnfname command).
Remote node id
The PNNI logical node identifier (node ID). The node-id consists of the
following logical elements, starting at the most significant byte:
•
The level of the PNNI node within the hierarchy.
•
The number of bits in the ATM address. The number is 160 for an NSAP
address because the ATM address of the node is always 20 bytes. For an
E.164 address, this field is decimal 15.
•
The ATM address portion of the peer group ID (20, 8-bit hexadecimal
bytes).
Neighbor state
FULL.
Port count
The number of ports.
SVC RCC index
The index for the SVC routing control channel.
RX DS pkts
The number of received signal packets in the receive direction. The current
release does not support SVCC RCC, so this value is 0.
TX DS pkts
The number of transmitted signal packets in the transmit direction.
RX PTSP pkts
The number of PNNI topology state packets in the receive direction.
TX PTSP pkts
The number of PNNI topology state packets in the transmit direction.
RX PTSE req pkts
The number of PNNI topology state element (PTSE) request packets in the
receive direction.
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-341
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsppnni-neighbor
TX PTSE req pkts
The number of transmitted PTSE request packets in the transmit direction.
RX PTSE ack pkts
The number of received PTSE acknowledgment packets in the receive
direction.
TX PTSE ack pkts
The number of transmitted PTSE acknowledgment packets in the transmit
direction.
Related Commands
None
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: any
Log: no
Example
Display the information for a specific PNNI neighbor in the network.
spirita.1.PXM.a > dsppnni-neighbor 1
node index: 1
node name
: ses001
Remote node id: 56:160:47.00918100000000107be92f07.00107be92f07.00
Neighbor state: FULL
Port count..........
0
SVC RCC index.......
0
RX DS pkts..........
2
TX DS pkts..........
2
RX PTSE req pkts....
125
TX PTSE req pkts....
134
RX PTSE ack pkts....
91
TX PTSE ack pkts....
84
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-342
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsppnni-node
dsppnni-node
Display PNNI Node—PXM1
Use the dsppnni-node command to display the PNNI logical nodes operating on a physical switching
system with the associated information. The node list is displayed in ascending order of internally
assigned PNNI node index, with 1 presenting the node at the lowest PNNI hierarchy.
If the node index is specified, the specific node information is displayed.
Syntax
dsppnni-node [node-index]
Syntax Description
node-index
The node-index identifies a logical node in relation to other nodes in the hierarchy.
This node index applies locally within the switch. In a multi-peer group. The range
is 1–108. In the current release, the only local node index is the default of 1, so you
do not actually have to enter it.
Range: 1–10
Display Contents
node index
The node-index is a numeric node identifier assigned by the software—it is not
user-configurable.
Range: 1–10
node name
Displays the PNNI node name assigned to a PNNI node. Each node name must
be unique in the peer group–choose names that all fit into an obviously similar
group, for example, names of states, names of universities, and so forth.
Level
Displays the PNNI hierarchical level by defining the length of the pg-id value.
For example, the default values 56 indicates that the pgId value extends 56 bits
from the left-most bit. Therefore, pg-id = 47 01 00 8100 0000. If you specify the
value of level to 40, pg-id = 47 01 00 8100.
Lowest
Indicates whether the node is the lowest logical node on the switch. In a
single-peer group, the Lowest parameter is always true. In a multi-peer group, it
can be true or false.
Restricted
transit
Displays the flag that indicates whether transit is restricted across this node. This
value can be set to off to secure the node, or to minimize traffic handled by the
node if it is of either low-capacity or high-criticality.
The following are the values:
•
on—Calls
can transit across this node.
•
off —Only calls terminating on end-systems supported by this node can
access this node.
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-343
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsppnni-node
Complex node
Indicates whether this node is a complex node. A node at the lowest level cannot
be a complex node. Therefore, this field is always off.
The following are the complex nodes:
Branching
restricted
Admin status
Operational
status
Non-transit for
PGL election
•
on—This node is a complex node.
•
off—This node is not a complex node.
Indicates whether the following node supports point-to-multipoint branching.
•
on—This node does not support point-to-multipoint branching.
•
off—This node supports point-to-multipoint branches.
Displays the administrative status of the node. You can disable or enable a node
by entering the cnfpnni-node command with the following parameters.
•
up—The logical PNNI node is enabled.
•
down—The logical PNNI node is disabled.
Displays the operational status of the node. The software determines the
operational state, so you cannot configure it.
Displays whether transit is restricted across this node. This value is set by the
software and is not user-configurable.
The following are the values:
•
on—Only calls that terminate on this node can access this node.
•
off—Calls can transit this node.
Node id
For the constituents of the node ID, see the description of the addpnni-node
command or the cnfpnni-node command. Before you change the node ID,
disable the node by entering cnfpnni-node -enable false.
ATM address
For the constituents of the ATM address, see the description of he addpnni-node
command or the cnfpnni-node command. Before you change the ATM address,
disable the node by entering cnfpnni-node -enable false.
Peer group id
Displays the -pgId of length level that is assigned to the PNNI node. The peer
group is the PNNI local group.The peer group consists of all PNNI nodes with
matching pg-id values.
The default value of level is 56 (7 bytes), which specifies the length of -pgId to
7 bytes. However, the maximum length of -pgId is 14 bytes, so display
commands always display -pgId as 14 bytes with trailing zeros filling the
undefined fields. If you increase the value of level, you change the length, and
therefore the value, of -pgId, but it will always be displayed as 14 bytes.
This is a 14-byte, formatted hexadecimal string. Like all PNNI addresses,
identifiers, and prefixes, this value is portrayed as a string of hexadecimal
“nibbles.” One or several pairs of nibbles entail each parameter field.
Related Commands
cnfpnni-node, dsppnni-node-list
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: any
Log: no
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-344
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsppnni-node
Example
Display the PNNI configuration values.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dsppnni-node
node index: 1
node name: SES_SJ
Level...............
56
Lowest..............
true
Restricted transit..
off
Complex node........
off
Branching restricted
on
Admin status........
up
Operational status..
up
Non-transit for PGL election..
off
Node id...............56:160:47.009181000000003071f813a1.003071f813a1.01
ATM address...........47.009181000000003071f813a1.003071f813a1.01
Peer group id.........56:47.00.9181.0000.0000.0000.0000.00
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-345
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsppnni-node-list
dsppnni-node-list
Display PNNI Node List—PXM1
Use the dspnni-node-list command to list the PNNI nodes in the network attached to the current switch.
For a single-peer group (SPG), the displayed nodes exist at one level. For a multi-peer group (MPG), the
list contains all nodes on the current switch and all nodes that are visible to every node on the current
switch. The display for an MPG shows an ascending order of nodes based on the node number. From the
node list, you can create a graphical representation of the network.
Syntax
dsppnni-node-list
Syntax Description
None
Display Contents
This section describes the contents of a node list. It also describes how the display changes from one
level of a hierarchy to a higher level. The description relates to the example of a multi-peer network
diagram in Figure 3-3. Linking the description here with Figure 3-3 and the example clarifies not only
the output of the dsppnni-node-list command but also MPGs in general. An example SPG list follows
the MPG example.
node #
The node number (node #) is a reference to the nodes in the network—not a node in the
hierarchy of an MPG on a switch (see the dsppnni-node description for details about
node index). The entity that has this view and compiles this list of node numbers is a
local logical node. The node numbers have a range of 1–256.
Node # 1 is the logical node that is making its list of network nodes. In an MPG list,
multiple instances of node # 1 appear because the logical node at each level sees itself
as node # 1. Also, each node in a multi-peer group has information for nodes in its peer
group but also for all nodes on the level of its parent, grandparent, and so forth (see
Figure 3-3).
Whether a node belongs to a single-peer group or a multi-peer group, each logical node
increments node # by 1 according to the sequence that it discovers other nodes.
You can view only a node number in applicable displays or provide it as a command
parameter. For example, you can provide a node number to the dsppnni-path
command.
node id
The node-id consists of the level, the length of the ATM address, and the ATM address
itself. The node ID is the 22 octet that uniquely identifies the node within the routing
domain.
node name
The name of the switch (not the name of a logical node). The root of this node name
results from the cnfname command. If a dash number follows the node number, that
number is the node index that pertains to the hierarchy of nodes on the switch. For this
command, a number is appended only for nodes above the lowest level on the switch.
level
The level is set through the addpnni-node command or the cnfpnni-node command.
Range: 1–104
Default: 56
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-346
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsppnni-node-list
Note
This display can not frequently update enough for you if you are configuring the network. You can
change timers to update more frequently, but changing timers can have unexpected effects. Before
you change any timers, discuss it with the TAC or your Cisco representative. The dsppnni-link
command frequently updates a display of the address, link, and Hello packet information of each link.
The following describe the progression in node numbers, levels, and the node index appended to the
switch name in an MPG network (see Figure 3-3).
1.
The display shows all network nodes that are known to the lowest level. These nodes consist of all
nodes in the peer group, all nodes on the level of its parent node, all nodes on the level of its
grandparent, and so on. The MPG shown in the Example section illustrates this concept.
The numbers in the “node #” column begin with 1—which is the local node itself—then continues
with the next learned node, and so on. The node# increases by 1 with each discovered node.
2.
When the sequence re-starts with node # 1, the display has begun showing the view from the next
higher node in the hierarchy. At this next higher level, node # 1 is the current node itself, which has
made its own list of nodes. The display continues with peer group members of that level, the
members of the parent’s group, the grandparent and members of the grandparent’s group, and so on.
The MPG in the Example section illustrates this progression.
3.
For levels above the lowest, the node index is appended to the name of the switch. See the node name
column in the display for a multi-peer group in the Example section. For the definition of a node
index, see the description of the dsppnni-node command.
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-347
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsppnni-node-list
Figure 3-3
Multi-Peer Group
Level
40
S1-3
Node indexes for switch 1
S4-2
S1 node index = 1
S1-2 node index = 2
S1-3 node index = 3
Node indexes for switch 2
S2 node index = 1
S2-2 node index = 2
Level
48
S1-2
S2-2
Node indexes for switch 4
S4 node index = 1
S4-2 node index = 2
S1
S2
S4
66349
Level
56
Example of MPG
Display all network nodes that are known to the logical nodes on the current switch. This multi-per group
is the basis of Figure 3-3 and is constructed from this list.
Note
Node # 2 has been either disabled or deleted from the network.
The first graphical representation in this example is Figure 3-4. It illustrates where the view of a
particular level begins and ends. As Figure 3-4 shows, the number of nodes visible at each higher level
decreases. After acquiring a visual grasp of the dsppnni-node-list display, the screen capture that
follows Figure 3-4 provides a more readable list to examine.
The first series of node numbers is node # 1 through node # 6 and is the list complied by the lowest level
node. As reflected in Figure 3-3, mpglax1 is the only node in its peer group, so the first series shows only
one node at level 56. The remainder of the nodes in the first series are the members at the level of its
parent and grandparent illustrated in Figure 3-3. At the levels other than the lowest, the node index is
appended to the switch name.
For the switch named mpglax4, levels 56 and 40 were configured. Therefore, the display shows the last
node name at level 40 of mpglax4-02.
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-348
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsppnni-node-list
Figure 3-4
A List of Nodes in a Multi-Peer Group
mpglax1.1.PXM.a > dsppnni-node-list
node # node id
node name
level
------- -------------------------------------------------- ---------- ------1
56:160:47.009181000000003071f80e4a.003071f80e4a.01 mpglax1
56
node # node id
node name
level
------- -------------------------------------------------- ---------- ------3
48:56:47.339181000000000000000000.003071f80833.00 mpglax1-02
48
node # node id
node name
level
------- -------------------------------------------------- ---------- ------4
40:56:47.229181000000000000000000.003071f80e52.00 mpglax4-02
40
node # node id
node name
level
------- -------------------------------------------------- ---------- ------5
40:48:47.559181000100000000000000.003071f80833.00 mpglax1-03
40
View
from
mpglax
level 56
node # node id
node name
level
------- -------------------------------------------------- ---------- ------6
48:56:47.119181000000000000000000.003071f80e56.00 mpglax2-02
48
node # node id
node name
level
------- -------------------------------------------------- ---------- ------1
48:56:47.339181000000000000000000.003071f80833.00 mpglax1-02
48
node # node id
node name
level
------- -------------------------------------------------- ---------- ------2
40:48:47.559181000100000000000000.003071f80833.00 mpglax1-03
40
node # node id
node name
level
------- -------------------------------------------------- ---------- ------3
48:56:47.119181000000000000000000.003071f80e56.00 mpglax2-02
48
View
from
mpglax-02
level 48
node # node id
node name
level
------- -------------------------------------------------- ---------- ------1
40:48:47.559181000100000000000000.003071f80833.00 mpglax1-03
40
node # node id
node name
level
------- -------------------------------------------------- ---------- ------3
40:56:47.229181000000000000000000.003071f80e52.00 mpglax4-02
40
View
from
level 40
66348
node # node id
node name
level
------- -------------------------------------------------- ---------- ------4
40:56:47.229181000000000000000000.003071f80e52.00 mpglax4-02
40
Related Commands
cnfpnni-node, dsppnni-node
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: any
Log: no
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-349
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsppnni-node-list
Example
Display the PNNI logical nodes for the for the switch.
spirit11.1.1.PXM.a > dsppnni-node-list
node # node id
node name
------- -------------------------------------------------- ---------1
56:160:47.0091810000000030ff0fef38.0030ff0fef38.01 Geneva
node # node id
node name
------- -------------------------------------------------- ---------2
56:160:47.00918100000000050fff0e02.00050fff0e02.01 NewYork
node # node id
node name
------- -------------------------------------------------- ---------3
56:160:47.00918100000000500fffe001.00500fffe001.01 Toronto
node # node id
node name
------- -------------------------------------------------- ---------4
56:160:47.00918100000000309409f321.00309409f321.01 Boston
node # node id
node name
------- -------------------------------------------------- ---------5
56:160:47.00918100000000050fffe002.00050fffe002.01 HongKong(Rt2)
node #
node id
node name
------- -------------------------------------------------- ---------6
56:160:47.00918100000000309409f17c.00309409f17c.01 Sydney(Rt1)
node # node id
node name
------- -------------------------------------------------- ---------7
56:160:47.00918100000000309409f010.00309409f010.01 Bombay
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-350
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsppnni-path
dsppnni-path
Display PNNI Paths (to a Node or Nodes)—PXM1
Use the dsppnni-path command to display the pre-computed paths between the source (the current
node) and the destination nodes. The system has determined these paths to be the best or optimal paths
for various service classes according to one of three metrics. These metrics are the administrative weight
(AW), the cell transfer delay (CTD), or the cell delay variation (CDV). The service class that each metric
supports for the purpose of routing varies.
For a list of metrics and service classes, see Table 3-1. For dsppnni-path, you must specify a
combinations of routing metric and service class.
Table 3-1
Routing Criteria and Service Classes
Routing Metric
Applicable Service Classes
AW
CBR, ABR, UBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR
CTD
CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR
CDV
CBR, rt-VBR
You can also specify a node index. If you specify a node-index, the command displays the paths from
the source node to the node whose index you specify
Syntax
dsppnni-path [aw {cbr|rtvbr|nrtvbr|ubr|abr}] [ctd {cbr|rtvbr|nrtvbr}] [cdv {cbr|rtbvr}] [node-index]
Syntax Description
aw
Specifies the administrative weight as the routing metric. PNNI uses the AW
parameter to choose a route based on weights assigned for different routes.
Default: -1
ctd
Specifies the CTD required for the connection in the local -> remote direction.
Default: -1
cdv
Specifies the CDV required for the connection in the local -> remote direction.
Default: -1
node-index
Specifies the LGN implemented on this switching system. This option lets you
specify one destination switch to show connecting paths, otherwise the paths to
all switches appear in the display.
Range: 1–10
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-351
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsppnni-path
Display Contents
S
or D
node #
The S or D in the first column of the display shows whether the line pertains to the
source (S) or begins one or more lines about the destination (D).
The node number (node index) within the network. This node number is a unique
identifier of the node within the network and appears as node-index in many
displays.
Range: 1–10
PortId
The PNNI logical port identifier in the form of a 32-bit number. Certain commands
require the port ID in this format. To obtain the logical port ID from the physical port
ID, enter the dsppnports command.
Range: 1–2147483648
node id
The node identifier (node ID) assigned to a PNNI node. The commands that specify
the node ID are addpnni-node and cnfpnni-node. To see the node ID, use the
dsppnni-node command
node name
The name of the switch assigned by the cnfname command. This name appears in the
CLI prompt.
Related Commands
None
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: yes
Log: no
Example
Display the all the PNNI paths.
spirita.1.PXM.a > dsppnni-path aw ubr
node #/PortId
--------------D 2/
0
S 1/
66048
node id
-------------------------------------------------56:160:47.00918100000000107be92f07.00107be92f07.00
56:160:47.00918100000000107be92f09.00107be92f09.00
node name
------------Dean
Jerry
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-352
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsppnni-pkttrace
dsppnni-pkttrace
Display PNNI Packet Trace—PXM1
Use the dsppnni-pkttrace command to display the packet-trace settings. These settings are configured
by the cnfpnni-pkttrace command. You can use a packet trace to examine the contents of the PNNI
Hello packets that are exchanged between two neighboring peers. The dsppnni-pkttrace command
applies only to debugging purposes.
Note
This command is very intrusive. If you enter it while the node carries live traffic, Cisco recommends
that you specify one direction at a time for the trace.
Syntax
dsppnni-pkttrace <tx | rx> [node-index] [-portId port-id] [-svcIndex svc-index ]
Syntax Description
tx | rx
Specifies the direction to display the trace.
tx: transmitted.
rx: received.
node-index
The node index indicates the relative level of the logical node within a multi-peer
group on the switch.
Range: 1–10
-portid
Logical port identifier of the port on which the packet trace has to be turned on or
off. The port ID in this instance has the format of the logical ID number. The format
is a 32-bit encoded number in the range 1–2147483648.
-svcIndex
An index of the switched virtual connection routing control channel (SVCC-RCC)
packet trace. This parameter is meaningful only if you specify node-index.
Related Commands
cnfpnni-pkttrace
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: active
Log: no
Example
Display the PNNI packet trace options for each link.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dsppnni-pkttrace tx -portId 17504
Node Index :1
Port id:
17504
Tx Pkt Trace on
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-353
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsppnni-ptse
dsppnni-ptse
Display PNNI Node PTSE—PXM1
Use the dsppnni-ptse command to display PNNI topology state elements (PTSEs). The purpose of this
command is troubleshooting, and it requires familiarity with the ATM Forum PNNI 1.0 specification.
Without knowledge of this specification, the usefulness of dsppnni-ptse is minimal.
PTSE Types
A node indicates its characteristics (such as all its ATM addresses) to all other nodes in the peer group
by broadcasting numerous PTSEs. A node periodically sends (or floods the group with) PTSEs according
to a user-specified timer but also floods the group with PTSEs when it triggers a change of topology. A
typical topology change is an addition of an ATM address.
Each PTSE carries an indicator of what type of PTSE it is. This PTSE type appears as both a descriptive
string and a number set by the ATM Forum. Five basic types exist and various subtypes exist.
The following are the basic types of PTSEs:
1.
Nodal information group
2.
Internal reachable addresses
3.
External reachable addresses
4.
Horizontal links
5.
Uplinks (multiple peer groups only)
Granularity of the Output
The optional parameters let you determine the granularity of the target of the command. The granularity
ranges from the whole peer group to a specific logical port. Additionally, you can specify a “detailed”
display or just the header information for PTSEs.
If you specify,
Note
•
Nothing, the display contains header information for all PTSEs for all logical nodes in the network.
•
Only the node-index, the output contains all PTSEs sent from the node indicated by node-index.
•
Only node-index, node-id, and ptse-id, the display shows the PTSE uniquely identified by these
three parameters.
•
A detailed display, the display contains information about the header and the contents of the PTSE
and applies to all combinations of the other parameters.
The node-index is automatically generated. See description of dsppnni-node-list.
The ptse-id is generated by the node that sends the PTSE.
You can enter dsppnni-ptse to trouble-shoot a faulty designated transit list (DTL). If a DTL is faulty,
you can observe the PTSE of nodes on the designated path to confirm the accuracy of the information
used to build the DTL. You can also enter dsppnni-ptse to determine if nodes are correctly passing both
the topology packets and the Hello packets.
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-354
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsppnni-ptse
Syntax
dsppnni-ptse [node-index] [node-id] [ptse-id] [-detail {true | false}]
Syntax Description
node-index
A unique, network-wide node identifier.
Range: 1–10
node-id
The 22-byte PNNI node id assigned to a PNNI logical node operating on a local
switching system. If the node-id is not specified, the default value is used. Once the
node-id is assigned, it can be changed only when the administrative status of the
node is disabled.
Default: (no specific node ID)
ptse-id
An integer that identifies a PTSE generated by a particular node. Regardless of the
number of times a node sends a PTSE, this ID remains the same until a change to
the topology occurs. For example, adding a ATM address to a node causes that
node to generate a new PTSE and associated ID.
The PTSE ID has a theoretical limit of a 32-bit number. However, the PTSE ID is
likely to be a relatively small number.
-detail
Specifies the amount of information to be displayed. If detail is not present, only
the content of the PTSE header is displayed. Otherwise, all the contained
information groups, if any, are displayed as well.
true: Display the contents of the PTSE as well as the header information.
false: Display only the PTSE header.
Default: false
Display Contents
node-index
This unique, network-wide node identifier is a switch-generated
number in the range 1–10. If the network consists of a multi-peer
group, the display shows the sequence of node numbers for the
lowest level then starts the sequence at the next level.
originating node ID
The identifier of the node that broadcast the PTSE.
PTSE ID
The unique identifier of the PTSE. ptse-id is a 32-bit number index
assigned by the PNNI node that created the PTSE.
PTSE type
The type of PTSE is an ASCII designated by the ATM forum PNNI
standard. Broad and narrow categories.
Nodal State Parameter Information
internal reachable ATM
addresses
A list of reachable ATM addresses that are inside the peer group or
network.
exterior reachable ATM
addresses
A list of reachable ATM addresses that are outside the network. The
current release does not support exterior addresses.
PTSE length
The number of bytes in the PTSE—a 16-bit number.
sequence
The sequence of the PTSE—a 32-bit number.
checksum
The checksum error-checking value. A 16-bit hex number.
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-355
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsppnni-ptse
remaining lifetime
The length of the remaining lifetime (in seconds). 32-bit number.
details for IG
The flag that determines the level of details for information group
(IG) if the detail option is enabled (“true”).
Nodal Information Group Parameters
Note
The current release does not support the logical group node (LGN), preferred peer group
leader (PGL), and other items that pertain to the levels of a multi-peer group.
type
The type of nodal information group (IG).
length
The length of the nodal IG PTSE. A 16-bit number.
ATM address
The upnode ATM address is a 20-byte, hexadecimal string. The
upnode is the node at the other end of the uplink. It is the neighboring
peer of the ancestor of the node from which the uplink originates.
priority
The value of the priority parameter, an 8-bit number.
nodal flags
The 8-bit nodal flags.
preferred PGL
A 22-byte hex string. The current release does not support peer
group leader (PGL).
next higher level binding
information IG type
The next higher level binding information IG type is an ASCII
string. The current release does not support higher level binding.
next higher level binding
information IG length
A 16-bit number.
The current release does not support higher level binding.
parent LGN id
The parent LGN ID is a 22-byte hex string. The current release does
not support logical group numbers (LGNs).
parent LGN ATM address
The parent LGN ATM address is a 20-byte, hex string. The current
release does not support group numbers (LGNs).
parent PG id
The peer group ID (of length level) assigned to the parent PG. The
peer group is the PNNI local group. The peer group consists of all
PNNI nodes with matching -pgId values. The current release does
not support parent peer groups.
Default: Figure 3-1 shows the factory-set default.
parent peer group PGL
The parent peer group PGL identifier is a 22-byte hexadecimal
string.
Nodal State IG Parameters
type
The ASCII string that indicates the type of the IG nodal state
parameters.
length
A 16-bit number.
flags
A string of 8-bit flags.
input port id
The logical identifier on the input interface.
Range: 1–2147483648
output port id
The logical PNNI identifier on the output interface.
Range: 1–2147483648
Internal Reachable ATM Address IG Parameters
type
The ASCII string that indicates the type of the internal reachable
ATM address IG parameters.
length
A 16-bit number.
flags
A string of 8-bit flags.
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-356
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsppnni-ptse
port id
The logical PNNI identifier on the interface.
Range: 1–2147483648
The UNI 4.0 address scope.
scope
Note
The current release does not support UNI 4.0, so the scope is
0.
Range: 1–15, where
1 = LocalNetwork
2 = LocalNetworkPlusOne
3 = LocalNetworkPlusTwo
4 = SiteMinusOne
5 = IntraSite
6 = SitePlusOne
7 = OrganizationMinusOne
8 = IntraOrganization
9 = OrganizationPlusOne
10 = CommunityMinusOne
11 = IntraCommunity
12 = CommunityPlusOne
13 = Regional
14 = InterRegional
15 = Global
address info length
The length of the address information—an 8-bit number.
address count
The number of reachable addresses—a 16-bit number.
reachable address prefixes
Display any PNNI summary address reachable by the node. The
length of addressprefix is set by prefixlength.
External Reachable ATM Address IG Parameters
Note
The current release does not support exterior reachable addresses.
type
The ASCII string that indicates the type of the exterior reachable
ATM address IG parameters.
length
A 16-bit number.
flags
A string of 8-bit flags.
port id
The logical port number of the PNNI port. This format is a 32-bit
number.
Range: 1–2147483648
scope
An 8-bit number.
address info length
An 8-bit number.
The current release does not support exterior reachable addresses.
address count
A 16-bit number.
reachable address prefixes
Display any exterior PNNI summary address reachable by the node.
The length of addressprefix is set by prefixlength.
Horizontal Links IG Parameters
type
The ASCII string that indicates the type of the horizontal link IG
parameters.
length
A 16-bit number.
flags
A string of 8-bit flags.
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-357
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsppnni-ptse
remote node id
The node ID of the remote node.
remote port id
The logical PNNI identifier on the remote interface.
Range: 1–2147483648
local port id
The logical PNNI identifier on the local interface.
Range: 1–2147483648
aggregation token
See the description of the cnfpnni-intf command for a definition of
an aggregation token. The current release does not support link
aggregation.
Range: 1–32
Uplink IG Parameters
Note
The current release does not support uplinks.
type
The ASCII string that indicates the type of up link IG parameters.
length
A 16-bit number.
flags
A string of 8-bit flags.
remote higher level
node id
The PNNI node identifier assigned to a PNNI node.
common pg id
The peer group ID (of length level) that assigned to the PNNI
common PG. This peer group is the local peer group.
Default: Figure 3-1 shows the factory-set default.
local port id
The logical PNNI identifier on the interface.
Range: 1–2147483648
aggregation token
Range: 1–2147483648
upnode ATM address
The ATM address of the PNNI uplink node. The upnode ATM
address is a 20-byte, hexadecimal string. The upnode is the node at
the other end of the uplink. It is the neighboring peer of the ancestor
of the node from which the uplink originates.
Default: none
Resource Availability IG Parameters
type
Indication of bi-directional resource availability information group
(RAIG).
length
A 16-bit number.
flags
A 16-bit number.
aw
The bandwidth used by AW metric cells in cells per second.
Range: 1–2147483648
ctd
The bandwidth used by CTD metric cells in cells per second.
Range: 1–2147483648
cdv
The bandwidth used by CDV metric cells in cells per second.
Range: 1–2147483648
mcr
The bandwidth used by MCR metric cells in cells per second.
Range: 1–2147483648
acr
The bandwidth used by ACR metric cells in cells per second.
Range: 1–2147483648
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-358
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsppnni-ptse
clr0
The bandwidth used by CLR0 metric cells in cells per second.
Range: 1–2147483648
clr0+1
The bandwidth used by CLR0+1 metric cells in cells per second.
Range: 1–2147483648
Generic Connection Admission Control (GCAC) IG
type
The ASCII string that indicates the type of GCAC IG parameters.
length
A 16-bit number.
crm
The cell rate margin (CRM) is a measure of the difference between
the effective bandwidth allocation and the allocation for sustainable
cell rate. It is a safety margin allocated above the aggregate
sustainable cell rate for nrt-VBR and rt-VBR. This feature has little
impact on traffic management.
The ATM Forum does require support for CRM, and Cisco currently
does not support it on SES products.
Range: 1–2147483648
The variance factor (VF) is a relative measure of the square of the
cell rate margin (CRM) normalized by the variance of the sum of the
cell rates of all existing connections. VF applies to nrt-VBR and
rt-VBR, but it has little impact on traffic management.
vf
The ATM Forum does require support for VF, and Cisco currently
does not support it on SES products.
Range: 1–2147483648
Related Commands
None
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: any
Log: no
Example
Display a PTSE for a specified PNNI node with the applicable nodes.
spirita.1.PXM.a > dsppnni-ptse 1
node index: 1
originating node name: Krishna
originating node id: 56:160:47.0091810000000000c0326496.0000c0326496.00
Type................
64
Length..............
1200
Sequence number.....
1
Checksum............
94d
PTSE id.............
1
Remaining lifetime..
2997
PTSE type...........
Nodal Info( 97)
Type................
97
Length..............
65
Priority............
0
Flags...............
f8
ATM addr..............47.0091810000000000c0326496.0000c0326496.00
Pref PGL id...........0:0:00.000000000000000000000000.000000000000.00
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-359
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsppnni-ptse
binding info: Type 192,
next level LGN node id.
next level LGN ATM addr
next level LGN PG id...
next level LGN PGL id..
Length 76
48:56:47.009181000000000000000000.0000c0326496.00
47.0091810000000000c0326496.0000c0326496.30
30:47.00.9181.0000.0000.0000.0000.00
30:48:56:47.009181000000000000000000.0000c0326496.00
node index: 1
originating node name: Liz
originating node id: 56:160:47.0091810000000000c0326496.0000c0326496.00
Type................
64
Length..............
1200
Sequence number.....
1
Checksum............
94d
PTSE id.............
2
Remaining lifetime..
2997
PTSE type........... Nodal State Parameter( 96)
Type................
Reserved............
Input port id.......
96
0
48
Length..............
Flags...............
Output port id......
65
0
12
Type(outgoing RA)
Flags............
AW...............
CLR=0............
maxCR(cells/sec)
CTD(micro-sec)...
Type(GCAC)....
CRM...........
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Length..............
Reserved............
0
0
CLR=0+1.............
AvCR(cells/sec).....
CDV(micro-sec)......
Length..............
VF..................
0
0
0
0
0
Type(incoming RA)
Flags............
AW...............
CLR=0............
maxCR(cells/sec)
CTD(micro-sec)...
4
0
0
0
0
0
Length..............
Reserved............
0
0
CLR=0+1.............
AvCR(cells/sec).....
CDV(micro-sec)......
0
0
0
node index: 1
originating node name: Liz
originating node id: 56:160:47.0091810000000000c0326496.0000c0326496.00
Type................
64
Length..............
1200
Sequence number.....
1
Checksum............
94d
PTSE id.............
2
Remaining lifetime..
2997
PTSE type........... Int Reach Addr(244)
Type................
224
Length..............
Reserved............
0
Flags...............
Port id.............
48
Scope...............
Ail... .............
0
Aic.................
Prefix..............47.0091.8100.0000.0010.7be9.2f07/104
Prefix..............47.0091.8100.0000.0010.7be9.2f44/94
65
0
0
0
Type(outgoing RA)
Flags............
AW...............
CLR=0............
maxCR(cells/sec)
CTD(micro-sec)...
Type(GCAC)....
CRM...........
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Length..............
Reserved............
0
0
CLR=0+1.............
AvCR(cells/sec).....
CDV(micro-sec)......
Length..............
VF..................
0
0
0
0
0
Type(incoming RA)
Flags............
AW...............
CLR=0............
maxCR(cells/sec)
CTD(micro-sec)...
4
0
0
0
0
0
Length..............
Reserved............
0
0
CLR=0+1.............
AvCR(cells/sec).....
CDV(micro-sec)......
0
0
0
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-360
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsppnni-ptse
Type(incoming RA)
Flags............
AW...............
CLR=0............
maxCR(cells/sec)
CTD(micro-sec)...
Type(GCAC)....
CRM...........
4
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Length..............
Reserved............
0
0
CLR=0+1.............
AvCR(cells/sec).....
CDV(micro-sec)......
Length..............
VF..................
0
0
0
0
0
node index: 1
originating node name: Liz
originating node id: 56:160:47.0091810000000000c0326496.0000c0326496.00
Type................
64
Length..............
1200
Sequence number.....
1
Checksum............
94d
PTSE id.............
4
Remaining lifetime..
2997
PTSE type...........
Horiz Link(288)
Type................
288
Length..............
65
Aggregation token...
0
Flags...............
f8
Remote node id......
4
Local port..........7158763985
Remote node id......56:160:47.00918100000000107be92f07.00107be92f07.00
Type(outgoing RA)
Flags............
AW...............
CLR=0............
maxCR(cells/sec)
CTD(micro-sec)...
Type(GCAC)....
CRM...........
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Length..............
Reserved............
0
0
CLR=0+1.............
AvCR(cells/sec).....
CDV(micro-sec)......
Length..............
VF..................
0
0
0
0
0
node index: 1
originating node name: Liz
originating node id: 56:160:47.0091810000000000c0326496.0000c0326496.00
Type................
64
Length..............
1200
Sequence number.....
1
Checksum............
94d
PTSE id.............
5
Remaining lifetime..
2997
PTSE type........... Ext Reach Addr(256)
Type................
256
Length..............
65
Reserved............
0
Flags.................
f8
Port id.............
48
Scope.................
0
Ail... .............
0
Aic...................
0
Prefix..............47.0091.8100.0000.0010.7be9.2f07/104
Prefix..............47.0091.8100.0000.0010.7be9.2f77/104
Prefix..............47.0091.8100.0000.0010.7be9.2f44/94
node index: 1
originating node name: Liz
originating node id: 56:160:47.0091810000000000c0326496.0000c0326496.00
Type................
64
Length..............
1200
Sequence number.....
1
Checksum............
94d
PTSE id.............
6
Remaining lifetime..
2997
PTSE type...........
Uplink(289)
Type................
289
Length..............
65
Aggregation token...
0
Flags...............
f8
Reserved.....................0
Local port id.......
0
Upnode id...........56:160:47.00918100000000107be92f07.00107be92f07.00
Common PGL id.......56:160:47.00918100000000.107b.e92f.07
Upnode ATM addr.....00.000000000000000000000000.000000000000.00
Type(outgoing RA)...
Flags...............
AW..................
2
0
0
Length..............
Reserved............
0
0
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-361
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsppnni-ptse
CLR=0...............
maxCR(cells/sec)...
CTD(micro-sec)......
Type(GCAC).......
CRM..............
0
0
0
0
0
CLR=0+1.............
AvCR(cells/sec).....
CDV(micro-sec)......
Length..............
VF..................
0
0
0
0
0
Type(outgoing RA)...
Flags...............
AW..................
CLR=0...............
maxCR(cells/sec)...
CTD(micro-sec)......
Type(GCAC).......
CRM..............
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Length..............
Reserved............
0
0
CLR=0+1.............
AvCR(cells/sec).....
CDV(micro-sec)......
Length..............
VF..................
0
0
0
0
0
Type(uplink IA).....
Sequence............
Type(outgoing RA)...
Flags...............
AW..................
CLR=0...............
maxCR(cells/sec)...
CTD(micro-sec)......
Type(GCAC).......
CRM..............
1
0
Length..............
66
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Length..............
Reserved............
0
0
CLR=0+1.............
AvCR(cells/sec).....
CDV(micro-sec)......
Length..............
VF..................
0
0
0
0
0
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-362
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsppnni-reachable-addr
dsppnni-reachable-addr
Display PNNI Reachable Addresses and Addresses—PXM1
Use the dsppnni-reachable-addr command to display displays all the reachable addresses and address
prefixes in the peer group. The following are the parameters to display granularity:
Note
•
If you enter local, the display shows the port ID and the addresses directly attached to the local node.
•
If you enter network, the display shows the advertising node ID, the addresses advertised by other
nodes, and the routing parameters for each reachable node.
The display may not update frequently enough if you are configuring the network. You can change
timers to update more frequently, but changing timers can have unexpected effects. Before you
modify a timer, discuss it with the TAC or your Cisco representative.
Syntax
dsppnni-reachable-addr <local | network>
Syntax Description
local | network
Determines whether the display shows the addresses of nodes that directly connect
to this switch or all nodes in the peer group.
Local: directly connected switches
Network: all reachable nodes in the peer group
Default: (no default)
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-363
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsppnni-reachable-addr
Display Contents
scope
The UNI 4.0 address scope. Refer to ATM forum documentation for a
description of these scopes. The current release does not support UNI
4.0, so scope currently is always 0.
Note
Range: 1–15, where
1 = LocalNetwork
2 = LocalNetworkPlusOne
3 = LocalNetworkPlusTwo
4 = SiteMinusOne
5 = IntraSite
6 = SitePlusOne
7 = OrganizationMinusOne
8 = IntraOrganization
9 = OrganizationPlusOne
10 = CommunityMinusOne
11 = IntraCommunity
12 = CommunityPlusOne
13 = Regional
14 = InterRegional
15 = Global
port id
The logical port identifier.
Exterior
The flag that indicates whether the node is an interior or exterior node.
The following values are
•
true—Specifies that the node is an exterior node.
•
false—Specifies that the node is an interior node.
ATM addr prefix
The PNNI summary address assigned to the node.
node name
The name of the switch results from the cnfname command and appears in the
CLI prompt.
Advertising node
number
The number of the remote node that has advertised information to the current
node. This number has a range of 1–256 and appears only if you specified the
network argument.
The local node generates the node numbers in the sequence that it discovers its
neighbors. You can only provide it as a command parameter or view it in
applicable displays. (Note that this node index or node number is not the node
index that identifies a node within the hierarchy of a multiple-peer group. See
dsppnni-node for details on the local node index.)
Transit Network ID
The transit network ID identifies a network where connections from the current
node do not terminate. This number applies to static addresses only. The
application of this option depends on the design intent of the user. The ID can
have up to four IA5 characters (IA5 is a superset of the ASCII character set).
Related Commands
None
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-364
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsppnni-reachable-addr
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: any
Log: no
Example
Display addresses directly attached to the local node.
SES_CH.1.PXM.a > dsppnni-reachable-addr local
scope...............
0
port id.............4294967295
Exterior............
false
Physical Desc.......NA
ATM addr prefix.....47.0091.8100.0000.0030.71f8.1ae7.0000.0001.0200/152
Transit network id..
scope...............
0
port id.............4294967295
Exterior............
false
Physical Desc.......NA
ATM addr prefix.....47.0091.8100.0000.0030.71f8.1ae7.0000.0002.0200/152
Transit network id..
scope...............
0
port id.............4294967295
Exterior............
false
Physical Desc.......NA
ATM addr prefix.....47.0091.8100.0000.0030.71f8.1ae7.0000.0005.0100/152
Transit network id..
scope...............
0
port id.............4294967295
Exterior............
false
Physical Desc.......NA
ATM addr prefix.....47.0091.8100.0002.0030.71f8.1ae7.0030.71f8.1ae7/152
Transit network id..
SES_CH.1.PXM.a >
Example
Display other network node addresses and node IDs.
spirita.1.PXM.a > dsppnni-reachable-addr network
scope...............
56
Advertising node number
2
Exterior............
false
ATM addr prefix.....47.0091.8100.0000.0010.7be9.2f07/104
Advertising nodeid..56:160:47.00918100000000107be92f07.00107be92f07.00
Node name...........ses001
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-365
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsppnni-routing-policy
dsppnni-routing-policy
Display PNNI Routing Policy—PXM1
Use the dsppnni-routing-policy command to display the parameters associated with the current routing
policy for this node.
The following parameters are displayed:
Caution
•
The tolerance of cost-calculations.
•
The frequency of routing table generation.
•
The type of load balancing that is specified.
•
The type of on-demand routing that is specified.
•
The type of administration weight table that is enabled.
You can change the routing policies to optimize PNNI routing for your network, but incorrect routing
policies can cripple or even crash a network. You should not change routing policies on a live
network. Use this command only after careful planning.
Syntax
dsppnni-routing-policy
Syntax Description
None
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-366
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsppnni-routing-policy
Display Contents
SPT epsilon
This parameter is meaningful primarily for crankback. The epsilon you
supply specifies a tolerance in the form of a percent that can influence
which paths qualify as equal-cost during route calculation. A higher
tolerance results in a broader range of path cost-values that can qualify as
equal-cost. If two paths have very similar administrative weights (AWs), a
large enough tolerance eliminates equal-cost as a routing factor because the
routing algorithm regards the costs as equal.
The range of 0–20 for this parameter comes from the ATM Forum PNNI
specification. However, the percent of tolerance that the numbers dictate is
determined by individual vendors.
Cisco currently maps the following percentages for the SES PNNI
Controller:
•
0: the total AWs along both directions of the path must be identical.
•
1–2: the total AWs along both directions of the path must be within
1.06%
•
3–4: the total AWs along both directions of the path must be within
3.125%
•
5–9: the total AWs along both directions of the path must be within
6.25%
•
10–15: the total AWs along both directions of the path must be within
12.5%
•
16–20: the total AWs along both directions of the path must be within
25.0%
Range: 0–20
Default: 0, so only identical path-cost values qualify as equal-cost
Load balance
The load balancing rule if any alternative, equal-cost routes exist for a
given call request.
The following values are
SPT holddown time
•
random—requires the least overhead due to minimal calculation. Best
choice when selecting between paths that have similar available
bandwidth.
•
maxbw—requires the most overhead due to ongoing comparison of
available bandwidth on paths. Best choice when selecting between
paths with dissimilar or fluctuating bandwidth.
The minimum time between consecutive calculations that generate routing
tables.
Units: 100 ms increments
Range: 1–600 (0.1–60 sec)
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-367
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsppnni-routing-policy
On demand routing
The current rule for on-demand routing is firstfit or bestfit.
The firstfit routing policy selects the first route found that goes to the
destination. The time for finding a route is the least possible, but the
optimal route may not be selected.
The following are selected as the bestfit policy based a route:
SPT path holddown time
•
The least-cost route, where the sum of all administrative weights in
both directions of the route must be less than maxCost.
•
Link verification.
•
Path constraint checks.
•
Avoidance of blocked nodes and links.
•
Checking limits in the designated transit list (DTL).
The minimum time that can elapse between consecutive calculations that
generate routing tables on border nodes.
Units: 100 ms
Range: 1 (0.1 sec)–600 (60 sec)
Note
AW Background Table
The current release does not support border nodes, so this value
must remain off.
The flag that enables or disables administrative weight (AW) for the
background routing table. The AW is the cost to traffic that traverses that
path. The metric AW can be specified on the interface and by the service
class (or QoS class), and it is associated with each link. AW is a defining
factor when routes are selected. The AW parameters influence how PNNI
selects paths in the peer group, and therefore how it distributes each SVC
and SPVC. PNNI route selection can also key on AW to exclude certain
links from routing, such as defining a backup link for use only when there
is no available bandwidth on the primary link.
The AW for a path is the sum of all AWs at each port egress for both
directions on the path.
CTD Background Table
The flag that enables or disables cell transfer delay (CTD) for the
background routing table. CTD is the time interval between a cell exiting
source node and entering the destination node.
CDV Background Table
The flag that enables or disables cell delay variation (CDV) for the
background routing table. CDV is a component of cell transfer delay, and
is a quality of service (QoS) delay parameter associated with CBR and
VBR service. CDV is the variation of delay between cells, measured peak
to peak.
Related Commands
cnfpnni-routing-policy
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: yes
Log: no
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-368
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsppnni-routing-policy
Example
Display the PNNI routing policy parameters.
SES_CH.1.PXM.a > dsppnni-routing policy
SPT
SPT
SPT
CTD
epsilon.........
holddown time...
path holddown time
Background Table
0
1
2
on
Load balance........
random
On demand routing... first fit
AW Background Table
on
CDV Background Table
on
SES_CH.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-369
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsppnni-scope-map
dsppnni-scope-map
Display PNNI Scope Map—PXM1
Use the dsppnni-scope-map command to view the scope map table that maps UNI 4.0 to the PNNI
hierarchy level.
Syntax
dsppnni-scope-map
Syntax Description
None
Display Contents
UNI Scope
Type
PNNI Routing Level
1
LocalNetwork
2
LocalNetworkPlusOne
3
LocalNetworkPlusTwo
4
SiteMinusOne
5
IntraSite
6
SitePlusOne
7
OrganizationMinusOne
8
IntraOrganization
9
OrganizationPlusOne
10
CommunityMinusOne
11
IntraCommunity
12
CommunityPlusOne
13
Regional
14
InterRegional
15
Global
Related Commands
cnfpnni-scope-map
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: any
Log: no
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-370
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsppnni-scope-map
Example
Display the PNNI scope map table if UNI 4.0 is supported.
SES_CH.1.PXM.a > dsppnni-scope-map
UNI Scope
---------------------LocalNetwork(1)
LocalNetworkPlusOne(2)
LocalNetworkPlusTwo(3)
SiteMinusOne(4)
IntraSite(5)
SitePlusOne(6)
OrganizationMinusOne(7)
IntraOrganization(8)
OrganizationPlusOne(9)
CommunityMinusOne(10)
IntraCommunity(11)
CommunityPlusOne(12)
Regional(13)
InterRegional(14)
Global(15)
Pnni Routing Level
-----------------56
56
56
40
40
32
32
24
24
24
8
8
0
0
0
SES_CH.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-371
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsppnni-spoke
dsppnni-spoke
Display PNNI Default Spoke—PXM1
Use the dsppnni-spoke command to display how the UNI 4.0 address scope values map to the PNNI
hierarchal levels. It displays the PNNI default spoke for a logical group node (LGN) using complex node
representation in a given peer group (PG). The spoke is the conceptual “radius” of the peer group. The
spoke values are based on averaging the administrate weights (AWs) of all border node paths then
dividing that average by 2.
If a logical path is not included in the bypass table, the spoke values are used to select which peer group
a route transits. The PG with the lowest spoke AW is the lowest cost PG; therefore, the best path to use
is based on AW.
Note
This debugging command does not apply to single-peer groups.
Syntax
dsppnni-spoke <node-index>
Syntax Description
node-index
Node index assigned to a PNNI logical node operating on a switching system.
Default: (the factory-set default)
Display Contents
nodal
aggregation
method
The ASCII string of the active aggregation method. The method is full-meshed
or spanning tree.
ptse-id
The unique identifier for the PTSE. ptse-id is assigned by the PNNI node that
created the PTSE.
node-index
The node-index is the local node index and has a range of 1–10.
Range: 1–10
AW-NRTVBR
The administrative weight for nrt-VBR connections on this interface.
Range: 0–4,194,304
AW-CBR
The administrative weight for CBR connections on this interface. While a CBR
connection is active, this option limits its bit rate to a static value that remains
available until the connection is torn down. The bit rate is characterized by the
peak cell rate (PCR) value.
Range: 0–4,194,304
AW-ABR
The administrative weight for available bit rate (ABR) connections on this
interface.
Specify the 24 bit number AW for ABR on this interface.
Range: 0–4,194,304
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-372
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsppnni-spoke
AW-RTVBR
The administrative weight for rt-VBR connections on this interface.
Range: 0–4,194,304
AW-UBR
The administrative weight used for unspecified bit rate (UBR) connections.
This category includes switched virtual connection (SVC) ping connections.
Range: 0–4,194,304
Related Commands
None
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: any
Log: no
Example
Display the PNNI default spoke for node index 1.
spirita.1.PXM.a > dsppnni-spoke 1
node index: 1
Ptse id ............
948
Flags................
Nodal aggregation method.. spanning tree
AW
MCR
AvCR
CTD
CDV
CLR0
CLR0+1
CRM
VF
CBR
-----5040
0
100000
0
0
0
0
10
5
RTVBR
-----5040
0
100000
0
0
0
0
10
5
NRTVBR
-----5040
0
100000
0
0
0
0
10
5
ABR
-----5040
0
100000
0
0
0
0
10
5
a3
UBR
-----5040
0
100000
0
0
0
0
10
5
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-373
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsppnni-summary-addr
dsppnni-summary-addr
Display PNNI Summary Address—PXM1
Use the dsppnni-summary-addr command to display all summary addresses at the specified degree of
granularity.
If you specify node-index, the command displays the PNNI summary addresses of the node-index PNNI
node. If you do not specify node-index, the command displays PNNI summary addresses for all local
nodes on network.
Use the addpnni-summary-addr command to create a new summary addresses or to configure an
existing one.
Syntax
dsppnni-summary-addr [node-index]
Syntax Description
node-index
Node index assigned to a PNNI logical node operating on a switching systems.
Range: 1–10
Display Contents
node index
The number of the node within the hierarchy on this switch. The range for a
multi-peer group is 1–10. For a single-peer group, the only node index is 1.
Type
Display the value of the argument -type—whether the kind of PNNI summary
address is internal or external.
In the current release, the value of the -type argument must be “internal.”
The following are the values:
Suppress
•
internal—Includes only addresses that are within the peer group.
•
exterior—Includes addresses that are outside of the peer group.
Display the value of the argument -suppress—whether the node PNNI
summary address is advertised or suppressed.
The following are the values:
State
•
false—Specifies that the PNNI summary address is advertised (is not
suppressed).
•
true—Specifies that the PNNI summary address is not advertised (is
suppressed).
This system-generated ASCII string indicates the advertisement state.
Possible states: advertising, notadvertised, or inactive
Summary address
The ATM PNNI summary address assigned to the network. The default is a
combination of the peer group id appended with the switch MAC address.
prefixlength
The length of the summary address-prefix in number of bits, equal or less than
152 bits. In the current release, the zero-length PNNI summary address is not
supported.
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-374
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsppnni-summary-addr
Related Commands
addpnni-summary-addr, delpnni-summary-addr
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: any
Log: no
Example
Display the PNNI summary address. This example shows only a single peer group.
SES_CH.1.PXM.a > dsppnni-summary-addr
node index: 1
Type..............
internal
Suppress..............
false
State............. advertising
Summary address........47.0091.8100.0000.0030.71f8.1ae7/104
node index: 1
Type..............
internal
Suppress..............
false
State............. advertising
Summary address........47.0091.8100.0002.0030.71f8.1ae7/104
SES_CH.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-375
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsppnni-svcc-rcc
dsppnni-svcc-rcc
Display SVCC-based RCC—PXM1
Use the dsppnni-svcc-rcc command to display the SVCC-RCC connection and packet values.
If you specify:
•
Both node-index and svc-index, the display shows information about an SVCC-based RCC.
•
Only node-index, the display shows all SVC-based RCCs attached to the svc-index node.
Nothing, the display shows all SVC-based RCCs attached to all PNNI nodes in the network.
Syntax
dsppnni-svcc-rcc [node-index [svc-index]]
Syntax Description
node-index
This system-generated indicates the relative position of a logical node within a
hierarchy. For a single-peer group, the only value for node-index is 1.
Range: 1–10
svc-index
PNNI uses the SVC index as a reference to the horizontal link (H-link) between
the levels in a multi-peer group. An SVC serves as the connection for an H-link.
Related Commands
cnfpnni-svcc-rcc-timer, dsppnni-svcc-rcc-timer
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: any
Log: no
Examples
Example 1 :
Without node index
dsppnni-svcc-rcc
node index: 2
svc index: 1
Hello pkt RX........
5539
SVCC VPI............
0
Hello pkt TX........
4440
SVCC VCI............
7156
Hello state............twoWayInside
Remote node id.........24:56:47.aaaaaa2ccb00000000000000.00309409f8b6.00
Remote node ATM addr...47.00918100000000309409f8b6.00309409f8b6.02
node index: 3
svc index: 2
Hello pkt RX........
6168
SVCC VPI............
0
Hello pkt TX........
5440
SVCC VCI............
132
Hello state............twoWayInside
Remote node id.........8:160:47.aaaaaaaaaaaaaaa1a45602a1.00309409f8f5.01
Remote node ATM addr...47.aaaaaaaaaaaaaaa1a45602a1.00309409f8f5.01
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-376
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsppnni-svcc-rcc
Example 2 :
With node index
dsppnni-svcc-rcc 2
node index: 2
svc index: 1
Hello pkt RX........
5539
SVCC VPI............
0
Hello pkt TX........
4440
SVCC VCI............
7156
Hello state............twoWayInside
Remote node id.........24:56:47.aaaaaa2ccb00000000000000.00309409f8b6.00
Remote node ATM addr...47.00918100000000309409f8b6.00309409f8b6.02
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-377
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsppnni-svcc-rcc-timer
dsppnni-svcc-rcc-timer
Display SVCC-based RCC Timer Values—PXM1
Use the dsppnni-svcc-rcc-timer command to display the SVCC-based RCC timer values associated
with a specified local PNNI node or for all local nodes on the same switching system.
Note
The dsppnni-svcc-rcc-timer command displays the SVCC-RCC timer values that are set by the
cnfpnni-svcc-rcc-timer command.
The dsppnni-svcc-rcc-timer command applies to multi-peer groups only.
Syntax
dsppnni-svcc-rcc-timer [node-index]
Syntax Description
node-index
Node index assigned to a PNNI logical node operating on a switching system. If no
Node index is provided, the SVCC RCC timer is displayed at all levels.
Range: 1–10
Display Contents
node-index
The local node identifier within the hierarchy. In the current release, the value of
node-index is 1.
Range: 1–10
Init time
Display the value of -initTime—the interval (in sec) that this node delays
advertising its choice of a preferred SVCC to a neighbor with a numerically lower
ATM address, The interval begins when the SVCC is established.
Range: 1–10
Retry time
Displays the interval (in sec) this node will delay after an apparently necessary and
viable SVCC-based RCC is unexpectedly torn down, before attempting to
reestablish it.
Range: 10–60
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-378
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsppnni-svcc-rcc-timer
Calling party
integrity time
Display the value of callingIntegrityTime, which limits wait times for establishing
an SVCC as a called party. After the node has decided to accept an SVCC as the
called party, the calledIntegrityTime variable specifies the interval (in sec) that
this node will wait for an SVCC to become fully established before giving up and
tearing down the connection.
Range: 5–300
Called party
integrity time
Display the value of calledIntegrityTime, which limits wait times for establishing
an SVCC as a called party. After the node has decided to accept an SVCC as the
called party, the calledIntegrityTime variable specifies the interval (in sec) that
this node will wait for an SVCC to become fully established before giving up and
tearing down the connection.
Range: 10–300
Related Commands
cnfpnni-svcc-rcc-timer
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: any
Log: no
Example
Display the SVCC-based RCC timer for the applicable node index.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dsppnni-svcc-rcc-timer
node index: 1
Init time...........
10
Calling party integrity time...
Called party integrity time....
Retry time..........
35
50
60
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-379
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsppnni-timer
dsppnni-timer
Display PNNI Timer—PXM1
Use the dsppnni-timer command to display the timer values and significant change thresholds on a
specified local PNNI node or for all local nodes on the same switching system.
Syntax
dsppnni-timer [node-index]
Syntax Description
node-index
The node index indicates the relative position of the logical node within a
multi-peer group on the switch. If you do not have the node index, use the
dsppnni-node command to see a list of all logical nodes and node indexes on the
current switch. In the current release, the value of node-index must be 1. If no Node
index is provided, the SVCC RCC timer is displayed at all levels.
Range: 1–10
Display Contents
node index
The relative position of the local node on the switch.
Hello holddown
The initial value for the Hello hold down timer is the time a node waits
to send Hello packets.
Units: 100 ms (1 = 0.1 sec)
PTSE holddown (100ms)
The time the node waits to broadcast PNNI topology statement elements
(PTSEs).
Hello int (sec)
The initial time in millisecond-increments that the node uses to limit the
rate of at which it transmits Hello packets.
Units: 100 ms (1 = 0.1 sec)
PTSE refresh int (sec)
The initial number of seconds allowed for the PTSE to re-originate.
Hello inactivity
factor
The Hello inactivity factor figures in the generation of a time period that
a neighbor is considered alive after the local receives the last Hello
packet from that neighbor. This period is in seconds and is the product of
the hello-inactivity-factor and the peer-neighbor hello-interval.
PTSE lifetime factor
The value for the lifetime multiplier is a percentage. The switch uses it
to generate the initial value for the remaining lifetime of a self-created
PTSE. This remaining lifetime is the product of the PTSE lifetime factor
and the PTSE-refresh-interval.
Retransmit int (sec)
The number of seconds between re-transmissions of unacknowledged
DS, PTSE request, and PTSP.
AvCR proportional PM
The proportional multiplier is a percent that used in the algorithms that
determine significant change for AvCR parameters.
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-380
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsppnni-timer
CDV PM multiplier
The proportional multiplier is a percent that is used in the algorithms that
determine significant change for peak-to-peak cell delay variation
(CDV).
AvCR minimumthreshold
The minimum threshold is a percent that is used in the algorithms that
determine significant change for AvCR parameters.
CTD PM multiplier
This proportional multiplier is a percent that is used in the algorithms that
determine significant change for cell transfer delay (CTD) parameters.
Peer delayed ack int
(100ms)
The minimum interval between transmissions of delayed PTSE
acknowledgment packets.
Units: 100 ms
Logical horizontal link
inactivity time (sec)
The amount of time in seconds that a node will continue to advertise a
horizontal link for which it has not received or processed the LGN
horizontal link IG.
Related Commands
cnfpnni-timer
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: any
Log: no
Example
Display the PNNI timer values and thresholds for node index 1.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dsppnni-timer 1
node index: 1
Hello holddown(100ms)...
10
PTSE holddown(100ms)...
Hello int(sec)..........
15
PTSE refresh int(sec)..
Hello inactivity factor.
5
PTSE lifetime factor...
Retransmit int(sec).....
5
AvCR proportional PM....
50
CDV PM multiplier......
AvCR minimum threshold..
3
CTD PM multiplier......
Peer delayed ack int(100ms)...................
10
Logical horizontal link inactivity time(sec)..
120
10
1800
200
25
50
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-381
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsppnport
dsppnport
Display PNNI Port—PXM1
Use the dsppnport command to show dynamic, operational data rather than just the configuration data
you would see by using the dspport command on the CLI of a service module.
The total number of connections that the dsppnport shows does not include control VCs. The following
are the types of control VCs:
•
Service-specific connection-oriented protocol (SSCOP)
•
PNNI routing control channel (PNNI-RCC)
•
Interim local management interface (ILMI) but only if ILMI is enabled
Syntax
dsppnport <portid>
Syntax Description
portid
Interface number, in the form of [shelf.]slot[:subslot].port[:subport].
Related Commands
addpnport, delpnport, dnpnport, uppnport
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: any
Log: no
Example
The dsppnport display shows a combination of user-configured and dynamic details, as follows:
•
Configuration details such as the type and version of the interface (UNI 3.1, for example), minimum
and maximum VPIs for SPVCs, and minimum and maximum VPIs and VCIs for SVCs.
•
A system-generated logical number that maps to the physical portID. The fields are Logical ID and
Port. The values in this example are 66560 for logical ID and 2.1 for port. Some PNNI commands
require you to provide the logical ID, and dsppnport is one command that can provide it.
•
The following are used for dynamic information:
– Status of the port
– The number of point-to-point and point-to-multipoint connections
– The numbers of configured and active of SPVCs and SVCs
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-382
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsppnport
spirita.1.PXM.a > dsppnport 2.1
Port:
1.4
Logical Id:
66560
IF status:
up
Admin Status:
up
UCSM:
enable
Auto-config:
enable
Addrs-reg:
enable
IF-side:
network
Operational
IF-type:
nni
UniType:
private
version:
pnni10
Input filter:
filter number
Output
filter:
filter number
minSvccVpi:
1
maxSvccVpi:
255
minSvccVci:
32
maxSvccVci:
65535
minSvpcVpi:
1
maxSvpcVpi:
255
#Svcc:
#Svpc:
#SpvcActive:
#SpvcCfg:
#SpvpActive: Total:
p2p :
647
0
0
0
0
647
p2mp:
0
0
0
0
0
0
Total :
647
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-383
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsppnportcac
dsppnportcac
Display PNNI Port CAC—PXM1
Use the dsppnportcac command to view CAC policy parameters for a specified port as configured by
the cnfpnportcac command.
Syntax
dsppnportcac <portid>
Syntax Description
portid
Interface number, in the form of [shelf.]slot[:subslot].port[:subport].
Related Commands
cnfpnportcac
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: any
Log: no
Example
Display the CAC policy parameters for PNNI for port 2.3.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dsppnportcac 2.3
sig:
bookFactor:
100%
maxBw:
100.0000%
minBw:
0.0000%
maxVc:
100%
minVc:
1%
maxVcBw:
0
cbr:
rt-vbr:
nrt-vbr:
ubr:
abr:
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100.0000%
100.0000%
100.0000%
100.0000%
100.0000%
0.0000%
0.0000%
0.0000%
0.0000%
0.0000%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0
0
0
0
0
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-384
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsppnportcc
dsppnportcc
Display PNNI Port Call Control—PXM1
Use the dsppnportcc command to view call control parameters for a specified port as configured by the
cnfpnportcc command.
Syntax
dsppnportcc <portid>
Syntax Description
portid
Interface number, in the form of [shelf.]slot[:subslot].port[:subport].
Related Commands
cnfpnportcc
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: any
Log: no
Example
Display the PNNI port call control parameters for port 2.3.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dsppnportcc 2.3
maxP2mpRoot:
900
maxP2mpLeaf:
2000
svc blocking option:
yes
spvc blocking option:
yes
nonpers blocking option:
yes
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-385
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsppnportidmaps
dsppnportidmaps
Display PNNI Port ID Maps—PXM1
Use the dsppnportidmaps command to display physical port ID to logical port ID mapping.
The dsppnportidmaps command lets you display the mapping of physical port identifiers (portIDs) to
logical port identifiers. The purpose of having logical port IDs is that some command require the logical
port ID.
The following information are displayed:
•
Physical port ID
•
Logical port ID in decimal format
•
Logical port ID in hexadecimal format
•
Operational state of the port
Syntax
dsppnportidmaps
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
None
Attributes
Access level: SUPER_GP
State: any
Log: no
Example
Display the mapping of physical port IDs to the logical IDs on the switch.
Note
The switch has not generated a logical ID for ports 1.4 and 2.3 because the ports are still in
provisioning state.
SES_CH.1.PXM.a > dsppnportidmaps
Port Id
Logical ID (Dec)
1.2
66048
1.4
n/a
2.2
131584
2.3
n/a
5.1
327936
SES_CH.1.PXM.a >
Logical ID (Hex)
OperStatus
10200
n/a
20200
n/a
50100
up
provisioning
down
provisioning
up
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-386
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsppnportloscallrel
dsppnportloscallrel
Display PNNI Port LOS Call Release—PXM1
Use the dsppnportloscallrel command to display the call release on a physical LOS setup on a port.
Syntax
dsppnportloscallrel <portid>
Syntax Description
portid
Interface ID in the form of [shelf.]slot[:subslot].port[:subport].
Related Commands
cnfpnportloscallrel
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: any
Log: no
Example
Confirm that the LOS call release is disabled on port 2.3.
SES_CH.1.PXM.a > dsppnportloscallrel 2.3
Call release on Los :disabled
SES_CH.1.PXM.a >
Example
Enable the release of SVCs/SPVCs after a physical LOS for port 2.3.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > cnfpnportloscallrel 2.3 yes
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Example
Verify the results for port 2.3.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dsppnportloscallrel 2.3
Call release on Los :enabled
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-387
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsppnportncci
dsppnportncci
Display PNNI Port Network Call Correlation Identifier—PXM1
Use the dsppnportncci command to display the configured response to a network call correlation
identifier for a port. For details about this identifier, see the description of cnfpnportncci.
Syntax
dsppnportncci <portid>
Syntax Description
portid
Identifies a PNNI physical port.
Related Commands
cnfpnportncci
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: any
Log: no
Example
Display the current response on port 2.3 to the call correlation identifiers. The output shows the default
of forward.
SES_CH.1.PXM.a > dsppnportncci 2.3
NCCI action: forward
SES_CH.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-388
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsppnportrange
dsppnportrange
Display PNNI Port Range—PXM1
Use the dsppnportrange command to display the ATM VPI/VCI range for a specified port as configured
by the cnfpnportrange command.
Syntax
dsppnportrange <portid>
Syntax Description
portid
Interface ID in the form of [shelf.]slot[:subslot].port[:subport].
Related Commands
cnfpnportrange, dsppnport
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: any
Log: no
Example
Display the ATM VPI/VCI range for port 2.3.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dsppnportrange 2.3
minSvccVpi:
minSvccVci:
minSvpcVpi:
0
35
1
maxSvccVpi:
maxSvccVci:
maxSvpcVpi:
255
65535
255
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-389
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsppnportrsrc
dsppnportrsrc
Display PNNI Port Resource—PXM1
Use the dsppnportrsrc command to display the available bandwidth and channels on the port for all
service classes.
Syntax
dsppnportrsrc <portid>
Syntax Description
portid
Identifies a PNNI physical port. The format is slot:subslot.port:subport.
Related Commands
dsppnports
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: any
Log: no
Example
Display the available resources on port 2.3.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dsppnportrsrc 2.3
cbr:
rt-vbr:
nrt-vbr:
ubr:
abr:
Max TxCR CPS:
0
0
0
0
0
Max RxCR CPS:
0
0
0
0
0
MinGuar TxCR CPS:
0
0
0
0
0
MinGuar RxCR CPS:
0
0
0
0
0
Min Tx CLR:
0
0
0
0
0
Min Rx CLR:
0
0
0
0
0
Avl TxCR CPS:
100000
100000
100000
100000
100000
Avl RxCR CPS:
100000
100000
100000
100000
100000
OvSub AvTx CPS:
100000
100000
100000
100000
100000
OvSub AvRx CPS:
100000
100000
100000
100000
100000
# Avl Tx Chans:
100
100
100
100
100
# Avl Rx Chans:
100
100
100
100
100
Warning: Port Status is down. The resource values may not be valid !!!
sig:
0
0
0
0
0
0
100000
100000
100000
100000
100
100
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-390
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsppnports
dsppnports
Display PNNI Port Status—PXM1
Use the dsppnports command to view status information for all UNI and NNI ports. If neither uni, nni,
or enni is specified, all ports are displayed.
The following display contents are shown:
Note
•
Summary of connections
•
Logical number associated with the PNNI port number (a format that some commands require)
•
Status summary for each port, including the number of connections on each port (excluding control
VCs)
The total number of connections that the display shows does not include control VCs. The types of
control VCs are SSCOP, PNNI-RCC, and ILMI (if ILMI is enabled).
Syntax
dsppnports [uni | nni | enni]
Syntax Description
uni
View status for all UNI ports.
nni
View status for all NNI ports.
enni
View status for all ENNI ports.
The following are the ILMI states:
Disable
Protocol is not enabled on this port.
NotApplicable
This port is not accessible due to hardware-related conditions.
LostConnectivity
Protocol on listening port is not enabled.
EnableNotUp
This port is not accessible due to hardware.
UpAndNormal
This port is physically up, and the protocol is enabled.
Display Contents
This section contains the following:
•
A list identifies all fields in the connection summary part of the display.
•
A simple network description illustrates how an SPVC in a three-node network would appear in the
summary part of the display.
•
A description of the summary for a DAX connection follows the SPVC explanation.
The following are the summary fields:
•
Total point-to-point or point-to-multipoint connections
– Svcc, switched virtual channel connections
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-391
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsppnports
– Svpc, switched virtual path connections
– SpvcD, semi-permanent virtual channel DAX connections
– SpvpD, semi-permanent virtual path DAX connections
– SpvcR, active (routed) semi-permanent virtual circuits
– SpvpR, active (routed) semi-permanent virtual paths
– Total of all the preceding types
•
Configured SPVC endpoints for either point-to-point and point-to-multipoint connections
– Spvc-R-P, active (routed) semi-permanent virtual circuits
– SpvcR-NP, active (routed) nonpersistent paths
– SpvpR-P, active (routed) persistent virtual paths
– SpvpR-NP, active (routed) nonpersistent paths
– SpvcD, semi-permanent virtual channel DAX connections
– SpvpD, semi-permanent virtual path DAX connections
– Totals for the preceding types
•
Active, intermediate endpoints for either point-to-point and point-to-multipoint connections
– Svcc, switched virtual channel connections
– Svpc, switched virtual path connection
– SpvcR, active (routed) semi-permanent virtual circuits
– SpvpR, active (routed) semi-permanent virtual paths
– Totals for the preceding types
For an SPVC example, see Figure 3-5. The SPVC master endpoint is on a UNI on Node 1. The slave
endpoint is on a UNI on Node 3. The SPVC traverses the via node, Node 2. If you enter the dsppnports
command on Node 1, the display gives the following information in the four parts of the summary:
•
Number of connections: SpvcR = 1
•
Number of configured endpoints: SpvcR = 1
•
Number of active intermediate endpoints: SpvcR = 1
•
Total of 1 connection, 2 endpoints (1 configured, 1 active intermediate)
If you enter the dsppnports command on via Node 2, the display gives the following information in the
four parts of the summary:
•
Number of connections: Svcc = 1
•
Number of configured endpoints: 0
•
Number of active intermediate endpoints: Svcc = 2
•
Total of 1 connection, 2 endpoints (2 active intermediate)
Next, a DAX connection has both endpoints on the same switch (the DAX does not appear in Figure 3-5).
The summary information for a DAX connection would appear as follows:
•
Number of connections: SpvcD = 1
•
Number of configured endpoints: SpvcD = 2
•
Number of active intermediate endpoints:0
•
Total of 1 connections, 2 endpoints (2 configured)
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-392
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsppnports
In summary, each active connection has two endpoints.
Figure 3-5 illustrates the SPVC endpoints.
Figure 3-5
SPVC with Endpoints and a Via Node
Via
Master
endpoint
NNI
NNI
NNI
Slave
endpoint
NNI
UNI
Node 1
Node 2
66397
UNI
Node 3
Related Commands
None
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: any
Log: no
Example
Display all PNNI logical ports on the switch.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dsppnports
Summary of total connections
(p2p=point to point,p2mp=point to
Type
#Svcc:
#Svpc:
#SpvcD:
p2p:
0
0
0
p2mp: 0
0
0
multipoint,SpvcD=DAX spvc,SpvcR=Routed spvc)
#SpvpD: #SpvcR: #SpvpR: #Total:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Total=
Summary of total SPVC endpoints
(P=Persistent, NP=Non-Persistent)
Type
#SpvcR-P #SpvcR-NP #SpvpR-P
p2p:
2
0
0
p2mp: 0
0
0
Total=2
0/100000
#SpvpR-NP #SpvcD
0
0
0
0
#SpvpD
0
0
Total
2
0
Summary of total active SVC/SPVC intermediate endpoints
Type
#Svcc
#Svpc
#SpvcR
#SpvpR
Total
p2p:
0
0
0
0
0
p2mp: 0
0
0
0
0
Total=0
EndPoint Grand Total =
2/200000
Type <CR> to continue, Q<CR> to stop:
DSPPNPORTSPer-port status summary
PortId
1.5
LogicalId
66816
IF status
Admin status
ILMI state
#Conns
provisioning
up
NotApplicable
0
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-393
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsppnports
1.6
67072
provisioning
up
NotApplicable
0
2.3
131840
provisioning
up
NotApplicable
0
2.4
132096
up
up
Disable
0
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-394
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsppnportsig
dsppnportsig
Display PNNI Port ATM Signaling—PXM1
Use the dsppnportsig command to display the ATM signaling parameters for a port as configured by the
cnfpnportsig command. The dsppnportsig command also shows the default routing priority for the
ingress connections.
Syntax
dsppnportsig <portid>
Syntax Description
portid
Interface number, in the form of [shelf.]slot[:subslot].port[:subport].
Related Commands
cnfpnportsig
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: any
Log: no
Example
Display the PNNI port ATM signaling parameters for port 2.3.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dsppnportsig 2.3
provisioned IF-type: uni
sigType: private
addrPlan: aesa
VpiVciAllocator: n/a
PassAlongCapab: n/a
sigVpi:
0
rccVpi:
n/a
svc routing priority: 8
version:
side:
uni3.1
network
HopCounterGen:
sigVci:
rccVci:
n/a
5
n/a
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-395
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsppnsysaddr
dsppnsysaddr
Display PNNI Port System Address—PXM1
Use the dsppnsysaddr to view addresses in the System Address Table that contains only static
addresses. If option is specified, it displays only addresses of the specified type.
Note
This command does not belong to the RA module.
Syntax
dsppnsysaddr [ilmi | uni | static | host | all]
Syntax Description
ilmi
Displays all of the ILMI addresses in the peer group.
uni
Displays all of the UNI addresses in the peer group.
static
Displays all of the static addresses in the peer group.
host
Displays all of the host addresses in the peer group.
all
Displays all of the addresses. The all parameter is the default.
Display Contents
ATM Address
(displayed but not
labeled)
Type
Displays the PNNI node ATM address. This is a 20-byte, formatted hexadecimal
string. Like all PNNI addresses, identifiers, and prefixes, this value is portrayed
as a string of hexadecimal “nibbles.” One or several pairs of nibbles entail each
parameter nfield.
Display the type of address that you specified in the command line.
The following are the address types:
Port id
•
ILMI
•
UNI
•
static
•
host
The PNNI logical port identifier.
Range: 1–2147483648
Related Commands
None
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: any
Log: no
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-396
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsppnsysaddr
Example
Display all the addresses for the System Address Table for the peer group.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dsppnsysaddr
47.0091.8100.0000.0030.71f8.13a1.0030.71f8.13a1.01/160
Type:
host
Port id:
131328
Physical Desc: NA
47.0091.8100.0000.0030.71f8.13a1.0030.71f8.13a1.99/160
Type:
host
Port id:
131328
Physical Desc: NA
47.0091.8100.0000.0030.71f8.13a1.0000.0002.0400.00/160
Type:
host
Port id:
131328
Physical Desc: NA
45.0073.1300.0000.1010.1010.1010.0000.0000.0001/152
Type:
uni
Port id:
131840
Physical Desc: 2.3
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Example
Display the host addresses in the peer group only.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dsppnsysaddr host
47.0091.8100.0000.0030.71f8.13a1.0030.71f8.13a1.01/160
Type:
host
Port id:
131328
Physical Desc: NA
47.0091.8100.0000.0030.71f8.13a1.0030.71f8.13a1.99/160
Type:
host
Port id:
131328
Physical Desc: NA
47.0091.8100.0000.0030.71f8.13a1.0000.0002.0400.00/160
Type:
host
Port id:
131328
Physical Desc: NA
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-397
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsppref
dsppref
Display Preferred Route—PXM1
Use the dsppref command to display a specific entry of the preferred route database.
Syntax
dsppref <rte_index> [-name {yes | no}]
Syntax Description
rte_index
Specifies a number between one and the maximum database size that uniquely identifies
the route location in the database.
Range: 1–1000 (unless you include -name yes with command entry)
-name
Indicates how the output is displayed. Enter the following options:
•
yes—Specifies that the preferred route is displays using the name strings that
represents the node names. The default is to display the indices.
•
no—Specifies that the indices are used.
Default: no
Related Commands
addpref, dspprefs, delpref, modpref
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: any
Log: no
Examples
Display a specific preferred route.
espses1.1.PXM.a > dsppref 2
Preferred Route:-----------------Route Index: 2
h1:1/1.1 h2:2/1.2 h3:3/#
espses1.1.PXM.a > dsppref 2 -name yes
Preferred Route:-----------------Route Index: 2
h1:espses1/1.1 h2:pswses2/1.2 h3:espses2/#
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-398
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dspprefs
dspprefs
Display Preferred Routes—PXM1
Use the dspprefs command to display multiple entries of the preferred route database. Multiple entries
are displayed in ascending order of the preferred route id. The dspprefs command lets you list one of
the following:
•
All routes in the preferred routes database
•
The database entries that show the specified node as the destination node (last location in the route)
•
All preferred routes that contain a particular node index (or, optionally, a particular node name)
The dsprefs command has an option to display nodes by name rather than node index. If you want names
and additionally use an option that requires you to specify a node, you must input the node name to see
node names in the resulting display. See Syntax description of the -name option for details.
Syntax
dspprefs [-node persNodeInfo] [-dst persNodeInfo] [-name {yes | no}]
Syntax Description
-node
Displays the entries that contain the specified node. The persNodeInfo index is a string or
an integer.
Default: integer (0)
-dst
Displays the entries that contain the specified node as the last location. The persNodeInfo
index is a string or an integer.
Default: integer (0)
-name
Indicates how the input for the persNodeInfo index is used and how you want to view the
output. Enter one of the following options:
•
yes—Specifies that the -node and -dst keywords are name strings. If yes is chosen, the
preferred routes are displayed using name strings that represent the node names.
•
no—Specifies that the preferred routes are displayed using indices. The indices are the
same as those used as the table indices in the persistent topology database.
Default: no
Related Commands
addpref, delpref
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: any
Log: no
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-399
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dspprefs
Example
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dspprefs -name yes
espses1.1.PXM.a > dspprefs -node 1
Preferred Routes:-----------------Route Index: 1
h1:1/1.1 h2:2/1.1 h3:3/#
Route Index: 2
h1:1/1.1 h2:2/1.2 h3:3/#
espses1.1.PXM.a > dspprefs -node espses1 -name yes
Preferred Routes:-----------------Route Index: 1
h1:espses1/1.1 h2:pswses2/1.1 h3:espses2/#
Route Index: 2
h1:espses1/1.1 h2:pswses2/1.2 h3:espses2/#
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-400
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dspprfhist
dspprfhist
Display Performance History—PXM1
Use the dspprfhist command to show the percentage of task activity. The command applies primarily to
internal Cisco developers.
Syntax
dspprfhist
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
clrerrhist, cmdhistory, dsperrhist
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: any
Log: no
Example
Display the performance history for PXM1.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dspprfhist
CURRENT TIME
00:28:16
Sample #
0
00:27:55(From)-00:28:15(To)
TASK
TaskId
%
--------------------------------------INTERRUPT
0.0000
KERNEL
0.0000
IDLE
99.9500
UNKOWN
0.0000
tNetTask
20
0.0500
Sample #
-1
00:27:35(From)-00:27:55(To)
TASK
TaskId
%
--------------------------------------INTERRUPT
0.0000
KERNEL
0.0000
IDLE
100.0000
UNKOWN
0.0000
Sample #
-2
00:27:15(From)-00:27:35(To)
TASK
TaskId
%
Type <CR> to continue, Q<CR> to stop:
--------------------------------------INTERRUPT
0.0000
KERNEL
0.0000
IDLE
100.0000
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-401
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dspprfhist
UNKOWN
-
0.0000
Sample #
-3
00:26:55(From)-00:27:15(To)
TASK
TaskId
%
--------------------------------------INTERRUPT
0.0000
KERNEL
0.0000
IDLE
100.0000
UNKOWN
0.0000
Sample #
-4
00:26:35(From)-00:26:55(To)
TASK
TaskId
%
--------------------------------------INTERRUPT
0.0000
KERNEL
0.0000
IDLE
100.0000
UNKOWN
0.0000
Type <CR> to continue, Q<CR> to stop:
Sample #
-5
00:26:15(From)-00:26:35(To)
TASK
TaskId
%
--------------------------------------INTERRUPT
0.0500
KERNEL
0.0000
IDLE
99.9500
UNKOWN
0.0000
Sample #
-6
00:25:55(From)-00:26:15(To)
TASK
TaskId
%
--------------------------------------INTERRUPT
0.0000
KERNEL
0.0000
IDLE
99.8000
UNKOWN
0.0000
tQe0Task
14
0.1000
lmiRootTask
45
0.1000
Sample #
-7
00:25:35(From)-00:25:55(To)
Type <CR> to continue, Q<CR> to stop:
TASK
TaskId
%
--------------------------------------INTERRUPT
0.0000
KERNEL
0.0500
IDLE
99.9000
UNKOWN
0.0000
tQe1Task
15
0.0500
Sample #
-8
00:25:15(From)-00:25:35(To)
TASK
TaskId
%
--------------------------------------INTERRUPT
0.0000
KERNEL
0.0000
IDLE
99.9000
UNKOWN
0.0000
tSarDisp
13
0.0500
lmiRootTask
45
0.0500
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-402
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dspprfhist
Sample #
-9
00:24:55(From)-00:25:15(To)
TASK
TaskId
%
--------------------------------------Type <CR> to continue, Q<CR> to stop:
INTERRUPT
0.0000
KERNEL
0.0000
IDLE
100.0000
UNKOWN
0.0000
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-403
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dspprfx
dspprfx
Display ILMI Address Prefixes—PXM1
Use the dspprfx command to view ILMI address prefixes currently configured for a specified port.
Syntax
dspprfx <portid>
Syntax Description
portid
Interface number, in the form of [shelf.]slot[:subslot].port[:subport].
Related Commands
addprfx, delprfx
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: any
Log: no
Example
Display the ILMI address prefix for the applicable port ID.
spirita.1.PXM.a > dspprfx 2.1
ILMI Configured Port Prefix(es):
47.0091.8100.0000.0000.0ca7.9e01
88.8888.8888.0000.0000.0000.0000
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-404
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsppri-routing
dsppri-routing
Display Priority Routing—PXM1
Use the dsppri-routing command to display the number of bandwidth groups, the size of the first
bandwidth group, the increment between successive groups, and the size of the routing event buffer.
Syntax
dsppri-routing
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
addcon, cnfcon, dspcon, dspcons, cnfpnportsig, cnfpri-routing, dsppnportsig, dsppncon, dsppncon
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: any
Log: no
Example
Verify the priority routing results by entering the dsppri-routing command.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dsppri-routing
Priority Routing Configuration
-------------------------------Number of bandwidth groups: 50
Size of first bandwidth group (in cps): 500
Increment between bandwidth groups (in cps): 100
Routing event buffer size (in 0.1-seconds): 10
Node startup routing delay (in 0.1-seconds): 50
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-405
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsppswdreset
dsppswdreset
Display Password Reset—PXM1
Use the dsppswdreset command to see whether the series of keys is enabled that resets the node to the
Cisco default password.
Syntax
dsppswdreset
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
cnfpswdreset
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: active
Log: no
Example
Check the status of the sequence of keys that resets the node password to the Cisco default.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dsppswdreset
Password Reset feature currently enabled
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-406
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsppvcif
dsppvcif
Display PVC Interface—PXM1
Use the dsppvcif command to display details about the PVC interface for IP connectivity. The following
outputs are shown:
•
Interface type on which the PVC connections exists. Possible types are
– ATM (atm0 in the output)
– Ethernet (lnPcio0 in the output)
– SLIP interface (sl0 in the output)
•
Alarms, if any
•
Operational state
•
Flags specified for the PVC support (through the pvcifconfig command)
•
Number of logical connection numbers (LCNs) in the receive and transmit direction
•
Numbers in input and output frames
Syntax
dsppvcif
Related Commands
dspipif, dspipifcache, ipifconfig, pvcifconfig
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: all
Log: no
Example
Display the current ATM interface state.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dsppvcif
SES_SJ
System Rev: 03.00
Feb. 06, 2002 00:51:27 GMT
SES-CNTL
Node Alarm: NONE
IP CONNECTIVITY PVC CACHE
-------------------------------------------------------------------atm (unit number 0):
Feeder VPI.VCI: 3.8
Flags:
(0x38) VCMUX,PVC,FEEDER
State:
(0x1) UP
RxLCN:
722
TxLCN:
32776
LCNindex:
0
Feeder Name:
B8650_SJ
Input Frames:
0
Output Frames:
0
Input Errors:
0
Output Errors:
0
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-407
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dspqosdefault
dspqosdefault
Display Quality of Service Default—PXM1
Use the dspqosdefault command to show whether defaults exist for individual quality of service (QoS)
parameters and the values for any existing defaults.
Syntax
dspqosdefault
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
clrqosdefault, cnfqosdefault
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: any
Log: log
Example
Display the settings for the default QoS values on the switch.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dspqosdefault
Service Category = cbr
MaxCTD =
100
MaxClrClp0 =
10
Qos Default Enable = yes
ppCDV =
1000
MaxClrClp01 =
5
Service Category = rt-vbr
MaxCTD =
Not Provisioned
MaxClrClp0 =
Not Provisioned
Qos Default Enable = no
ppCDV =
Not Provisioned
MaxClrClp01 =
Not Provisioned
Service Category = nrt-vbr
MaxCTD =
Not Provisioned
MaxClrClp0 =
Not Provisioned
Qos Default Enable = no
ppCDV =
Not Provisioned
MaxClrClp01 =
Not Provisioned
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-408
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dspred
dspred
Display Redundancy—PXM1
Use the dspred command to display the current redundant slot links.
Syntax
dspred
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
switchredcd
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: active
Log: no
Example
Display the redundant information.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dspred
SES_SJ
System Rev: 03.00
Feb. 06, 2002 01:06:53 GMT
SES-CNTL
Node Alarm: NONE
Logical
Primary
Secondary
Card
Redundancy
Slot
Slot
Card
Slot
Red
Type
Type
State
State
----- ----- ----------- ---- ------------ ------------ ---------1
1
Active
2
Empty Resvd PXM1
NO REDUN
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-409
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsprevs
dsprevs
Display Revisions—PXM1
Use the dsprevs command to show the current versions of firmware for slots 1 and 2. The optional
parameter lets you see the status of a firmware revision change that is in progress. The following slight
variations exist in the display with and without the optional status parameter:
•
Without a parameter, dsprevs shows the versions of current runtime firmware and boot firmware.
•
With the optional -status parameter (-s), dsprevs shows the current runtime firmware version, the
primary and secondary runtime firmware versions, and the status of the revision change. Usually, a
revision change is an upgrade rather than a downgrade. However, the boot firmware version is not
shown.
The dsprevs command helps you observe the progress of an upgrade. When a revision change is in
progress, the Rev Change Status column shows the command for the active process—loadrev for
example—for the affected slot and whether the process is an upgrade (U) or a downgrade (D). Usually, a
revision change is an upgrade rather than a downgrade. The Rev Change Status column also shows when
the revision command is in progress and subsequently when it is done. Additionally, the dspcds
command output reflects the progress of an upgrade.
The dspcds command shows the status of each card and its slot configuration in the switch. During an
upgrade, the card eventually is reset. In a graceful upgrade, the runrev command resets the command.
In a non-graceful upgrade, the setrev command resets the card.
For information on graceful firmware upgrades, see the loadrev command, runrev command,
commitrev command, and dspversion command.
Note
The dspversion command shows the primary and secondary firmware versions for only the current
slot.
Syntax
dsprevs [-status]
Syntax Description
-status
Causes the display to show the status of a firmware revision change.
Related Commands
runrev, setrev, dspversion, dspcd, dspcds, commitrev, loadrev, abortrev
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: active
Log: no
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-410
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsprevs
Example
Display the current firmware versions for slots 1 and 2.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dsprevs
SES_SJ
SES-CNTL
Physical Logical
Inserted
Slot
Slot
Card
-------- -------------01
02
03
04
05
06
07
01
01
03
04
05
06
07
PXM1_OC3
-------------
System Rev: 03.00
Cur Sw
Revision
-------3.0(0.171)P3
-------------
Feb. 06, 2002 01:14:21 GMT
Node Alarm: NONE
Boot FW
Revision
-------3.0(0.171)P3
-------------
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Example
Display firmware versions and include status of any firmware upgrades.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dsprevs -status
SES_SJ
System Rev: 03.00
Feb. 06, 2002 01:14:29 GMT
SES-CNTL
Node Alarm: NONE
Phy. Log. Cur Sw
Prim Sw
Sec Sw
Rev Chg
Slot Slot Revision
Revision
Revision
Status
---- ---- ---------------------------01
02
03
04
05
06
07
01
01
03
04
05
06
07
3.0(0.171)P3
-------------
3.0(0.171)P3
3.0(0.171)P3
-----------
3.0(0.171)P3
3.0(0.171)P3
-----------
---------------
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-411
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsprrtparm
dsprrtparm
Display Global Reroute Retry Parameters—PXM1
Use the dsprrtparm command to display global reroute retry parameters configured for SPVC for two
types of reroute intervals. The dsprrtparm command shows the current slow interval time and fast
timer base.
Syntax
dsprrtparm
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
cnfrrtparm
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: all
Log: no
Example
Display the current, global reroute parameters for SPVCs. The parameters are the defaults.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dsprrtparm
Global SPVC Retry Parameters:
-------------------------------Slow Retry Interval: 300 sec
Fast Retry Interval Base: 70 (in 100 msec)
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-412
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsprteoptcnf
dsprteoptcnf
Display Route Optimization Configuration—PXM1
Use the dsprteoptcnf command to display the current configuration for route optimization. The
configuration itself originates from the cnfrteopt command.
The following contents are displayed:
•
The node-level threshold for route optimization. It is the percent of reduction in the route cost.
•
Identity of the optimization target by port and VPI/VCI range.
•
Enable status of optimization.
•
Interval between times that optimization begins.
•
Start and stop times for route optimization.
Syntax
dsprteoptcnf <portid>
Syntax Description
portid
If the port ID is not specified, then optimization configuration for all ports is
displayed.
Related Commands
cnfrteopt, cnfrteoptthld, dsprteoptstat, optrte
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: any
Log: no
Example
Display route optimization configuration on all ports.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dsprteoptcnf
Configuration of Route Optimization:
Percentage Reduction Threshold: 30
Port
Enable
VPI/VCI Range
1.5
no
1.6
yes
1/40..10/1000
2.3
no
Interval
Time Range
45
23:00..23:30
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-413
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsprteoptcnf
Example
Display route optimization configuration on port 1.6.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dsprteoptcnf 1.6
Configuration of Route Optimization:
Percentage Reduction Threshold: 30
Port
Enable
VPI/VCI Range
1.6
yes
1/40..10/1000
Interval
45
Time Range
23:00..23:30
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-414
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsprteoptstat
dsprteoptstat
Display Route Optimization Status—PXM1
Use the dsprteoptstat command to display the current percent of route cost reduction. This percent is a
threshold that the PXM1 requires to determine that one route costs sufficiently less to warrant rerouting.
The percent applies to all connections on the node. The system default is 30%, but you can configure a
percent through the cnfrteoptthld command.
Syntax
dsprteoptstat
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
cnfrteopt, cnfrteoptthld, dsprteoptcnf, optrte
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: any
Log: no
Example
Display the route optimization status for the switch.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dsprteoptstat
Route Optimization Status:
Percentage Reduction Threshold: 30
Port
1.6
Status
waiting
VPI/VCI Range
1/40..10/1000
# SPVC
Time Range
Evaluated
23:00..23:30 0
# SPVC
Rerouted
0
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-415
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dspsem
dspsem
Display Semaphore—PXM1
Use the dspsem command to display semaphore information for a specified semaphore.
Syntax
dspsem <semaphore ID> <level>
Syntax Description
semaphore ID
Resource ID.
level
Display the level. Enter 0, 1, or 2.
Related Commands
dspsems
Attributes
Access level: SERVICE_GP
State: all
Log: no
Example
Display information for semaphore 1 and level 1.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dspsem 1 1
SSI_SEMID
: 0x1
Semaphore Id
: 0x8236e880
Semaphore Type
: MUTEX
Task Queuing
: PRIORITY
Pended Tasks
: 0
Owner
: NONE
initState
: 1
recv action
: LOG_ERROR
recv function
: 0x0
number recursive
: 0
SSI_SEMID
Name
Creation Time
Task
0x1 plfm:eventlog
02/05/2002 21:53:19 tRootTask
SSI_SEMID
Name
0x1 plfm:eventlog
SSI_SEMID
Name
0x1 plfm:eventlog
Last Take Task
tLOGD
Taken
180
Location
sysCardInit+936
Location
sysEventMsgLog+272
AveHoldTime
65564 uSec
AveDelayTime
2 uSec
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-416
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dspsems
dspsems
Display Semaphores—PXM1
Use the dspsems command to display information about all semaphores in the network.
Syntax
dspsems
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
dspsem
Attributes
Access level: SERVICE_GP
State: all
Log: no
Example
Display all the semaphores.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dspsems
NAME
TYPE
plfm:eventlog
MUTEX
plfm:errorslot
MUTEX
plfm:watchbool
BINARY
plfm:statistics
BINARY
plfm:pxmMib
BINARY
plfm:novRead
BINARY
plfm:pathinit
BINARY
semChunkLib
MUTEX
SSIDIO_FD_TABLE
MUTEX
MUTEX
MUTEX
MUTEX
BINARY
BINARY
BINARY
BINARY
BINARY
BINARY
BINARY
BINARY
BINARY
BINARY
BINARY
BINARY
BINARY
BINARY
BINARY
BINARY
BINARY
SSI_SEMID
SEM_ID
0x1 0x8236e880
0x2 0x8236e850
0x3 0x8236e820
0x4 0x8236e7f0
0x5 0x8236e7c0
0x6 0x8236e790
0x7 0x8236e760
0x10008 0x823e93f0
0x10009 0x823e9390
0x1000a 0x823e9360
0x1000b 0x823e9330
0x1000c 0x823e9300
0x1000d 0x823e92d0
0x1000e 0x823e92a0
0x1000f 0x823e9270
0x10010 0x823e9240
0x10011 0x823e9210
0x10012 0x823e91e0
0x10013 0x823e91b0
0x10014 0x823e9180
0x10015 0x823e9150
0x10016 0x823e9120
0x10017 0x823e90f0
0x10018 0x823e90c0
0x10019 0x823e9090
0x1001a 0x823e9060
0x1001b 0x823e9030
0x1001c 0x823e9000
0x1001d 0x823e8fd0
LAST_TAKE_TASK
tLOGD
0xffffffff
0xffffffff
0xffffffff
0xffffffff
pnPnni
tRootTask
trapClTask
dbSvrIO
pnConPro
pnConPro
pnConPro
0xffffffff
0xffffffff
0xffffffff
0xffffffff
0xffffffff
0xffffffff
0xffffffff
0xffffffff
0xffffffff
0xffffffff
0xffffffff
0xffffffff
0xffffffff
0xffffffff
0xffffffff
0xffffffff
0xffffffff
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-417
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dspsems
qe0MutexSem
qe1MutexSem
cbc0MutexSem
cbc1MutexSem
sarGlcnPoolSem
sarTxSem
sarTxSem
sarQeDmaDoneSem
sarQeXmtRcvReqS
sarQeDmaDoneSem
sarQeXmtRcvReqS
rpcNBTimer
hlistSem
CTC_CSM_LOCK
semChnk_0x00010
semChnk_0x00010
SYNCRAM_DB_TBL
FNKEY_TBL_SEM
RCHKEY_TBL_SEM
SYNCRAM_SM_LOCK
cntpSem_0000000
VERIFY_MUTEX
BINARY
BINARY
BINARY
BINARY
BINARY
BINARY
BINARY
BINARY
BINARY
BINARY
BINARY
BINARY
BINARY
BINARY
BINARY
BINARY
BINARY
BINARY
BINARY
BINARY
BINARY
BINARY
BINARY
BINARY
BINARY
BINARY
BINARY
BINARY
BINARY
BINARY
BINARY
BINARY
BINARY
MUTEX
MUTEX
BINARY
BINARY
BINARY
BINARY
BINARY
BINARY
BINARY
BINARY
BINARY
BINARY
BINARY
BINARY
BINARY
MUTEX
MUTEX
MUTEX
MUTEX
MUTEX
MUTEX
MUTEX
BINARY
MUTEX
COUNTING
MUTEX
MUTEX
MUTEX
MUTEX
MUTEX
MUTEX
0x1001e
0x1001f
0x10020
0x10021
0x10022
0x10023
0x10024
0x10025
0x10026
0x10027
0x10028
0x10029
0x1002a
0x1002b
0x1002c
0x1002d
0x1002e
0x1002f
0x10030
0x10031
0x10032
0x10033
0x10034
0x10035
0x10036
0x10037
0x10038
0x10039
0x1003a
0x1003b
0x1003c
0x1003d
0x1003e
0x1003f
0x10040
0x10041
0x10042
0x10043
0x10044
0x10045
0x10046
0x10047
0x10048
0x10049
0x1004a
0x1004b
0x1004c
0x1004d
0x1004e
0x1004f
0x10050
0x10051
0x10052
0x10053
0x10054
0x10055
0x10056
0x10057
0x10058
0x10059
0x1005a
0x1005b
0x1005c
0x1005d
0x823e8fa0
0x823e8f70
0x823e8f40
0x823e8f10
0x823e8ee0
0x823e8eb0
0x823e8e80
0x823e8e50
0x823e8e20
0x823e8df0
0x823e8dc0
0x823e8d90
0x823e8d60
0x823e8d30
0x823e8d00
0x823e8cd0
0x823e8ca0
0x823e8c70
0x823e8c40
0x823e8c10
0x823e8be0
0x823e8bb0
0x823e8b80
0x823e8b50
0x823e8b20
0x823e8af0
0x823e8ac0
0x823e8a90
0x823e8a60
0x823e8a30
0x823e8a00
0x823e89d0
0x823e89a0
0x823e8970
0x823e2dd0
0x823e2da0
0x823e2d70
0x823e2d40
0x823e2d10
0x823e2ce0
0x823e2cb0
0x823e2c80
0x8235de90
0x8235de60
0x8235de30
0x8235de00
0x82348450
0x82348420
0x82341d60
0x82329040
0x82329010
0x82328e00
0x82328dd0
0x82328da0
0x82328d70
0x824f4d40
0x82328fe0
0x82328fb0
0x822fb8f0
0x822fb8c0
0x822fb890
0x822fb860
0x822fb830
0x822fb800
0xffffffff
0xffffffff
0xffffffff
0xffffffff
0xffffffff
0xffffffff
0xffffffff
0xffffffff
0xffffffff
0xffffffff
0xffffffff
0xffffffff
0xffffffff
0xffffffff
0xffffffff
0xffffffff
0xffffffff
0xffffffff
0xffffffff
0xffffffff
0xffffffff
0xffffffff
0xffffffff
0xffffffff
0xffffffff
0xffffffff
0xffffffff
0xffffffff
0xffffffff
0xffffffff
0xffffffff
0xffffffff
0xffffffff
0xffffffff
tTnInTsk01
ipconn
tLDRV10ms
tSCM
tSCM
0xffffffff
tQe0Task
tQe1Task
tQe0Task
tQe0Task
tQe1Task
tQe1Task
0xffffffff
0xffffffff
PnProot
ShelfMgr
ShelfMgr
pnRedman
pnRedman
pnRedman
tSyncRamDb
tTnCmdTsk0
dbSvrIO
dbSvrIO
dbSvrIO
0xffffffff
0xffffffff
0xffffffff
0xffffffff
0xffffffff
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-418
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dspsems
MUTEX
MUTEX
MUTEX
MUTEX
MUTEX
MUTEX
MUTEX
MUTEX
MUTEX
MUTEX
MUTEX
MUTEX
MUTEX
MUTEX
MUTEX
MUTEX
MUTEX
MUTEX
MUTEX
MUTEX
MUTEX
MUTEX
MUTEX
MUTEX
MUTEX
MUTEX
MUTEX
MUTEX
MUTEX
MUTEX
MUTEX
MUTEX
MUTEX
MUTEX
MUTEX
MUTEX
MUTEX
MUTEX
MUTEX
MUTEX
MUTEX
MUTEX
MUTEX
dbClntWorkers
MUTEX
fasLocalFdTblSe
MUTEX
DB_SYNC_REQ
COUNTING
DB_SYNC_REQ
BINARY
DB_SYNC_RESP
COUNTING
DB_SYNC_RESP
BINARY
DB_VERF_REQ
COUNTING
DB_VERF_REQ
BINARY
DB_VERF_RESP
COUNTING
DB_VERF_RESP
BINARY
Stat_Upload_SEM
MUTEX
CUTS_CB_semid
BINARY
CUTS_WCB_semid
BINARY
CUTW_FILE_ONE
BINARY
CUTW_FILE_TWO
BINARY
CUTW_FILE_THREE
BINARY
CUTW_FILE_FOUR
BINARY
CUTW_FILE_FIVE
BINARY
MASemaphore
BINARY
IOSemaphore
BINARY
ipconnDb
COUNTING
0x1005e
0x1005f
0x10060
0x10061
0x10062
0x10063
0x10064
0x10065
0x10066
0x10067
0x10068
0x10069
0x1006a
0x1006b
0x1006c
0x1006d
0x1006e
0x1006f
0x10070
0x10071
0x10072
0x10073
0x10074
0x10075
0x10076
0x10077
0x10078
0x10079
0x1007a
0x1007b
0x1007c
0x1007d
0x1007e
0x1007f
0x10080
0x10081
0x10082
0x10083
0x10084
0x10085
0x10086
0x10087
0x10088
0x10089
0x1008a
0x1008b
0x1008c
0x1008d
0x1008e
0x1008f
0x10090
0x10091
0x10092
0x10093
0x10094
0x10095
0x10096
0x10097
0x10098
0x10099
0x1009a
0x1009b
0x1009c
0x1009d
0x822fb7d0
0x822fb7a0
0x822fb770
0x822fb740
0x822fb710
0x822fb6e0
0x822fb6b0
0x822fb680
0x822fb650
0x822fb620
0x822fb5f0
0x822fb5c0
0x822fb590
0x822fb560
0x822fb530
0x822fb500
0x822fb4d0
0x822fb4a0
0x822fb470
0x822fb440
0x822fb410
0x822fb3e0
0x822fb3b0
0x822fb380
0x822fb350
0x822fb320
0x822fb2f0
0x822fb2c0
0x822fb290
0x822fb260
0x822fb230
0x822fb200
0x822fb1d0
0x822fb1a0
0x822fb170
0x822fb140
0x822fb110
0x822fb0e0
0x822fb0b0
0x822fb080
0x822fb050
0x822fb020
0x822faff0
0x822faed0
0x822fadb0
0x822fa9e0
0x822fa9b0
0x822fa950
0x822fa920
0x822fa770
0x822fa740
0x822fa6e0
0x822fa6b0
0x822eaf10
0x822ea9d0
0x822ea9a0
0x822ea970
0x822ea940
0x822ea910
0x822ea8e0
0x822ea8b0
0x822ea700
0x822ea6d0
0x822e9fa0
0xffffffff
dbSvrIO
dbSvrIO
0xffffffff
0xffffffff
0xffffffff
0xffffffff
0xffffffff
0xffffffff
0xffffffff
0xffffffff
0xffffffff
0xffffffff
0xffffffff
0xffffffff
0xffffffff
0xffffffff
0xffffffff
0xffffffff
0xffffffff
0xffffffff
0xffffffff
0xffffffff
0xffffffff
0xffffffff
0xffffffff
0xffffffff
0xffffffff
0xffffffff
0xffffffff
0xffffffff
0xffffffff
0xffffffff
0xffffffff
0xffffffff
0xffffffff
0xffffffff
0xffffffff
0xffffffff
0xffffffff
0xffffffff
0xffffffff
dbSvrVal
0xffffffff
cutSTask
0xffffffff
0xffffffff
0xffffffff
0xffffffff
0xffffffff
0xffffffff
0xffffffff
0xffffffff
StatUpldMg
0xffffffff
cutW3Task
snmpSA
snmpSA
snmpSA
snmpSA
snmpSA
snmpMA
snmpMA
0xffffffff
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-419
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dspsems
ipconnDb
BINARY
ssiThreadSem
BINARY
Rp_mutex
BINARY
SALock
BINARY
SAIoSemaphore
BINARY
DIFMIB_MUTEX
MUTEX
CUT_MIB_semid
BINARY
singleThrMibFun
BINARY
CPI:SEM
BINARY
PnRedMan
COUNTING
PnRedMan
BINARY
cliSyncRamDb
COUNTING
cliSyncRamDb
BINARY
RtmConfSem
BINARY
cliHelpSem
BINARY
cliUserPassword
BINARY
0x1009e
0x1009f
0x100a0
0x100a1
0x100a2
0x100a3
0x100a4
0x100a5
0x100a6
0x100a7
0x100a8
0x100a9
0x100aa
0x100ab
0x100ac
0x100ad
0x822e9f70
0x822e9830
0x822e9400
0x822e9460
0x822e93d0
0x822e91b0
0x822e9150
0x822e90f0
0x822e8e20
0x822e8550
0x822e8520
0x822e7d70
0x822e7d40
0x824f4ab0
0x824f4740
0x824f4690
0xffffffff
0xffffffff
tLDRV10ms
snmpSA
snmpSA
0xffffffff
cutSTask
0xffffffff
tTnCmdTsk0
0xffffffff
0xffffffff
0xffffffff
0xffffffff
trapSrvTas
0x10053
0xffffffff
Free semaphores : 327
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-420
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dspserialif
dspserialif
Display Serial Interface—PXM1
Use the dspserialif command to display the data rate on one of the serial interfaces on the PXM UI-S3
back card. For more information, see the cnfserialif command.
Syntax
dspserialif <port#>
Syntax Description
port#
Indicates the type of port you want to display. Enter the following options:
•
1—Adds a maintenance port.
•
2—Adds a console port.
Related Commands
cnfserialif
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: active
Log: no
Example
Display the console port speed.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dspserialif 2
SerialPortNum
: 2
SerialPortType : console
SerialPortSpeed : 0
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-421
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dspsesn
dspsesn
Display Session—PXM1
Use the dspsesn command to display details about all current user-sessions.
Syntax
dspsesn
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
delsesn
Attributes
Access level: SERVICE_GP
State: all
Log: log
Example
Display the current user-session.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dspsesn
----------------------------------------> Session 0 (console):
Waiting for login...
----------------------------------------*> Session 1 (telnet):
Executing command: dspsesn
user name:
access level:
slot:
slotFallback:
From:
cisco
CISCO_GP
1
1
171.71.29.60
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-422
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dspsig
dspsig
Display Signaling—PXM1
Use the dspsig command to view the current configuration of the signaling timers for a specified port.
Syntax
dspsig <portid>
Syntax Description
portid
Interface number, in the form of [shelf.]slot[:subslot].port[:subport].
Related Commands
cnfsig, dspsigdiag, dspsigstats
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: any
Log: no
Example
Display the signaling timers and crankback maximum for port 2.3.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dspsig 2.3
Signaling Timers for port : 2.3
Timer
----t301
t303
t308
t310
t316
t317
t322
t397
t398
t399
Value(secs)
----------180
4
30
10
90
60
4
180
4
14
Max Crankback:
3
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-423
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dspsigdiag
dspsigdiag
Display Signaling Diagnostic—PXM1
Use the dspsigdiag command to display the configured filter entries and the collection call records for
the ATM signaling diagnostics.
Syntax
dspsigdiag { filter | rec | status } [ index ]
Syntax Description
filter
Displays the information in the filter table.
rec
Displays the call failure records.
status
Displays global diagnostics status.
index
Specifies either option filter or rec. If used with filter, the configuration of the specified
indexed filter entry display. If you do not specify an index, configuration of all filter
entries are displayed. If this field is used with rec, all of the records filtered for the
specified indexed filter entry are displayed.
Related Commands
cnfsig, dspsig, dspsigstats
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: any
Log: no
Example
Display the filter sets.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dspsigdiag filter
An Index of 0 will be treated as a request for all filters
Dspsigdiag option : 1
Index : 0
message ID : 301
message Length : 1704
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-424
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dspsigstats
dspsigstats
Display Signaling Statistics—PXM1
Use the dspsigstats command to view signaling statistics associated with a specified port. When no port
is specified, signaling statistics for all ports are displayed.
Syntax
dspsigstats <portid>
Syntax Description
portid
Interface number, in the form of [shelf.]slot[:subslot].port[:subport].
Related Commands
cnfsig, dspsig, dspsigdiag
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: any
Log: no
Example
Display the signaling statistics for the applicable port ID.
spirita.1.PXM.a > dspsigstats 2.1
Signaling Statistics for 2.1
Message
Rcv
Xmt
Call Proceeding
0
0
Connect
0
0
Connect Ack
0
0
Setup
0
0
Release
0
0
Release Complete 0
0
Add Party
0
0
Add Party Ack
0
0
Add Party Rej
0
0
Drop Party
0
0
Drop Party Ack
0
0
Drop Party Rej
0
0
Restart
0
0
Restart Ack
0
0
Status
0
0
Status Enquiry
0
0
Last Cause/Diag
Cause
Diagnostic
16
XX XX XX XX
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-425
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dspsnmp
dspsnmp
Display SNMP—PXM1
Use the dspsnmp command to display the SNMP strings.
Syntax
dspsnmp
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
cnfsnmp
Attributes
Access level: SUPER_GP
State: active
Log: no
Example
Display the SNMP strings.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dspsnmp
SES_SJ
SES-CNTL
Community (rw):
Community (ro):
System Location:
System Contact:
System Rev: 03.00
Jan. 31, 2002 23:13:45 GMT
Node Alarm: NONE
toplevel
public
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-426
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dspsntp
dspsntp
Display SNTP—PXM1
Use the dspsntp command to display the client requests for the SNTP or NTP server.
The following are the display contents:
•
Client—displays the status of the client (yes or no)
•
Server—displays the status of the server (yes or no)
•
Polling—displays the current polling timer configuration
•
Waiting timer—displays the current waiting timer configuration
•
Stratum (default)—displays the default stratum configuration for server
•
Stratum (current)—displays the current stratum level for SNTP server
Syntax
dspsntp
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
clrsntpstats, cnfsntp, dbgsntp, deltrapmgr, dspsntpstats
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: any
Log: no
Example
Verify the settings for SNTP client requests.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dspsntp
client: no
server: no
polling: 64
waiting: 5
rollback: 1024
stratum(default): 0
stratum(current): 0
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-427
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dspsntpstats
dspsntpstats
Display SNTP Statistics—PXM1
Use the dspsntpstats command to display the SNTP statistics information.
Syntax
dspsntpstats
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
clrsntpstats, cnfsntp, dbgsntp, dspsntp
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: any
Log: no
Example
Verify the results by entering the dspsntpstats command.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dspsntpstats
Statistic Counters For SNTP
----------------------------Receive server mode packets from servers in list: 0
Receive server mode packets from servers not in list: 0
Receive server mode packets which fail sanity check: 0
Receive server mode packets which pass sanity check: 0
Receive client mode packets: 1728
Receive other mode packets: 0
Send server mode packets: 0
Send client mode packets: 0
Polling Timer Expire Counter: 0
Polling Wait Timer Expire Counter: 0
Rollback Timer Expire Counter: 0
Rollback Wait Timer Expire Counter: 0
Switch From Primary To Secondary Counter: 0
Switch From Secondary To Primary Counter: 0
Switch From Secondary To Secondary Counter: 0
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-428
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dspspvcaddr
dspspvcaddr
Display SPVC Address—PXM1
Use the dspspvcaddr command to display the ATM end station addresses (AESAs) associated with the
PNNI physical port address for SPVCs.
Syntax
dspspvcaddr [port_id]
Syntax Description
port_id
If you do not specify a port ID, the output lists all port IDs and associated AESAs. The
portid identifies a PNNI physical port. The format is slot:subslot.port:subport.
Related Commands
dspspvcprfx
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: any
Log: no
Example
Display all SPVC addresses.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dspspvcaddr
Interface Id
-----------2.4
Soft VC Address(es)
------------------47.0091.8100.0000.0030.71f8.13a1.0000.0002.0400.00
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-429
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dspspvcprfx
dspspvcprfx
Display SPVC Prefix—PXM1
Use the dspspvcprfx command to display the SPVC node prefix for the switch-level SPVC address. The
switch comes with a default SPVC prefix, and you can modify the prefix by entering the cnfspvcprfx
command.
Syntax
dspspvcprfx
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
cnfspvcprfx, dspspvcaddr
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: any
Log: no
Example
Display the SPVC node prefix output.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dspspvcprfx
SPVC Node Prefix: 47.009181000000003071f813a1
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-430
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dspsscop
dspsscop
Display Port SSCOP—PXM1
Use the dspsscop command to view SSCOP details for a specified port. The dspsscop command displays
information about the state of the link on the port, status inquiry and response timers, and statistics.
Syntax
dspsscop <portid>
Syntax Description
portid
Interface number, in the form of [shelf.]slot[:subslot].port[:subport].
Related Commands
clrsscopstats, cnfsscop, disablesscop, dspsscopstats
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: any
Log: no
Example
Display the port SSCOP details for port 2.3.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dspsscop 2.3
SSCOP details for interface: 2.3
Current State = enabled, Current Link State = Unknown State ,
SSCOP version = Invalid
Send Sequence Number: Current = 0, Maximum = 0
Send Sequence Number Acked = 0
Rcv Sequence Number: Lower Edge = 0, Upper Edge = 0, Max = 0
Poll Sequence Number = 0, Poll Ack Sequence Number = 0
Vt(Pd) = 0
Vt(Sq) = 0
Timer_IDLE = 10 - Inactive
Timer_CC = 1 - Inactive
Timer_POLL = 1 - Inactive
Timer_KEEPALIVE = 5 - Inactive
Timer_NO-RESPONSE = 30 - Inactive
Timer_T309 = 10 - Inactive
Max CC = 10
Send Window = 30
Recv Window = 30
Current Retry Count = 0, Maximum Retry Count = 0
AckQ count = 0, RcvQ count = 0, TxQ count = 0
AckQ HWM = 0, RcvQ HWM = 0, TxQ HWM = 0
Type <CR> to continue, Q<CR> to stop:
Statistics Pdu's Sent = 0, Pdu's Received = 0, Pdu's Ignored = 0
Begin = 0/0, Begin Ack = 0/0, Begin Reject = 0/0
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-431
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dspsscop
End = 0/0, End Ack = 0/0
Resync = 0/0, Resync Ack = 0/0
Sequenced Data = 0/0, Sequenced Poll Data = 0/0
Poll = 0/0, Stat = 0/0, Unsolicited Stat = 0/0
Unassured Data = 0/0, Mgmt Data = 0/0, Unknown Pdu's = 0
Lack of credit = 0
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-432
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dspsscopstats
dspsscopstats
Display Port SSCOP Statistics—PXM1
Use the dspsscopstats command to view SSCOP statistics for a port for both Tx and Rx directions.
Syntax
dspsscopstats <portid>
Syntax Description
portid
Interface number, in the form of [shelf.]slot[:subslot].port[:subport].
Related Commands
clrsscopstats, disablesscop, dspsscop
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: any
Log: no
Example
Display the SSCOP statistics for the applicable port ID.
spirita.1.PXM.a > dspsscopstats 1.2
Statistics -;
SSCOP statistics for interface:
1.1
Pdu’s Sent = 100, Pdu’s Received = 70, Pdu’s Ignored = 3,
Begin = 11/11, Begin Ack = 10/10, Begin Reject = 1/1”,
End = 10/10, End Ack = 10/10”,
Resync = 1/1, Resync Ack = 1/1”,
Sequenced Data = 10/10, Sequenced Poll Data = 1/1”,
Poll = 30/30, Stat = 30/30, Unsolicited Stat = 1/1”,
Unassured Data = 0/0, Mgmt Data = 0/0, Unknown Pdu’s = 0,
Error Recovery/Ack = 0/0, lack of credit 0
spirita.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-433
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dspstatsmgr
dspstatsmgr
Display Statistics Manager—PXM1
Use the dspstatsmgr command to display the IP addresses to which statistics collection trap
notifications will be sent upon creation of the statistics file.
Syntax
dspstatsmgr
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
None
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: active
Log: no log
Example
View the statistics manager with the corresponding IP address.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dspstatsmgr
Statistics Manager
IP Address
--------------------------Primary
172.29.4.50
Secondary
0.0.0.0
Tertiary
0.0.0.0
Statistics Master
0.0.0.0
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-434
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dspsvcparm
dspsvcparm
Display SVC Parameters—PXM1
Use the dspsvcparm command to display global SVC parameters for the node.
Syntax
dspsvcparm
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
cnfe164 justify
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: any
Log: no
Example
Display the global SVC parameters.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dspsvcparm
Global SVC parameters
============================
E164 Adress Conversion Justification :left
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-435
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dspsvcoverride
dspsvcoverride
Display SVC Override—PXM1
Use the dspsvcoverride command to display the current nodal SVC override configuration.
Syntax
dspsvcoverride
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
clrspvcnonpers, cnfpnportcc, cnfsvcoverride, cnftrftolerance, dsppnportcc, dsptrftolerance
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: any
Log: no
Example
Verify that the spvcoverridesvc parameter is enabled.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dspsvcoverride
spvcoverridesvc:
Enabled
spvcoverridesvp:
Disabled
spvpoverridesvp:
Disabled
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-436
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dspswalms
dspswalms
Display Switch Alarms—PXM1
Use the dspswalms command to display alarms for circuits on the PXM. The dspswalms command
helps you isolate the cause of switch fabric alarms. The display shows whether the alarm severity is
critical, major, or minor. It also lists information by slot and by alarm type.
For alarm severity definitions, see the description for the dspcdalms command.
Syntax
dspswalms
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
dspenvalms, dspndalms
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: active
Log: no
Example
Display the node switching alarm summary.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dspswalms
Node Switching Alarm Summary
Alarm Type
---------Crossbar Fabric
Alarm Type
---------Card Crossbar
Humvee Alarm
Slot
----
Critical
-------0
Major
------0
Minor
------0
Critical
-------0
0
Major
------0
0
Minor
------0
0
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-437
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsptrapip
dsptrapip
Display Trap IP—PXM1
Use the dsptrapip command to display the switch trap IP address.
Note
The switch must have a trap IP assigned by the cnftrapip command.
Syntax
dsptrapip
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
addtrapmgr, cnftrapip, deltrapmgr, dsptrapmgr
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: active
Log: no
Example
Set the IP address 172.29.4.50 to the switch.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > cnftrapip 172.29.4.50
IP Address set successfully
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Example
Verify the trap IP address by entering the dsptrapip command.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dsptrapip
Trap IP Address :172.29.4.50
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-438
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsptrapmgr
dsptrapmgr
Display Trap Manager—PXM1
Use the dsptrapmgr command to display all the details about a trap manager or all existing trap
managers. The following outputs are for the dsptrapmgr command:
•
IP address of each trap manager
•
Port number on the connected work station
•
Row status
•
Read trap flag stats
•
Next trap sequence number
Of these elements, the IP address and port number result from the addtrapmgr command.
Syntax
dsptrapmgr
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
addtrapmgr, deltrapmgr
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: active
Log: no
Example
Display the summary about all the trap managers.
spirit11.1.1.PXM.a > dsptrapmgr
node19.8.PXM.a > dsptrapmgr
ipAddress
PortNum RowStatus
--------------- ------- ---------171.71.55.21
2500
Add
172.29.65.87
2500
Add
172.71.59.21
2500
Add
LastTrapSeqNum:
NumOfValidEntries:
ReadTrapFlag
-----------Off
Off
Off
NextTrapSeqNum
-------------0
348
0
385
3
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-439
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dsptrftolerance
dsptrftolerance
Display Traffic Conformance Tolerance—PXM1
Use the dsptrftolerance command to display the traffic conformance tolerance factor.
Syntax
dsptrftolerance
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
clrspvcnonpers, cnfpnportcc, cnfsvcoverride, cnftrftolerance, dsppnportcc
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: any
Log: no
Example
Verify the configured tolerance factor.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dsptrftolerance
Trf Tolerance for SPVCs: 1
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-440
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dspusers
dspusers
Display Users—PXM1
Use the dspusers command to display all the current users and their access levels if the keyword -u is
not given. If the key word -u is specified, it displays the user ID and access level of that user only.
Syntax
dspusers [-u -userid]
Syntax Description
-u
Displays the keyword for the user (userid). Principle string length of 1–12.
Related Commands
bootChange, cnfuser, deluser, users
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: any
Log: no
Example
Display the access levels for all the configured user IDs.
wilco.1.1.PXM.a > dspusers
UserId
AccessLevel
------------------------cisco
CISCO_GP
service
SERVICE_GP
superuser
SUPER_GP
raoul
GROUP3
duke
GROUP1
wilco.1.1.PXM.a >
Example
Show the access level for a specified user. The user ID is me.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dspusers -u me
UserId
AccessLevel
------------------------me
GROUP1
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-441
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
dspversion
dspversion
Display Version Information—PXM1
Use the dspversion command to show details for the versions of boot and runtime firmware residing on
a card. Typically, you can use the dspversion command in conjunction with the commands for changing
the card firmware version. You can use dspversion to see if a particular firmware version is currently
running.
The dspversion command shows the firmware version number rather than the firmware filename.
The C:\FW directory on the hard drive contains firmware files of possibly many revisions. Each firmware
file has the .fw file extension. The following is the format of a firmware filename:
cardtype_version-element[_platform].fw
Syntax
dspversion
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
abortrev, commitrev, dspcd, loadrev, runrev, setrev
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: all
Log: no
Example
Display the firmware version for PXM1.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dspversion
Image Type
---------Runtime
Boot
Shelf Type
---------MGX
MGX
Card Type
Version
Built On
-------------------------------PXM1
3.0(0.171)P3
Jan 22 2002, 12:06:59
PXM1
3.0(0.171)P3
-
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-442
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
exit
exit
Exit—PXM1
Use the exit command to exit the current user session and log out. To start another session, you must log
in by using Telnet
Syntax
exit
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
bye, logout
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: all
Log: log
Example
Exit from the current user session.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > exit
(session ended)
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-443
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
forcecdnative
forcecdnative
Force Card Native—PXM45, PXM1E
The forcecdnative command is used to recover from a PXM failure because of non-nativity issues. This
command forces the PXM to ignore nativity and rebuild from the configuration on the disk Running the
forcecdnative command causes the PXM to reset, so you are prompted to confirm the operation before
it actually runs.
Note
This command is available only on a card that is in the failed state.
Syntax
forcecdnative
Syntax Description
This command takes no parameters.
Related Commands
none
Attributes
Log: no
State: active, standby, init
Privilege: SERVICE_GP
Example
Force the card to recover its native configuration from the hard drive. (If the PXM was not in the failed
state, the following error message would appear: “ERR: This command is applicable only in FAILED
state.”)
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > forcecdnative
This command will cause the system to reset and bring up the shelf
with the configuration on the hard disk.
Please confirm now!
forcecdnative: Do you want to proceed (Yes/No)?
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-444
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
help
help
Help—PXM1
Use the help command to view commands associated with the current card. The help command is
case-sensitive.
The following are the functions of the help command:
•
With no parameter string, it lists all commands on the card.
•
With part of a command name, it lists all commands that contain that string.
•
With the entire command name, the output shows only whether the command is available.
Syntax
Help
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
None
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: all
Log: no
Example
View all the commands.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > help
Available commands
-----------------?
abortofflinediag
abortrev
addaddr
addapsln
addchan
addfltset
addlmiloop
addmaster
addpnni-node
addpnni-summary-addr
addpnport
addprfx
addred
addserialif
addslave
addtrapmgr
adduser
Type <CR> to continue, Q<CR> to stop:
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-445
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
history
history
Command History—PXM1
Use the history command to display the last ten commands entered on the current card. To repeat a
command with its parameters, type an exclamation mark followed by the associated number and no
spaces.
Syntax
history
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
cmdhistory
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: all
Log: no
Example
Display the last entered commands.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > history
Size of cmdHistory is currently 10 line(s)
1 timeout 600
2 help
3 Q
4 history
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-446
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
ifShow
ifShow
Interface Show—PXM1
Use the ifShow command to view the contents of all the currently configured interfaces.
Syntax
ifShow
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
None
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: all
Log: no
Example
View the contents for the current interfaces.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > ifshow
lnPci (unit number 0):
Flags: (0x63) UP BROADCAST ARP RUNNING
Type: ETHERNET_CSMACD
Internet address: 172.29.52.131
Broadcast address: 172.29.255.255
Netmask 0xffff0000 Subnetmask 0xffffff00
Ethernet address is 00:30:71:f8:13:a1
Metric is 0
Maximum Transfer Unit size is 1500
3863 packets received; 5048 packets sent
347 multicast packets received
1 multicast packets sent
0 input errors; 0 output errors
0 collisions; 0 dropped
lo (unit number 0):
Flags: (0x8069) UP LOOPBACK MULTICAST ARP RUNNING
Type: SOFTWARE_LOOPBACK
Internet address: 127.0.0.1
Netmask 0xff000000 Subnetmask 0xff000000
Metric is 0
Maximum Transfer Unit size is 32768
0 packets received; 0 packets sent
0 multicast packets received
0 multicast packets sent
0 input errors; 0 output errors
0 collisions; 0 dropped
atm (unit number 0):
Flags: (0xc61) UP ARP RUNNING
Type: UNDEFINED
Internet address: 10.10.11.131
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-447
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
ifShow
Netmask 0xff000000 Subnetmask 0xffffff00
Ethernet address is 00:00:00:00:00:00
Metric is 0
Maximum Transfer Unit size is 1500
0 packets received; 0 packets sent
0 multicast packets received
0 multicast packets sent
0 input errors; 0 output errors
0 collisions; 0 dropped
sl (unit number 0):
Flags: (0x8071) UP POINT-TO-POINT MULTICAST ARP RUNNING
Type: SLIP
Internet address: 127.0.0.2
Destination Internet address: 127.0.0.3
Netmask 0xff000000 Subnetmask 0xff000000
Metric is 0
Maximum Transfer Unit size is 576
0 packets received; 0 packets sent
0 multicast packets received
0 multicast packets sent
0 input errors; 0 output errors
0 collisions; 0 dropped
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-448
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
ipifconfig
ipifconfig
IP Interface Configuration—PXM1
Use the ipifconfig command to set IP address information for a specified IP interface on the PXM.
Typically, the Cisco WAN Manager application running on a local or remote work station uses this
connection to control the switch.
Note
The ipifconfig command and related commands have no bearing on the console port for an ASCII
terminal that is co-located with the node.
For details on the hardware connections and initial start-up through the console port, refer to the Cisco
SES PNNI Controller Software Configuration Guide, Release 3.
The following are the functions for the ipifconfig command:
•
Type of logical interface—ATM, Ethernet, or SLIP
•
IP address for the interface
•
Broadcast address for Ethernet
•
Restriction of connections to be either SVCs or PVCs
•
Support at the interface level for ARP
•
Interface type that serves as the default when the switch powers up
•
Operational state of the interface—up or down
Syntax
ipifconfig <interface>[ <ip_address> ] [ netmask <mask> ] [ broadcast <broad_addr> ]
[ dest <peer_ip_address> ] [ up | down ] [arp | noarp][svc | nosvc] [pvc | nopvc] [ default | nodefault]
[clrstats]
Syntax Description
interface
Identifies the name for the type of interface. The type of interface affects the
applicability of other ipifconfig parameters.
The following choices are for the interface:
ip_address
•
lnPci0 for Ethernet (the default on power-up)
•
atm0 for the ATM
•
sl0 for SLIP
(Optional if already configured, mandatory if not) ip_address is a 32-bit IP
address in dotted decimal format. This parameter is mandatory when you
first configure a particular interface type, for example, lnPci0. If you
subsequently modify one or more optional interface parameters, you can
omit this IP address because the interface name (interface, above) is
sufficient to get the address.
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-449
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
ipifconfig
netmask
(Optional) Specifies the network mask value for the interface. Netmask is
decided by the type of IP address entered and is in 32-bit dotted decimal
format.
Note
The mask value can be identical to the netmask value. When set to
different values, netmask becomes a sub_netmask by default. Do not
set netmask unless you want to build a complicated SNMP network
by using a subnet.
broadcast
(Optional) Specifies the broadcast address for the interface. This applies
only to Ethernet.
up | down
(Optional) Sets interface status as either active (up) or not active (down).
Default: up
arp | noarp
(Optional) Enables or disables ARP for all connections on the interface.
Enter the keyword arp or noarp in its entirety.
Note
Note that disabling ARP for Ethernet is a very unlikely choice.
If you disable ARP, the system subsequently prevents you from specifying
ARP for an individual SVC or PVC. If you need to disable ARP for a
connection because a particular interface or device does not support ARP,
disable it though svcifconfig or pvcifconfig.
Default: enabled if the interface supports ARP
svc | nosvc
(Optional) Specifies whether SVC support is enabled on the interface. The
choice applies to all connections on the interface. Specific contexts provide
a reason to disable SVCs on the interface.
Default: enabled if the interface supports SVC and is the most common
application
pvc | nopvc
Optional) Specifies whether PVC support is enabled. The application of
PVC support is for a device in the network management path that provides
IP connectivity but does not support SVCs. With PVC support enabled, you
subsequently set up a PVC to that device by entering pvcifconfig. If PVC
support is not enabled, pvcifconfig fails.
If you change this value, type the word pvc or nopvc in its entirety.
Default: enabled (pvc)
default | nodefault
(Optional) Specifies whether to use this interface as the default interface.
The default interface is Ethernet for the first time the switch powers up. You
can change the default by entering the default or nodefault keyword.
For example, if you currently are specifying an ATM interface (atm0) on the
control port, you can make it the default (upon subsequent node reset) by
entering the keyword default.
clrstats
Clears all interfaces and connection statistics for the specified interface type.
The statistics pertain to incoming and outgoing packets, errored packets, and
so forth.
Related Commands
dspipif
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-450
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
ipifconfig
Attributes
Access level: SUPER_GP
State: active
Log: no
Example
Set the IP address information for a specified IP interface on the PXM.
spirita.1.PXM.a > ipifconfig atm0 10.1.2.95
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-451
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
loadrev
loadrev
Load Revisions—PXM1
Use the loadrev command to download a firmware image from the C:\FW directory on the disk to flash
memory on the targeted card. Running loadrev is the first step in a graceful firmware upgrade. A
graceful revision change preserves the configuration of the card and minimizes any data loss that can
result from the brief disruption in service.
Syntax
loadrev <slot> <revision>
Syntax Description
slot
Specifies the number of the targeted card slot.
revision
Revision number. For example, 3.0(0.171)P3.
Related Commands
abortrev, dsprevs, runrev, setrev
Attributes
Access level: SERVICE_GP
State: active
Log: log
Example
Load version 3.0(0.171) for slot 1.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > loadrev 1 3.0(0.171)
one or more card(s) in the logical slot may be reset.
loadrev: Do you want to proceed (Yes/No)? n
(command not executed)
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-452
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
logout
logout
Logout—PXM1
Use the logout command to end the current user session.
Syntax
logout
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
bye, exit
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: all
Log: log
Example
Log out of the current CLI shell.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > logout
(session ended)
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-453
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
ls
ls
List—PXM1
Use the ls command to list the contents of the working directory. The filename is listed for each entry.
The total space of the file system and free space is also summarized at the end of the output.
Syntax
ls
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
cd, copy, rename
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: all
Log: no
Example
List all the files at the highest level of the disk.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > ls
SM
FW
DIAG
STATS
TMP
CNF
RPM
SCT
LOG
SHMDB
version
CUT
HELP
enable.stats.01
enable.stats.02
In the file system :
total space : 818961 K bytes
free space : 778284 K bytes
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-454
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
memShow
memShow
Memory Map Show—PXM1
Use the memShow command to view the current memory map.
Syntax
memShow
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
None
Attributes
Access level: SERVICE_GP
State: all
Log: no
Example
View the current memory map.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > memshow
status
bytes
blocks
avg block max block
------ --------- -------- ---------- ---------current
free 14735744
8
1841968 14726704
alloc
3184176
893
3565
cumulative
alloc
4785680
5348
894
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-455
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
modpref
modpref
Modify Preferred Route—PXM1
Use the modpref command to modify an existing preferred route in the nodal database. The specified
route ID must already exist. While modifying the existing route, some existing hops, for example,
persNodeIdx/portID pair, can be modified or some new hops can be appended.
Syntax
modpref <rteId> [-name yes/no] [-h1 {<persNodeIndex>/<portId>}]
[-h2 {<persNodeIndex/<portId>}] ... [-h20 {<persNodeIndex>/<portId>}]
Syntax Description
rteId
Specifies a number between one and the maximum database size that uniquely identifies the
route location in the database.
Range: 1–000
-name
Specifies the nodes by names. Enter either yes or no. If no, indices are used.
Default: no
-h1,
-h2, ...
-h20
Each -hn parameter refers to a node in the preferred route, in which there can up to 20 nodes.
Each node is expressed as a persNodeIndex and portId pair. -h1 refers to the first pair for
the first node, -h2 refers to the pair for the second node, and so on, up -h20 which refers to
the 20th node. If the -name yes option is selected, persNodeIndex stands for a name string.
If -name no is selected or -name keyword is not specified then the persNodeIndex refers
to an index called “table index.” This index is derived from the persistent topology database.
This database can be displayed entering dsptopondlist command.
Related Commands
addpref, delpref, dsppref, dspprefs
Attributes
Access level: GROUP1
State: active
Log: log
Example
Add the following two hops to the above route and display the modified route:
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > modpref 2 -h5 26/1:1.1:1 -h6 33/#
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dsppref 2
Route Locations
ID = 2
h1: 112/1:2.1:9,
h2: 34/1:1.1:3,
h3: 56/1:2.1.7,
h4: 23/1:1.2:1,
h5: 26/1:1.1:1,
h6: 33/#
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-456
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
modpref
Example
Modify two hops in preferred route 2. In this case, hop 1 and hop 3 are the targets. First display the
members of route 2 by entering the dsppref command.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dsppref 2
Route Locations
ID = 2
h1: 112/1:2.1:9,
h2: 34/1:1.1:3,
h3: 56/1:2.1.7,
h4: 23/1:1.2:1
Change hop 1 and route 3 in route 2, as follows:
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > modpref 2 -h1 126/1:1.1:1 -h3 33/1:2.2:2
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-457
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
optrte
optrte
Optimize Route—PXM1
Use the optrte command to Force immediate optimization of either a single SPVC route, a range of
SPVCs, or all SPVCs on a particular port. (Connection grooming is a common word for optimization.)
Rerouting depends on a reduction in the cost of the route. If the PXM45 can find a route with sufficiently
lower cost, the SPVC is de-routed then re-routed. The system default is a 30% reduction in the cost but
is configurable through the cnfrteoptthld command. For a detailed explanation of route optimization, see
the description of cnfrteopt command.
Syntax
optrte <portid> [-vpi <vpi>][-vci <vci>][-range <starting-vpi/vci..ending-vpi/vci>]
Syntax Description
portid
Specifies the port ID of a port for which route optimization is set.
-vpi
Specifies the VPI of a soft PVC.
Range: 0–4095
Default: 0
-vci
Specifies the VCI of a soft PVC. If no VCI is specified, then an SPVP connection is
requested. This parameter can be used only if VPI is specified.
Range: 32–65535
Default: 32
-range
Specifies the range of connections for grooming. The VPI of the starting SPVC must be
less than the ending VPI, and the starting VCI must be less than the ending VCI.
Use the notation as it appears on the syntax line: enter a slash between the VPI and VCI
and two dots with no spaces between the starting and ending values. For example,
100/1000..200/10000 is a valid entry.
The following are the ranges:
•
VPI: 0–4095
•
VCI: 32–65535
In the variable parameter starting-vpi/vci..ending-vpi/vci, the starting and ending VPIs
are independent of the starting and ending VCIs. For example, -range 3/40..5/50 means
to optimize all SPVCs that have a VPI in the range 3–5 and a VCI in the range 40–50.
The sample range can include 3/40, 3/45, 4/45, 5/45 and 5/50 but not 4/60.
Note
The default for -range is all connections on the PNNI port specified by portid.
Therefore, to groom all connections on the port, leave out the -range parameter.
Note
If no VPI/VCI or range is specified, optimization is set for all active SPVCs on the port.
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-458
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
optrte
Related Commands
cnfrteopt, cnfrteoptthld, dsprteoptcnf, dsprteoptstat
Attributes
Access level: GROUP1
State: active
Log: log
Example
Kick off route optimization on all SPVCs on port 2.3.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > optrte 2.3
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Example
Kick off route optimization on a specific SPVC.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > optrte 2.3 -vpi 1 -vci 100
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Example
Kick off route optimization on a range of specific SPVCs.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > optrte 2.3 -range 1/100..10/1000
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-459
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
pathtraceie
pathtraceie
Path Trace IE—PXM1
Use the pathtraceie command to remove or insert path trace information element (IE) at port level.
Syntax
pathtraceie <portid> {rmv | ins}
Syntax Description
portid
Port identifier for the call.
rmv
Enables the removal of trace transit list IE at the port.
ins
Enables the insertion of trace transit list IE at the port. The ins parameter is the default.
Related Commands
dsppathtraceie, pathtracenode, pathtraceport
Attributes
Access level: SUPER_GP
State: active
Log: log
Example
Insert the trace transit list IE for port 2.3.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > pathtraceie 2.3 ins
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Example
Verify the results by entering the dsppathtraceie command.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dsppathtraceie 2.3
dsppathtraceie:
insert
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-460
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
pathtracenode
pathtracenode
Enable/Disable Path Trace Node—PXM1
Use the pathtracenode command to enable or disable path trace feature at the node level.
Syntax
pathtracenode {enable |disable}
Syntax Description
enable |disable
Enables or disables the path trace at the node level.
Default: enable
Related Commands
dsppathtracebuffer, dsppathtracebuffers, dsppathtraceie, dsppathtracenode, dsppathtraceport,
pathtraceie, pathtraceport
Attributes
Access level: SUPER_GP
State: active
Log: log
Example
Enable the path trace.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > pathtracenode enable
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Example
Verify the results by entering the dsppathtracenode command.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dsppathtracenode
dsppathtracenode: enable (1)
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-461
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
pathtraceport
pathtraceport
Enable/Disable Path Trace Port—PXM1
Use the pathtraceport command to enable or disable the path trace feature at the port level. The result
of the path trace is saved in the log file.
Syntax
pathtraceport <portid> {enable | disable}[-X {on | off}] [-CB {on | off}] [-V {on | off}][-CR {on |
off}][-cldnum called-AESA] [-cldopt {{add | del}][-clgnum calling-AESA] [-clgopt {add | del}]
Syntax Description
portid
Port identifier for the call.
enable | disable
Enables or disables the path trace at the port level.
-X
Clear flag option. When the setup message reaches the destination, the
destination node can clear the call by sending the RELEASE message with
the path trace TTL IE. The clear flag option clears the connection at the
destination node.
Default: off
-CB
Crankback option. Enable (on) or disable (off) failure cause for crankback to
be included in the TTL IE.
Default: off
-V
VPI/VCI option. Enable (on) or disable (off) VPI/VCI values of the egress
port to be added in the TTL IE at every node.
Default: on
-CR
Call reference flag option. Enable (on) or disable (off) call reference values
of all egress ports to be added in the TTL IE.
Default: on
-cldnum
Called party number. Enable or disable the path trace on a specified called
address.
-cldopt
Called party option. Add or delete the path trace on a specified called
address.
Default: del
-clgnum
Calling party number. Enable or disable the path trace on a specified calling
address.
-clgopt
Calling number option. Add or delete the path trace on a specified calling
address.
Default: del
Related Commands
dsppathtracebuffer, dsppathtracebuffers, dsppathtraceie, dsppathtracenode, dsppathtraceport,
pathtraceie, pathtraceport
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-462
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
pathtraceport
Attributes
Access level: SUPER_GP
State: active
Log: log
Example
Enable the path trace result for a call in the log file for port 2.3.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > pathtraceport 2.3 enable
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Example
Verify the results by entering the dsppathtraceport command.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dsppathtraceport 2.3
Port option
:
Clear
:
Crankback
:
VPI/VCI
:
Call Reference :
Calling address:
Called address :
on
off
off
on
on
none
none
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-463
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
ping
ping
Ping—PXM1
Use the ping command to determine if a host is operational. The ping command causes the switch to
send an Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) packet to a destination address.
Syntax
ping <IP_Addr> [<Num_Packets>]
Syntax Description
IP_Addr
Specifies the IP address of the destination host in dotted decimal format.
Num_Packets
Determines the number of packets.
0: infinite
3: default
Range: 0–65535
Related Commands
None
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: any
Log: no
Example
ping IP address 172.29.23.148 to transmit three packets.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > ping 172.29.23.148 3
PING 172.29.23.148: 56 data bytes
64 bytes from 172.29.23.148: icmp_seq=0. time=0. ms
64 bytes from 172.29.23.148: icmp_seq=1. time=0. ms
64 bytes from 172.29.23.148: icmp_seq=2. time=0. ms
----172.29.23.148 PING Statistics---3 packets transmitted, 3 packets received, 0% packet loss
round-trip (ms) min/avg/max = 0/0/0
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-464
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
pvcifconfig
pvcifconfig
PVC Interface Configuration—PXM1
Use the pvcifconfig command to configure a PVC for IP connectivity between the PXM and a
workstation. Using a PVC for IP connectivity is appropriate if a connecting interface or device (such as
a router) cannot support SVCs.
The pvcifconfig command modifies an existing PVC to support IP connectivity to a feeder such as a BPX
switch or an MGX Release 1 switch.
Syntax
This command is configured in the following two ways:
1.
pvcifconfig <interface> router | feeder <pvc_address> [atmarp | noatmarp] [llcencap | vcmux]
[up][ default | nodefault] [reset] [delete] [clrstats]
2.
pvcifconfig <interface> [clrstats]
Syntax Description
interface
An alphanumeric string that identifies the interface type. Enter one of the
following options:
•
lnPci0—Use this option for Ethernet (the default on power-up).
•
atm0—Use this option for the ATM.
•
sl0—Use this option for SLIP.
Enter the entire keyword. Where appropriate, each subsequent parameter
description identifies characteristics that depend on the type of interface.
Note
router | feeder
If you do not know the interface type, enter the dspipif command to display
it.
Specifies whether the AESA corresponds to a router or the local PXM1. Both
router and local ends are configured. Configure the local end first, then enter the
pvcifconfig command to specify the router end.
Enter either router or feeder.
pvc_address
Log in ID for the PVC in one of the following formats:
• logical_id—For example, 16848897.
•
atmarp |
noatmarp
3.8—SES uplink feeder port.
(Optional) Enables or disables ATMARP on a PVC. If the connected router
supports ATMARP. Furthermore, it applies to only the ATM End Station Address
(AESA) configuration at the router's interface. For more details, see description for
the ipifconfig command.
llcencap | vcmux Applies to the router link only. This parameter specifies encapsulation. The choice
primarily depends on whether the router supports LLC Snap encapsulation
(llcsnap). The alternative is VC-based multiplexing (vcmux)
up
(Optional) Put the PVC in the UP state and try to bind the associated LCNs.
default |
nodefault
(Optional) Specifies whether this PVC is the default route on the interface.
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-465
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
pvcifconfig
reset
(Optional) Forces a reset of the PVC. After the PVC is freed, the call is attempted
again.
delete
(Optional) Deletes the specified AESA configuration.
clrstats
(Optional) Clears all SVC statistics on this interface, for example, dropped
packets.
Related Commands
dsppvcif, ipifconfig
Attributes
Access level: SUPER_GP
State: active
Log: no
Example
Configure a PVC for IP connectivity between the PXM and a workstation.
spirita.1.PXM.a > pvcifconfig lnPci0 feeder 16848897 atmarovcmux default
spirita.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-466
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
pwd
pwd
Present Working Directory—PXM1
Use the pwd command to identify the current working directory on PXM1.
Syntax
pwd
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
cd, copy, ls
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: all
Log: no
Example
Identify the present working directory.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > pwd
C:
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-467
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
remove
remove
Delete—PXM1
Use the remove command to remove a file or directory from the PXM1 hard drive.
Syntax
remove <file name>
Syntax Description
file name
Name of an existing file or directory.
Related Commands
None
Attributes
Access level: GROUP1
State: all
Log: log
Example
Remove file named event44.log
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > remove event44.log
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > ls
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-468
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
rename
rename
Rename—PXM1
Use the rename command to change a file name.
Syntax
rename <old file name> <new file name>]
Syntax Description
old file name
Name of the file you want to change.
new file name
New name of the file.
Related Commands
None
Attributes
Access level: GROUP1
State: all
Log: log
Example
Rename a file.
spirita.1.PXM.a > rename oldfile newfile
spirita.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-469
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
resetcd
resetcd
Reset Card—PXM1
Use the resetcd command to reset the selected PXM, and to gracefully terminate all current applications
on the card. Using the resetcd command without defining a slot number results in an ungraceful
(disruptive) upgrade. This is the fastest method to upgrade a card, but it disrupts service.
A graceful (non-disruptive) upgrade requires that the loadrev, runrev, and commitrev commands have
already been entered and that the card is identified in the command string.
Syntax
resetcd <slot number> [-f]
Syntax Description
slot number
The optional slot parameter identifies a card to reset. Enter either 1 or 2 as the slot
number of the installed PXM1.
-f
Specifies that the command resets only the failure history of a card.
Related Commands
resetsys
Attributes
Access level: SUPER_GP
State: active, init
Log: no
Example
Reset the current PXM1.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > resetcd
The card in slot number 1, will be reset. Please confirm action
resetcd: Do you want to proceed (Yes/No)? n
(command not executed)
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Example
Reset the failure history of the card in slot 1.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > resetcd 1 -f
Clearing (-F) Failed state on slot 1. Please confirm action
resetcd: Do you want to proceed (Yes/No)? n
(command not executed)
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-470
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
resetsys
resetsys
Reset System—PXM1
Use the resetsys command to reset the SES shelf.
Syntax
resetsys
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
resetcd
Attributes
Access level: SUPER_GP
State: active, init
Log: no
Example
Reset the entire shelf.
spirita.1.PXM.a > resetsys
This command resets the entire shelf, a destructive command.
Please confirm now!
Do you want to proceed (Yes/No)? y
Syncing ... C:
Syncing ... D:
Syncing ... E:
Syncing ... F:
Warning: firmware reset on active PXM card by cisco@console
(session ended)
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-471
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
restoreallcnf
restoreallcnf
Restore All Configuration—PXM1
Use the restoreallcnf command to restore all configuration files saved in the C:\CNF directory on the
hard drive. The saved configuration is the result of a prior execution of the saveallcnf command.
To see a list of existing configurations that have been zipped by saveallcnf, cd to the C: drive and list
the contents of the C:\CNF directory.
Syntax
restoreallcnf -f FILENAME [-v]
Syntax Description
-f
Specifies the filename of the zipped version of the configuration.
-v
(Optional) Specifies that a list of the restored configuration files goes to the default printer.
Default: not
Related Commands
saveallcnf
Attributes
Access level: SERVICE_GP
State: active, init
Log: yes
Example
Restore the system configuration. The system responds with a statement of what the command would do
and prompts you to accept the action before it proceeds with the command execution.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > restoreallcnf -f SES_SJ_01_200112061332.zip
The current configuration will be replaced with the contents
of the specified file and the shelf will be rebooted.
restoreallcnf: Do you want to proceed (Yes/No)? n
(command not executed)
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-472
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
routeShow
routeShow
Route Show—PXM1
Use the routeShow command to view the current IP routing of the network layer of the operating system.
Syntax
routeShow
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
ifShow, routestatShow
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: all
Log: no
Example
View the IP routing of the network layer of the operating system.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > routeShow
ROUTE NET TABLE
destination
gateway
flags Refcnt Use
Interface
---------------------------------------------------------------------------0.0.0.0
172.29.52.1
3
1
7848
lnPci0
10.1.2.0
10.1.2.95
1
0
0
atm0
172.29.52.0
172.29.52.131
101
0
0
lnPci0
---------------------------------------------------------------------------ROUTE HOST TABLE
destination
gateway
flags Refcnt Use
Interface
---------------------------------------------------------------------------127.0.0.1
127.0.0.1
5
1
0
lo0
127.0.0.2
127.0.0.2
5
0
0
lo0
127.0.0.3
127.0.0.2
5
0
0
sl0
---------------------------------------------------------------------------SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-473
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
routestatShow
routestatShow
Routing Statistics Show—PXM1
Use the routestatShow command to view the current IP routing statistics for the network layer of the
operating system.
Syntax
routestatShow
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
ifShow, routeShow
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: all
Log: no
Example
View the IP routing statistics for the network layer of the operating system.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > routestatShow
routing:
0 bad routing redirect
0 dynamically created route
0 new gateway due to redirects
0 destination found unreachable
0 use of a wildcard route
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-474
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
rrtcon
rrtcon
Reroute Connection—PXM1
Use the rrtcon command to trigger the rerouting of a connection.
Syntax
rrtcon <portid> <vpi> <vci>
Syntax Description
portid
PNNI logical port, in the format [shelf.]slot[:subslot].port[:subport]. Using the short
form where only the mandatory elements are appropriate, the port ID has the format
slot.port.
vpi
The VPI of the connection.
Range: 0–4095 (NNI) and 0–255 (UNI)
vci
The VCI of the connection.
Range: 32–65535 (VCC) and 0 (VPC)
Related Commands
dspcon,dspcons
Attributes
Access level: GROUP1
State: active
Log: log
Example
Specify the reroute connection for the applicable parameters.
spirita.1.PXM.a > rrtcon 4.1 200 32
spirita.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-475
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
runrev
runrev
Run Revision—PXM1
Use the runrev command to run revisions on the specified slot. In a redundant card pair, runrev first
causes the standby card to become the active card. The runrev command is the second of the required
commands in a graceful upgrade and runs on the PXM.
The following are the list of commands in a graceful upgrade or graceful revision, which includes the
option of aborting the upgrade:
1.
loadrev loads a firmware version from the hard disk to a card's memory. In a non-redundant card
setup, loadrev does not cause the system to reset the CARD.
2.
runrev causes the primary card to start running the new version. For a redundant pair of cards, the
standby becomes the active card then starts running the new version.
3.
If an unacceptable problem occurs, the optional abortrev command restores the previous version of
firmware as well as the previous database contents.
4.
commitrev declares the new primary version to be acceptable and removes the old primary from
main memory (but not the hard disk).
Syntax
runrev <slot> <revision>
Syntax Description
slot
Slot number of the card for which the version is set.
revision
Revision number. For example, 3.0 (0.171).
Related Commands
abortrev, commitrev, dsprevs, loadrev, setrev
Attributes
Access level: SERVICE_GP
State: active
Log: log
Example
Run revision 3.0 (0.171) for logical slot 1.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > runrev 1 3.0(0.171)
one or more card(s) in the logical slot may be reset.
runrev: Do you want to proceed (Yes/No)? n
(command not executed)
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-476
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
saveallcnf
saveallcnf
Save All Configurations—PXM1
Use the saveallcnf command to save all the configuration files to the C:\CNF directory on the hard drive.
The saveallcnf command is time consuming, so a warning message prompts you for confirmation before
the system performs the task. Upon completion, the system displays the name of the saved configuration
file. The system stores up to two-zipped configuration files. If you want to save more than two
configurations, use FTP to transfer the files to another device.
The shelf must not provision new circuits while this command is running.
Note
Cisco recommends that you use FTP client to copy a saved configuration file to a workstation. This
step ensures that an extra backup copy exists if the PXM hard drive fails. Please note that subsequent
usage of saveallcnf can overwrite an existing, older configuration file if more than one such file
exists in the C:\CNF directory.
Also, Cisco recommends that you do not modify the name of a backup file in the C:\CNF directory
because the resulting behavior is not predictable.
To restore the system configuration, enter the restoreallcnf command. To abort a configuration save,
enter the abortallsaves command.
Note
Warning
You should enter the saveallcnf command only if no connection provisioning is occurring.
Do not run this command unless the shelf configuration is stable. You risk corrupting the saved
configuration file.
Syntax
saveallcnf
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
abortallsaves, restoreallcnf
Attributes
Access level: SERVICE_GP
State: active, init
Log: log
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-477
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
saveallcnf
Example
Save all the configuration files to the C:\CNF directory.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > saveallcnf
The 'saveallcnf' command can be time-consuming. The shelf
must not provision new circuits while this command is running.
Do not run this command unless the shelf configuration is stable
or you risk corrupting the saved configuration file.
ATTENTION PLEASE NOTE:
-> If you want to abort the save, please use abortallsaves CLI.
If you use cntrl-C, you will risk hanging the whole telnet
session and may lose capability of being able to perform
subsequent saves
-> The save command will only store the
2 most recent saved files in C:/CNF directory.
If you have 2 or more files already saved in C:/CNF,
the older ones will be deleted by the current save,
keeping the 2 most recent.
saveallcnf: Do you want to proceed (Yes/No)? n
(command not executed)
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-478
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
sesntimeout
sesntimeout
SES Number (seconds until) Timeout—PXM1
Use the sesntimeout command to specify the number of seconds of idle time for the current user-session.
If you do not specify a timeout period, the system displays the current timeout. At the end of the session,
the system logs you out.
To disable the session timeout function, specify 0 sec.
Syntax
sesntimeout [time_out]
Syntax Description
time_out
Number of idle seconds allowed before the session times out.
Related Commands
timeout
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: all
Log: no
Example
Specify the number of seconds of idle time for the current user-session.
spirit11.1.1.PXM.a > sesntimeout 300
The timeout period for this session is now set to 300 second(s)
spirit11.1.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-479
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
setrev
setrev
Set Revisions—PXM1
Use the setrev command to set the primary and secondary revisions of the slot specified. You can also
force-load and run a firmware version for a card. You must enter the setrev command from the CLI.
Syntax
setrev <slot> <primaryversion> <secondaryversion>
Syntax Description
Note
slot
Slot number of the card for which the version is set.
primaryversion
Primary version number to which the card is set.
secondaryversion
Secondary version number to which the card is set
Use the revision number for both the primary and secondary versions to start a new version.
Related Commands
abortrev, dsprevs, loadrev, runrev
Attributes
Access level: SERVICE_GP
State: active
Log: log
Example
Set the primary and secondary revisions for slot 1.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > setrev 1 3.0(0.171)P3
one or more card(s) in the logical slot will be reset.
setrev: Do you want to proceed (Yes/No)? n
(command not executed)
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-480
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
shellcon
shellcon
Shell Connection—PXM1
Use the shellcon command to enter the shell CLI.
Syntax
shellcon
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
None
Attributes
Access level: CISCO_GP
State: all
Log: log
Example
Enter the shell CLI.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > shellcon
pxm1>
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-481
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
showsyserr
showsyserr
Show System Error—PXM1
Use the showsyserr command to display whether the showSyserr feature is on or off.
Syntax
showsyserr [on | off]
Syntax Description
on | off
Enable or disable the showSyserr feature. Enter on to enable the showSyserr feature.
Enter off to disable showSyserr feature.
Related Commands
None
Attributes
Access level: SERVICE_GP
State: all
Log: no
Example
Display whether showSyserr is on or off.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > showsyserr
Value of showSyserr is currently ON
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Example
Enable the showSyserr feature.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > showsyserr on
Value of showSyserr is now turned ON
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Example
Disable the showSyserr feature.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > showsyserr off
Value of showSyserr is now turned OFF
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-482
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
stackdump
stackdump
Stack Dump—PXM1
Use the stackdump command to write stack data to an error file. You can view the file by using the
dsplog command.
Syntax
stackdump
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
dsplog
Attributes
Access level: SERVICE_GP
State: any
Log: no
Example
Enter the stackdump command.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > stackdump
The trace is saved in file error62.log
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Example
View the resulting log file by entering the dsplog command.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > stackdump
The trace is saved in file error62.log
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dsplog -log error62.log
01-00016 08/17/2001-12:22:00 SSI-4-SSISARTXERROR
tSCM
0x8007b360
A SAR frame or cell transmit failed buffer=0xa7503020, glcn=0. - 9 dropped
01-00014 08/17/2001-12:22:00 SHM_-4-SSM_ACT_CD_ERR2
ShelfMgr
0x8017ae7c
SHM SSM ERR: Pxm card failed - local card not healthy -can't gain mastership:
shmSsmActCtcUpPendProc
01-00013 08/17/2001-12:21:58 SHMA-7-BACKCARD_INSERT
tmon
0x8018f718
shmBackCardInsertReportDirect: AppId 0x10000, tId 0x10031, tName tmon, Slot 1,
BayType 0, callerPc 0x0
01-00011 08/17/2001-12:21:58 SHM_-7-RESOURCE_REPORT
ShelfMgr
0x80163674
Resrc Upd sl 1, appId 0x10000, taskId 0x10031, sType 4610, serverity 3, ref.
pslot 1, callerPc 0x0, evtNo 0x7000
01-00010 08/17/2001-12:21:58 SCM-4-SSI_XMT
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-483
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
stackdump
tSCM
0x80126494
ssiFrameXmt failed, error status -1
01-00009 08/17/2001-12:21:58 SSI-4-SSISARTXERROR
tSCM
0x8007b360
A SAR frame or cell transmit failed buffer=0xa7500fa0, glcn=0.
01-00008 08/17/2001-12:21:58 SCM-4-UNKNOWN_VALUE
Type <CR> to continue, Q<CR> to stop:
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-484
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
svcifconfig
svcifconfig
SVC Interface Configuration—PXM1
Use the svcifconfig command to configure IP-related parameters for the SVCs that support network
control at a workstation. The configuration applies to all the SVCs on one of the three-physical port
types.
Note
A complete configuration requires you to enter the svcifconfig command twice.
The first execution identifies the ATM end-station address (AESA) and encapsulation type at the router
end. The second execution identifies the AESA—but no encapsulation type—for the switch.
Syntax
The following are the two ways to enter the svcifconfig command:
1.
svcifconfig <interface> router | local <svc_address>[atmarp | noatmarp] [llcencap | vcmux]
[default | nodefault] [reset] [delete] [ force] [clrstats]
2.
svcifconfig <interface> [clrstats]
Syntax Description
interface
An alphanumeric string that identifies the interface type. Enter one of the following
options:
•
lnPci0—Use this option for ethernet (the default on power-up)
•
atm0—Use this option for the ATM.
•
sl0—Use this option for SLIP
Enter the entire keyword. Where appropriate, each subsequent parameter description
identifies characteristics that depend on the type of interface.
Note
router | local
If you do not know the interface type, enter the dspipif command to display it.
Specifies whether the AESA corresponds to a router or the local PXM1. Both router
and local ends can be configured. Configure the local end first, then enter svcifconfig
to specify the router end.
You must enter the entirety of one of these keywords. The AESA is an NSAP address
used by the router or the local PXM1.
svc_address
atmarp |
noatmarp
Specifies the NSAP portion for the SVCs that the switch sets up on the specified
interface type.
Enables or disables ATMARP on an SVC. If the connected router supports
ATMARP. Furthermore, it applies only to the ATM End Station Address (AESA)
configuration at the router’s interface. For more information, see the description for
the ipifconfig command.
llcencap |
vcmux
Applies to the router link only. This parameter specifies encapsulation. The choice
primarily depends on whether the router supports LLC Snap encapsulation (llcsnap).
The alternative is VC-based multiplexing (vcmux)
default |
nodefault
(Optional) Specifies whether this SVC is the default route on the interface.
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-485
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
svcifconfig
reset
(Optional) Forces a reset of the SVC. After the SVC is freed, the call is attempted
again.
delete
(Optional) Deletes the specified AESA configuration.
clrstats
(Optional) Clears all SVC statistics on this interface.
Related Commands
dspipif, dspipifcache, ipifconfig
Attributes
Access level: SUPER_GP
State: active
Log: no
Example
Configure the AESA for the router.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > svcifconfig atm0 router
47.0091.8100.0000.0101.0101.0101.0101.0101.0101.01
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-486
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
switchapsln
switchapsln
Switch APS Line—PXM1
Use the switchapsln command to control APS switching actions, for example, bay and line, and it
applies to OC-3 lines.
Syntax
switchapsln <line number> <operation> or switchapsln s <slot number>
Syntax Description
line number
OC-3 line number on which to apply APS. Enter the value 1.
operation
Alpha character to set type of APS switch functionality to use on the PXM line.
Enter one of the following options:
slot number
•
f: forced
•
m: manual
•
c: user clear
•
l: lock
Enter one of the following slot numbers to apply APS:
•
1: switch all APS lines to slot 1
•
2: switch all APS lines to slot 2
Related Commands
addapsln, cnfapsln, delapsln, dspapsln
Attributes
Access level: SUPER_GP
State: active
Log: yes
Example
Control the APS line switch functions.
spirita.1.PXM.a > switchapsln 1 f
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-487
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
switchcc
switchcc
Switch Card Control—PXM1
Use the switchcc command to reverse the roles of the active and the standby PXM. The PXM previously
designated as the active PXM becomes the standby; the PXM previously designated as the standby
becomes the active PXM.
Syntax
switchcc
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
cc
Attributes
Access level: SERVICE_GP
State: active
Log: no
Example
Switch the core card.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > switchcc
switchcc: Do you want to proceed (Yes/No)? n
(command not executed)
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-488
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
switchredcd
switchredcd
Switch Redundancy Card—PXM1
Use the switchredcd command to switch the operation from the active redundant card to standby
redundant card.
Syntax
switchredcd <fromSlot> <toSlot>
Syntax Description
fromSlot
The currently active redundant card.
toSlot
The current standby redundant card, which is being switched to active.
Related Commands
dspred, switchcc
Attributes
Access level: SERVICE_GP
State: active
Log: no
Example
Switch the operation from the active redundant card to the standby redundant card.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > switchredcd 1 2
switchredcd: Do you want to proceed (Yes/No)? n
(command not executed)
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-489
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
syserr
syserr
System Errors—PXM1
Displays a list of all system errors.
Syntax
syserr [on | off]
Syntax Description
on | off
Enables or disables the showSyerr feature. Enter on to turn the syserr feature on.
Enter off to turn the showSyserr feature off.
Related Commands
dsptrapip, dsperrs, showsyserr
Attributes
Access level: SERVICE_GP
State: all
Log: no
Example
Display whether syserr is enabled or disabled.
spirita.1.PXM.a > syserr
Value of showSyserr is currently OFF
Example
Enable the showsyserr feature.
spirita.1.PXM.a > syserr on
Value of showSyserr is now turned ON
Example
Disable the showsyserr feature.
spirita.1.PXM.a > syserr off
Value of showSyserr is now turned OFF
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-490
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
telnet
telnet
Telnet—PXM1
Use the telnet command to directly telnet to another switch from the current CLI session. Therefore, you
do not have to exit the current CLI session and start a new telnet session to reach another switch.
No limit exists on the number of telnet hops you can take from an individual CLI session. However, an
individual node has a limit of 15-telnet sessions. Therefore, a limit of 15 users can start telnet sessions.
Syntax
telnet [-E<escape character>] [-R<traceroute character>] <ip addr> [[0x]<tcp port>]
Syntax Description
-E
(Optional.) The escape character for terminating the next telnet session in the chain.
The purpose of the escape sequence (Esc key then escape character) is to terminate the
telnet attempt if the destination node is unable to accept the telnet session for reasons
such as: the destination switch is down or unreachable; its in backup boot mode; or it
detects that TCP communication is down. If you use the escape sequence, the session
falls back to the first switch in the telnet chain. The default value for the escape
character is Q.
-R
(Optional.) The character for triggering a printout of details for all successive hops in
the telnet session. The default value for the traceroute character is g.
ip addr
The IP address of the next switch in the chain.
tcp port
(Optional.) The destination TCP port. The default TCP port is identical to the
destination telnet port. Most applications call for the default.
In addition, by default you can enter the number in decimal format, but you can also
enter the optional TCP port address in hexadecimal format by preceding the TCP
destination with the string 0x.
Related Commands
exit, bye
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: all
Log: no
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-491
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
telnet
Example
Telnet to the switch with IP address 172.29.52.141. Log into the destination switch. Verify the available
telnet commands by entering ? telnet.
If the destination switch is uncertain of the software version, enter the dspversion command to verify
the software version. Eventually, return to the source node by exiting the destination node.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > telnet 172.29.52.141
Trying 172.29.52.141...
Connected to 172.29.52.141
Login: cisco
password:
SES_CH.1.PXM.a > ? telnet
Available commands
-----------------telnet
SES_CH.1.PXM.a > dspversion
Image Type
---------Runtime
Boot
Shelf Type
---------MGX
MGX
Card Type
---------PXM1
PXM1
Version
-----------1.1(70.201)
1.1(70.201)
Built On
-----------Dec 19 2001, 14:37:43
-
SES_CH.1.PXM.a > exit
(session ended)
Connection closed by foreign host.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-492
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
timeout
timeout
Timeout—PXM1
Use the timeout command to display or change the maximum time a user can be idle before the system
terminates that user’s session. The units of measure are seconds. To change the timeout period, enter a
number that is less than or equal to 600 after the timeout command.
To disable the session timeout function, specify 0 sec.
Note
The timeout command is the same as the sesntimeout command.
Syntax
timeout [timeout_period]
Syntax Description
timeout_period
Number of seconds for the new timeout period. The maximum is 600. If you do
not enter a timeout_period, the system displays the current timeout period.
Related Commands
sesntimeout
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: all
Log: no
Example
Display or change the maximum time a user can be idle before the system terminates the user’s session.
spirit11.1.1.PXM.a > timeout 0
The timeout period for this session is now set to 0 second(s)
espses3.2.PXM.a > timeout 40000
The timeout period for this session is now set to 40000 second(s)
espses3.2.PXM.a > timeout 22
The timeout period for this session is now set to 22 second(s)
espses3.2.PXM.a > timeout 5
Err:input timed out
(session ended)
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-493
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
tstconseg
tstconseg
Test Continuity Segment—PXM1
Use the tstconseg command to test continuity by using OAM segment loopback cells generated toward
the user device at the local end of the connection. The tstconseg command tests the integrity of an SVC
or SPVC. With tstconseg, a single collection of supervisory cells is sent in the egress direction between
the card and service equipment (CPE). For ingress direction, see the description for the tstdelay
command.
Syntax
tstconseg <portid> <vpi> <vci>
Syntax Description
portid
Corresponds to the port ID = slot.port.
vpi
VPI assigned to the endpoint.
Range: 1–255 (UNI) and 1–4095 (NNI)
vci
VCI assigned to the endpoint. For a VPC connection, this is specified as 0.
Range: 32–65535 (VCC)
Related Commands
tstdelay
Attributes
Access level: GROUP1
State: active
Log: log
Example
Test the continuity by using OAM segment loopback cells for the applicable parameters.
spirita.1.PXM.a > tstconseg 1.1 10 101
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-494
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
tstconseg
Example
Enter the dspcon command to check the results.
orses18.1.PXM.a > dspcon 1.1 10 101
Port
Vpi Vci
Owner
State
------------------------------------------------------------------------Local 1:-1.1:-1
10.101
SLAVE
OK
Address:47.00918100000000500ffde80b.000000010100.00
Remote Routed
10.101
MASTER
-Address:47.0091810000000010293001d8.000000050100.00
-------------------- Provisioning Parameters -------------------Connection Type:VCC
Cast Type:Point-to-Point
Service Category:UBR
Conformance:UBR.1
Bearer Class:UNSPECIFIED
Last Fail Cause:SPVC Established
Attempts:0
Continuity Check:Disabled
Frame Discard:Disabled
L-Utils:0
R-Utils:0
Max Cost:0
Routing Cost:0
---------- Traffic Parameters ---------Tx PCR: 50
Rx PCR: 50
Tx SCR: 50
Rx SCR: 50
Tx MBS: 1024
Rx MBS: 1024
Tx CDVT:250000
Rx CDVT:250000
Tx CDV: N/A
Rx CDV: N/A
Tx CTD: N/A
Rx CTD: N/A
Type <CR> to continue, Q<CR> to stop:
------- SES Parameters only ---------Tx AIS:0
Rx AIS:0
Rx Abit:0
lpbk_type
:Non Destructive
lpbk_dir
:---lpbk_status
:Success
round trip delay:17464 usec
Stats
:Disabled
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-495
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
tstdelay
tstdelay
Test Delay on a Connection—PXM1
Use the tstdelay command to verify the continuity of a connection by using inband OAM loopback cells.
The tstdelay command applies to only SPVCs. The tstdelay command tests the integrity of the
connection in the ingress direction by sending a collection of supervisory cells to the remote end of the
network and back. For egress direction, see the description for thetstconseg command. The tstdelay
command applies only to SPVCs.
Syntax
tstdelay <portid> <vpi> <vci>
Syntax Description
portid
Corresponds to the port ID = slot.port.
vpi
VPI assigned to the endpoint.
Range: 1–255 (UNI) and 1–4095 (NNI)
vci
VCI assigned to the endpoint. For a VPC connection, this is specified as 0.
Range: 32–65535 (VCC)
Related Commands
tstconseg
Attributes
Access level: GROUP1
State: active
Log: log
Example
Verify the continuity of a connection by using inband OAM loopback cells for the applicable parameters.
spirita.1.PXM.a > tstdelay 1.1 10 100
Example
Enter the dspcon command to check the result.
orses18.1.PXM.a > dspcon 1.1 10 100
Port
Vpi Vci
Owner
State
------------------------------------------------------------------------Local 1:-1.1:-1
10.100
SLAVE
OK
Address:47.00918100000000500ffde80b.000000010100.00
Remote Routed
10.100
MASTER
-Address:47.0091810000000010293001d8.000000050100.00
-------------------- Provisioning Parameters -------------------Connection Type:VCC
Cast Type:Point-to-Point
Service Category:UBR
Conformance:UBR.1
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-496
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
tstdelay
Bearer Class:UNSPECIFIED
Last Fail Cause:SPVC Established
Attempts:0
Continuity Check:Disabled
Frame Discard:Disabled
L-Utils:0
R-Utils:0
Max Cost:0
Routing Cost:0
---------- Traffic Parameters ---------Tx PCR: 50
Rx PCR: 50
Tx SCR: 50
Rx SCR: 50
Tx MBS: 1024
Rx MBS: 1024
Tx CDVT:250000
Rx CDVT:250000
Tx CDV: N/A
Rx CDV: N/A
Tx CTD: N/A
Rx CTD: N/A
Type <CR> to continue, Q<CR> to stop:
------- SES Parameters only ---------Tx AIS:0
Rx AIS:0
Rx Abit:0
lpbk_type
:Non Destructive
lpbk_dir
:forward - tstdelay
lpbk_status
:Success
round trip delay:2000 usec
Stats
:Disabled
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-497
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
tstpndelay
tstpndelay
Test PNNI Delay—PXM1
Use the tstpndelay command to initiate the loopback test for a connection. When both the VPI and VCI
are present, the segment endpoint is a F5 flow endpoint (for VCCs). When the optional VCI is not
present, the segment endpoint is a F4 flow endpoint (for VPCs). This command displays the round trip
delay in microseconds.
Use the cnfconsegep command to set the segment endpoint if one does not already exist.
Syntax
tstpndelay <portid> <vpi> [vci] [-direction {inbound | outbound}]
Syntax Description
portid
Identifies a PNNI physical port. The format is slot:subslot.port:subport.
vpi
VPI of the connection.
vci
VCI of the connection.
Default VCI: 0 for VP connection
-direction
Direction of the loopback, as either inbound or outbound.
•
Inbound: Endpoint towards the backplane.
•
Outbound: Endpoint departing the port.
Default: inbound
Related Commands
cnfconsegep
Attributes
Access level: SUPER_GP
State: active
Log: log
Example
After confirming that the endpoints are configured to be OAM segment endpoints, enter tstpndelay on
connection 1 100 on port 1.3. Make the direction outbound.
spirita.1.PXM.a > tstpndelay 1.3 1 100 -direction outbound
spirita.1.PXM.a > Response for the cli Command -It is Primary OAM Endpoint vpi:1, vci:100
tstpndelay:In Progress
Successful, Cell round trip delay time = 117 uSec
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-498
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
upcon
upcon
Up Connection—PXM1
Use the upcon command to bring a connection back into service. The upcon command activates a
connection that was previously brought down by the dncon command.
Syntax
upcon <portid> <vpi> <vci>
Syntax Description
portid
Interface number.
Range: 1–60
vpi
Starting VPI to view the active calls starting from the specified VPI of the
specified port. This parameter can be used only if the port is specified.
Range: 0–4095
vci
Starting VCI to view the active calls starting from the specified VPI/VCI of the
specified port. This parameter can be used only if the VPI is specified.
Range: 32–65535
Related Commands
addcon, cnfcon, delcon, dncon
Attributes
Access level: GROUP1
State: active
Log: log
Example
Up a down connection for the applicable port ID.
spirita.1.PXM.a > upcon 1 1 100
Admin state of connection is UP
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-499
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
uppnport
uppnport
Up PNNI Port—PXM1
Use the uppnport command to bring a specified UNI or NNI port into service on the controller
(administratively up on the controller). This command is used to bring a port in service after the
dnpnport command is used or after you have preconfigured a port by using the addpnport command.
Syntax
uppnport <portid>
Syntax Description
portid
Identifies a PNNI physical port. The format is slot:subslot.port:subport.
Related Commands
delpnport, dnpnport, dsppnport, dsppnports
Attributes
Access level: GROUP1
State: active
Log: log
Example
Check for any downed ports by entering the dsppnports command.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dsppnports
Summary of total connections
(p2p=point to point,p2mp=point to
Type
#Svcc:
#Svpc:
#SpvcD:
p2p:
0
0
0
p2mp: 0
0
0
multipoint,SpvcD=DAX spvc,SpvcR=Routed spvc)
#SpvpD: #SpvcR: #SpvpR: #Total:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Total=
Summary of total SPVC endpoints
(P=Persistent, NP=Non-Persistent)
Type
#SpvcR-P #SpvcR-NP #SpvpR-P
p2p:
2
0
0
p2mp: 0
0
0
Total=2
0/100000
#SpvpR-NP #SpvcD
0
0
0
0
#SpvpD
0
0
Total
2
0
Summary of total active SVC/SPVC intermediate endpoints
Type
#Svcc
#Svpc
#SpvcR
#SpvpR
Total
p2p:
0
0
0
0
0
p2mp: 0
0
0
0
0
Total=0
EndPoint Grand Total =
2/200000
Type <CR> to continue, Q<CR> to stop:
DSPPNPORTSPer-port status summary
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-500
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
uppnport
PortId
LogicalId
IF status
Admin status
ILMI state
#Conns
1.5
66816
provisioning
up
NotApplicable
0
1.6
67072
provisioning
up
NotApplicable
0
2.3
131840
provisioning
down
NotApplicable
0
2.4
132096
up
up
Disable
0
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Example
Enter the uppnport command to up port 2.3.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > uppnport 2.3
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Example
Check the administrative status of port 2.3.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > dsppnport 2.3
Port:
IF status:
2.3
provisioning
Logical ID:
Admin Status:
n/a
up
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-501
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
users
users
Users—PXM1
Use the users command to display the ID of each user logged into a card.
The following parameters are displayed for the users command:
Note
•
Access method and port, for example, telnet session to the PXM1
•
Current card slot.
•
Idle time for the user session (can depend on the sesntimeout command).
•
User-name (the login name).
•
Point from which the user gained access, for example, an IP address in the case of a telnet session
or the word “console” if the user logged in through a local terminal at the console port.
The users command shows the current user sessions; whereas, the dspusers command shows the
names of all the user accounts on the switch whether or not a corresponding user has logged in.
Syntax
users
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
bootChange, cnfuser, deluser, dspusers
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: any
Log: no
Example
Display the current users on the switch. One user-session is currently running.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > users
Port
Slot
Idle
UserId
From
------------------------------------------------------------telnet.01 *
1
0:00:00
cisco
171.71.29.60
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-502
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
who
who
Who—PXM1
Use the who command to view details associated with user IDs currently active on the PXM.
The following information is displayed:
•
Type of port where you logged into the card.
•
Slot number of the current card.
•
Idle time in hours, minutes, and seconds.
•
Current username.
•
IP address of the device that accessed the card (not the IP address of the card or node).
Syntax
who
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
adduser, deluser, whoami
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: any
Log: no
Example
View the parameters that are associated with the current user ID.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > who
Port
Slot
Idle
UserId
From
------------------------------------------------------------telnet.01 *
1
0:00:00
cisco
171.71.29.60
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006
3-503
Chapter 3
Alphabetical Listing of SES PNNI Controller Commands
whoami
whoami
Who Am I—PXM1
Use the whoami command to view the current login ID, access level, and associated terminal port of the
current user.
Syntax
whoami
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
adduser, deluser, who
Attributes
Access level: ANYUSER
State: any
Log: no
Example
Display information about the user of the current terminal session.
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a > whoami
User ID:
Access Level:
Terminal Port:
cisco
CISCO_GP
telnet.01
SES_SJ.1.PXM.a >
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference
3-504
Release 3, Part Number 78-14260-01 Rev. C0, May 2006